HomeMy WebLinkAboutBID - 7433 ROLLAND MOORE PARK RESTROOMSADDENDUM No. 2
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Description of BID 7433: Rolland Moore Park Restrooms
OPENING DATE: 3:00 PM (Our Clock) October 9, 2012
To all prospective bidders under the specifications and contract documents described
above, the following changes/additions are hereby made and detailed in the following
sections of this addendum:
Exhibit 1 – General Information & Changes to the Specifications & Drawings
Exhibit 2 – Additional Drawings
Please contact John Stephen, CPPO, LEED AP, Senior Buyer at (970) 221-6777 with
any questions regarding this addendum.
RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM MUST BE ACKNOWLEDGED BY A WRITTEN
STATEMENT ENCLOSED WITH THE BID/QUOTE STATING THAT THIS
ADDENDUM HAS BEEN RECEIVED.
Financial Services
Purchasing Division
215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor
PO Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522
970.221.6775
970.221.6707
fcgov.com/purchasing
Addendum 2 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 1 of 6
EXHIBIT 1
GENERAL INFORMATION & CHANGES TO THE SPECIFICATIONS & DRAWINGS
General
Notice of award will be made after reference checks which should take a couple
of days. Notice to proceed will be dependent on documentation the contractor
needs to submit to Purchasing.
Assume the electrical line under the building will be shut off by the time of
excavation.
Limits for construction access will coordinated with the owner, damage
outside this area will be the responsibility of the contractor.
Rigid insulation shall have a minimum R-value of 14 as shown on A-4, it is
understood that the actual thickness of the material provided may vary, but
shall not exceed 3".
Fire Extinguisher shall be provided in the chase as shown on sheet A-1.
Air infiltration barrier shall be as listed in system note EW1
Unless specifically noted to re-use all construction shall be with new
materials.
SPECIFICATIONS
1. Section 01010 1.04 SUMMARY OF WORK
Paragraph 1.04 Work by others. Delete and replace sub paragraph A with
the following. Owner shall furnish and install landscaping and irrigation. Finish
Grading shall be by the contractor. Repair of damage to existing outside the
limits of construction shall be by the contractor.
2. Section 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITES
Paragraph 2.04 Cellular phones are acceptable for temporary phone utilities
DRAWINGS
Sheet SD1: Exterior sidewalk as shown on SD1 shall be by the contractor.
Approximate dimensions for the 4" thick Cast-in-place concrete sidewalk is 5'
wide by 100' long with additional concrete to flare the ends as shown on SD1 this
is in addition to the cast-in-place concrete surrounding the building.
Sheet SD1: Finish Floor is 5034 and grading of swales and slopes around the
building shall be verified in the field with the finish floor to be lowered if required
to meet accessibility requirement.
Sheet S1.1 See attached detail for the structural fascia
Sheet M-1 See attached revisions for the plumbing.
Addendum 2 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 2 of 6
Sheet E-1Base bid shall include replacing the devices in the existing shelter
ATTACHMENTS
Detail SSK1
Mechanical Site Plan
Domestic Water Plan
Addendum 2 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 3 of 6
EXHIBIT 2
Addendum 2 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 4 of 6
Addendum 2 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 5 of 6
Addendum 2 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 6 of 6
ADDENDUM No. 1
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Description of BID 7433: Rolland Moore Park Restrooms
OPENING DATE: 3:00 PM (Our Clock) October 9, 2012
To all prospective bidders under the specifications and contract documents described
above, the following changes/additions are hereby made and detailed in the following
sections of this addendum:
Exhibit 1 – General Information & Changes to the Specifications & Drawings
Exhibit 2 – Section 07900 Sealants and Joint Fillers
Please contact John Stephen, CPPO, LEED AP, Senior Buyer at (970) 221-6777 with
any questions regarding this addendum.
RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM MUST BE ACKNOWLEDGED BY A WRITTEN
STATEMENT ENCLOSED WITH THE BID/QUOTE STATING THAT THIS
ADDENDUM HAS BEEN RECEIVED.
Financial Services
Purchasing Division
215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor
PO Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522
970.221.6775
970.221.6707
fcgov.com/purchasing
Addendum 1 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 1 of 6
EXHIBIT 1
GENERAL INFORMATION & CHANGES TO THE SPECIFICATIONS & DRAWINGS
General
General contractor to provide finish grading, owner will provide all
landscaping and irrigation.
All existing irrigation lines encountered during construction shall be capped
and marked outside the construction footprint by the contractor. Locations of
existing irrigation lines are unknown.
Demolition alternate of the existing restroom includes demolition and removal
of adjacent landscaping and extension from the path to the restroom and
grading to blend existing slopes. Existing utilities may be capped and
abandoned in place. Alternate does not include demolition of the wall on the
opposite side of the sidewalk from the restroom.
Water to the existing restroom will be shut off by the city during the city
winterization process.
Paint colors are to be determined. Interior restroom and all exterior block is to
be painted per Section 09900.
SPECIFICATIONS
1. Section 01030 ALTERNATES
Paragraph 1.02 Description of Alternates. Delete subparagraph B.:
2. Section 02225 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATIONG, BACKFILLING AND
COMPACTING
Paragraph 3.05 Clarification one foot overexcavation is not required at
sidewalks.
3. Sections 02930 & 02950 Delete these sections in their entirty this shall be
owner provided
4. Section 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
Paragraph 2.01 / 2.01 Clarification all mortar shall have Integral Water
Repellant.
5. Section 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
Paragraph 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS. Clarification Integral water
repellent is required.
Subparagraph B.: change 8" deep split-face units to 4" deep split face units.
6. Section 07900 SEALANTS AND JOINT FILLERS
Add this Section in its entirety.
DRAWINGS
Cover Sheet delete references to sheet A-7 & A-9 they are not part of this set
Addendum 1 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 2 of 6
07900 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS AND JOINT FILLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces.
B. Furnish and install joint backing materials.
C. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants in exterior applications.
D. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants in interior applications.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
2. Section 02515, Portland Cement Paving.
3. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork: Joint fillers for cast-in-place concrete work.
4. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
5. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Joint sealants.
6. Section 07612, Prefinished Corrugated Screwed-Down Metal Roofing.
7. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashings and Trim.
8. Section 07810, Skylights.
9. All Sections of Division 8, Doors and Windows.
10. Section 09900, Painting: Joints of walls and/or ceilings of dissimilar colors.
11. Section 10800, Toilet and Bath Accessories.
12. Division 15, Mechanical.
13. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer of sealants and caulking shall have minimum five (5) years of
successful experience with projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shall be
continuously employed in work of this type.
C. Certification: Manufacturer/Supplier of sealant and accessory materials shall certify that
materials supplied are acceptable and appropriate for the materials, substrates and conditions
under which sealants are to be installed.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation
instructions for each type of sealant, caulking compound and associated miscellaneous material
required.
B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's standard color line for each type of sealant
specified for exposed locations for selection by the Architect.
C. Sample Installation: Select a test area for each major exterior building material or system and
install caulking. Notify the Architect for approval and acceptance prior to proceeding with
caulking. The test area will become the standard for quality control of remaining caulking and
sealant work.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions or when
temperatures are below 40° F or above 100° F. Proceed with the work only when forecasted
weather conditions are favorable for proper curing and development of high early bond
EXHIBIT 2
Addendum 1 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 3 of 6
07900 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
strength. Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric
sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of the manufacturer's recommended instal-
lation temperature range so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and
bond stress by subsequent low temperatures. Coordinate time schedule with Contractor to
avoid delay of project.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty covering defects in materials when such
materials are properly applied and fully cured as described in the manufacturer's product data
sheets. The Contractor further agrees to replace sealants which fail because of loss of
cohesion or adhesion, or that do not cure properly due to improper application or curing, or
when the materials installed are not appropriate for that application, joint type or other factor
beyond the manufacturer's control, for a period of five (5) years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. General: Supplier/Installer of work of this Section shall certify that materials specified and/or
furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications for the following
criteria:
1. Compatibility of sealant material with adjacent materials.
2. Compatibility of sealant material with type and degree of weather exposure.
3. Compatibility of sealant material with expected use of space.
4. Compatibility of sealant material with joint type, width and depth.
B. Exterior: One- or two-part polyurethane-based elastomeric sealants complying with FS TT-S-
00230, Class A, Type I (self-leveling) or Type II (non-sag).
1. One-Part Sealant: Sonolastic NP-1 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended
by manufacturer for type of application.
2. Two-Part Sealant: Sonolastic NP-2 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as
recommended by manufacturer for type of application.
C. Interior: One-part silicone-based non-sag, elastomeric sealant, resistant to mildew complying
with FS TT-S-01543, Class A, and FF TT-S-00230, Class A.
1. Sonolastic Omniseal and OmniPlus by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended
by manufacturer for type of application.
D. Interior Paintable: One-part non-sag mildew-resistant acrylic emulsion sealant complying with
ASTM C834, paintable.
1. Sonolac by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by the manufacturer for
type of application.
E. Concrete Slab Joints: One-part non-priming urethane-based self-leveling pourable sealant
complying with FS TT-S-00230C, Class A, Type 1 (horizontal use).
1. Sonolastic SL-1 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by manufacturer
for type of application.
2. Ensure that sealant is compatible with seamless flooring systems specified in Division 9.
3. Ensure that sealant is compatible with special concrete floor finish system specified in
Section 09800.
F. Color(s):
1. Colors are to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors.
2. Design intent is to match sealant color to color of adjacent material, unless indicated
otherwise. The Architect shall have final authority for color selection, including
variations from this policy.
3. Clear silicone sealant shall be installed at the following locations, including but not
limited to:
a. Perimeter of rimless vitreous china toilet and bath fixtures, tubs, water
closets, urinals, sinks and lavatories.
b. Perimeter of stainless steel kitchen and bar sinks.
Addendum 1 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 4 of 6
07900 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
c. Perimeter edges of stainless steel kitchen equipment adjacent to walls, floors,
ceilings or soffits.
d. Perimeter edges of stainless steel countertops and backsplashes to walls.
e. Joints between plastic laminate finished countertops and backsplashes.
G. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.1, VOC Content of Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers that
comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR
59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Sealants: 250 g/L.
b. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
c. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
H. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Sonneborne Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835-3434.
2. Tremco Sealants, Cleveland, OH, (800) 321-7906.
3. Schnee-Morehead Inc., Irving, TX, (800) 255-9427.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
acceptable.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Primer: Non-staining type for joints as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer,
compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Filler: ASTM D1056, round polyethylene foam rod, over-sized 30-50%, as recommended by
manufacturer of sealant used.
1. Provide closed cell or open cell foam rod materials, as recommended by the Installer
for specific applications.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure-sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
E. Joint Fillers for Cast-in-Place Concrete Work: Refer to Section 03100.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine joint surfaces, backing and anchorage of units forming sealing rabbet
and conditions under which sealant work is to be performed and notify Contractor of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of the work, performance and curing of sealants. Do not
proceed with sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Installer.
B. Clean, prepare and size joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove any
loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Ensure that horizontal and vertical surfaces are of sufficient dimension for required bonding of
sealant materials as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Ensure that sealants are compatible with the substrates to which they are to adhere.
E. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
F. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
G. Install joint filler to achieve required joint depths to allow sealants to perform properly.
H. Install bond breaker where required.
I. Mask or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces which may be marred or damaged by sealant
materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS
A. General: Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply sealant within
recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied
within recommended temperature ranges.
Addendum 1 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 5 of 6
07900 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Tool joints slightly concave in vertical surfaces and flush in horizontal surfaces.
C. Maintain joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges or sags.
D. Ensure that sealant is applied leaving crisp, clean lines with adjacent materials. Do not allow
sealant to bleed onto adjacent surfaces. Immediately wipe excess sealant materials off
adjacent surfaces.
E. Remove and replace any sealants improperly applied, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
F. Repair and replace any adjacent materials that have been damaged, marred or discolored by
work of this Section, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF SEALANT WORK
A. Exterior: Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not
limited to:
1. Expansion joints in exterior concrete flatwork adjacent to buildings and retaining walls.
2. Expansion joints in exterior concrete pavements, aprons, sidewalks, ramps and curb
and gutter sections.
3. Vertical expansion and control joints in concrete unit masonry walls.
4. Perimeter of exterior window and door frames.
5. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs.
6. Perimeter joints of metal flashings, counterflashings, reglets and similar accessories.
7. Perimeter joints of prefabricated skylight units.
8. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where
required for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain the
weathertightness of the project.
9. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by the
Architect.
B. Interior: Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not
limited to:
1. Expansion joints and control joints in interior concrete slabs where surfaces are
scheduled to be sealed and/or exposed to view.
2. Perimeter of casework, cabinetry, countertops and backsplashes.
3. Horizontal and vertical joints between walls, ceilings, soffits and running and standing
trims.
4. Perimeter of interior window and door frames.
5. Perimeter of toilet fixtures, water closets, urinals, sinks and lavatories.
6. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs.
7. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where
required for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain the
weathertightness of the project.
8. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by the
Architect.
C. Refer to other Division 2 sections for sealants required for site concrete work and other
materials.
D. Exterior materials/systems not to receive sealants, including but not limited to:
1. Open joints and drainage channels of exterior rainscreen cladding systems.
2. Drainage channels of aluminum storefront framing or glazed aluminum curtain wall
systems framing.
3. Weepholes in brick, concrete unit or stone masonry walls.
END OF SECTION
Addendum 1 - 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms Page 6 of 6
SPECIFICATIONS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
ROLLAND MOORE PARK RESTROOMS
BID NO. 7433
PURCHASING DIVISION
215 NORTH MASON STREET, 2ND FLOOR, FORT COLLINS
OCTOBER 9, 2012 – 3:00 P.M. (OUR CLOCK)
Financial Services
Purchasing Division
215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor
PO Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522
970.221.6775
970.221.6707
fcgov.com/purchasing
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Pages
BID INFORMATION
00020 Notice Inviting Bids 00020-1 - 00020-2
00100 Instruction to Bidders 00100-1 - 00100-9
00300 Bid Form 00300-1 - 00300-3
00400 Supplements to Bid Forms 00400-1
00410 Bid Bond 00410-1 - 00410-2
00420 Statements of Bidders Qualifications 00420-1 - 00420-3
00430 Schedule of Major Subcontractors 00430-1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
00500 Agreement Forms 00500-1
00510 Notice of Award 00510-0
00520 Agreement 00520-1 - 00520-6
00530 Notice to Proceed 00530-1
00600 Bonds and Certificates 00600-1
00610 Performance Bond 00610-1 - 00610-2
00615 Payment Bond 00615-1 - 00615-2
00630 Certificate of Insurance 00630-1
00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00635-1
00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00640-1
00650 Lien Waiver Release (Contractor) 00650-1 - 00650-2
00660 Consent of Surety 00660-1
00670 Application for Exemption Certificate 00670-1 - 00670-2
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00700 General Conditions 00700-1 - 00700-34
Exhibit GC-A GC-A1 - GC-A2
00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 - 00800-2
00900 Addenda, Modifications, and Payment 00900-1
00950 Contract Change Order 00950-1 - 00950-2
00960 Application for Payment 00960-1 - 00960-4
SPECIFICATIONS
SOILS REPORT
SECTION 00020
INVITATION TO BID
SECTION 00020
INVITATION TO BID
Date: September 17, 2012
Sealed Bids will be received by the City of Fort Collins (hereinafter referred to as OWNER), at
the office of the Purchasing Division, 3:00 P.M., our clock, on October 9, 2012, for the Rolland
Moore Park Restrooms; BID NO. 7433. If delivered, they are to be delivered to 215 North
Mason Street, 2nd Floor, Fort Collins, Colorado, 80524. If mailed, the mailing address is P. O.
Box 580, Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580.
At said place and time, and promptly thereafter, all Bids that have been duly received will be
publicly opened and read aloud.
The Contract Documents provide for the construction of Bid 7433. The Work consists of the
construction of a community park restroom. The project will include construction of the new
restroom, connecting to utilities and fine grading for a complete product. Demolition of the old
restroom will be bid as an alternate. The old restroom must stay open and operational until
Nov.1, 2012. Building permits will be applied for by the contractor and paid for by the city. The
contractor will be responsible for calling for inspections..
All Bids must be in accordance with the Contract Documents on file with the City of Fort Collins,
215 North Mason St., 2nd floor, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524.
The City encourages all disadvantaged business enterprises to submit bid in response to all
invitations and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, national origin.
A prebid conference and job walk with representatives of prospective Bidders will be
held at 10:00 AM, on September 24, 2012, by the playground at Rolland Moore Park, 2201
S Shields Street, Fort Collins.
Prospective Bidders are invited to present their questions relative to this Bid proposal at this
meeting.
The Contract Documents and Construction Drawings may be examined online at:
City of Fort Collins BuySpeed: https://www.fcgov.com/eprocurement
Bids will be received as set forth in the Bidding Documents.
The Work is expected to be commenced within the time as required by Section 2.3 of General
Conditions. Substantial Completion of the Work is required as specified in the Agreement.
The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond
guaranteeing faithful performance and the payment of all bills and obligations arising from the
performance of the Contract.
No Bid may be withdrawn within a period of forty-five (45) days after the date fixed for opening
Bids.
The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any informalities and
irregularities therein.
Bid security in the amount of not less than 5% of the total Bid must accompany each Bid in the
form specified in the Instructions to Bidders.
Sales Prohibited/Conflict of Interest: No officer, employee, or member of City Council, shall have
a financial interest in the sale to the City of any real or personal property, equipment, material,
supplies or services where such officer or employee exercises directly or indirectly any decision-
making authority concerning such sale or any supervisory authority over the services to be
rendered. This rule also applies to subcontracts with the City. Soliciting or accepting any gift,
gratuity favor, entertainment, kickback or any items of monetary value from any person who has
or is seeking to do business with the City of Fort Collins is prohibited.
City of Fort Collins
James B. O'Neill, II, CPPO, FNIGP
Purchasing & Risk Management Director
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.0 DEFINED TERMS
Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General
Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1990 ed.) have the meanings
assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits
a Bid to OWNER, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a Bid to Bidder. The terms
"Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to
whom OWNER (on basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an
award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,
Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including
all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
2.0 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained as stated in the Invitation to
Bid. No partial sets will be issued. The Bidding Documents may be examined at the
locations identified in the Invitation to Bid.
2.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither
OWNER nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations
resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.3. The submitted Bid proposal shall include Sections 00300, 00410, 00420, and 00430
fully executed.
2.4. OWNER and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the
above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer
a license or grant for any other use.
3.0 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
3.1 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must submit at the
time of the Bid opening, a written statement of qualifications including financial data, a
summary of previous experience, previous commitments and evidence of authority to
conduct business in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Each Bid must contain
evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located
or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the contract. The Statement of
Qualifications shall be prepared on the form provided in Section 00420.
3.2. In accordance with Section 8-160 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins in
determining whether a bidder is responsible, the following shall be considered: (1) The
ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the services
required, (2) whether the bidder can perform the contract or provide the service promptly
and within the time specified without delay or interference, (3) the character, integrity,
reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency of the bidder, (4) the quality of the
bidder's performance of previous contracts or services, (5) the previous and existing
compliance by the bidder with laws and ordinances relating to the contract or service, (6)
the sufficiency of the financial resources and ability of the bidder to perform the contract
or provide the service, (7) the quality, availability and adaptability of the materials and
services to the particular use required, (8) the ability of the bidder to provide future
maintenance and service for the use of the subject of the contract, and
(9) any other circumstances which will affect the bidder's performance of the contract.
3.3. Each Bidder may be required to show that he has handled former Work so that no
just claims are pending against such Work. No Bid will be accepted from a Bidder who is
engaged on any other Work which would impair his ability to perform or finance this
Work.
3.4 No Bidder shall be in default on the performance of any other contract with the City
or in the payment of any taxes, licenses or other monies due to the City.
4.0 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
4.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the
Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to familiarize himself with local
conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, (c)
familiarize himself with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations
that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, (d) study and
carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify
Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
4.2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: Subsurface
and Physical Conditions SC-4.2.
4.3. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder
that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception
the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract
Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.
5.0 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA.
5.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be
submitted in writing to the Engineer and the OWNER. Interpretation or clarifications
considered necessary in response to such questions will be issued only by Addenda.
Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of the Bids may
not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding.
Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
5.2. All questions concerning the scope of this project should be directed to the
Engineer. Questions regarding submittal of bids should be directed to the City of Fort
Collins' Purchasing Division.
5.3. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed
advisable by OWNER or Engineer.
5.4. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the OWNER as
having received the Bidding documents.
6.0 BID SECURITY
6.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in the
amount stated in the Invitation to Bid. The required security must be in the form of a
certified or bank cashier's check payable to OWNER or a Bid Bond on the form enclosed
herewith. The Bid Bond must be executed by a surety meeting the requirements of the
General Conditions for surety bonds.
6.2. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has
executed the Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon Bid
Security will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required contract security within 15 days of the Notice of
Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder will
be forfeited. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have
reasonable chance receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of
the seventh day after the effective date of the Agreement or the thirty-first day after the
Bid Opening, whereupon Bid Security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. Bid
Security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within seven days after the
Bid opening.
7.0 CONTRACT TIME.
The number of days within which, or the date by which the Work is to be substantially
complete and also completed and ready for Final Payment (the Contract Times) are set
forth in the Agreement.
8.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES.
Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement.
9.0 SUBSTITUTE ("OR EQUAL") MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described on
the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible
substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated on the Drawings or specified in
the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item of material or equipment may be
furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to Engineer, application for such
acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the "effective date of the
Agreement". The procedure for submittal of any such application by CONTRACTOR and
consideration by Engineer is set forth in the General Conditions which may be
supplemented in the General Requirements.
10.0 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
10.1. Each Bidder shall submit at the Bid opening to OWNER a list of principal
subcontractors he proposes to use in the Work. Refer to Section 00430 contained within
these Documents.
10.2. If OWNER or Engineer after due investigation has reasonable objection to any
proposed Subcontractor, either may, before the Notice of Award is given, request the
apparent successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Bid
price. If the apparent successful Bidder declines to make any substitution, OWNER may
award the contract to the next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder that proposes
to use acceptable subcontractors. Subcontractors, suppliers, other persons or
organization listed and to whom OWNER or Engineer does not make written objection
prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and
ENGINEER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the effective date of the
Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any subcontractor, supplier or
other persons or organizations against whom he has reasonable objection. The use of
subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by OWNER prior to the Notice of
Award will be required in the performance of the Work.
11.0 BID FORM.
11.1. A copy of the Bid Form is bound in the Contract Documents which may be retained
by the Bidder. A separate unbound copy is enclosed for submission with the Bid.
11.2. Bid Forms must be complete in ink or typed. All lump sum prices on the form must
be stated in words and numerals; in case of conflict, words will take precedence. Unit
prices shall govern over extensions of sums.
11.3. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a
vice-president (or other appropriate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign)
and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant
secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the
corporate name.
11.4. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a
partner, his title must appear under his signature and the official address of the
partnership must be shown below the signature.
11.5. Bids by joint venture shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by
an authorized agent of each participant. The full name of each person or company
interested in the Bid shall be listed on the Bid Form.
11.6. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers
of which must be filled in on the Bid Form).
11.7. No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefore, by erasures, interpolations,
or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by the
Bidder; if initialed, OWNER may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so initialed.
11.8. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be
shown.
12.0 BID PRICING.
Bids must be priced as set forth in the Bid Schedule or Schedules.
13.0 SUBMISSION OF BIDS.
13.1. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and
shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope marked with the Project title, Bid No.,
and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security, Bid Form,
Bid Bond, Statement of Bidders Qualifications, and Schedule of Subcontractors as
required in Section 00430. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system,
the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID
ENCLOSED" on the face of it.
13.2. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for
receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid, or any extension thereof made by
addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned
unopened. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location
designated for receipt of Bids.
13.3. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, or facsimile Bids are invalid and will not receive
consideration.
13.4. No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different names will
not be accepted from one firm or association.
14.0 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS.
14.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in
a manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.
14.2. Bids may also be modified or withdrawn in person by the Bidder or an authorized
representative provided he can prove his identity and authority at any time prior to the
opening of Bids.
14.3. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of
Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.
15.0 OPENINGS OF BIDS.
Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly as
indicated in the Invitation to Bid. An abstract of the amounts of the Base Bids and major
alternates (if any) will be made available after the opening of Bids.
16.0 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE.
All Bids shall remain open for forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid Opening, but
OWNER may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to
that date.
17.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT.
17.1. OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all
informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work, to negotiate contract terms
with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive,
unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, OWNER reserves the right to reject the Bid of any
Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make
an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is
unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or
criteria established by OWNER. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any
column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct
sum.
17.2. In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether
or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices
and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
17.3. OWNER may consider the qualification and experience of Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work
as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and
organizations is submitted as requested by OWNER. OWNER also may consider the
operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major
items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such
data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award.
17.4. OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist
in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial
ability of the Bidder's proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and
organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to OWNER's
satisfaction within the prescribed time.
17.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsive and
responsible Bidder whose evaluation by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the award
will be in the best interest of the OWNER. Award shall be made on the evaluated lowest
base bid excluding alternates. The basis for award shall be the lowest Bid total for the
Schedule or, in the case of more than one schedule, for sum of all schedules. Only one
contract will be awarded.
17.6. If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice
of Award within forty-five (45) days after the date of the Bid opening.
17.0 CONTRACT SECURITY.
The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER's
requirements as to performance and other Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers
the executed Agreement to the OWNER, it shall be accompanied by the required
Contract Security.
18.0 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT.
When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied
by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written
Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall
sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached
documents to OWNER with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter,
OWNER hall deliver one fully signed counterpart to CONTRACTOR. Each counterpart is
to be accompanied by a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification.
19.0 TAXES.
OWNER is exempt from Colorado State Sales and Use Taxes on materials and
equipment to be incorporated in the Work. Said taxes shall not be included in the
Contract Price. Reference is made to the General and Supplementary Conditions.
20.0 RETAINAGE.
Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement.
21.0 PURCHASING RESTRICTIONS.
Purchasing restrictions: The Bidder's authorized signature of this Bid assures the
Bidder's compliance with the City's purchasing restrictions. A copy of the resolutions is
available for review in the Purchasing and Risk Management Division or the City Clerk's
office.
A. Cement Restrictions: City of Fort Collins Resolution 91-121 requires that
suppliers and producers of cement or products containing cement to certify
that the cement was not made in cement kilns that burn hazardous waste as
a fuel.
22.0 COLLUSIVE OR SHAM BIDS.
Any Bid deemed by the City in its sole discretion to be a collusive or sham Bid will be
rejected and reported to authorities as such. Your authorized signature of this Bid
assures that such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid.
23.0 BID RESULTS.
For information regarding results for individual Bids send a self-addressed, self-stamped
envelope and a Bid tally will be mailed to you. Bid results will be posted in the
Purchasing office seven (7) days after the Bid Opening.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
PROJECT: 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms
Place:
Date:
1. In compliance with your Invitation to Bid dated , 20 and subject to
all conditions thereof, the undersigned a (Corporation, Limited Liability Company,
Partnership, Joint Venture, or Sole Proprietor) authorized to do business in the State of
Colorado hereby proposes to furnish and do everything required by the Contract
Documents to which this refers for the construction of all items listed on the following Bid
Schedule or Bid Schedules.
2. The undersigned Bidder does hereby declare and stipulate that this proposal is made in
good faith, without collusion or connection with any other person or persons Bidding for
the same Work, and that it is made in pursuance of and subject to all the terms and
conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, the Agreement, the
detailed Specifications, and the Drawings pertaining to the Work to be done, all of which
have been examined by the undersigned.
3. Accompanying this Bid is a certified or cashier's check or standard Bid bond in the sum
of
($ ) in accordance with the Invitation To Bid and Instructions to
Bidders.
4. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute the Agreement and a Performance Bond and
a Payment Bond for the amount of the total of this Bid within fifteen (15) calendar days
from the date when the written notice of the award of the contract is delivered to him at
the address given on this Bid. The name and address of the corporate surety with which
the Bidder proposes to furnish the specified performance and payment Bonds is as
follows: .
5. All the various phases of Work enumerated in the Contract Documents with their
individual jobs and overhead, whether specifically mentioned, included by implication or
appurtenant thereto, are to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under one of the items
listed in the Bid Schedule, irrespective of whether it is named in said list.
6. Payment for Work performed will be in accordance with the Bid Schedule or Bid
Schedules subject to changes as provided in the Contract Documents.
7. The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of Addenda No. through
.
8. BID SCHEDULE (Base Bid)
Lump Sum Base Bid $ ______________
In Words: _______________
Total for Add Alternate #1 $ ______________
9. PRICES
The foregoing prices shall include all labor, materials, transportation, shoring, removal,
dewatering, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the complete Work in place of the
several kinds called for.
Bidder acknowledges that the OWNER has the right to delete items in the Bid or change
quantities at his sole discretion without affecting the Agreement or prices of any item so
long as the deletion or change does not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the total
Agreement Price.
RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED:
CONTRACTOR
BY:
Printed Date
Title
License Number (If Applicable)
(Seal - if Bid is by corporation)
Attest:
Address
Telephone
Email
SECTION 00400
SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS
00410 Bid Bond
00420 Statement of Bidder's Qualifications
00430 Schedule of Subcontractors
SECTION 00410
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that we, the undersigned
as Principal, and as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins,
Colorado, as OWNER, in the sum of $ for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we
hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors, and assigns.
THE CONDITION of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the City
of Fort Collins, Colorado the accompanying Bid and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a
Construction Agreement for the construction of Fort Collins Project, .
NOW THEREFORE,
(a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or
(b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a Contract in the
form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and
shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance of said Contract, and for payment of all
persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all
other respects perform the Agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this
obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect, it being
expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims
hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein
stated.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety
and its BOND shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which
the OWNER may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such
extension.
Surety Companies executing bonds must be authorized to transact business in the State of
Colorado and be accepted by the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals
this day of , 20__, and such of them as are corporations have caused
their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper
officers, the day and year first set forth above.
PRINCIPAL SURETY
Name:
Address:
By: By:
Title: Title:
ATTEST:
By:
(SEAL) (SEAL)
SECTION 00420
STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This
statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached
sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires.
1. Name of Bidder:
2. Permanent main office address:
3. When organized:
4. If a corporation, where incorporated:
5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present
firm or trade name?
6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing the amount of each contract and the
appropriate anticipated dates of completion.)
7. General character of Work performed by your company:
8. Have you ever failed to complete any Work awarded to you?
If so, where and why?
9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract?
If so, where and why?
10. Are you debarred by any government agency?
If yes list agency name.
11. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the
approximate cost of each, and the month and year completed, location and type of
construction.
12. List your major equipment available for this contract.
13. Experience in construction Work similar in importance to this project:
14. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including
officers:
15. Credit available: $
16. Bank Reference:
17. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other
information that may be required by the OWNER?
18. Are you licensed as a General Contractor?
If yes, in what city, county and state?
What class, license and numbers?
19. Do you anticipate subcontracting Work under this Contract?
If yes, what percent of total contract?
And to whom?
20. Are any lawsuits pending against you or your firm at this time?
IF yes, DETAIL
21. What are the limits of your public liability? DETAIL
What company?
22. What are your company's bonding limitations?
23. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to
furnish any information requested by the OWNER in verification of the recital comprising
this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications.
Dated at ________________ this ______ day of __________________, 20__.
Company:
By: Printed:
Title:
State of
County of
being duly sworn deposes and says that he
is of
(Name) (Organization)
and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true
and correct.
Subscribed and sworn to before me this _______ day of____________, 20__.
(Seal)
Notary Public
My commission expires: .
SECTION 00430
SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS
List all subcontractors for the work items listed below and all subcontractors performing over
15% of the contract.
ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR
SECTION 00500
AGREEMENT FORMS
00510 Notice of Award
00520 Agreement
00530 Notice to Proceed
SECTION 00510
NOTICE OF AWARD
DATE:
TO:
PROJECT: 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms
OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER")
You are hereby notified that your Bid dated , 20 for the above project has been
considered. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded an Agreement for
7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms.
The Price of your Agreement is ($ ).
Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany
this Notice of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise
made available to you immediately.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of
this Notice of Award, that is by , 20 .
1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the Agreement
including all the Contract Documents. Each of the Contract Documents must bear your
signature on the cover of the page.
2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as
specified in the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions (Article 5.1) and
Supplementary Conditions.
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider
your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited.
Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one (1)
fully-signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached.
City of Fort Collins
OWNER
By:
James B. O’Neill, II, CPPO, FNIGP
Director of Purchasing & Risk Management
SECTION 00520
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the day of in the year of 20 and shall be
effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City.
The City of Fort Collins (hereinafter called OWNER) and
(hereinafter called CONTRACTOR)
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth,
agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1. WORK
CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract
Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may
be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of the 7433 Rolland
Moore Park Restrooms and is generally described in Section 01010.
ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER
The Project has been designed by Aller Lingle Massey. The City Parks
Department, who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who will assume all
duties and responsibilities and will have the rights and authority assigned to
ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES
3.1 The Work shall be Substantially Complete within ninety (90) calendar days
after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the
General Conditions and completed and ready for Final Payment and
Acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions within fourteen (14)
calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.
3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is
of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss
if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1.
above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of
the General Conditions.
They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in
proving in a legal preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work
is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,
OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as Liquidated damages for delay
(but not as penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set
forth hereafter.
1) Substantial Completion:
Three Hundred Dollars ($300.00) for each calendar day or fraction
thereof that expires after the ninety (90) calendar day period for
Substantial Completion of the Work until the Work is Substantially
Complete.
2) Final Acceptance:
After Substantial Completion, One Hundred Fifty Dollars ($150.00) for
each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the fourteen (14)
calendar day period for Final Payment and Acceptance until the Work is
ready for Final Payment and Acceptance.
ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE
4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds as follows:
Dollars ($ ), in accordance with Section 00300, attached and
incorporated herein by this reference.
ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article
14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by
ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions.
5.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on
account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application
for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during
construction as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis
of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values
established in paragraph 2.6 of the General Conditions and in the case of
Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed, and in
accordance with the General Requirements concerning Unit Price Work.
5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, Owner will be entitled to withhold as
contract retainage five percent (5%) of each progress payment, but, in each
case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such
amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in
accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. If , in the sole
discretion of Owner, on recommendation of Engineer, Owner determines
that the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to
OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER may determine that as long as the
character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will
be no additional retainage on account of Work completed in which case the
remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an
amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 95% of materials and
equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and
accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in
paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the
application Section 00520 Page 3 for payment.
5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount
sufficient, if necessary, to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to
95% of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall
determine or OWNER may withhold in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of
the General Conditions or as provided by law.
5.2. FINAL PAYMENT. Upon Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work in
accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall
pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER
as provided in said paragraph 14.13.
ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes
the following representations:
6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the
Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and with all local conditions and
Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress,
performance or furnishing of the Work.
6.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of
subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are
identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of
the General Conditions.
6.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes
responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to
supplement those referred to in paragraph 6.2 above) which pertain to the
subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site or otherwise
may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as
CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of
the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in
accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents,
including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General
Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required
by CONTRACTOR for such purposes.
6.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown
or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes
responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies
or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are
or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the
Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance
with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including
specifically the provision of paragraph 4.3. of the General Conditions.
6.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations,
examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents.
6.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors
or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the
written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR.
ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
7.1 The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, those items included in the
definition of “Contract Documents” in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions,
and such other items as are referenced in this Article 7, all of which are
incorporated herein by this reference.
7.2 Forms for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related
actions in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract
Documents and incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are
not limited to, the following:
7.2.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion
7.2.2 Certificate of Final Acceptance
7.2.3 Lien Waiver Releases
7.2.4 Consent of Surety
7.2.5 Application for Exemption Certificate
7.2.6 Application for Payment
7.3 Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered as follows:
ARCHITECTURAL
SD1 SITE PLAN
A-1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN
A-2 BUILDING ELEVATIONS
A-3 BUILDING SECTIONS
A-4 WALL SECTIONS
A-5 TYPICAL DETAILS
A-7 DETAILS
A-9 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE & LEGEND
STRUCTURAL
S0.1 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS
S1.1 FOUNDATION & FRAMING PLAN
S2.1 DETAILS
MECHANICAL
M1 MECHANICAL PLAN
M2 MECHANICAL LEGENDS & DETAILS
ELECTRICAL
E1 ELECTRICAL PLANS
E2 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE SCHEDULES
The Contract Drawings shall be stamped "Final for Construction" and
dated. Any revisions made shall be clearly identified and dated.
7.4. Addenda Numbers to , inclusive.
7.5. The Contract Documents also include all written amendments and other
documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract
Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions.
7.6. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or incorporated
by reference in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be
amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6
of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 8. MISCELLANEOUS
8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General
Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions.
8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the
Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the
written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not
without limitations, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due
may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the
effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically
stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no
assignment will release or discharge that assignor from any duty or
responsibility under the Contract Document.
8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors,
assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners,
successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants,
Agreement and obligations contained in the Contract Document.
OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS CONTRACTOR:
By: By:
JAMES B. O’NEILL II, CPPO, FNIGP
DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING
AND RISK MANAGEMENT
PRINTED
Title: Title:
Date: Date:
Attest: (CORPORATE SEAL)
City Clerk
Address for giving notices:
P. O. Box 580
Fort Collins, CO 80522 Attest:
Approved as to Form Address for giving notices:
Assistant City Attorney
License No.:
SECTION 00530
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Description of Work: 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms
To:
This notice is to advise you:
That the contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the
CONTRACTOR and the OWNER.
That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been received
by the OWNER.
That the OWNER has approved the said Contract Documents.
Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, you are hereby authorized and
directed to proceed within ( ) calendar days from receipt of this notice as required by the
Agreement.
Dated this day of , 20 .
The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be , 20_ and
, 20__, respectively.
City of Fort Collins
OWNER
By:
Title:
ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of
, 20__.
CONTRACTOR:
By:
Title:
SECTION 00600
BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
00610 Performance Bond
00615 Payment Bond
00630 Certificate of Insurance
00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion
00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance
00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR)
00660 Consent of Surety
00670 Application for Exemption Certificate
SECTION 00610
PERFORMANCE BOND
Bond No.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(firm)
(address)
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and
(Firm)
(Address)
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto City of Fort Collins, 300
Laporte Ave, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as
the "OWNER", in the penal sum of ____________ in lawful money of
the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves,
successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a
certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the day of , 20 , a copy of which
is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins
Project, 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the
undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the
original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or
without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall
satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and
save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure
to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER
may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in
full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees
that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the
Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way
affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension
of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the
Specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in
the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of
which shall be deemed an original, this _____ day of _____ ____, 20__.
IN PRESENCE OF: Principal
(Title) (Title)
(Corporate Seal)
(Address)
IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners
_____________________________ By:
_____________________________ By:
IN PRESENCE OF: Surety
_____________________________ By:_____________________________________
_____________________________
(Address)
(Surety Seal)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is
Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.
SECTION 00615
PAYMENT BOND
Bond No.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(firm)
(address)
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and
(Firm)
(Address)
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins,
300 Laporte Ave., Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to
as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of in lawful money of the United States, for the
payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a
certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the day of , 20 , a copy of which
is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins
project, 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors,
and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work
provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including
all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools,
consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance
premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or
otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees
that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the
Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way
affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension
of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the
Specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in
the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts,
each one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of , 20__.
IN PRESENCE OF: Principal
(Title) (Title)
(Corporate Seal)
(Address)
IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners
_____________________________ By:
_____________________________ By:
IN PRESENCE OF: Surety
_____________________________ By:_____________________________________
_____________________________
(Address)
(Surety Seal)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is
Partnership, all partners should execute Bond.
SECTION 00630
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACTOR shall insert his own standard form for Certificate of Insurance.
SECTION 00635
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (OWNER)
DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: PROJECT TITLE: 7433 Rolland Moore Park
Restrooms
PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado
INCLUDE:
OWNER: City of Fort Collins
CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT DATE:
The Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of
the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project or specified part of the
project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date.
A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be
exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to
complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated.
CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially complete and
will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01 a.m., on
. The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance under
the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under "Remarks" below.
CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By:
OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
DATE
REMARKS:
SECTION 00640
CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE
, 20__
TO:
Gentlemen:
You are hereby notified that on the day of , 20__, the City of
Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted the Work completed by for the City of Fort Collins
project, 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms.
A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final
Payment for all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents which are dated
, 20 .
In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and guarantees
will continue for the specified time from the following date:____________ _, 20__.
Sincerely,
OWNER: City of Fort Collins
By:
Title:
ATTEST:
Title:
SECTION 00650
LIEN WAIVER RELEASE
(CONTRACTOR)
TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER)
FROM: (CONTRACTOR)
PROJECT: 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms
1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the
OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the
CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement,
alteration, addition or repair of the above described project.
2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt
and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives
all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims
(40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights
which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any
work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction,
design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against
the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the
possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the
buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project.
3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or
performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of
the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents,
employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various
Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further
affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or
possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the
OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its
officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project.
4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any,
and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the
CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns
against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns
arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys
fees, incurred as a result of such claims.
5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and
adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release
pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and
may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any labor and
material bonds for the project.
Signed this day of , 20__.
CONTRACTOR:
By:
Title:
ATTEST:
Secretary
STATE OF COLORADO )
)ss.
COUNTY OF LARIMER )
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20__,
by .
Witness my hand and official seal.
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
SECTION 00660
CONSENT OF SURETY
TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER")
CONTRACTOR:
PROJECT: 7433 Rolland Moore Park Restrooms
CONTRACT DATE:
In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
as indicated above, for .
(Surety)
on bond of
hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final Payment to
the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the
OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this
day of , 20____ .
(Surety Company)
By:
ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact.
SECTION 00670
APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE
Special Notice
Contractors who have completed this application in the past, please note the following changes
in procedure:
The Department will no longer issue individual Certificates of exemption to subcontractors. Only
prime contractors will receive a Contractor’s Exemption Certificate on exempt projects.
Upon receipt of the Certificate, the prime contractor should make a copy for each subcontractor
involved in the project and complete it by filling in the subcontractor’s name and address and
signing it.
The original Certificate should always be retained by the prime contractor. Copies of all
Certificates that the prime contractor issued to subcontractors should be kept at the prime
contractor’s place of business for a minimum of three years and be available for inspection in
the event of an audit.
Once an 89# has been assigned to you, please use the next five numbers following it for any
applications submitted for future projects. This should be your permanent number. For
instance, if you were assigned 89-12345-0001, every application submitted thereafter should
contain 89-12345 on the application. The succeeding numbers will be issued by the
Department of Revenue. DO NOT enter what you believe to be the next in sequence as this
may delay processing of your application.
SECTION 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Conditions of the Contract
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990 edition with City of Fort Collins
modifications) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below.
SC-4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions:
A. Add the following language to paragraph 4.2.1 of the General Conditions.
4.2.1.1.1 The following report(s) of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions
at the site of the Work:
Geotechnical Investical by Empire Laboriitories, Inc., dated May 15, 1981,
Project No. 4452-81
Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in the
geotechnical documents, but not upon nontechnical data, interpretations or
opinions contained therein or upon the completeness of any information in the
report.
B. 4.2.1.2.1 No drawing of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities referred to in Paragraph
4.3) which are at or contiguous to the site have been utilized by the Engineer in
preparation of the Contract Documents, except the following:
None
SC-5.4.8 Limits of Liability
A. Add the following language at the end of paragraph 5.4.8.
The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph numbers of the
General Conditions listed below are as follows:
5.4.1 and 5.4.2
Coverage A - Statutory Limits
Coverage B - $100,000/$100,000/$500,000
5.4.3 and 5.4.5 Commercial General Liability policy will have limits of
$1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy will include coverage
for Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverage unless waived by the
Owner.
5.4.6 The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance policy will have
limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL).
5.4.9 This policy will include completed operations coverage/product
liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL).
SC-8.10 OWNER’s Project Manager
A. Add the following language to ARTICLE 8:
8.10. The OWNER will provide a Project Manager. The CONTRACTOR shall
direct all questions concerning Contract interpretation, Change Orders,
and other requests for clarification or instruction to the Project Manager.
8.10.1 Authority: The Project Manager will be the OWNER's representative
during the construction of the project. The Project Manager shall have
the authority set forth in the OWNER's Capital Project Procedures
Manual. The Project Manager shall have the authority to reject work
and materials whenever such rejection may be necessary to ensure the
proper performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
8.10.2 Duties and Responsibilities: The Project Manager will make periodic
visits to the project site to observe the progress and quality of the Work
and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance
with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall not be
required to make comprehensive or continuous inspections to check the
progress or quality of the Work. The Project Manager shall not be
responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences,
or procedures, or for safety precautions or programs in connection with
the Work, or for any failure of the Contractor to comply with laws and
regulation applicable to the performance or furnishing of the Work.
Visits and observations made by the Project Manager shall not relieve
the CONTRACTOR of his obligation to conduct comprehensive
inspections of the Work, to furnish materials and perform acceptable
Work, and to provide adequate safety precautions in conformance with
the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall at all times have
access to the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities for
such access so the Project Manager may perform his or her functions
under the Contract Documents.
8.10.3 One or more Resident Construction Inspector(s) (RCI) may be
assigned to assist the Project Manager in providing observation of the
Work, to determine whether or not the Work is proceeding according to
the construction documents. CONTRACTOR will receive written
notification from the OWNER of any RCI assignments. The RCI shall
not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be
responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or
performance of the Work. The RCI will not be responsible for
CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents. The RCI's dealings in matters pertaining
to the on-site work will be to keep the Project Manager properly
apprised about such matters.
8.10.4 Communications: All instructions, approvals, and decisions of the
Project Manager shall be in writing. The CONTRACTOR may not rely
on instructions, approvals, or decisions of the Project Manager until the
same are reduced to writing.
SC-12.3 Add the following language to the end of paragraph 12.3.
Contractor will include in the project schedule zero (0) days lost due to abnormal
weather conditions.
SC-13.12 Correction Period:
13.12.1 If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer
period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the
terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract
Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, an
Work is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without
cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER’s written instructions.
SECTION 00900
ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS AND PAYMENT
00950 Contract Change Order
00960 Application for Payment
SECTION 00950
CHANGE ORDER NO.
PROJECT TITLE: Rolland Moore Park Restrooms
CONTRACTOR:
PROJECT NUMBER: 7433
DESCRIPTION:
1. Reason for change:
2. Description of Change:
3. Change in Contract Cost:
4. Change in Contract Time:
ORIGINAL CONTRACT COST $ .00
TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDER .00
TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDER .00
TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER .00
TOTAL % OF THIS CHANGE ORDER %
TOTAL C.O.% OF ORIGNINAL CONTRACT %
ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST $ .00
(Assuming all change orders approved)
ACCEPTED BY: DATE:
Contractor's Representative
ACCEPTED BY: DATE:
Project Manager
REVIEWED BY: DATE:
Title:
APPROVED BY: DATE:
Title:
APPROVED BY: DATE:
cc: City Clerk Contractor
Project File Architect
Engineer Purchasing
Section 00960
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 1 OF 4
OWNER: City of Fort Collins PROJECT: APPLICATION NUMBER:
APPLICATION DATE:
PERIOD BEGINNING:
ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR: PERIOD ENDING:
PROJECT NUMBER:
CHANGE ORDERS Application is made for Payment as shown below in connection with Contract
NUMBER DATE AMOUNT
The present status of the account for this Contract is as
follows:
1
2 Original Contract Amount:
3 Net Change by Change Order:
Current contract Amount: $0.00
Total Completed and Stored to Date:
Less Previous Applications:
Amount Due this Application - Before Retainage: $0.00
Less Retainage:
Net Change by Change Order $0.00 AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION: $0.00
CERTIFICATION:
The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that all obligations of CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with
the Work have been satisfied as required in Paragraph 14.3. of the General Conditions of the Contract.
The above Amount Due This Application is requested by the CONTRACTOR.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is recommended by the ENGINEER.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application has been reviewed by the OWNER'S Project Manager.
Date: By:
Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is approved by the OWNER.
Date: By:
CONTRACT AMOUNTS
APPLICATION FOR
PAYMENT PAGE 2 OF 4
Work
Completed
Work
Completed
Work
Completed Stored
Bid
This
Month
Previous
Periods
To
Date Materials Total
Item This Earned Percent
Number Description Quantity Units
Unit
Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period
To
Date Billed
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
CHANGE ORDERS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 3 OF 4
Work
Completed
Work
Completed
Work
Completed Stored
Bid
This
Month
Previous
Periods
To
Date Materials Total
Item This Earned Percent
Number Description Quantity Units
Unit
Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period
To
Date Billed
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
TOTALS CHANGE
ORDERS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
PROJECT TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
STORED MATERIALS
SUMMARY PAGE 4 OF 4
On Hand Received Installed On Hand
Item Invoice Previous This This This
Number Number Description Application Period Period Application
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
ROLLAND MOORE
PLAYGROUND RESTROOM
FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
100% CONSTRUCTION
DOCUMENTS
September 2012
Architect's Project No.: 1143.04
712 Whalers Way, Suite B-100
Fort Collins, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
Table of Contents - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01010 Summary of Work
01016 Green Building Requirements (used for
non-LEED certified projects)
01025 Measurement and Payment
01026 Application for Payment
01027 Change Order Procedures
01030 Alternates
01040 Coordination
01041 Superintendent
01046 Access to Site
01050 Field Engineering
01060 Regulatory Requirements
01200 Project Meetings
01310 Construction Schedules
01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and
Samples
01370 Schedule of Values
01400 Quality Control
01410 Testing
01510 Temporary Utilities
01520 Construction Equipment and Aids
01530 Barriers and Enclosures
01540 Erosion and Sedimentation Control
01560 Temporary Controls
01590 Field Offices and Sheds
01600 Material and Equipment
01700 Contract Close-Out
01710 Cleaning
01714 Construction Waste Management and
Removal
01720 Project Record Documents
01730 Operating and Maintenance Data
01740 Warranties and Bonds
DIVISION 2 SITEWORK
Section 02100 Site Preparation
02115 Selective Clearing and Pruning
02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
02225 Structural Excavating, Backfilling and
Compacting
02930 Sodding and Seeding
02950 Trees, Plants and Ground Covers
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
Section 03100 Concrete Formwork
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
Section 04100 Mortar and Masonry Grout
04220 Concrete Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5 METALS
Section 05999 Miscellaneous Metals
DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06100 Rough Carpentry
06116 Exterior Gypsum Sheathing
06170 Prefabricated Structural Wood
06200 Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
01010 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT SITE
A. Location: The site is located at Rolland Moore Park, 2201 S. Shields Street, Fort Collins,
Colorado.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK
A. General: The work consists of the construction of a park restroom building, complete with
related sitework and landscaping, and demolition of existing.
1. Utility systems design and installation shall be design/build by the selected
Subcontractor.
B. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor shall provide, at his expense, all materials, labor,
equipment, tools, transportation and utilities, including cost of connection necessary for
successful completion of the project.
C. It is the intent of the Owner not to disturb the normal functions of the complex, its residents
and their visitors, employees, vendors, suppliers, contractors or related outside businesses
during the work of this project.
1. Refer to Section 01046, Access to Site, for specific construction access, phasing and
scheduling requirements.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for seeing that all contractors, subcontractors, suppliers
and workmen associated with the project conduct themselves in a professional, respectful and
businesslike manner while on the site.
1. Firearms, alcoholic beverages and controlled substances are not permitted on the
premises.
2. Smoking or use of tobacco products shall only be allowed in designated areas, and is
prohibited within any structure.
3. All workers shall refrain from the use of profane or abusive language and other forms of
harassment on the site.
4. Other specific conditions of this Section shall be as arranged at the Pre-Construction
Conference. Refer to Section 01046 for specific rights of the Owner's principal
representative.
E. Related requirements or conditions specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01016, Green Building Guidelines.
2. Section 01046, Access to Site.
3. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
4. Section 01400, Quality Control: Quality control and workmanship standards.
5. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Quality of materials and equipment to be
installed in the work.
1.03 FORM OF BID AND/OR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. The work of this Project shall be bid and construction contracts awarded on the following
basis, unless otherwise modified in the General or Supplementary Conditions of the Contract:
1.04 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Owner shall furnish and install all grading, landscaping and related site improvements, beyond
the construction limits indicated on the Drawings, by separate contract, except areas disturbed
by construction.
01010 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Owner shall provide any applicable project or building inspection services as required by
Chapter 17 of the International Building code (IBC), current edition, by separate contract. The
Architect and Engineers will not provide these services.
END OF SECTION
01016 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01016
GREEN BUILDING GUIDELINES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. This Section includes general sustainable design and construction guidelines and procedures for
LEED certification through the U.S. Green Building Council. LEED Green Building Rating System
will not be pursued for this Project.
B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01010, Summary of Work: Sustainability goals.
2. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Submittal requirements.
3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
4. Respective Sections of Specifications: Specific requirements for design and
performance criteria.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. LEED reference standards, as specified in the LEED Green Building Rating System for New
Construction and Major Renovations, Version 3.0, are included in this Section by reference.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design. LEED Version 3.0 (2009), Green Building
Rating System for New Construction and Major Renovations (LEED-NC).
B. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured or assembled within a
radius of 500 miles from the Project location.
C. Regionally Extracted, Harvested, or Recovered Materials: Materials that are extracted,
harvested, or recovered and manufactured within a radius of 500 miles from the Project site.
D. Recycled Content: Percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered or
otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre-
industrial), or after consumer use (post-consumer).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS
A. General: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled
content plus one-half of post-industrial recycled content constitutes a minimum of 10 percent
of the cost of materials used for the Project.
1. The cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing
the weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by the total weight of the
item and multiplying by the cost of the item.
2. The cost of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of post-industrial recycled
content of an item shall be determined by dividing the weight of post-consumer
recycled content plus one-half of post-industrial recycled content in the item by the
total weight of the item and multiplying by the cost of the item.
3. Do not include mechanical and electrical components in the calculation.
4. Recycled content shall be defined according to the Federal Trade Commission's "Guide
for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims", 16 CFR 260.7 (e).
2.02 REGIONAL MATERIALS
A. Provide a minimum of 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regionally
manufactured or assembled materials.
01016 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Of the regionally manufactured materials specified above, provide at least 50 percent (by cost)
that are regionally extracted, harvested, or recovered materials.
2.03 CERTIFIED WOOD
A. Provide wood materials that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an
FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2 "Principles and Criteria".
1. Wood-based materials include but are not limited to the following materials:
a. Rough carpentry.
b. Miscellaneous carpentry.
c. Finish carpentry.
d. Architectural woodwork.
e. Athletic or sports flooring.
f. Wood paneling.
g. Non-rented temporary construction including bracing, concrete formwork,
pedestrian barriers and temporary protection.
2.04 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
A. For interior applications use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for
VOC content:
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L.
4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
6. Carpet and Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
7. VCT, Asphalt Tile, and Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
8. Gypsum Wallboard and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
9. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
10. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
11. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
12. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
13. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
14. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
15. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
16. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 g/L.
17. ABS Welding Compounds: 400 g/L.
18. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.
19. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
20. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L.
21. Sealants: 250 g/L.
22. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
23. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B. For interior applications use paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC
content and the following chemical restrictions per Green Seal Standard GS-11:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
4. Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
5. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
6. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight total aromatic compounds.
7. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain acrolein, acrylonitrile,
antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-
n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate,
dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone,
01016 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride,
naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, or vinyl chloride.
D. Do not use composite wood and agrifiber products that contain added urea-formaldehyde resin.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
01025 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01025
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section covers methods of measurements and payment for items of Work covered in the
Bid Form/Bid Schedule.
1. Owner will not pay for defective work and will not pay for repair or additional work
required to bring the project to a point of acceptance.
B. Bid Price:
1. The Total Bid Price covers all Work required by the Contract Documents. All work not
specifically set forth as a pay item in the Bid Form shall be considered a subsidiary
obligation of the Contractor and all costs in connection therewith shall be included in
the prices bid for the various items of Work.
2. Prices shall include all costs in connection with the proper and successful completion of
the Work, including furnishing all materials, equipment and tools, performing all labor
and supervision to fully complete the Work, associated General Conditions and Division
1 expenses associated with the Work, and the costs of Contractor overhead, profit and
bonding applicable to the particular Bid Item.
END OF SECTION
01026 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01026
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect in accordance with the schedule established by
the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Owner-Contractor Agreement.
B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Owner-Contractor Agreement:
a. Lump sum.
b. Progress payments, retainages and final payment.
c. Allowable progress payments for Contractor overhead, profit and Division 1
expenses.
2. Bid Form.
3. General and Supplementary Conditions:
a. Retainages.
b. Liquidated damages, if applicable.
c. Partial release of lien affidavits.
4. Section 01370, Schedule of Values.
5. Section 01700, Contract Closeout.
6. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
7. Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data.
1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED
A. Submit itemized Applications using standard City of Fort Collins forms, unless otherwise
approved.
B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet. Format, schedule, line items and values shall be
those of the Schedule of Values accepted by Architect.
C. Applications for payment shall include only that material, labor and/or stored material in place
as of the date of Application.
1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT
A. Application Form:
1. Form shall be completed and notarized by a Notary Public, state of Colorado.
2. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed prior to date of
submittal of Application. Incomplete Application forms shall be returned to the
Contractor and not processed.
3. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continua-
tion sheets.
4. Certification shall be executed with signature of a responsible officer of contract firm.
B. Continuation Sheets:
1. Fill in total list of all schedule component items of work with item number and
scheduled dollar value for each item.
2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been
performed or products stored, as of date of Application.
3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of Application at the end of the
continuation sheets.
a. List by Change Order number and description, as for an original component
item of work.
C. Retainage: The Owner shall withhold retainage from each progress payment, as stipulated in
the General and Supplementary Conditions. Contractor shall reflect the amount retained on
each Application for Payment.
01026 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.04 RELATED SUBMITTALS REQUIRED WITH APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Partial Release of Liens Affidavit: Contractor shall submit a Partial Release of Liens Affidavit
with each Application for Payment certifying payment to Subcontractors, material suppliers or
other entities having provided labor, materials and equipment related to the Work covered by
the previous Application for Payment, as specified in the General and Supplementary
Conditions.
B. Prior to acceptance of Application for Progress Payments, Contractor shall show that project
record drawings are current and up to date per Section 01720, as requested by the Architect or
Owner.
C. Prior to acceptance of Final Application for Payment, Contractor shall submit complete
operating and maintenance manuals, including all warranties, for review and acceptance by
the Architect and Owner. Refer to paragraph 1.06 below.
1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. When the Owner or the Architect requires substantiating data, Contractor shall submit suitable
information with a cover letter identifying:
1. Project name, Application number and date.
2. Detailed list of enclosures.
3. Stored materials may be submitted for payment, provided they are stored on site, in
the Subcontractor's insured facility, or in a bonded warehouse facility as of the date of
Application.
a. Submit item number and identification as shown on Application, description of
specific material.
b. Submit certificate of insurance indicating coverage of stored materials, if
requested by the Owner.
B. Submit one (1) copy of data for each copy of Application.
1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
A. Fill in Application form as specified for progress payments.
B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as specified in Section
01700, Contract Close-Out.
1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
A. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect within the time limitations and deadlines
stipulated in the Agreement.
B. Number: Four (4) copies of each Application, or as established at the Pre-Construction
Conference.
C. When Architect finds Application properly completed and correct, he will transmit Certificate
for Payment to Owner within seven (7) calendar days.
D. Final Certificate for Payment shall be processed only after operating and maintenance manuals
have been received, reviewed and accepted by the Architect and Owner.
END OF SECTION
01027 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01027
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall prepare and promptly implement Change Order procedures:
1. Provide full written data required to evaluate proposed changes in the Contract Sum or
extensions of the Contract Time.
2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time-and-material/force-account basis.
3. Maintain detailed records of weather-related delays to substantiate claims for
additional time.
B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization who is authorized to accept
changes in the work.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Owner-Contractor Agreement and Conditions of the Contract:
a. Methods of determining cost or credit to Owner resulting from changes in the
work made on a time-and-material basis.
b. Contractor's claims for additional costs.
c. Allowable limits for Contractor's overhead and profit.
d. Established unit prices.
2. Section 01026, Applications for Payment.
3. Section 01046, Access to Site: Designation of Owner's Principal Representative,
authorized to execute change orders.
4. Section 01310, Construction Schedules.
5. Section 01370, Schedule of Values.
6. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Substitutions.
7. Section 01720, Project Record Documents.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Change Order: See General Conditions.
B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions, AIA Document G710: A written order, instructions or
interpretations signed by Architect making minor changes in the work not involving a change in
Contract Sum or Contract Time.
C. Proposal Request, AIA Document G709: A written request by the Owner or Architect describing
proposed changes in the work and requesting change order pricing from the Contractor, but not
authorizing the work to be completed until approved in writing by the Owner.
D. Construction Change Authorization, standard City of Fort Collins form: A written order to the
Contractor signed by Owner and Architect which amends the Contract Documents as described
and authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change which affects the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time, for inclusion in a subsequent Change Order.
1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
A. Owner or Architect may initiate changes by submitting a Proposal Request to Contractor.
Request will include:
1. Detailed description of the change, products and location of the change in the project.
2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.
3. The projected time span for making the change and a specific statement as to whether
overtime work is or is not authorized.
4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid.
5. Such request is for information only and is not an instruction to execute the changes or
to stop work in progress.
01027 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to Architect containing:
1. Description of the proposed changes.
2. Statement of the reason for making the changes.
3. Statement of the affect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
4. Statement of the affect on the work of separate contractors.
5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time as
appropriate.
C. Changes in the work affecting construction cost and/or contract time shall not be started
without a fully executed Change Order or other written authorization from the Owner and
Architect, in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions.
1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
A. In lieu of a Proposal Request, Architect may issue a Construction Change Authorization for
Contractor to proceed with a change for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
B. Authorization will describe changes in the work, both additions and deletions, with
attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change and will designate
the method of determining any change in the Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time.
C. Owner and Architect will sign and date the Construction Change Authorization as authorization
for the Contractor to proceed with the changes.
D. Contractor will sign and date the Construction Change Authorization to indicate agreement
with the terms therein.
1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS
A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal and for each unit price which has not
previously been established with sufficient substantiating data to allow Architect and Owner to
evaluate the quotation.
1. Labor and equipment required.
2. Materials required:
a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost.
b. Quantities required.
3. Taxes, insurance and bonds.
4. Credit for work modified or deleted from Contract similarly documented.
5. Overhead and profit. Refer to Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for established
limits, if applicable.
6. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
B. Support each claim for additional costs and for work done on a time-and-material/force-
account basis, with documentation as required for a lump sum proposal plus additional
information:
1. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and date of the order.
2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom.
3. Time record, summary of hours worked and hourly rates paid.
4. Receipts and invoices for:
a. Equipment used, listing dates and times of use.
b. Products used, listing quantities.
c. Subcontracts.
C. Document requests for substitutions for products as specified in Section 01600.
D. Support each claim for additional time due to weather-related delays with the following daily
information:
1. Statement of the reason for requesting an extension to the Contract Time due to the
weather, including the materials or trades affected and the adverse effects of the
weather upon these items.
2. Weather conditions at the site of the project for each day requested.
3. Temperature in Fahrenheit at the site for each day requested.
4. Any additional information requested by the Owner.
01027 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS
A. Contractor shall prepare each Change Order, unless Owner or Architect is authorized to
prepare Change Orders at the Pre-Construction Conference.
B. Form: Change Order, standard City of Fort Collins form or Owner provided form.
C. Change Order will describe changes in the work, both additions and deletions, with
attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change.
D. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract Sum and the
Contract Time.
1.07 LUMP SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either:
1. Architect's Proposal Request and Contractor's response as mutually agreed between
Owner and Contractor; or
2. Contractor's proposal for a change as recommended by Architect.
B. Owner and Architect will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for the Contractor to
proceed with the changes.
C. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein.
1.08 TIME AND MATERIAL/FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
A. Architect and Owner will issue a Construction Change Authorization directing Contractor to
proceed with the changes.
B. At completion of the change, Contractor shall submit itemized accounting and supporting data
as provided in paragraph 1.05, Documentation of Proposals and Claims.
C. Architect will determine the allowable cost of such work as provided in General Conditions and
Supplementary Conditions.
D. Architect and Owner will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in Contract
Sum and in Contract Time.
E. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their agreement therein.
F. Owner must approve in writing and on a daily basis all time and material Change Orders.
1.09 CONTRACTOR OVERHEAD AND PROFIT
A. General: Allowable limits to the Contractor's and Subcontractors' mark-ups on Change Orders
shall be as established in the General Conditions of the Contract.
1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS
A. Periodically revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each change
as a separate item of work and to record the adjusted Contract Sum.
B. Periodically revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time.
1. Revise subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the changes.
C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in Record Documents.
END OF SECTION
01030 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01030
ALTERNATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. This section identifies each Alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be
incorporated into the work only when that Alternate is made a part of the work by specific
provisions in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.
B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly integrate the
work under each Alternate for the complete construction required by the Contract Documents.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Bidding Documents: Method of quotation of the cost of each Alternate and the basis of
the Owner's acceptance of Alternate.
2. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Incorporation of Alternates into the work.
3. Bid Form and Bid Schedule.
4. Sections of the Specifications as listed under the respective Alternates. Referenced
Sections of Specifications stipulate pertinent requirements for products and methods to
achieve the work stipulated under each Alternate.
D. Alternates will be accepted as follows, unless otherwise modified by the General or
Supplementary Conditions to the Contract.
1. Alternates will be accepted in any order.
E. The Owner will consider the price quotation for each Alternate, in addition to the Base Bid, in
determining the apparent Low Bidder, unless otherwise modified by the General or
Supplementary Conditions to the Contract. Refer to Information for Bidders.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1 (Add): Demolition of existing restroom, except as required for new utility
connections.
B. Alternate No. 2 (Add): Sod for areas disturbed by construction.
END OF SECTION
01040 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01040
COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for the overall coordination of all civil, landscape design,
architectural, structural, plumbing, mechanical and electrical components and systems that
are a part of this project.
1. Coordinate components and systems prior to purchasing or fabricating.
2. Coordinate materials, equipment and fixtures supplied by various trades for
compatibility with the final installation.
B. Coordinate all work included in the Construction Documents, including but not limited to the
following construction trades:
1. Demolition.
2. Earthwork, excavation and grading.
3. On-site utilities, including utilities designed by other jurisdictions.
4. Asphalt, Portland cement and other hard surface pavements.
5. Landscaping and site irrigation systems.
6. Cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete.
7. Concrete unit masonry.
8. Structural steel and metalwork.
9. Rough and final carpentry.
10. Cabinetwork.
11. Building, roof and foundation insulation.
12. Roofing and flashings.
13. Doors, windows and storefront glazing systems.
14. Painting and finishing.
15. Flooring and hard surfaces.
16. Specialties and equipment.
17. Mechanical, plumbing and fire protection systems.
18. Electrical systems.
C. Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of the Drawings and various Sections of
Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent
construction elements.
D. Coordinate and verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are
compatible with the building utilities. Interruption of utility services shall be scheduled with
and subject to the approval of the Owner seven (7) business days prior to the interruption.
E. Coordinate utility locates and utility designs with Colorado State University and/or the City of
Fort Collins and other jurisdictions having authority over the project. Refer to Section 01060.
F. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. General and Supplementary Conditions: Contractor's Responsibilities.
2. Section 01010, Summary of Work.
3. Section 01016, Green Building Guidelines.
4. Section 01050, Field Engineering.
5. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
6. Section 01310, Construction Schedules.
7. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment: Substitutions.
8. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: General project coordination.
1.02 COORDINATION OF SCHEDULES
A. Coordinate schedule of construction activity with the Owner's continued use of the facility and
site. Refer to Section 01046, Access to Site.
B. Coordinate schedule of construction activity with the Owner and other Contractors as
necessary to facilitate the related work by others described above.
01040 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.03 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. In addition to progress meetings specified in Section 01200, Contractor shall hold coordination
meetings and pre-installation conferences with personnel and Subcontractors to assure
coordination of work.
1.04 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. General: Schedule and coordinate all submittals specified in Section 01340 or other Sections.
B. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installation,
connection and start-up and controls for systems and equipment.
C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, operating elements and
the effect on work of other Sections.
1.05 COORDINATION OF SPACE
A. Coordinate use of project space and sequence of installation of mechanical, plumbing, fire
protection and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings. Follow
routing shown for pipes, ducts and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for
available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to
maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance and for repairs.
B. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
1.06 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial
Completion.
B. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in Section 01700.
C. After Owner's occupancy of premises, coordinate access to the site by various Sections for
correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents to minimize
the disruption of Owner's activities.
END OF SECTION
01041 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01041
SUPERINTENDENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, who shall be
in attendance at the project site during performance of the work.
B. Superintendent shall be on the jobsite to the minimum level specified herein, but in all cases
whenever a Subcontractor is working on the project.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
2. Section 01010, Summary of Work: Contractor Qualifications.
3. Section 01040, Coordination.
4. Section 01046, Access to Site.
1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Superintendent Qualification Requirements: Contractor shall employ a competent
superintendent to supervise and coordinate all construction and jobsite administration tasks for
the duration of the project.
1. Superintendent shall be a regular employee of the Contractor's firm, unless the use of a
contract employee is approved and authorized by the Owner in writing.
2. Superintendent shall have a general knowledge of the building type and type of
construction proposed for this project, and shall have successfully completed at least
one (1) project of similar size and complexity in the past five (5) years, serving in a
similar capacity.
3. Contractor shall submit a written resume, references for similar completed projects
and other supporting documents with their bid to verify the qualifications of the
person(s) to be employed as superintendent for this project, if requested by the
Owner.
B. General Contractor Qualification Requirements: Refer to Section 01010, Summary of Work.
1.03 REQUIRED LEVEL OF SUPERVISION
A. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite until Substantial Completion on a full-time basis.
1. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite whenever a Subcontractor is working on
the project.
2. Superintendent shall be present during any municipal or utility inspection.
3. Superintendent shall be present at any scheduled or Owner- or Architect-requested
meeting.
B. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite after Substantial Completion and through
project close-out as follows:
1. Superintendent need not be on-site full time during this period, except as noted below.
2. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite when any punchlist work is being
completed.
END OF SECTION
01046 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01046
ACCESS TO SITE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 OWNER'S USE OF PREMISES
A. The City of Fort Collins shall fully occupy the existing facility, parking areas and grounds during
construction of this project, except for specific areas designated strictly for use by the
Contractor as specified in paragraph 1.02.
B. It is the intent of the Owner that the Contractor not disturb the normal functions of the
complex, visitors, employees, vendors, suppliers, contractors or related outside businesses
during the work of this project.
C. The City of Fort Collins shall not occupy or use any portion of the new building or site within
limits of construction until Substantial Completion of the project. Existing restroom will be
occupied until time for utility connections.
D. Refer to paragraph 1.04 below for special site restrictions.
E. The Owner's principal representative on this project shall be Eileen Scholl. Ms. Scholl shall be
the only representative of the Owner with access to the site with or without the Contractor's
knowledge, permission or guidance.
F. Related conditions specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01010, Summary of Work.
2. Section 01040, Coordination.
3. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
4. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
5. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds.
1.02 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A. Contractor shall have access to the site of new construction as required for the successful
completion of the project, as arranged at the Pre-Construction Conference.
B. Site area affected by construction access, construction activities, employee parking and
material storage areas is to be minimized.
1. General limits of the site access are as shown on the site plan in the Drawings. Final
limits shall be as determined at the Pre-Construction Conference.
2. Owner's access to non-affected areas of the site shall be maintained at all times.
Employee parking areas will be maintained throughout the duration of the Project, as
determined at the Pre-Construction Conference.
3. Contractor's employees and subcontractors shall not park on the public streets adjacent
to the site.
C. Access to areas of the existing facility affected by construction activities of the Project is to be
minimized.
1. Schedules for construction activities within the existing facility shall be submitted to
the Owner for approval a minimum of seven (7) days prior to beginning work.
2. Contractor shall protect all existing exterior and interior materials and finishes as
determined at the Pre-Construction Conference. Contractor shall repair or replace any
existing materials or finishes damaged as a part of this work at no cost to the Owner,
including damage to adjacent properties.
3. Contractor shall provide daily cleaning of the site and areas of the existing facility
during the period of construction activity, as specified in Section 01710.
D. Contractor shall maintain access to all park facilities not under construction at all times.
1. Contractor shall maintain safe public access through the construction.
E. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products under
this Contract stored on the site and for completed work.
F. Noise Control: Refer to Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
G. Dust and Erosion Control: Refer to Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
01046 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
H. Construction Hours: Refer to Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
I. Toilet Facilities: Refer to Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
1.03 CONSTRUCTION STAGING
A. Contractor shall provide a staging and phasing plan for the Owner's review and approval at the
Pre-Construction Conference, including:
1. Major materials to be stored on the site.
2. Major equipment to be used in the work, with the proposed placement of this
equipment during different phases of construction.
3. Field offices, trailers and storage sheds, including those proposed by major
Subcontractors.
4. Limits of temporary site fencing, including access points.
5. Proposed location for construction vehicle and employee parking.
6. Proposed phasing or sequencing of construction on the site.
7. Means and methods of maintaining public access through the construction to park
facilities not under construction, and safety barricades and/or enclosures for public
sidewalks.
1.04 SPECIAL SITE RESTRICTIONS
A. All construction access shall be via Shields Street.
B. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the existing jurisdictional wetlands
and Dry Creek channel and floodway during construction activities.
END OF SECTION
01050 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for the proper execution of the work,
including but not limited to:
1. Contractor will provide all required construction staking and field engineering.
B. In addition to the specified surveys, Contractor shall provide any resurveying as may be
necessary by field changes or redesign.
C. Requirements for use of electronic documents.
D. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01410, Testing.
2. Section 01720, Project Record Documents.
1.02 OWNER-FURNISHED INFORMATION
A. Site Survey: Site survey prepared for the Owner by the Engineer will be provided to the
Contractor for his use on this project.
1. Such data is offered solely for reference and is not to be considered a part of the Con-
tract Documents. The data contained in the document prepared for the Owner by the
Engineer is believed to be reliable; however, the Architect and Owner do not guarantee
its accuracy or completeness.
B. Architectural Site Plan Drawing or Horizontal Control Plan prepared by the Architect/Engineer.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Employ a Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor licensed in the state of Colorado and
acceptable to the Owner and Architect.
B. Documentation and Records: Surveyor or Engineer shall maintain a complete and accurate log
of control and survey work as it progresses. On request of the Architect, submit
documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work.
1. Enter all survey notes and construction stakeout cut notes into bound, hardcover field
books.
2. All survey data developed by the Contractor in performing the work shall be available
throughout the construction period.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Surveyor or Engineer: Submit name and address of Surveyor or Professional Engineer to be
employed by the Contractor to Architect for approval before beginning work of this Section, if
requested by the Owner or Architect.
B. Completion Certificate: Upon completion of the work, submit to Architect a certificate signed
by the Surveyor or Engineer certifying that elevations and locations are in conformance or non-
conformance with Contract Documents. Refer to Section 01700, Contract Close-Out.
C. Final Completion Survey: Upon completion of the work, submit to the Owner a Final
Improvement Survey as specified below.
1.05 USE OF ARCHITECT'S AND ENGINEER'S ELECTRONIC FILES
A. General: Contractor and/or Surveyor may use the Architect's and Engineers' electronic CAD
files for site and building layout, upon written request.
B. Architect and Engineers will require a release form to be signed and returned prior to release
of any electronic files, waiving liability for any use the Contractor or Surveyor makes of the
01050 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
electronic files.
C. Architect and Engineers will require payment of a flat service fee plus a use fee for each sheet
of Drawings requested. Payment of fees are required prior to release of any electronic files.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Reference Points: The Owner shall set construction reference points itemized in paragraph
1.02. Immediately upon entering the project, Contractor shall locate and maintain benchmarks
and all other grades, lines, levels and dimensions. Report any errors or inconsistencies to the
Architect/Engineer before commencing work.
B. Basis for Layout: Surveyor shall reference the Architectural Site Plan or other Horizontal
Control Plan in the Drawings as the basis for the layout of the Project. Grading plans, utility
plans, or other site-related Drawings shall not be used for basic building layout, other than for
required coordination.
C. Permanent Benchmarks: Surveyor or Engineer shall establish a minimum of two (2) permanent
benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points.
1. Benchmarks shall be referenced U.S.G.S. datum based on elevations above sea level if
required by the Owner.
D. Coordination: Surveyor shall contact all jurisdictions and/or utility providers for field locates
and temporary markings of affected utility lines prior to beginning survey work.
E. Batter Boards and Levels: Engineer or Surveyor shall stake out the building and sitework and
provide rigidly set batter boards. Such batter boards shall continue in use free to all requiring
them, but the Contractor shall remain responsible for their maintenance and accuracy. From
permanent benchmarks the engineer or surveyor shall ascertain grades and levels to the
building as needed.
F. Preservation of Monuments and Stakes: Carefully preserve all monuments, benchmarks,
property markers, reference points and stakes. In case of the destruction of these, the
Contractor will be charged with expense of replacement and shall be responsible for any
mistake or loss of time that may be caused. Permanent monuments or benchmarks which must
be removed or disturbed shall be protected until properly referenced for relocation. Furnish
materials and assistance for proper replacement of such monuments or benchmarks.
G. Layout and Control: Surveyor or Engineer shall establish lines and levels, locate and layout by
instrumentation and similar means the stakes for finish grading. He shall set control stakes and
shall reset stakes as required during progress of the work.
H. Construction Staking: Contractor shall provide construction stakes for the following:
1. Double offset stakes on building slab corners for horizontal and vertical alignment.
2. Sanitary and storm sewer lines as follows: The first 100' from any junction shall be
stationed every 25'. From 100' on, stationing will be every 100'. Cut sheets shall be
provided. Sewer services shall be staked with convenient offsets.
3. Water lines shall be staked on centerline at all fittings and angle points and any other
points necessary for establishing the line. Water service will be staked with 5' offsets.
4. Any other stakes necessary for the correct alignment of building structures or
components.
3.02 INTERMEDIATE SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Intermediate Survey: Upon completion of formwork for foundation structures, but prior to
placement of cast-in-place concrete, Surveyor shall perform an intermediate survey to verify
building placement in relation to required setbacks and new or existing easements or rights-of-
way. Submit three (3) copies to the Owner.
01050 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1. Comply with any other requirements of the Owner's lender for this survey work.
3.03 CERTIFICATION SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Certification Survey: Upon completion of sitework, the Surveyor shall perform a certification
survey as may be required by the City of Fort Collins or other jurisdictions or utility providers,
including submittal of properly formatted drawings or other documentation to these
authorities. Submit three (3) copies to the Owner. Certification surveys may be required for,
but are not limited to:
1. Storm drainage.
2. Water line improvements.
3. Sanitary sewer line improvements.
3.04 FINAL COMPLETION SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Final Improvement Survey: Upon completion of the work, the surveyor or engineer shall
perform a final improvement survey of the as-constructed conditions, including but not limited
to, required reference points, above-ground structures and other improvements, below-ground
structures and utilities, and final topography. Submit three (3) copies to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
01060 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01060
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 APPROVAL AND RECOMMENDATION AGENCIES
A. The City of Fort Collins has jurisdiction for review and approval of the project, including but
not limited to, the following departments:
1. Planning and Zoning.
2. Building Inspection.
3. Engineering and Traffic Engineering.
4. Water/Wastewater Utility.
5. Stormwater Utility.
6. Electric Utility.
7. Natural Resources.
B. Other entities having jurisdiction of this project, include but are not limited to:
1. Poudre Fire Authority.
C. Codes which have been adopted by the City of Fort Collins applicable to the project include,
but may not be limited to:
1. International Building Code, 2009 Edition with local amendments.
2. International Fire Code, 2009 Edition.
3. International Existing Building Code, 2009 Edition.
4. International Energy Conservation Code, 2009 Edition with local amendments.
5. International Plumbing Code, 2009 Edition.
6. International Mechanical Code, 2009 Edition.
7. NFPA-1, Fire Code, Current Edition, where applicable.
8. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, Current Edition, where applicable.
9. National Electrical Code, 2011 Edition.
10. Fort Collins Non-Residential Energy Code.
11. ANSI A117.1, American National Standards Institute Specifications for Making Buildings
and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People, Current
Edition.
12. Americans with Disabilities Act, provisions for accessibility by physically handicapped
people, 1990.
13. Miscellaneous health and safety codes and standards applied by the State of Colorado
Department of Public Health and Environment.
14. Any other local, state or federal codes which are applicable.
15. In case of a conflict between referenced applicable codes, the one having the more
stringent requirements shall govern.
D. Related requirements or conditions specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01400, Quality Control: Quality control workmanship standards.
2. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Quality of materials and equipment to be
installed in the work.
1.02 SERVICES AND UTILITIES
A. Utility services are provided to the area of the project by the following jurisdictions:
1. Water: City of Fort Collins.
2. Sanitary Sewer: City of Fort Collins.
3. Stormwater Drainage: City of Fort Collins.
4. Natural Gas: N/A.
5. Telephone: N/A.
6. Electric: City of Fort Collins.
7. Fiber Optics: City of Fort Collins.
01060 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Specific on-site utility extensions and service lines are shown on the Drawings, except:
1. Electrical primary service to location(s) of the transformer(s).
C. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the work of these outside utility providers, as
well as the coordination of these utilities with those shown on the Drawings. Refer to Section
01040.
1.03 COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAWS
A. In addition to any applicable regulations referenced elsewhere, all Contractors shall strictly
adhere to all applicable federal and state laws, orders, and all applicable standards,
regulations, interpretations or guidelines issued pursuant thereto, including but not limited to:
1. National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, as amended, and the implementing
regulations of HUD and of the Council on Environmental Quality providing for
establishment of national policy, goals, and procedures for protecting, restoring and
enhancing environmental quality.
2. The Clean Air Act of 1970 as amended, requiring that federal assistance will not be
given and that license or permit will not be issued to any activity not conforming to the
State implementation plan for national primary and secondary ambient air quality
standards.
3. Federal Lead-Based Paint Renovation, Repair and Painting Program, requiring the
certification of contractors that perform renovation or repair work on structures built
before 1978 to follow specific work practices to prevent lead contamination. This law
applies where more than six (6) sq. ft. of interior painted surfaces, or twenty (20) sq.
ft. of exterior painted surfaces, are being disturbed in housing, child care facilities and
schools.
1.04 HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY
A. Construction shall be in substantial compliance with the requirements of the American National
Standards Institute Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable
by Physically Handicapped People, ANSI A117.1, Current Edition, and the Americans with
Disabilities Act, 1990.
B. Refer to Section 01010, Summary of Work, for extent of handicapped accessible and
handicapped adaptable construction.
C. Refer to specific Sections of the Specifications for specific requirements relating to each
section.
1.05 SAFETY OF LIFE, HEALTH AND PUBLIC WELFARE
A. Contractor shall have sole responsibility for compliance on the job site with all applicable
portions of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and compliance
with the Equal Employment Opportunity Act (EEO).
1. Contractor shall fully comply with OSHA requirements for maintaining Material Safety
Data Sheets (MSDS) on the site.
B. Protection of life, health and public welfare as it relates to construction of the project is the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Owner will not provide observation, inspection,
supervision or any comment on plans, procedures or actions employed at the project as they
relate to safety of life, health or public welfare. If conditions are imposed by the Owner which
interfere with or imply actions detrimental to safety, written notice shall be returned to the
Contractor for action prior to affecting any unsafe conditions.
C. The Architect shall not have control or charge of, and shall not be responsible for, construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures for safety precautions and programs in
connection with the work, for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, subcontractors or any
other persons performing any of the work or for the failure of any of them to carry out the
work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
D. The Architect shall have no responsibility for the discovery, presence, handling, removal or
disposal of or exposure of persons to hazardous materials in any form at the project site,
including but not limited to asbestos, asbestos products, lead-based paint, polychlorinated
01060 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
biphenyl (PCB) or other toxic substances. Refer also to Section 02080, Hazardous Material
Removal.
1.06 LICENSES
A. Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for meeting all contractor licensing requirements for the City of
Fort Collins, including testing and fees as applicable. Contractor shall acquire and maintain all
required licenses for the duration of the Project.
1.07 PERMITS AND FEES
A. General: Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions.
B. Owner shall be responsible for the following permits and fees required by the regulatory
agencies referenced above:
1. Plan review fees, including fees assessed by Poudre Fire Authority.
2. Building permit fees.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for all permits, fees and inspections required by the regulatory
agencies referenced above, including but not limited to:
1. Subcontractor fees.
2. Any other local or state permits or fees.
3. State of Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment: Demolition permit.
D. Tax Exempt Projects: The City of Fort Collins is a tax exempt entity, and therefore no sales or
use taxes should be included in the Bid.
E. Owner shall be responsible for the following permits, fees and inspections required by the
regulatory agencies referenced above, including:
1. Plan review fees.
2. Building permit fees.
3. Capital expansion fees, utility impact and plant investment fees, and other
development fees.
4. Utility tap and meter fees.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for applying for, and acquiring, all building permits,
inspections and any other permits required for the construction of this project.
1. The Drawings and Specifications shall be in the City of Fort Collins' review process
during the bidding phase of the project.
END OF SECTION
01200 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
90% Construction Documents
SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Owner and Architect shall schedule and administer Pre-Bid and Pre-Construction Conferences.
B. Contractor shall schedule and administer periodic O/A/C (Owner/Architect/Contractor) progress
meetings and specially called meetings throughout progress of the work.
1. Prepare agenda for meetings and conduct meetings.
2. Record the minutes, including significant proceedings and decisions.
3. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within five (5) days after each meeting to all
participants in the meeting and parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
4. Prepare and regularly update an "open items" list to document and track required
decisions and pending changes.
C. Contractor shall schedule and administer pre-installation conferences and other meetings with
subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturer's technical representatives throughout progress of the
work.
D. Representatives of contractors, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be
qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
E. Architect and Owner's representative will attend meetings to ascertain that work is expedited
consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules.
1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Owner and Architect shall schedule and administer the Pre-Construction Conference within five
(5) working days after the date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by the Owner.
C. Attendance:
1. Owner's principal representative.
2. Architect and his professional consultants, as necessary.
3. Contractor's project manager and superintendent.
4. Major subcontractors.
D. Agenda:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors.
b. Project construction schedules.
c. Schedule of Values.
d. Contractor's staging plan.
2. LEED Action Plan and Construction Waste Management Plan.
3. Critical work sequencing.
4. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
5. Project coordination.
a. Designation of responsible personnel.
6. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions.
b. Proposal requests.
c. Submittals, shop drawings and samples.
d. Change Orders.
e. Applications for Payment.
7. Distribution of Contract Documents.
8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents.
9. Use of premises:
a. Field office, work and storage areas.
b. Owner's use of site and grounds.
01200 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
90% Construction Documents
10. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids.
11. Temporary utilities.
12. Safety and first-aid procedures.
13. Security procedures and temporary site or building fencing and enclosures.
14. Periodic cleaning procedures.
15. Pending changes and substitutions by Change Order.
16. Installation of project sign.
1.03 O/A/C PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Contractor shall schedule and administer regular meetings as determined at the Pre-Construction
Conference and specially called meetings as required by progress of the work.
B. Location of the Meetings: As designated by Contractor and coordinated with the Owner's
principal representative, normally the Contractor's field office.
C. Attendance:
1. Contractor's project manager and on-site superintendent.
2. Owner's principal representative.
3. Architect and his professional consultants, as needed.
4. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda.
5. Others as appropriate.
D. Suggested Agenda:
1. Review of work progress since previous meeting.
2. Field observations, problems and conflicts.
3. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
4. Compliance with LEED Action Plan and Construction Waste Management Plan.
5. Revisions to the construction schedule.
6. Progress and schedule during succeeding work period.
7. Review submittal schedules and expedite as required.
8. Maintenance of quality standards.
9. Pending changes and substitutions, with review of the proposed changes for:
a. Effect on construction schedule and completion date.
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project.
10. Review of Contractor's application for progress/final payment.
11. Walk-through observation of the work in progress by the Owner's representative,
Architect and his consultants, as necessary, and General Contractor. Subcontractors will
only be involved in these walk-throughs as requested by the Owner or Architect.
1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Contractor shall schedule and administer pre-installation conferences and other meetings with
subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturer's technical representatives throughout progress of the
work.
B. Attendance:
1. Contractor's project manager and on-site superintendent.
2. Architect or his professional consultants, as needed.
3. Structural Engineer for architectural precast concrete and structural steel erection.
4. Subcontractors as appropriate.
5. Suppliers as appropriate.
6. Manufacturer's technical representatives, as appropriate.
C. Suggested Agenda: As determined by Contractor.
END OF SECTION
01310 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect and Owner estimated construction
progress schedules for the work with subschedules of related activities which are essential to
its progress.
B. Submit revised progress schedules periodically.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. General and Supplementary Conditions, and Conditions of the Contract: Liquidated
damages, if applicable.
2. Section 01027, Change Order Procedures: Requirements for documenting requests for
time extensions due to weather.
3. Section 01040, Coordination.
4. Section 01200, Project Meetings.
5. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
6. Section 01700, Contract Close-Out.
1.02 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Type: Schedules will be computer generated, using "critical path" software subject to approval
by the Owner and Architect.
1. Software shall indicate intermediate and final completion milestones.
2. Software shall indicate product data and shop drawing submittal dates, and indicate
required ordering dates for long lead-time items.
3. Software shall be capable of automatically adjusting critical path entries.
B. Prepare schedules in a continuous flow, both daily and weekly formats.
1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade, supplier or subcontractor.
2. Horizontal Time Scale: Identify the first workday of each week.
3. Minimum Size: 8-1/2" x 11".
C. Format of Listing: Table of Contents of this project manual as a minimum.
D. Format of Scheduling: Chronological order of the start of each item of work, using "critical
path" method.
E. Identification of Listings: By major Specification Section numbers as a minimum.
1. Listings shall be complete enough to include each item of work that is sizable enough
to affect either the start of, or completion of, other areas of the work.
1.03 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Indicate the complete sequence of construction by activity.
2. Indicate the dates for the beginning and completion of each major element of
construction.
3. Indicate critical intermediate and final completion milestone dates.
4. Indicate product data and shop drawing submittal dates, and required ordering dates
for long lead-time items.
5. Indicate substantial completion, punch list completion, final completion and contract
close-out dates.
B. Final Completion Schedule: Contractor shall update the latest progress schedule through
contract close-out.
C. Float Time: The Contractor and Owner hereby agree that "float" time designed into the
schedule is an asset to the Project, and not for the exclusive use or benefit of the Contractor
or the Owner, unless otherwise specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions.
01310 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
D. Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to be a usurpation of the Contractor's authority
and responsibility to plan and schedule the work as he sees fit, subject to all other
requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.04 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial construction schedule within fifteen (15) days after Award of Contract.
1. Architect/Engineer and Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten
(10) days after receipt, if modifications are required.
2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
B. Submit revised progress schedules with each Application for Payment indicating actual work
progress in comparison to scheduled progress.
C. Revised schedules shall be reviewed at each normally scheduled O/A/C progress meeting, as
set forth in Section 01200.
D. Submit final schedule with contract close-out documentation.
E. Claims for Weather-Related Contract Time Extensions: Refer to Section 01027 and General and
Supplementary Conditions.
F. Claims for Other Delays: Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions.
1.05 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULES
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1. Jobsite file.
2. Owner's representative(s).
3. Architect.
4. Other concerned parties.
B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to the Contractor in writing any problems anticipated by
the projections shown in the schedules.
END OF SECTION
01340 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall coordinate and submit shop drawings, product data, samples and other
submittals required by the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor shall construct and maintain mock-ups and sample panels required by the Contract
Documents.
C. Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings and submittals prior to transmittal to the
Architect and Owner.
D. Requirements and restrictions on resubmittals.
E. Requirements for paper and/or electronic submittals.
F. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Conditions of the Contract: Definitions and additional responsibilities of parties.
2. Section 01040, Coordination.
3. Section 01200, Project Meetings.
4. Section 01310, Construction Schedules.
5. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Controls: Submittal requirements.
6. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal: Submittal requirements.
7. Section 01720, Project Record Documents.
8. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings: Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner, with sufficient
detail and completeness to clearly illustrate all conditions of the specific installation.
1. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers
shown on Contract Drawings.
2. Shop drawings shall be returned unreviewed if, in the opinion of the Architect or
consultants, the drawings lack sufficient completeness or clarity to allow their review.
B. Sheet Size: All shop drawings shall be 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17" or 24" x 36", except as restricted
in paragraph 1.07 for electronic submittals.
C. Quantity and Format: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, provide four (4) reproducible
and three (3) prints or copies, including one (1) set for the Owner's records.
D. Cover Sheet: Each copy shall contain the Shop Drawing Identification Form, located at the end
of this Section.
E. Electronic Submittals: Refer to paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 below.
1.03 PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation:
1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
B. Demonstrate compliance with required LEED design and performance criteria.
C. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:
1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the
work.
2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the
work.
D. Quantity and Format: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, provide four (4) complete
sets, including one (1) set for the Owner's records.
01340 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
E. Electronic Submittals: Refer to paragraph 1.07 below.
1.04 SAMPLES
A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product with integral related parts and attachment
devices.
2. Full range of color, textures and pattern.
B. Contractor shall coordinate and submit all samples requiring finish, texture or color selection
by the Architect so that these materials may be reviewed by the Architect as a complete
package. The Architect reserves the right to withhold finish and color selections until all such
samples have been submitted.
C. Sample Panels: Construct and maintain mock-ups and sample panels as required by specific
Sections of these Specifications.
D. Refer to paragraph 1.13 below for requirements related to return of approved samples.
1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a log of shop drawing, product data and
sample submittals, indicating schedules for submission and review of individual products or
equipment.
B. Contractor shall coordinate and make submittals promptly, in accordance with the approved
submittal schedule. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall be responsible for delays in the
work caused by the Contractor's failure to make submittals in a timely manner, the
completeness and/or accuracy of such submittals, or failure to allow adequate time for review
of submittals by the Architect or his professional consultants.
C. Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings, product data and samples prior to
submission to Architect. Contractor shall determine and verify:
1. Quantities.
2. Field measurements and construction criteria.
3. Conformance with specified finishes and color selections.
4. Field construction criteria.
5. Catalog numbers and similar data.
6. Warranty coverages.
7. Conformance to requirements of Specifications.
8. Conformance to required LEED design and performance criteria.
9. Completeness of submittal and compliance with the requirements of this Section.
D. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall coordinate submittals between related items of work prior to purchasing or
fabricating.
E. Review of shop drawings and submittals by the Architect/Engineer is only for general
conformance with design intent of the project and general compliance with the information
given in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for meeting all requirements
of the Drawings and/or Specifications, whether noted in the Architect/Engineer review or not.
1. Contractor's review "stamp" language shall not waive or alter this responsibility.
F. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the
submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor must submit in
writing any requests for modifications to the Drawings and Specifications. Shop drawings
submitted to the Architect/Engineer for this review do not constitute "in writing" unless it is
noted that specific changes are being requested. Changes by means of shop drawings become
the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
G. Electronic Submittals: Refer to paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 below.
H. Begin no fabrication or work which requires submittals until return of submittals with
Architect/Engineer approval.
01340 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make submittals promptly, in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence as to
cause no delay in the work or in the work of any other Contractor.
B. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings: As specified in paragraph 1.02.C.
2. Product Data: As specified in paragraph 1.03.C.
3. Samples: Submit one sample or set of samples of each item requested.
4. Construction Waste Management Plan: As specified in Section 01714.
5. The Architect reserves the right to withhold review and approval of submittals until all
required copies have been furnished.
C. Submittals shall contain the following information, to be completed on the attached Shop
Drawing Identification Form:
1. Date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions.
2. Project title and number.
3. Names of:
a. Contractor.
b. Supplier or Subcontractor.
4. Field dimensions clearly identified as such.
5. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
6. Applicable standards such as UL, ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
7. Identification of any deviations from Contract Documents.
8. Certification signatures and Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review
of submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field construction
criteria and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of
the work and of the Contract Documents.
D. Submittals for design/build systems, as specified in these Specifications or indicated on the
Drawings, shall include the stamp and signature of the Professional Engineer registered in the
State of Colorado who prepared the design and construction documents.
1.07 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTALS
A. General: Contractor and/or Subcontractors may submit product data and shop drawings
electronically to the Architect, upon written request.
B. Electronic submittals shall conform to the same content, clarity, format, completeness and
other requirements as specified above for paper submittals, except as follows:
1. Quantity: One (1) electronic submittal.
2. Sheet Size for Submittals: 24" x 48" maximum.
3. Clarity: Architect/Engineer reserves the right to reject electronic submittals if they
are illegible when printed.
C. Submittals requiring color and/or finish selections will not be accepted electronically.
Separate color and/or finish samples or selection sheets shall be submitted separately from the
electronic product data submittal.
D. Contractor's Responsibility: Since scans of electronic shop drawings and product data
submittals will only be made in black and white, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility
for ensuring that Architect/Engineer modifications are accurately translated into the
fabrication and construction process.
1.08 USE OF ARCHITECT'S AND ENGINEER'S ELECTRONIC FILES
A. General: Contractor and/or Subcontractors may use the Architect's and Engineers' electronic
CAD files for preparation of shop drawing submittals, upon written request.
B. Architect and Engineers will require a release form to be signed and returned prior to release
of any electronic files, waiving liability for any use the Contractor or Subcontractor makes of
the electronic files.
C. Architect and Engineers will require payment of a flat service fee plus a use fee for each sheet
of Drawings requested. Payment of fees are required prior to release of any electronic files.
01340 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.09 ARCHITECT RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Upon receipt, Architect shall evaluate submittals for completeness, conformance to
requirements of the Specifications, and to verify that Contractor has reviewed and approved
the submittal. If the Architect determines that the submittal is incomplete or has not been
properly reviewed and approved by the Contractor, the submittal shall be returned to the
Contractor without further review. Also refer to paragraph 1.05.C.
B. Architect shall then distribute submittals to his professional consultants as applicable.
C. Architect and consultants shall review submittals in a timely manner, in accordance with the
requirements of General and Supplementary Conditions, but shall require a minimum of ten
(10) working days for review.
D. Architect's and Consultant's review shall be for general compliance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents. This review shall not include:
1. Verification of field measurements.
2. Verification of quantities.
3. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
E. Architect shall return submittals to the Contractor, with stamp indicating approval, rejection,
required revisions, or description of requirements for resubmittal, if applicable.
1. Architect shall not return more than two (2) copies of submittals to the Contractor.
F. Unless the Architect and/or Consulting Engineer has required that a submittal be resubmitted,
the Architect/Engineer shall review each product submittal or shop drawing only once. Also
refer to paragraph 1.11 below.
G. Architect shall retain one (1) copy of submittals for the Owner.
1.10 REQUIRED SHOP DRAWING, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLE SUBMISSIONS
A. Provide complete information for products specified in individual Sections of these
Specifications.
1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. General: If, after initial review by the Architect or Consulting Engineer, a submittal is required
to be resubmitted by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall make any corrections or
changes in the submittals required by the Architect/Engineer and resubmit until approved.
Resubmittals may be required for the following reasons:
1. Incomplete or unclear submittals, or submittals which have not first been reviewed and
approved by the Contractor.
2. Lack of required number of copies of product data or shop drawings.
3. Lack of Professional Engineer's stamp and signature where required for design/build
systems.
4. Extent of the revisions necessary in the submittal to meet the design intent and to be
properly reviewed.
5. Materials and/or fabrication details that do not meet the design or technical
requirements of the specifications.
6. All color and/or finish selections have not been submitted as a complete package.
B. Shop Drawing and Product Data: Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for
the initial submittal. Identify any revisions made.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.12 DISTRIBUTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall distribute reproductions of shop drawings and copies of product data which
carry the Architect/Engineer stamp of review to:
1. Job site file.
2. Record Documents file.
3. Subcontractors.
4. Supplier or fabricator.
01340 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Architect shall distribute returned copies of shop drawings and product data to:
1. Owner's representative.
2. Consultants, as applicable.
1.13 RETURN OF SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: If samples submitted for approval in compliance with paragraph 1.04 above are to be
returned, Contractor shall indicate this requirement with the sample submittal information.
B. Upon approval of such sample(s), Contractor shall be responsible for picking them up at the
Architect's office. If requested, the Architect shall arrange for shipping them back to the
supplier or manufacturer, upon receipt of shipping fees in advance or upon receipt of the
Contractor's shipping account number.
01340 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SHOP DRAWING IDENTIFICATION FORM
DATE:
PROJECT:
ARCHITECT: Aller•Lingle•Massey Architects P.C.
712 Whalers Way, Suite B-100
Fort Collins, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
CONTRACTOR: Name:
Address:
Phone:
SUPPLIER OR
SUBCONTRACTOR: Name:
Contact Person:
Address:
Phone:
PRODUCT(S):
SPEC. SECTION(S):
CERTIFICATION OF REVIEW: I (We) hereby certify that the product or material covered by this submittal has
been reviewed for compliance with the applicable Section(s) of these Specifications, as well as Section 01340,
and is in compliance with all specified requirements, including warranty coverages.
______________________________________ _____________________________________
Contractor Signature Supplier/Subcontractor Signature
*STAMP*
END OF SECTION
01370-1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Architect a Schedule of Values allocated to the
various portions of the work. Upon request of the Architect, support the values with data
which will substantiate their correctness.
B. Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for
Payment.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Conditions of the Contract.
2. Section 01026, Application for Payment.
1.02 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Schedule of Values shall be submitted to the Architect within fifteen (15) days of Award of
Contract.
B. Format: Contractor's standard forms or computer printouts. Identify schedule with:
1. Title of project and location.
2. Architect and project number.
3. Name and address of Contractor.
4. Contract designation.
5. Date of submission.
C. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in sufficient detail to
serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction.
1. List separately the costs associated with the materials and labor for each component
part of the work.
D. Basis: At a minimum, the Table of Contents of this Project Manual shall be used as the format
for listing component items. Contractor may include additional listings at their option.
1. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section of the
Specifications.
2. Contractor’s overhead and profit shall be listed as a separate line item.
3. Contractor's contingency, if required by the General or Supplementary Conditions, shall
be listed as a separate line item.
4. Mechanical and Electrical: Provide separate line items for rough-in and finish work for
all plumbing, mechanical and electrical work.
E. For each major line item, list subvalues of major products or operations under the item.
F. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum.
END OF SECTION
01400 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. General quality control of the materials, equipment and labor for the project.
B. Manufacturer's field services, support, and testing requirements.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements: Minimum Building Code standards and
applicable laws.
2. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment: Quality of materials and equipment to be
installed in the work.
3. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Materials shall be as specified in specific Sections of these Specifications. Also refer
to Section 01600.
B. Manufacturers: Where two or more units of the same class of fixture or equipment are
required, these shall be the products of a single manufacturer. However, the component parts
of the system need not be the products of the same manufacturer, unless otherwise specified.
C. Design Criteria:
1. Design equipment for operations at an elevation of 4,900 feet above mean sea level,
unless otherwise indicated in Division 15 and/or 16.
2. Coordinate details of the equipment with other related parts of the work, including
verification that all structures, piping, wiring and equipment components are
compatible.
3. Design equipment to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable sound
or vibration. Sounds or vibrations noticeable outside of room in which equipment is
installed, or annoying sounds or vibrations noticeable inside room, will be considered
objectionable. Correct conditions considered objectionable to Architect/Engineer by
means of approved vibration eliminators or by replacing equipment at Owner's option.
4. Nameplates: Provide a permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power-
operated equipment indicating the manufacturer, product name, model number, serial
number, speed, capacity, power characteristics, labels of tested compliances and
similar essential operating data. Locate nameplates in easily read locations.
D. Design underground piping systems, joints, couplings, valves, vaults and other appurtenances
to function under all conditions of load to be encountered on the site, including but not limited
to:
1. Soils conditions, including expansion and contraction.
2. Water table conditions.
1.03 QUALITY CONTROL AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS
A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and
workmanship to produce work of specified quality.
B. Comply with industry standards, except when more restrictive tolerances or specified
requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
C. Comply with applicable Building Codes, except when specified materials, equipment, systems,
tolerances or workmanship requirements indicate more rigid or restrictive standards.
1. Applicable codes are considered to be only minimum standards.
D. Contractor and Subcontractor Qualifications: Perform work by persons qualified to produce
workmanship of specified quality.
1. Subcontractors shall be certified by the manufacturer as an approved installer, when
specified in specific Sections.
01400 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Refer to Sections 01010 and 01041 for other qualification requirements.
E. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed for the appropriate loads
and sized to withstand stresses, vibration and racking.
1.04 CONTRACTOR'S ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGER
A. Designate an on-site party responsible for overseeing the Contractor's conformance to
environmental goals for the project and implementing procedures for environmental
protection.
1. Qualifications: Minimum three (3) years construction experience on projects of similar
size and scope, minimum three (3) years experience with environmental procedures
similar to those of this project, and familiarity with environmental regulations
applicable to construction operations.
2. Responsibilities shall include:
a. Compliance with applicable Federal, State, and local environmental
regulations, including maintaining required documentation.
b. Implementation of the Construction Waste Management Plan.
c. Implementation of the IAQ Management Plan.
d. Implementation of the Environmental Protection Plan.
e. Training for Contractor personnel in accordance with their position require-
ments.
f. Monitoring and documentation of environmental procedures.
3. Contractor's Environmental Training Program: Contractor shall provide environmental
training for workers performing work on the project site, including the following:
a. Overview of environmental issues related to the Project.
b. Review of site specific procedures and management plans:
1) Section 01015: Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management.
2) Section 01714: Construction Waste Management and Removal.
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When required by individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's printed instructions
in the quantity specified for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, startup, adjusting and
finishing.
B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions in full detail. Include each step in sequence. Should
instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer
before proceeding.
C. When required by individual Specification section, submit manufacturer's written maintenance
instructions for the Owner's use after occupancy.
1.06 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When required by individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's certificate, in
duplicate, that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.07 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in respective Specifications section, require supplier and manufacturer to
provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions, installation and workmanship, startup,
testing and balancing of equipment as applicable and to make appropriate recommendations.
B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect listing observations and
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
01410 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01410
TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Materials testing by an independent, approved testing laboratory including, but not limited to:
1. Concrete testing.
2. Compaction testing.
3. Asphalt paving testing.
4. Structural concrete unit masonry testing.
5. Mortar and masonry grout testing.
6. Structural steel testing.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
2. Section 02220, Excavation, Filling and Grading.
3. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
4. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
5. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
6. Section 04100, Mortar and Masonry Grout.
7. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry.
8. Division 15, Mechanical.
9. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 WORK BY SEPARATE CONTRACT
A. Owner shall provide any applicable project or building inspection services as required by
Chapter 17 of the International Building Code (IBC), current edition, by separate contract. The
Architect and Engineers will not provide these services. Refer to Section 01010, Summary of
Work, paragraph 1.06 Work by Others.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Geotechnical Investigation Report by Empire
Labs dated May 1981, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity
between said borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect or upon
request of the General Contractor. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn therefrom.
1.04 ACCESS TO SITE AND NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Testing laboratory will be allowed access to the site as required in the performance of their
work. Contractor shall provide testing laboratory at least 48 hours notice prior to time testing
is required prior to the next phase of work.
B. Asphalt Paving: Testing laboratory will be allowed access to the mixing plant for verification of
weights or proportions, character of materials used and determination of temperatures used in
the preparation of asphalt concrete mix.
1.05 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Open-Hole Inspection: Soils Engineer shall perform an open-hole inspection for each building
site within the project to verify the findings of the above-referenced Geotechnical
Investigation Report, prior to placement of any foundation structures, footings or piers.
1. Notify the Architect at the completion of excavation, prior to placement of any
formwork. Contractor shall be responsible for notification of the Soils Engineer.
01410 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Do not proceed with formwork or foundation construction until results have been
verified.
B. Concrete:
1. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by an independent testing
agent recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Owner.
2. Submit proposed concrete mix design to inspection and testing firm and
Architect/Engineer for review prior to commencement of work.
3. Test cylinders shall be taken and materials tested in accordance with requirements of
Section 03300.
4. If tests indicate that materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective
work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Compaction at Foundations, Building Slabs and Utility Trenches:
1. Inspection and testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an
independent testing agent recommended by the Contractor and approved by the
Owner.
2. Notify the Architect at completion of each phase of excavation prior to placement of
backfill of all foundations and utility trenches.
3. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing
laboratory to perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work
until results have been verified.
4. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove
defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Structural Concrete Unit Masonry Testing:
1. Inspection and testing of structural concrete unit masonry shall be performed by an
independent testing laboratory recommended by the Contractor and approved by the
Owner.
2. Test structural concrete unit masonry materials in accordance with the requirements of
Section 04220.
3. If tests indicate that materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective
work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner.
E. Mortar and Masonry Grout Testing:
1. Inspection and testing of mortar and masonry grout materials shall be performed by an
independent testing laboratory recommended by the Contractor and approved by the
Owner.
2. Submit proposed mortar and masonry grout mix designs to inspection and testing firm
and Architect/Engineer for review prior to commencement of work.
3. Test cylinders shall be taken and materials tested in accordance with requirements of
Section 04100 and other applicable Division 4 Masonry sections.
4. If tests indicate that materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective
work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Steel:
1. Inspection and testing of steel construction shall be performed by an independent
testing laboratory recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Structural
Engineer and Owner.
2. Testing agency shall perform visual inspections of steel erection and connections,
including but not limited to: general construction, field welds, bolts torque of high-
strength bolts, headed anchor studs and deck welds. Refer to Structural Drawings for
complete steel inspection table or schedule.
3. Where visual inspection cannot determine adequacy, additional testing will be
performed, including ultrasound and/or X-ray testing of welds.
4. If testing indicates that materials do not meet specified requirements, remove
defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner.
1.06 TESTING FEES
A. Fees for required materials testing will be paid for by the Owner as provided in the General
and Supplementary Conditions.
01410 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Fees for additional testing required due to improper performance of the work will be paid by
the Contractor.
1.07 TESTING RESULTS
A. Testing laboratory shall furnish copies of the required test results to the following:
1. Owner's representative.
2. Architect.
3. Structural Engineer for open-hole inspection, concrete, structural concrete unit
masonry and steel testing.
4. Contractor.
END OF SECTION
01510 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01510
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utility services required for
construction. Remove upon completion of work.
B. Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary sanitary facilities for use by
construction personnel. Remove upon completion of work.
C. Furnish, install and maintain temporary relocation of utility services to the existing facility
until Substantial Completion of the new building.
D. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01030, Alternates.
2. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
3. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
4. Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
5. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds.
6. Sections 01710, Cleaning and 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal:
Trash removal during construction.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with the current editions of all applicable building codes. Refer to Section 01060.
B. Comply with applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations.
C. Comply with applicable utility company requirements.
1.03 UTILITY FEES
A. Utility charges and expenses for temporary construction usage for the following shall be paid by
the Contractor, unless indicated otherwise:
1. Installation or connection charge for temporary electricity, water, natural gas, propane
or telephone service.
2. Temporary sanitary facilities.
3. Temporary local and long-distance telephone, including cellular.
4. Temporary heat and ventilation until start-up or use of the building's permanent
mechanical systems, including the cost of fuel used during construction.
5. Temporary heat within any winterization or weather protection enclosure(s), if
applicable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials for temporary construction uses may be new or used but must be adequate
in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions and must not violate
requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain, at his own expense, temporary electrical power service
to the site of construction, including temporary service feeds and panels.
1. Contractor shall utilize existing 120/240 V power at the site.
01510 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Install circuit and branch wiring with area distribution boxes located so that power and lighting
is available throughout the construction area by the use of construction-type power cords.
C. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not adequate for
work and for areas accessible to the public.
D. Security Lighting: Provide temporary security lighting for temporary, secure materials storage
area, as may be required by the Owner’s or Contractor’s Builder’s Risk insurance.
2.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain, at his own expense, all temporary heating, including all
fuel and required attendance necessary to protect and dry all work during cold weather.
B. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of installed materials, to
disperse humidity and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors or gases.
1. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units complete with controls. Do not store
materials near sources of intense heat or open flame.
C. Permanent building heating system may be used upon installation, testing and acceptance by
the jurisdiction having authority over this area of the work, as allowed in Division 15,
Mechanical.
1. The project shall be substantially enclosed and secured with the building's permanent
glazing systems and either construction or permanent hardware.
2.04 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Contractor shall install and maintain a job telephone. Contractor shall pay all costs for
installation, maintenance, removal and service charges for local calls. Toll charges shall be
paid by the party who places the call.
B. Telephones within the existing facility shall not be used by construction personnel during the
construction period.
2.05 TEMPORARY WATER
A. Contractor may utilize existing water service in the existing facility.
1. Contractor shall tap existing fire hydrant for construction water. Contractor shall be
responsible for acquiring any necessary permit and installing temporary meter as
required by the City of Fort Collins.
B. Contractor shall provide and maintain, at his own expense, all temporary construction water
service to the site of construction.
C. Install branch piping with taps located so that water is available throughout the construction
area by the use of 50' hoses. Protect piping and fittings against freezing.
2.07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities for use by construction personnel in compliance with
current laws and regulations.
1. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures in accordance with local governing
health agencies.
B. Toilet facilities within the existing facility may be used by construction personnel during the
construction period.
C. New toilet facilities within the facility may be used by construction personnel upon
installation, testing and acceptance by the jurisdiction having authority over this area of the
work. Contractor shall provide routine cleaning and servicing of these facilities until
occupancy by the Owner.
2.08 TEMPORARY RELOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES
A. General: Contractor shall provide and maintain the temporary relocation of existing
underground utilities to maintain service to the existing facility until Substantial Completion of
the new building.
01510 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
A. General: Install and maintain temporary utility services in accordance with requirements of
applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations, and applicable utility company
requirements.
B. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16,
Electrical.
C. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service.
D. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires.
3.02 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITY SERVICES
A. Interruption of the existing building's utility services shall be scheduled with and subject to the
approval of the Owner seven (7) business days prior to the interruption.
3.03 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when use is no longer required, or
upon completion of the work.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities.
C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary construction services to original or specified
condition.
1. Prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new lamps in all lighting
fixtures used during the construction period.
2. Prior to final inspection, clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters in all
mechanical equipment used during the construction period. Clean ducts, blowers and
coils if units were operated during the construction period without filters.
END OF SECTION
01520 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01520
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND AIDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall furnish and maintain required construction equipment.
B. Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain required construction aids and remove upon
completion of work.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01046, Access to Site.
2. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
3. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
4. Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
5. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Equipment and construction aids for temporary construction uses may be new, used
or rental equipment, suitable for the intended purpose, but must not violate requirements of
applicable codes and standards.
2.02 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
A. Provide construction equipment required by specific Sections of the Specifications or as
necessary to facilitate execution of the work, including but not limited to:
1. Miscellaneous hand tools.
2. Miscellaneous power tools.
3. Goggles, masks, hardhats and other personal safety equipment.
4. Cranes, forklifts and other material handling equipment.
5. Rolling or vibrating plate compactors.
6. Concrete batching and pumping trucks and equipment.
7. Asphalt paving machines and rollers.
8. Concrete paving machines and curb and gutter extrusion equipment.
9. Excavators, graders, tractor and end loaders, scrapers, backhoes, trenchers and other
heavy excavation and grading equipment.
10. Air compressors.
11. Portable electrical generators.
12. Mortar batching equipment.
13. Concrete slab floats and joint saws.
14. Drywall texturing equipment.
15. Paint spraying equipment.
16. Prefinished metal roofing forming and seaming equipment.
17. Other equipment as required.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids and temporary equipment required by personnel to facilitate
execution of the work. Refer to respective Sections of the Specifications for the particular
requirements of each trade, including but not limited to:
1. Scaffolding, staging, ladders and platforms.
2. Stairs, ramps, runways and guardrails.
01520 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3. Hoists, platform lifts and chutes.
4. Concrete curing and thermal protection blankets.
5. Drop cloths and other protective materials.
6. Portable space heaters.
7. Other facilities as required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Consult with Architect, review site conditions and other factors which affect construction
procedures and construction aids, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may
be affected by execution of the work.
B. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Divisions 2 through 16.
C. Relocate construction aids as required by progress of construction, by storage or work
requirements and to accommodate legitimate requirements of other subcontractors employed
at the site.
3.02 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials, equipment and services:
1. When construction needs can be met by use of the permanent construction; or
2. At completion of the project.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or by use of temporary facilities.
1. Remove foundations and underground installations for construction aids.
2. Grade areas of site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and
slopes and clean the area.
END OF SECTION
01530 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01530
BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain temporary construction barriers and enclosures.
B. Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain temporary site security fencing and gates.
C. Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain temporary safety barricade fencing.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01030, Alternates.
2. Section 01046, Access to Site.
3. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
4. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
5. Section 01520, Construction Equipment and Aids.
6. Section 01560, Temporary Controls: Dust partitions.
7. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds.
8. Section 02100, Site Preparation.
9. Section 02950, Trees, Plants and Ground Covers: Pruning.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide and maintain for the duration of construction all scaffolds, tarpaulins,
canopies, warning signs, steps, platforms, bridges, and other temporary construction necessary
for proper completion of the work, in compliance with applicable safety and other regulations.
B. Safety Barricade Fencing: Refer to paragraph 2.08 below.
2.02 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Prior to commencing site work, erect and maintain protective fencing around existing trees and
vegetation to remain as identified on the Drawings or as indicated by the Architect.
1. Approved Materials: Expanded plastic or chain link fencing.
B. Individual trees shall have protective fencing erected beyond drip line to the satisfaction of the
Architect and Owner.
C. Groups of trees and other vegetation shall have protective fencing erected around the entire
group to the satisfaction of the Architect.
D. Areas within protective fencing shall remain undisturbed and shall not be used for any purpose.
E. Any trees damaged or scarred during construction shall be repaired immediately by an
approved tree surgeon. Where separations expose or damage the root system of trees
designated to remain, remedial measures shall be taken immediately at the direction of the
Owner to ensure the health of the trees. Trees designated to remain but damaged beyond
repair or which subsequently die shall be replaced with a similar size and species chosen by the
Owner at the sole expense of the Contractor.
F. Refer to Section 02950, Trees, Plants and Ground Covers, for pruning of existing trees.
2.03 TEMPORARY SITE FENCING
A. Prior to commencing work, Contractor shall erect and maintain construction fencing to enclose
an area for ground level construction activity, storage and waste removal, as approved by the
Owner.
1. Fencing Materials: Panelized, chain-link fencing with crossed X-type post supports,
minimum 6'-0" high.
01530 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Refer to the approved staging plan for approximate limits of site area to be fenced for
construction activities and storage.
B. Provide vehicular and pedestrian access gates, with locks, as appropriate for construction
access.
1. Furnish Owner's principal representative with keys to the lock of the primary access
gate.
C. Do not attach temporary fencing to any existing permanent construction, including buildings,
trees, retaining walls, walks or pavements.
D. Promptly remove temporary fencing materials upon completion of sitework, rough grading and
asphalt paving and restore area to original condition. Contractor shall repair or replace any
existing materials or equipment damaged as a part of this work at no cost to the Owner.
1. Fencing shall remain in place until building is secured.
2. Fencing shall be removed prior to finish grading, installation of underground sprinkler
system and landscaping.
2.04 COLD-WEATHER CONSTRUCTION ENCLOSURES
A. Construct temporary construction enclosures as required for cold-weather concrete, masonry,
stucco and other exterior finish trades requiring temperature-controlled environments.
1. Frame enclosures of metal or wood, adequately sized and braced to resist anticipated
wind and snow loads and to pose no threat of safety to workmen or the public.
2. Cover enclosure structure with minimum 6 mil translucent poly or other material
allowing adequate light penetration to work areas.
B. Promptly remove temporary construction enclosures upon completion of the work requiring
temperature controls or when weather conditions allow.
C. Refer to Section 01030, Alternates, for provision of temporary construction enclosures. Work of
this paragraph shall be authorized by the Owner prior to construction of cold-weather
enclosures.
END OF SECTION
01540 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01540
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, install and maintain erosion and sedimentation control materials and procedures.
Remove upon completion of work.
B. Design an erosion and sediment control plan in accordance with specified standards. Monitor
compliance as required by applicable standards.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
2. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Recycling.
4. Section 02100, Site Preparation.
5. Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
6. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting.
1.02 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN
A. Erosion and Sediment Control Plan: Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall submit a
draft Erosion and Sediment Control (E&SC) plan to the Architect and Owner for review as
submitted and approved by the City of Fort Collins. The E&SC plan shall contain the following
required information:
1. Name of Contractor's personnel responsible for managing the E&SC plan.
2. Analysis of the erosion and sediment controls needed for the Project, including extent
of controls, appropriate methods and construction phasing or sequencing of work.
B. E&SC plan shall be designed in conformance with the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) 2003 Construction General Permit, Storm Water Management for Construction Activities,
or local erosion and sedimentation control standards and codes, whichever is more stringent.
The plan shall meet the following objectives:
1. Prevent loss of soil during construction by stormwater runoff and/or wind erosion,
including protecting topsoil by stockpiling for reuse.
2. Prevent sedimentation of storm sewer or receiving streams.
3. Prevent polluting the air with dust and particulate matter.
C. E&SC plan should include the following information:
1. Statement of erosion control and stormwater control objectives.
2. Comparison of post-development stormwater runoff conditions with pre-development
conditions.
3. Description of all temporary and permanent erosion control and stormwater control
measures implemented on the project site.
4. Description of the type and frequency of maintenance activities required for the
chosen erosion control methods.
D. Contractor shall submit copies of the E&SC plan for review by the Architect and Owner's
Representative. Allow for at least ten (10) working days for review. Contractor shall make
requested revisions and complete the approved E&SC plan.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES
A. EPA Document 2003 Construction General Permit describes two types of measures that can be
used to control sedimentation and erosion:
1. Stabilization measures include temporary seeding, permanent seeding and mulching.
All of these measures are intended to stabilize the soil to prevent erosion.
2. Structural control measures are implemented to retain sediment after erosion has
occurred. Structural control measures include earth dikes, silt fencing, sediment traps
01540 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
and sediment basins.
3. The application of these measures depends on the conditions at the specific site. If
local provisions are substantially similar, they can be substituted for this standard if it
is demonstrated that local provisions meet or exceed the EPA best management
practices.
B. Definitions:
1. Erosion is a combination of processes in which materials of the earth's surface are
loosened, dissolved or worn away, and transported from one place to another by
natural agents.
2. Sedimentation is the addition of soils to water bodies by natural and human-related
activities. Sedimentation decreases water quality and accelerates the aging process of
lakes, rivers and streams.
1.04 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL IMPLEMENTATION
A. Distribution: Contractor shall distribute copies of the approved E&SC plan to the
Superintendent, each affected Subcontractor, the Architect, the Civil Engineer and the Owner.
One copy shall be posted at the jobsite at all times.
B. Instruction: Contractor shall provide onsite instruction of appropriate erosion and sediment
control measures to be implemented and maintained at appropriate stages of the work.
C. Erosion and Sediment Control Plan Compliance: Contractor shall implement, maintain and
monitor compliance with the approved E&SC plan.
1. Protect areas prone to erosion from construction activities and implement a soil
stabilization plan in susceptible areas.
D. Conditions in the field may warrant erosion control measures in addition to what is specified
herein or shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall implement whatever measures are
determined necessary, as directed by the City of Fort Collins.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Erosion and Sediment Control Materials: Refer to specific Division 2 Sections of these
Specifications for silt fence and other required materials.
B. Straw Bales: Standard 36" x 24" x 18" straw bales.
C. Wattles: 8" diameter machine-produced tube filled with compacted rice straw in seamless
flexible netting material, creating a densely filled fiber log.
D. Riprap: Rock used for riprap shall be hard, durable, angular in shape and free from cracks,
overburden, shale and organic matter. Thin, slab type stones, rounded stones and flaking rock
shall not be used. Removed concrete may not be used for riprap.
1. Rock used for riprap shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.50.
2. The d50 for the riprap shall be equal to 9". The maximum stone size shall not be larger
than the thickness of a riprap layer. Neither breadth nor thickness of a single stone
shall be less than 1/3 of its length.
E. Bedding material used shall be equivalent to Colorado Division of Highways Class A filter
material (Section 703.09).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. No earth-disturbing activity outside the limits designated on the Drawings is permitted.
B. All required perimeter silt and construction fencing shall be installed prior to any land
disturbing activity (stockpiling, stripping, grading, etc.). All other required erosion control
measures shall be installed at the appropriate time in the construction sequence as indicated in
the approved E&SC plan, construction drawings and erosion control report.
01540 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
C. At all times during construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for preventing and
controlling onsite erosion including keeping the property sufficiently watered so as to minimize
windblown sediment. The Contractor shall also be responsible for installing and maintaining all
erosion control and mitigation facilities.
D. Pre-disturbance vegetation shall be protected and retained wherever possible. Removal or
disturbance of existing vegetation shall be limited to the areas required for immediate
construction operations, and for the shortest practical period of time.
E. Verify required locations of erosion and sedimentation controls with the E&SC plan and the
Owner's principal representative before proceeding.
3.02 EXECUTION
A. All soils exposed during land disturbing activity (stripping, grading, utility installations,
stockpiling, filling, etc.) shall be kept in a roughened condition by ripping or disking along land
contours until mulch, vegetation or other permanent erosion control best management
practices are installed. No soils in areas outside the project street rights-of-way shall remain
exposed by land disturbing activity for more than 30 days before required temporary or
permanent erosion control (e.g. seed/mulch, landscaping, etc.) is installed, unless otherwise
approved by the City of Fort Collins.
B. In order to minimize erosion potential, all temporary (structural) erosion control measures
shall:
1. Be inspected at a minimum of once every two (2) weeks and after each significant
storm event and repaired or reconstructed as necessary in order to ensure the
continued performance of their intended function.
2. Remain in place until such time as all the surrounding disturbed areas are sufficiently
stabilized as determined by the Owner.
3. Be removed after the site has been sufficiently stabilized as determined by the Owner.
C. No soil stockpile shall exceed 10' in height. All soil stockpiles shall be protected from sediment
transport by surface roughening, watering and perimeter silt fencing. Any soil stockpile
remaining after 30 days shall be seeded and mulched.
D. Silt Fence: Set stakes, construct 4" wide x 4" deep trench upslope of stakes, install fabric to
bottom of trench, backfill and compact excavated trench. Refer to the Drawings for
appropriate details.
E. Straw Bale Sediment Barrier: Straw bale sediment barriers will be installed after the initial
grading of the site (in swales) and after the installation of storm pipes and inlets. Excavate 4"
deep trench for the width of the inlet. Install straw bales in trench with ends tightly abutted.
Stake each bale into the ground with two (2) wooden stakes. Refer to the Drawings for
appropriate details.
F. Wattle Sediment Barrier: Wattle sediment barriers will be installed after the initial grading of
the site (in swales) and after the installation of storm pipes and inlets. Install wattles with
ends tightly abutted. Stake each wattle into the ground with two (2) wooden stakes. Refer to
the Drawings for appropriate details.
G. Riprap: Riprap shall be installed after the initial grading of the site (in swales) and after the
installation of storm pipes and inlets. Place 6" of bedding material underneath a minimum of
16" of Type L riprap (d50 = 9"). Cover riprap bed with 6" of soil cover consistent with the
surrounding finished grade. Refer to the Drawings for appropriate details.
3.03 SITE CLEANING AND EXCESS MATERIAL DISPOSAL
A. City of Fort Collins ordinances and Colorado Discharge Permit System (CDPS) requirements
make it unlawful to discharge or allow the discharge of any pollutant or contaminated water
from construction sites. Pollutants include, but are not limited to, discarded building
materials, concrete truck washout, chemicals, oil and gas products, litter and sanitary waste.
The Contractor shall at all times take whatever measures are necessary to assure the proper
containment and disposal of pollutants on the site in accordance with any and all applicable
local, state and federal regulations.
B. A designated area shall be provided onsite for concrete truck chute washout. The area shall be
constructed so as to contain washout material and located at least 50' away from any waterway
01540 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
during construction. Upon completion of construction activities, the concrete washout
material will be removed and properly disposed of prior to the area being restored.
C. The stormwater volume capacity of detention ponds or other stormwater management
infrastructure will be restored and storm sewer inlets, catch basins and/or lines shall be
cleaned upon completion of the project, before turning the maintenance over to the Owner.
D. When temporary erosion control measures are removed, the Contractor shall be responsible for
the cleanup and removal of all sediment and debris from all drainage infrastructure and other
public facilities.
E. The Contractor shall immediately clean up any construction materials inadvertently deposited
on existing streets, sidewalks or other public rights-of-way, and make sure streets and
walkways are cleaned at the end of each working day.
F. All retained sediments, particularly those on paved roadway surfaces, shall be removed and
disposed of in a manner and location so as not to cause their release into any natural
waterways, in accordance with local, state or federal regulations.
END OF SECTION
01560 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01560
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary facilities required for dust and
pollution control.
B. Contractor shall implement and maintain temporary controls required for noise and
construction work hours limitations.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01010, Summary of Work: Special site restrictions.
2. Section 01040, Coordination.
3. Section 01046, Access to Site.
4. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
5. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures: Cold-weather construction enclosures.
6. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials for temporary controls may be new or used, but must be adequate in
capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions and must not violate
requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.02 DUST CONTROL
A. Furnish and maintain such facilities or procedures as may be necessary to prevent air-borne
dust generated by the construction activities of this project from affecting either the Owner's
use of this site or neighboring properties. Implementation of such requirements will be at the
sole discretion of the Owner or the City of Fort Collins.
2.03 ENVIRONMENTALLY-SENSITIVE AREAS CONTROL
A. Furnish and maintain such facilities as might be necessary to prevent disturbance of, or damage
to, environmentally-sensitive areas, whether on the site of the project or offsite where such
areas may be potentially affected by the construction of this project. Such areas may include:
1. Jurisdictional wetlands as established by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.
B. Comply with any restrictions placed upon the approval of this project by the City of Fort
Collins.
C. Comply with all applicable federal, state or local restrictions or requirements.
2.04 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent spilling or littering of water-polluting
substances. Do not allow any foreign materials to be dumped into any portion of the sanitary
sewer or storm drainage collection system or into any water runoff collection basin. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, equipment and materials necessary to remedy any
such pollution as deemed appropriate by governing agencies with such jurisdiction.
B. No burning of debris or any other air-polluting methods or equipment will be allowed. All
motorized equipment shall be adjusted to minimize exhaust pollution.
C. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Refer to Section 01540.
01560 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Construction Work Hours: Construction activity will be limited to 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
Monday through Saturday during the construction period, except as limited in paragraphs
3.01.B. and 3.02. Sunday or holiday construction will not be allowed.
B. Specific activities that may limit the Contractor's working hours, if applicable, shall be
determined at the Pre-Construction Conference.
3.02 NOISE CONTROL
A. Construction activities that generate noise in excess of 85 db shall be limited to hours as
established at the Pre-Construction Conference.
1. Prohibited after 5:00 p.m. every weekday.
2. Prohibited on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays.
END OF SECTION
01590 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01590
FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary construction offices and secured
storage facilities.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01046, Access to Site.
2. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal: Separation facilities for
handling, recycling, salvage, reuse and return of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STORAGE SHEDS
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain secured, weathertight storage sheds or enclosures for
tools, materials and equipment requiring such conditions, with adequate heat and ventilation.
Provide space for organized storage, and access and artificial lighting for inspection of stored
materials.
1. Structures shall be provided and maintained in good condition, as determined by the
Owner's representative.
2. Signage and other advertising allowed on the structure shall be as determined at the
Pre-Construction Conference.
B. Temporary Site Fencing: Refer to Section 01530.
C. Security Lighting: Provide temporary security lighting for temporary, secure materials storage
area, as may be required by the Owner's or Contractor's Builder's Risk insurance. Refer to
Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
2.03 SEPARATION FACILITIES
A. Contractor shall provide and secure a specific area to facilitate separations of materials for
recycling, salvage, reuse and return, as specified in Section 01714. Recycling and waste bin
areas are to be kept neat and clean, and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of
materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Completely remove temporary facilities when use is no longer required, or upon completion of
the work.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities.
C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary construction services to original or specified
condition.
END OF SECTION
01600 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Material and equipment incorporated into the work shall conform to applicable standards and
manufacturer’s specifications, requirements and applicable recommendations.
1. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in
writing by the Architect/Engineer.
2. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and
shop practices.
b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages to be
interchangeable.
c. Two (2) or more items of the same kind shall be identical by the same
manufacturer.
d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered
to, unless variations are specifically approved in writing.
3. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is
designed or specified.
B. Provide specified maintenance materials, equipment and tools to the Owner at the completion
of the project.
C. Provide equipment or systems start-up, commissioning, field testing and operational testing, as
specified in individual Sections.
D. Requirements for substitutions and project options.
E. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Conditions of the Contract.
2. Section 01010, Summary of the Work.
3. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
4. Section 01040, Coordination.
5. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
6. Section 01400, Quality Control.
7. Section 01710, Cleaning.
8. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal: Construction waste
diversion requirements.
9. Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data.
10. Section 01810, Commissioning.
11. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's
printed instructions, contractor shall obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties
involved in the installation, including two (2) copies to the Architect.
1. Maintain one (1) set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and
until completion.
B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such
instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's
instructions, consult with Architect for further instructions. Do not proceed with work
without clear instructions.
C. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory
step or installation procedure, unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract
Documents.
01600 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid
conflict with work and conditions at the site.
1. Deliver products in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original containers or
packaging with identifying labels intact and legible.
2. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to assure that materials and equipment
are in compliance with approved submittals, required quantities have been provided
and that products are properly protected and undamaged.
B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage
to products or packaging.
C. Recycle shipping cartons, pallets and other packaging materials as required to meet project
goal for construction waste diversion. Refer to Sections 01015 and 01714.
1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Preparation for Shipment:
1. Prepare in a manner to facilitate unloading and handling.
2. Provide skids, boxes, crates or other effective shipping devices to protect materials,
fixtures or equipment against damage from rough handling, moisture, dust, excessive
heat or cold.
3. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration and other damage.
4. Apply grease packing or lubricating oil to all bearing and similar items.
5. Tag or mark each item as identified in the delivery schedule or on the shop drawings.
Package or bundle items consisting of multiple similar pieces. Tag or mark the package
or bundle.
6. Include complete packing lists or bills of material with each shipment.
7. Do not ship equipment requiring cranes or special equipment for unloading or handling
without notice or until Contractor is prepared to receive and care for it properly.
8. Protect electrical equipment, controls and insulation from moisture or water damage.
B. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and
legible.
1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.
2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Exterior Storage:
1. Store fabricated products above the ground on blocking or skids. Prevent soiling or
staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet
coverings. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.
2. Store wood and wood products above the ground on blocking or skids, and cover to
protect from weather exposure.
D. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections
of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions and free
from damage or deterioration.
E. Protection after Installation:
1. Protect materials, fixtures and equipment with original protective wrappings until
Substantial Completion of the project, as specified in individual Sections, to include
but not be limited to:
a. Countertops.
b. Toilet and bath fixtures and faucets.
c. Finish hardware items.
2. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage
from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed.
01600 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products List:
1. Within thirty (30) days after Award of Contract, submit to Architect a complete list of
major products proposed to be used with the name of the manufacturer and the
installing Subcontractor.
B. Contractor's Options:
1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that
standard.
2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of
the products or manufacturers named which complies with the specifications.
3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and "or
equal", Contractor shall submit a request for substitutions of any product or
manufacturer not specifically named. When the phrase "equal approved prior to
bidding" is used, consideration of equals will not be made after Bid Opening, except as
allowed in paragraph 1.05.D. below.
4. Naming approved products, models, systems or manufacturers does not relieve the
Contractor from meeting all specification requirements.
5. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no
option. For purposes of this project, these include, but may not be limited to:
a. Steel overhead coiling doors specified in Section 08330.
b. Automatic entrance doors, specified in Section 08460.
c. Finish hardware specified in Section 08700.
d. Electric hand dryers specified in Section 10800.
e. Residential appliances specified in Section 11452.
f. Lecterns specified in Section 12621.
g. Stainless steel penal plumbing fixtures specified in Division 15.
h. Electric unit heaters specified in Division 15.
i. Rooftop HVAC equipment, specified in Division 15.
j. HVAC and/or lighting controls, specified in Divisions 15 and 16.
k. Light fixtures and motion switches specified in Division 16.
6. Manufacturer's material or equipment listed in Schedules, Specifications or on the
Drawings are types to be provided for establishment of size, capacity, grade and
quality. If other acceptable manufacturers are used, cost of any change in construc-
tion required by their use shall be borne by the Contractor.
C. Substitutions during Bidding:
1. For the period up to ten (10) working days before the Bid Date, Architect/ Engineer will
consider written requests from Contractors for substitution of products.
2. Submit a separate request for each product supported with complete data with
drawings and samples as appropriate, including:
a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that specified.
b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the substitution.
c. Effect on the construction schedule.
d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product specified.
e. Any required license fees or royalties.
f. Availability of maintenance service and source of replacement materials.
3. Architect and Owner's representative shall judge the acceptability of the proposed
substitution and respond to the Contractor in writing by addenda, provided the request
for substitution has been made in accordance with the requirements listed above.
Requests made after this timeline will not be responded to by addenda; any use of
these products will be at the sole risk of the Contractor.
4. Requests for substitutions received later than the deadline stipulated above will not be
considered.
D. Substitutions after Contract Award: Substitutions after contract award will only be allowed
where the specified products are no longer available, or where lead times in fabrication and
delivery will affect the construction schedule, unless otherwise allowed in the General and
Supplementary Conditions.
01600 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1. Submit a separate request for each product supported with complete data with
drawings and samples as appropriate, including:
a. Written documentation from the subcontractor or supplier that all allowable,
approved manufacturers of a specific product are no longer available, or that
the use of such products will adversely affect the construction schedule. Also
refer to subparagraph 1.05.E. below.
b. All other data specified for substitution requests in paragraph 1.05.C. above.
c. Additional cost of a specified material or the proposed substitution shall not be
criteria for reviewing a substitution after contract award.
2. Failure by the Contractor to submit product data and shop drawings for approval, or
order materials or equipment in a timely manner will not be grounds for approving a
substitution request under this paragraph.
3. Contractor shall use any approved equal material or equipment at no additional cost to
the Owner if the material or equipment used in his Bid is unavailable or causes undue
delay in fabrication or delivery, as approved by the Architect and Owner.
E. Contractor's Representation: A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that the
Contractor:
1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in
all respects to that specified.
2. Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product
specified.
3. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the work and make
such other changes as may be required to make the work complete in all respects.
4. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may subsequently
become apparent.
5. Has investigated the requested substitution and determined that it will not adversely
affect any applicable LEED credits, or the overall project compliance with the LEED
certification requirement specified in Section 01015.
F. Architect and Owner will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness and
notify Contractor in writing of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution.
1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish to the Owner at the completion of the work all maintenance materials, equipment and
tools specified in respective Sections of these Specifications, including but not limited to:
1. Exterior Portland cement stucco system specified in Section 07245.
2. Solid vinyl siding and prefinished trims specified in Section 07463.
3. Wood siding and trims specified in Section 07466.
4. Ceramic tile specified in Section 09310.
5. Porcelain tile specified in Section 09320.
6. Brick Paver Tile specified in Section 09340.
7. Acoustical ceilings specified in Section 09510.
8. Resilient flooring specified in Section 09650.
9. Carpeting specified in Section 09680.
10. Modular carpet tile specified in Section 09690.
11. Paints and stains specified in Sections 09900 and 09930.
12. Vinyl wall coverings specified in Section 09952.
B. Materials specified for the Owner's maintenance stock shall not be used by the Contractor for
replacement of defective or damaged materials during the course of construction or to remedy
any defect in workmanship caused by the Contractor's own forces or his subcontractors.
Maintenance materials may be used, with the written permission of the Owner, to replace
materials damaged during construction as a result of vandalism or natural causes.
C. Contractor shall certify in writing that all specified maintenance materials have been furnished
and turned over to the Owner's representative or delivered to the location on the site directed
by the Owner.
01600 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials shall be as specified in specific Sections of these Specifications. Provide
materials of commercial quality suitable for the anticipated service conditions.
1. Naming approved products, models, systems or manufacturers shall not relieve the
Contractor from meeting all specification requirements.
B. All materials and equipment to be installed in the permanent construction shall be new, unless
otherwise permitted.
C. Unless required otherwise, use components of standard sizes to assure future availability and
permit field installation of repair parts. Make like parts of duplicate units interchangeable.
2.02 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
A. Workmanship and Materials: Design, fabricate and assemble equipment in accordance with the
best engineering and shop practice.
B. Lubrication:
1. Include lubrication systems which do not waste lubricants, require attention during
startup or shutdown or more frequently than weekly during normal operation.
2. Furnish sufficient lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer
to fill lubricant reservoirs and replace consumption during startup, testing and
operation prior to the Owner's acceptance of the equipment.
C. Drive Units: Refer to Division 15, Mechanical, and/or Division 16, Electrical.
D. Anchor Bolts:
1. Furnish with each piece of equipment required to be anchored.
2. Minimum Diameter: 3/4", or as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Minimum Length: Provide for required embedment in structural concrete and extend
through concrete base, 1-1/2" of grout, base plate and nuts. Concrete base will be 4"
thick, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Include two (2) nuts with each bolt.
5. Deliver anchor bolts with templates or setting drawings in time for installation when
structural concrete is placed.
E. Equipment Bases:
1. Include a cast iron or welded base plate with each pump, compressor and similar
equipment installed on concrete base, if applicable.
2. Design to support both the driven unit and its drive assembly on a single base plate.
3. Support all equipment to be set on floor with 4" minimum concrete base.
4. Include grout holes and provisions for anchor bolts.
5. Include raised lip all around and a threaded drain connection with base plates for
pumps.
F. Special Tools and Accessories:
1. Furnish all special tools, instruments and accessories required for proper maintenance.
2. Furnish such special devices as are required for proper lifting and handling.
G. Shop Painting: Refer to Section 09900, Painting.
1. Protect iron and steel surfaces with paint or other protective coating applied in the
shop.
2. Use coating good for anticipated useful life of equipment on surfaces inaccessible after
assembly.
3. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, clean and filled to obtain uniform base for paint.
4. Apply one (1) or more shop coats of a primer capable of protecting surfaces to receive
finish paint coats after installation.
5. Apply finish coats in the shop with a high-grade oil-resistant enamel on electric motors,
speed reducers, starters and other self-contained or enclosed components.
6. Do not paint machined, polished or non-ferrous surfaces. Coat such surfaces with
rust-preventive compound, Houghton Rust Veto 334, Rust-Oleum R-9 or equal.
01600 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment with or under the guidance of qualified personnel having the knowledge and
experience necessary for proper results.
B. Arrange work to facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement of equipment. Locate services
requiring maintenance on valves and similar units in front of services requiring less
maintenance. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference
with other work.
C. Locate operating and control equipment, dampers, valves, traps, clean-outs, motors,
controllers, switchgears, drain points, maintenance items and devices for easy access. Install
access panels where units are concealed by finished and similar work.
D. Provide required clearances in front of, and around, equipment as necessary for access and
ventilation. Comply with all applicable codes and safety regulations.
3.02 PLACING EQUIPMENT IN OPERATION
A. Before starting up each system:
1. Check each piece of equipment for proper drive rotation, belt tension and any other
condition which may cause damage to equipment or endanger personnel.
2. Clean, blow-out or flush lubricating oil, water systems and other pipelines.
3. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Test lubrication system safety interlocks and system performance.
5. Perform final alignment checks under observation of the Owner's principal
representative and, where required, manufacturer's field representative.
6. Demonstrate that no abnormal stresses are transmitted to equipment from piping,
ducts or other attachments.
7. Check anchor bolt tensions, grout and shims. Use calibrated torque wrenches for
tightening anchor bolts. Do not overstress bolts.
B. Place equipment into successful operation in accordance with the written instructions of the
manufacturer or the instruction of the manufacturer's field representative, including required
adjustment, tests and operation checks.
3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Tests may be required, whether or not specifically called for, to determine if equipment will
perform as specified or guaranteed. Final acceptance of equipment, or Substantial Completion
of that part of the work, is contingent upon acceptable test results.
B. Do not conduct tests on equipment for which manufacturer's field service is specified, unless
manufacturer's field representative is present and declares the equipment ready for test.
C. Conduct tests as set forth in the Specifications, unless another manner of testing is approved.
D. Equipment or systems that fail to satisfy the performance requirements shall be modified or
replaced at Architect/Engineer's option. If modifications are allowed, make modifications
necessary to produce an installation which will satisfy the performance requirements. Retest
after modifications or equipment replacement is complete. Modifications, additional
equipment, retesting and structural, piping or electrical modifications necessary to
accommodate modified equipment or replacement equipment shall be made at no additional
cost.
END OF SECTION
01700 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Comply with requirements stated in Conditions of the Contract and in Specifications for
administrative procedures in closing out the work.
B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Conditions of the Contract: Fiscal provisions, legal submittals and additional
administrative requirements.
2. Section 01026, Applications for Payment: Requirements for final payment.
3. Section 01050, Field Engineering: Surveying certificate and final completion survey.
4. Section 01310, Construction Schedules.
5. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Maintenance materials.
6. Section 01710, Cleaning.
7. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
8. Section 01720, Project Record Documents.
9. Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data.
10. Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds.
11. Respective Sections of Specifications: Testing requirements and closeout submittals
required of specific trades or subcontractors.
1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Definition of Substantial Completion: Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract.
B. When Contractor considers that the work is substantially complete, he shall submit to the
Architect:
1. Written notice that the work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete.
2. "Punch list" of items to be completed or corrected, as determined by the Contractor
prior to inspection by the Architect and/or Owner.
3. Temporary Certificate of Occupancy, or other evidence of acceptance by the building
official or other authority with jurisdiction over the project.
4. Complete prefunctional checklist and function performance testing from commissioning
documentation.
C. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, Architect will make an inspection to
determine the status of completion.
D. Should Architect or Engineer determine that the work is not substantially complete:
1. Architect or Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons
therefor.
2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the work and send a second written notice
of substantial completion to the Architect.
3. Architect or Engineer will reinspect the work, as appropriate.
E. When Architect concurs that the work is substantially complete, he will:
1. Prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion on AIA form G704 or other Owner-
provided form, accompanied by Architect's list of items to be completed or corrected.
2. Submit the Certificate to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the
responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.
1.03 FINAL INSPECTION
A. When Contractor considers the work is complete, he shall submit written certification that:
1. Contract Documents have been reviewed, and that the work has been inspected for
compliance with Contract Documents.
01700 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
3. Corrective or incomplete work has been completed from punch lists provided at
Substantial Completion.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative
and are operational.
5. Roofing systems have been inspected by the manufacturer's technical representative
and have been approved by such technical representative.
6. Final cleaning has been completed and project is ready for final inspection.
7. Final Certificate of Occupancy has been issued.
8. Completion of “flush-out” of building’s mechanical systems.
9. Verification of completion of all outstanding commissioning requirements.
B. Architect will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable
promptness after receipt of such certification.
C. Should Architect consider that the work is incomplete or defective:
1. Architect or Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the
incomplete or defective work.
2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send a
second written certification to Architect that the work is complete.
3. Architect or Engineer will reinspect the work, as appropriate.
D. When the Architect finds that the work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he shall
request the Contractor to prepare and deliver closeout submittals.
E. Should Architect and/or Engineer perform reinspection due to failure of the work to comply
with the claims of status of either Substantial or Final Completion made by the Contractor:
1. Owner will compensate Architect and/or Engineer for such additional services by
change order to the A/E Agreement.
2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment due the
Contractor.
1.04 SYSTEMS TESTING
A. Contractor shall conduct tests for operational systems and equipment as specified herein or as
required by individual Sections, prior to Final Inspection. Testing of systems or equipment shall
include but not be limited to:
1. Drainage and weathertightness of roofing systems.
2. Domestic water service, natural gas or other pressurized site utilities.
3. Site irrigation system.
4. Other systems as specified in Division 15, Mechanical, or Division 16, Electrical, or
Section 01600, Material and Equipment.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS
A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities:
1. Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificates of Inspection, including plumbing, mechanical, electrical and fire sprinkler
systems.
B. Final Completion Schedule: Refer to Section 01310.
C. Project Record Documents: Refer to Section 01720.
D. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel: Refer to Section 01730.
E. Warranties and Bonds: Refer to Section 01740.
F. Keys and Keying Schedule: Refer to Section 08700, Finish Hardware.
G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: General and Supplementary Conditions.
H. Maintenance Materials: Evidence that all required maintenance materials have been furnished
and stored as directed by the Owner.
I. Test Results: Written approval from the testing agency for systems or equipment requiring
final testing, as specified above.
J. Surveying Certificate: Certification of accuracy of building layout, grading and drainage or
ATLA survey, as referenced in Section 01050.
01700 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
K. Certifications: Written certifications of material or equipment compliance, as required by
various Sections of the Specifications.
L. Construction Waste Management Plan: Final report, as specified in Section 01714.
1.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Architect. Statement shall reflect all
adjustments to the Contract Sum:
1. The original Contract Sum, including accepted Bid Alternates.
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a. Previous Change Orders.
b. Allowances.
c. Unit prices.
d. Deductions for uncorrected work.
e. Penalties and bonuses.
f. Deductions for liquidated damages, if applicable.
g. Deductions for reinspection payments.
h. Other adjustments.
3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.
4. Previous payments.
5. Sum remaining due, including retainage.
B. Contractor will prepare a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract
Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders.
1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and
requirements stated in the Conditions of the Contract and Section 01026, Applications for
Payment.
END OF SECTION
01710 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01710
CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall execute periodic cleaning during progress of the work.
B. Contractor shall execute final cleaning at completion of the work.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Conditions of the Contract.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Respective Sections of Specifications: Cleaning for specific products or work.
1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduct cleaning operations to comply with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and anti-
pollution laws.
B. Construction waste management shall be provided in accordance with the approved
construction waste management plan specified in Section 01714.
C. Disposal of waste materials, debris and rubbish shall be at a commercially-operated recycling
center, legal dumpsite or landfill. Refer to Section 01714.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS
A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and
which will not damage surfaces.
B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturers of the surface
material to be cleaned.
C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Contractor shall execute periodic cleaning to keep the building(s), the site and adjacent
properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris resulting
from construction operations.
1. Contractor shall provide site cleaning at the end of each workday during progress of
the work.
2. Building(s) and site shall be kept clean to the satisfaction of the Owner, including but
not limited to:
a. Removal of scrap lumber, plywood, gypsum wallboard and other waste
construction materials.
b. Removal of accumulations of sawdust, drywall compound, nails and other waste
materials.
c. Removal of cans, bottles and other rubbish.
d. Removal of boxes, cartons, pallets and other construction packaging materials.
3. Stored materials that are to be used in the construction of the work are not subject to
the provisions of this paragraph.
4. Refer to Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, General and Supplementary Conditions
of the Contract for site cleaning damages and other remedies available to the Owner.
01710 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Maintain parking areas, access drives and city streets clean from mud and other debris.
3.02 CLEANING PRIOR TO PAINTING
A. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as-needed
basis until painting is finished.
B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will
not fall on wet or freshly finished surfaces.
C. Temporarily seal window and door openings prior to the start of finish painting to prevent
windblown dust and other particulates from impairing wet or freshly finished surfaces.
3.03 CLEANING PRIOR TO CARPETING
A. Scrape all concrete floor slabs and wood floor substructures to remove accumulations of
drywall compounds and other foreign material.
B. Broom clean prior to installation of carpeting and/or pad.
3.04 FINAL CLEANING
A. Final cleaning shall be performed by personnel or subcontractors skilled in this work.
B. In general, the extent of final cleaning shall be to remove grease, mastic and adhesives, dust
and dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from site-exposed interior and
exterior surfaces.
C. Interior cleaning shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Wash and polish glass, glazing and mirrors. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine.
2. Damp mop all exposed concrete slabs.
3. Wipe down all ceramic tile work and remove grout smears.
4. Wipe down all finish carpentry, woodwork and cabinetwork.
5. Wipe down all interior surfaces of wood doors, windows, casings and trims.
6. Wipe down and polish toilet partitions, toilet and bath accessories, signage components
and other specialties.
7. Broom clean and dry vacuum all interior sealed concrete floor slabs to be left exposed.
Apply specified finish/sealer.
8. Wash and wipe down exposed structural steel and ornamental metal surfaces.
D. Exterior cleaning shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Power-wash and/or scrub with natural bristle or synthetic bristle brush all surfaces of
brick, concrete block or stone masonry, as specified in Division 4.
2. Power-wash or wash and wipe down exposed structural steel and ornamental metal
surfaces.
3. Power-wash or wash and wipe down prefinished metal roofing, gutters, downspouts,
counterflashings and trim.
4. Wash and wipe down doors and frames.
5. Wash and polish glass and glazing.
E. Site cleaning shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Broom clean and wash down all areas of exterior concrete flatwork and asphalt paving.
2. Rake excess mulch and other debris from shrub beds and turf areas, as specified in
Division 2.
F. Ventilating Systems:
1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during
construction.
2. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
G. Prior to final completion or Owner occupancy, Contractor shall conduct an inspection of the
site, all site-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all work areas to verify that work of the
entire project is clean.
END OF SECTION
01714 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01714
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND REMOVAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. The City of Fort Collins has established that this project shall generate less waste and will
recycle or salvage at least 50% (by volume or by weight) of construction, demolition and land
clearing waste. The Contractor shall develop and implement a Construction Waste
Management (CWM) plan that identifies proposed deconstruction and salvage opportunities,
reduces waste in ordering, storing and installation, recommends recycling activities, identifies
licensed haulers and processors of recycled materials, names materials subject to salvage and
identify organizations that accept salvaged materials. The Contractor shall estimate costs for
recycling, salvage and reuse on site and train all site workers on the CWM plan process and
requirements.
B. Administrative and procedural requirements for recycling non-hazardous demolition,
construction waste and packaging materials.
C. Furnish, maintain and service dumpsters and/or roll-offs for handling recycled materials, and
disposing of non-hazardous demolition and construction waste.
D. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01010, Summary of Work.
2. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Submittal requirements.
3. Section 02050, Building Demolition: Salvage and recycling requirements.
4. Section 02070, Selective Demolition: Salvage and recycling requirements.
5. Respective Sections of Specifications: Specific requirements for construction waste
management.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging materials.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal offsite of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,
reuse or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Construction Waste Management Plan: Submit one (1) electronic plan in PDF or Microsoft Word
format within 14 days of date established for commencement of the work.
B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit one
(1) electronic copy of report, including the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Total quantity of waste in tons or cubic yards.
3. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged, reused or recycled) in tons or cubic yards.
4. Total quantity of waste recovered as a percentage of total waste.
C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit one (1)
electronic copy of calculated end-of-project rates for salvage, recycling and disposal as a
01714 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
percentage of total waste generated by the work.
D. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable or reusable waste
donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts and invoices.
F. Landfill Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills facilities
licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts and invoices.
G. Final Report: Contractor shall submit a final report after all waste materials have been
removed or reused on site and final cleaning has taken place. The report shall include
information from the Waste Reduction Progress Reports and shall result in a total waste
recovered (salvaged, reused or recycled) matching the goal established above.
1.04 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. Construction Waste Management Plan: Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall develop
and implement a draft Construction Waste Management (CWM) plan to the Architect and Owner
for review. The CWM plan shall contain the following required information:
1. Name of Contractor's personnel responsible for managing the CWM plan.
2. Analysis of the proposed jobsite waste to be generated, including types and
approximate quantities or percentages. Offer options to reduce the waste generated,
including ordering procedures, reducing damage to material during storage on site and
during installation, and reducing packaging waste. Also offer options to reduce waste
that must be disposed of in a hazardous waste facility.
3. Landfill Options: Name of the landfill(s) where trash will be disposed of, the
applicable landfill tipping fees, and the projected cost of disposing of all construction
waste in the landfill(s).
4. Alternatives to Landfilling: A list of each material proposed to be salvaged, reused or
recycled during the course of the Project and the estimated net cost savings or
additional costs resulting from separating and recycling, reusing or salvaging (versus
landfilling) each material. "Net" means that the following have been subtracted from
the cost of separation and recycling:
a. Revenue from the sale of recycled or salvaged materials, and
b. Landfill tipping fees saved due to diversion of materials from the landfill. The
list of these materials shall include, at a minimum, the following materials:
1) Cardboard.
2) Concrete.
3) Asphalt.
4) Wood, including dimensional, unpainted wood, plywood, OSB and
particleboard.
5) Ferrous materials.
6) Non-ferrous metals, including copper, brass and aluminum.
7) Glass, including glass bottles from beverages.
8) HDPE and PET plastics, including beverage containers.
9) Brick.
10) Concrete masonry units (CMU).
11) Gypsum wallboard products.
12) Carpet and pad materials.
13) Polystyrene.
14) Newspaper.
15) Office and other white paper.
16) Drawings, engineering copies and blueprints.
17) Packaging materials, including:
a) Paper.
b) Cardboard boxes.
c) Wood pallets and crates.
d) Plastic sheet and film.
e) Polystyrene packaging.
01714 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
f) Glass.
g) HPDE and PET plastics, including beverage containers.
h) Plastic pails.
5. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste
management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing
waste management plan. Include the following:
a. Total quantity of waste.
b. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and
cost of collection containers for each type of waste.
c. Revenue from salvaged materials.
d. Revenue from recycled materials.
e. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.
f. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.
g. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for
each type of waste.
h. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.
6. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which any materials identified
above will be protected from contamination and describe the means to be employed in
recycling the materials (separation requirements, containers, etc.)
7. Transportation: Describe the means of transportation of the recyclable materials, such
as whether materials will be site-separated by the Contractor, hauled by the
Contractor or specialty recycling firm, or collected by the designated facility.
8. Site Disposal: Burial or other disposal of material on site is prohibited.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall accrue to the Contractor.
C. Contractor shall submit copies of the CWM plan for review by the Architect and Owner's
Representative. Allow for at least two weeks for review. Contractor shall make requested
revisions and complete the approved CWM plan.
1. Quantity of Draft Plan: Three (3) (one (1) electronic copy), unless other quantity is
specified in Section 01340.
1.05 WASTE MANAGEMENT CONFERENCE
A. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project
Management and Coordination". Meeting shall include contractors affected by the Waste
Management Plan. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste
Management Coordinator.
2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
disposition.
3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
disposal facilities.
5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
1.06 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduct disposal operations in compliance with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and
anti-pollution laws.
B. Disposal of waste materials, debris and rubbish shall be at a commercially-operated recycling
center, legal dumpsite or landfill.
1. Contractor shall be responsible for all dump fees and expenses associated with hauling
materials to the landfill.
01714 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RECYCLED MATERIALS CONTAINERS
A. Furnish and maintain recycling containers, dumpsters and/or roll-off dumpsters for the sorting
and collection of non-hazardous recyclable construction waste materials.
B. Individual recycling containers shall be maintained for paper, corrugated cardboard, and co-
mingled containers for glass, plastic, aluminum and steel, or as required to meet the
Contractor's Construction Waste Management plan. General contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring proper separation of recycled materials and delivery to acceptable recycling centers.
2.02 WASTE REMOVAL CONTAINERS
A. Furnish and maintain trash and waste removal dumpsters and/or roll-off dumpsters for the
collection of non-hazardous construction waste materials, debris and rubbish, in quantities
sufficient for the Work.
1. Dumpsters shall be provided with tightly fitted covers to prevent debris from being
blown out.
2. Roll-offs shall not be required to be covered, but shall be serviced frequently enough
to prevent debris from accumulating and being blown out.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Distribution: Contractor shall distribute copies of the approved CWM plan to the
Superintendent, each Subcontractor, the Architect and the Owner. One copy shall be posted at
the jobsite at all times.
B. General: Contractor shall implement the CWM plan as approved by the Owner and Architect.
Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation and other items as required to
implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Project.
C. Waste Management Coordinator: Contractor shall provide a waste management coordinator to
be responsible for implementing, monitoring and reporting status of waste management work
plan.
D. Training: Train and supervise workers, subcontractors and suppliers on proper waste
management procedures, as appropriate for the project.
1. Distribute the CWM plan to everyone concerned within three (3) days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute the CWM plan to entities when they first begin work on site. Review plan
procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling and disposal.
3. Instruction: Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation,
handling and recycling, salvage, reuse and return methods to be used by all parties at
the appropriate stages of the work
E. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities. Also refer to Sections 01046 and 01560.
1. Designate and label specific areas on site necessary for separating materials that are to
be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated and sold.
F. Separation Facilities: Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separations
of materials for potential recycling, salvage, reuse and return, to be determined at the Pre-
Construction Conference. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean, and
clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials.
G. Hazardous Wastes: Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored and disposed of according to
local regulations. Refer to Section 02080, Hazardous Material Removal.
H. Application for Progress Payments: Contractor shall submit with each Application for Progress
Payment a summary of waste generated by the Project. The summary shall contain the
following information.
01714 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1. Amount (in cubic yards) of material landfilled from the Project, the identity of the
landfill, the total amount of tipping fees paid and the total disposal cost.
2. Amount (in cubic yards) of each material recycled, reused on the jobsite, salvaged or
returned. Include the transportation cost, the amount of money paid or received for
the recycled or salvaged material and the net total cost or savings of recycled or
salvaged materials.
I. Final Report: Contractor shall submit a final report when all waste material has been removed
or reused on site and final cleaning has taken place. The report shall state what percentage by
volume or by weight of construction, demolition and land clearing waste has been diverted
from landfill disposal. Salvage may include donation of the material to charitable organizations
if acceptable to the Owner.
1. Minimum required construction waste diversion rate is 50% by volume or by weight of
construction, demolition and land clearing debris.
3.02 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. General Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable
materials at each container and bin.
2. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if
found.
3. Stockpile processed materials on-site away from construction area, without intermixing
with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover
to prevent windblown dust.
B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.
1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 4" size.
C. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other
metals.
1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 4" size.
2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
D. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type and length. Separate lumber,
engineered wood products, panel products and treated wood materials.
E. Metals: Separate metals by type.
1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member and length.
2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers and other rough hardware.
F. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.
G. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports,
hangers, valves, sprinklers and other components by type and size.
H. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.
I. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters,
panelboards, circuit breakers and other devices by type.
3.03 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a
dry location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
01714 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
C. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees at landfill facility.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 2 landscaping sections for use of chipped organic
waste as organic mulch.
D. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
E. Gypsum Wallboard: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper
or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE AND RECYCLED MATERIALS
A. Cleaning: Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site and adjacent properties free
from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from
construction operations, as specified in Section 01710.
1. Maintain parking areas, access drives and city streets clean from mud and other debris.
B. Recycling: Remove non-hazardous materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused to
appropriate recycling centers, recycling processors, architectural salvage sites or other
locations as specified in the approved CWM plan or other Sections of these Specifications.
C. Except for materials to be salvaged, recycled or otherwise reused, remove non-hazardous
construction waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at
legal commercial dump sites or landfills away from the site.
END OF SECTION
01720 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall maintain at the site one (1) record copy of each of the following documents:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications or Project Manual.
3. Addenda.
4. Construction Waste Management Plan.
5. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
6. Architect field orders or written instructions.
7. Approved shop drawings, product data and samples.
8. Field test records.
9. Architect's and Engineers' field reports.
10. Caisson boring logs.
11. Engineered screwpile logs.
B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
2. Section 01380, Construction Photographs: Requirements for construction record
photography.
3. Section 01410, Testing.
4. Section 13122, Prefabricated Steel Structures: Special requirements for record
documents.
1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Prior to beginning work, separate one (1) clean, complete set of project documents from
construction sets and hold for record document purposes. The Architect and Owner will not
furnish additional sets for the Contractor's use at the end of construction, unless compensated
for by the Contractor.
B. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for
construction. Provide files and rack for storage of documents.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record
documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Architect, Engineers
and Owner's representative.
1.03 RECORDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until
required information is recorded.
B. Drawings shall be legibly marked to record actual construction:
1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finished first floor datum.
2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface locations.
3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Changes made by field order or by Change Order.
6. Details not included in original Contract Documents.
C. Specifications and Addenda shall be legibly marked to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of
equipment actually installed.
01720 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Changes made by field order or by Change Order.
D. Caisson Boring Logs:
1. Format: 24" x 36".
E. Engineered Screwpile Logs.
1. Format: 24" x 36".
F. Construction Photographs: Refer to Section 01380.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. At contract closeout, deliver all Record Documents to the Architect for the Owner.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter containing:
1. Date, project name and number.
2. Contractor's name and address.
3. Title and number of each Record Document.
4. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.
C. Submit one (1) copy of approved data in final form no later than fifteen (15) days after final
inspection or acceptance, but prior to applying for final payment.
D. As-Recorded Documents shall be submitted, reviewed and accepted by the Architect and
Owner prior to the Final Application for Payment being processed.
E. Architect shall prepare and furnish the Owner with one (1) set of reproducible Record
Documents in accordance with the Contract requirements.
F. Commissioning Report: As specified in Section 01810, Commissioning.
END OF SECTION
01730 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01730
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
maintenance and operation of products, fixtures and equipment furnished for this Project.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced
in other pertinent Sections of the Specifications.
B. Contractor and/or subcontractors shall provide training for Owner's personnel in maintenance
of products and in operation of equipment and systems.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
2. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
3. Section 01700, Contract Close-Out.
4. Section 01720, Project Record Documents.
5. Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds.
6. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Format of Submittals:
1. Size: 8-1/2" x 11".
2. Paper: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten.
3. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text.
b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
4. Provide fly leaf for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment.
a. Provide typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.
b. Provide indexed tabs.
5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List the following:
a. Title of project.
b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
C. Binders:
1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers, ring
size as required.
2. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related, consistent groupings.
D. Number of Manuals Required: Three (3) copies of each complete manual, including all general
information and plumbing, mechanical, electrical and fire sprinkler sections.
1.03 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Table of Contents for each volume arranged in sequential order.
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
2. List of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume.
3. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
a. Subcontractor or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor as appropriate.
c. Identify the area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in
Contract Documents.
01730 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Product Data: Contractor shall mark or edit manufacturer's printed literature as to the specific
items used in the Project.
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Note each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
c. Delete references to inapplicable information.
C. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct
illustration of completed installation. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance
drawings.
D. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
2. Provide logical sequence of instruction for each procedure.
E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued indicating:
1. Proper procedures in the event of failure.
2. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
F. Copy of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product or material.
G. Color/Finish Schedules:
1. List of each color and finish selection for all exterior materials, including manufacturer
and color/finish number.
2. List of each color and finish selection for all interior materials, including manufacturer
and color/finish number.
1.04 GENERAL MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Provide complete information for products specified in individual Sections of these
Specifications.
1.05 MANUALS FOR PLUMBING, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
2. Operating Procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "troubleshooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication schedule, with list of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams
required for maintenance.
8. As-installed control diagrams by control manufacturer.
9. As-installed color-coded piping diagrams.
10. Charts of valve tag numbers with location and function of each valve.
11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
12. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications.
01730 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Content for each electric and electronic system as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
b. Engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Circuit directories of panelboards.
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating Procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "troubleshooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications.
C. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during
instruction of Owner's personnel.
D. Provide complete information for products specified in:
1. Division 15, Plumbing and Mechanical Systems and Equipment.
2. Division 16, Electrical Systems and Equipment.
1.06 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form no later than fifteen (15)
days after final inspection or acceptance, but prior to applying for final payment.
B. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be submitted, reviewed and accepted by the
Architect and Owner prior to the Final Application for Payment being processed.
1.07 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and
maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and
systems, including but not limited to:
1. Mechanical equipment, systems, controls and safety features.
2. Electrical power distribution equipment, systems, controls and safety features.
3. Electrical lighting controls.
4. Security system and controls.
5. Access control systems.
6. Fire alarm system and controls.
7. Elevator equipment, controls and safety features.
8. Commercial kitchen equipment, controls and safety features.
B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. Review contents
of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
END OF SECTION
01740 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall compile specified warranties and bonds and specified service and maintenance
contracts.
B. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
C. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner.
D. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Instructions to Bidders: Bid or Proposal Bond.
2. Conditions of the Contract: Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond.
3. Conditions of the Contract: General Warranty of Construction.
4. Section 01030, Alternates.
5. Section 01700, Contract Close-Out.
6. Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data.
7. Respective Sections of Specifications which specify the product.
1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Submit warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts as specified in
respective Sections of Specifications.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all warranties shall be written in the Owner's name, and
shall be transferable to future Owner(s) for the duration of the warranty period.
B. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the
respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors, bound with operating and
maintenance data. Manuals are specified in Section 01730.
C. Number of original signed copies required: Three (3) each, or as required by number of
manuals specified in Section 01730.
D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each
item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Firm with name of principal, address and telephone number.
3. Scope of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
5. Duration of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
b. Conditions which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
E. Format of Submittals:
1. Format: Prepare in duplicate packets.
2. Size: 8-1/2" x 11" punched sheets for standard three-ring binder. Fold larger sheets to
fit into binders.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
A. Submit documents within twenty-five (25) days after inspection and acceptance for equipment
or component parts of equipment put into service during progress of construction.
B. Otherwise make submittals within twenty-five (25) days after date of Substantial Completion,
prior to final request for payment.
C. For items of work where acceptance is delayed materially beyond date of Substantial
Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing date of
acceptance as start of warranty period.
01740 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.04 REQUIRED WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Bid or Proposal Bond: Refer to Instructions to Bidders.
B. Performance and Payment Bond: Refer to Conditions of the Contract.
C. General Warranty of Construction: Refer to Conditions of the Contract. Unless modified
elsewhere, General Contractor shall warrant all construction materials and workmanship for a
period of one (1) calendar year from the date of Substantial Completion.
D. Extended Warranties: Certain portions of the Project may have warranty coverage
requirements in excess of the general warranty stipulated herein, required by other Sections of
these Specifications or by governing authorities. Examples of these extended warranties may
include, but not be limited to, landscaping materials or pavement work performed in public
streets.
E. Warranties: Provide required warranties for products, materials and equipment covering
defects in materials and workmanship for the time duration(s) specified in individual Sections.
Where no specific warranty is mentioned, provide warranty coverages normally provided by the
manufacturer for that product, but in no case less than one (1) year from the date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all warranties shall be written in the Owner's name.
2. All warranties shall be transferable to future Owner(s) for the duration of the warranty
period.
F. Provide warranties and/or bonds for products and services specified in individual Sections of
these Specifications.
1. Warranties for individual materials or systems shall not be pro-rated, unless specifically
allowed in individual sections of these Specifications.
G. Maintenance Agreements: None required. However, all Contractors and Subcontractors shall
be required to make service calls as requested by the Owner throughout the one-year general
warranty period, at no additional expense to the Owner.
H. Optional Bond(s): The Contractor shall retain the right to require Performance and/or Labor
and Material Payment Bonds from any or all of his/her Subcontractors. The costs of such
second or third tier bonds will not be paid for by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
02100 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 02100
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Stripping and stockpiling of topsoil, unless arranged for otherwise.
B. Finish grading and placing of topsoil, unless arranged for otherwise.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01010, Summary of Work.
2. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
3. Section 02050, Building Demolition.
4. Section 02115, Selective Clearing and Pruning.
5. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading: Excavating, filling and compacting of
embankments and other site work unrelated to structures.
6. Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
7. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting.
8. Application Division 2 Landscaping Sections: Preparation of topsoil.
9. Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical
specifications.
1.02 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by Empire Labs
dated May 1981, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity
between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect. The
Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom.
1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request
written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow.
B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then determine for
himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface conditions normally
considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test hole borings be
encountered, the Contractor may apply for just compensation for additional expenses resulting
from such conditions.
C. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified. Excavation
and trenching includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or
otherwise removed in performance of the work, regardless of the type, character, composition
or condition thereof. Refer to Section 02225.
1.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from equipment and
vehicular traffic.
B. Protect existing trees to remain as specified in Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
C. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in accordance
with requirements of Section 01040, 01046 and 01060. Protect all utilities which are to
remain.
D. Notify Architect/Engineer of any unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue work in the
area until Architect/Engineer provides notification to resume work.
02100 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Refer to applicable portions of Sections 02200, 02220, 02221 and/or 02225 for selected
imported fill materials and reuse of existing on-site materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and this Section.
B. Clear and strip surface vegetation, sod and organic topsoil as required for grading or new
construction in areas within sitework boundaries. The stripped topsoil shall be stored for later
use in the site finish grading.
1. Extent of Stripping: As required for new construction, as shown on the Drawings, or as
directed by the Architect/Engineer. Topsoil shall not be stripped or existing vegetative
cover disturbed in excess of these limits without written approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
C. Clearing and Tree/Brush Removal: Refer to Section 02115.
3.02 ROUGH GRADING, EXCAVATING AND COMPACTING
A. Refer to applicable portions of Sections 02200, 02220, 02221 and/or 02225.
3.03 FINISH GRADING
A. General: Provide finish grading and placing of topsoil unless arranged for otherwise.
B. Bring subsoil to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradually and
blend slopes into existing areas. Maintain tolerance within .10' of required subgrade, except
under building slabs where final grades shall be within 1/2" of required elevation.
C. Slope finish grade away from building minimum 1' in 10', unless indicated otherwise on the
Drawings, providing effective drainage of at least 1%, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6" where topsoil is to be placed and compact as specified.
Provide depth allowances for topsoil placement.
E. Place and shape subgrade for landscape berms and other artificially created earthen features
as shown on the Landscape Drawings.
3.04 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Place and spread topsoil with minimum depth of 6", using suitable stockpiled, onsite material,
supplemented with imported material as required.
B. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather.
C. Fine grade topsoil to within 1" of finish contours eliminating rough and low areas to ensure
positive drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades to tie new work into
existing.
D. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, debris and other foreign materials while spreading.
E. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants and buildings to prevent compaction and damage
which may be caused by grading equipment.
F. Lightly compact placed topsoil and leave prepared for soil preparation and landscaping
specified in other Sections of Division 2.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified
02100 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
tolerances.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, or where topsoil has been compacted
in excess of the specified limits, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density prior
to further construction.
3.06 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove and dispose of debris and excess materials off of Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
02115 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 02115
SELECTIVE CLEARING AND PRUNING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Selective clearing of existing trees, shrubs, brush and vegetative growth.
B. Selective pruning of trees to remain in place.
C. Disposing of felled trees and surface debris.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures: Tree and plant protection.
2. Section 02050, Building Demolition.
3. Section 02070, Selective Demolition.
1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall comply with any requirements of the City of Fort Collins and/or U.S. Forest
Service that govern this type of work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certified or Licensed Arborist: All pruning of trees specified in this Section shall be performed
by certified or licensed arborists, with minimum five (5) years experience in projects of similar
scale and complexity. Submit evidence of certification, licensure and/or qualifications to the
Owner, if requested.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish and maintain chain saws, tree saws, axes and other equipment as required to complete
work of this Section.
1. Maintain saw blades in new or sharp condition to make cuts clean and smooth.
B. Mulching Equipment: Chippers or other site-based mulching equipment, if mulching of tree
branches is specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall examine the site with the Owner and Architect/Landscape Architect to verify
extent of work to be performed. Architect/Landscape Architect shall identify the trees or
groups of trees to be preserved, as shown on the Drawings, and the Contractor shall tag and
protect these as specified in Section 01530.
3.02 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Erect and maintain protective fencing around existing trees and vegetation identified by the
Architect to remain, as specified in Section 01530.
B. Protect tops, trunks and roots of existing vegetation to remain. Do not use heavy equipment
within branch spread.
C. Regrade around existing trees by hand when existing grade is lower than new finish grade.
02115 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.03 TREE AND BRUSH REMOVAL
A. General: Cut and completely remove trees, shrubs and brush not identified to be preserved.
B. Cut trees, shrubs and brush identified to be removed maximum 12" above existing grade.
C. Do not pull up, rip or otherwise damage root structures of vegetation to remain. If excavation
through roots is required, excavate by hand and cut roots with a sharp axe, making clean,
smooth, sloping cuts.
3.04 GRUBBING AND REMOVAL
A. Grub out stumps and roots of vegetation removed to minimum 12" below original existing
grade.
B. Remove cleared and grubbed trees, limbs, shrubs, uprooted stumps and surface debris from the
site.
C. Do not bury cuttings, stumps and roots or burn materials on the site.
3.05 TREE PRUNING
A. General: Pruning shall be performed by a certified or licensed arborist, as specified in
paragraph 1.03.
B. Specific Requirements Pertaining to the Pruning of Trees:
1. No tree shall be cut back in such a manner that its health or eventual safety will be
impaired. An exception to this may occur in tree removal or emergency relief of an
immediate danger to persons or property. Any such emergency procedures must be
reported promptly to the City Forester (or other authority) with plans for completion or
follow-up work submitted for approval.
2. Authority to prune street trees does not include the cutting back of sound, healthy tree
branches in excess of 6" in diameter (outside bark) unless specifically described and
written into the permit form by the City Forester (or other authority).
3. When tree pruning cuts are made to a side branch, such remaining branch must possess
a basal thickness of at least 1/3 of the diameter of the wound so affected. Such cuts
shall be considered proper only when such remaining branch is vigorous enough to
maintain adequate foliage to produce woody growth capable of healing the cut within a
reasonable period of time.
4. All final tree pruning cuts shall be made in such a manner as to favor the earliest
possible covering of the wound by natural callus growth. Excessively deep flush cuts
that produce large wounds or weaken the tree at the cut shall not be made. Tree
pruning cuts should be made just outside the branch collar.
5. Tree branches shall be removed and controlled in such a manner as to not cause
damage to buildings, other parts of the tree or to other plants or property.
6. All tools used on a tree known to contain an infectious tree disease shall be properly
disinfected immediately after completing work in such a tree.
7. Maples, birches and walnut trees shall be pruned only when in leaf, except where
conditions hazardous to the public or property are involved.
8. All cutting tools and saws used in making tree pruning cuts shall be kept sharpened
adequately to result in final cuts with an unabrased wood surface and secure bark
remaining adjacent thereto.
9. Whenever pruning cuts are to be made while removing branches too large to hold
securely in one hand during the cutting operation, the branches shall be cut off first 1'
to 2' beyond the intended final cut. Then the final cut shall be made in a manner to
prevent unnecessary tearing back of the bark and wood.
10. Any cutting of tree roots, other than when in the process of tree removal, shall give
due consideration to the future welfare and safety of the tree. Proper action shall be
taken to treat resulting wounds to prevent entry of decay organisms.
C. Standards of Workmanship for Pruning:
1. Cleanup of branches, logs or any other debris resulting from any tree pruning or
removing shall be promptly and properly accomplished. The work area shall be kept
safe at all times until the cleanup operation is completed. Under no condition shall the
02115 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
accumulation of brush, branches, logs or other debris be allowed upon a public
property in such a manner as to result in a public hazard.
2. The use of climbing spurs or spike shoes in the act of pruning trees is prohibited.
3. Under no conditions shall it be considered proper to leave any severed or partially cut
branches in the upper portion of any tree being worked on after the tree workers leave
the site.
4. Whenever large tree sections are being cut in a treetop that may endanger the public,
adjacent buildings or property, such materials shall be secured by ropes and lowered
safely in a controlled manner.
5. Unless the tree work area is totally barricaded or otherwise kept safe while pruning or
removing trees, at least one (1) responsible tree worker shall serve to coordinate safe
operations on the ground at all times when work operations are in progress.
D. Authorized Types of Tree Pruning:
1. Medium Prune:
a. Properly remove all dead and dying branches of 1/2" and over in diameter.
b. Remove all broken branches or any loose branches lodged in the tree.
c. Remove all dead and live stubs of previously broken or poorly cut branches.
d. Remove any live branches which interfere with the tree's structural strength
and healthful development, which will include the following:
1) Branches which rub and abrade a more important branch.
2) Branches of weak structure which are not important to the framework
of the tree.
3) Branches which, if allowed to grow, would wedge apart the junction of
more important branches.
4) Branches with twigs and foliage obstructing the development of more
important branches.
5) Branches forming multiple leaders in a single leader type tree.
6) Branches near the end of a limb which will produce more weight or
offer more resistance to wind than the limb is likely to support.
7) Undesirable sucker and sprout growths.
8) Selective removal to one or more developing leaders where multiple
branch growth exists near the end of broken or stubbed limbs.
9) Removal of branches which project too far outward beyond an
otherwise symmetrical form.
10) Removal or severance of any exposed roots which serve to restrict or
act in a girdling manner and prevent proper expansion and growth of
other major roots, or restrict the base of the tree trunk.
e. All final cuts shall be made just outside the branch collar. Extremely deep cuts
which produce excessively wide wounds or weaken the tree shall not be made.
2. Minimum or Safety Prune: This operation of tree trimming shall consist of the
minimum performance necessary to correct one or more extreme and undesirable
conditions existing within a tree which may be hazardous to persons or property.
a. Remove all dead and dying branches of 2" or more in diameter.
b. Remove all broken or loose branches 2" or more in diameter.
c. Reduce the length of branches which extend extremely beyond the perimeter
of an otherwise symmetrical form.
d. Cut back ends of branches and reduce weight where excessive overburden
appears likely to result in breakage of supporting limbs. Such cutting back
shall not include the removal of any live, healthy branches in excess of 6" in
diameter, unless a specific consent is given by the Architect.
3. Head Back Prune: This operation shall consist of reducing the height and/or spread of
a tree by not more than 1/3 and shall only be applied to trees when such work is
necessary to control extended growth which may endanger overhead utility lines or
interfere with adjacent structures.
a. This form of pruning trees shall be done by means of a method called "drop
crotching" which serves to shorten branch structure and thereby limits the
extent of the foliage canopy to a natural appearing margin. This action
02115 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
side branches.
b. No cuts on living branches shall be made in excess of 6" in diameter without
first securing specific consent of the Architect.
c. Extended perimeter branches shall be properly cut at their junction with lower
branches having a basal diameter of at least 1/3 of the diameter of the cut so
affected.
d. The remaining lower branches so cut back to shall be retained intact to form a
reduced foliage perimeter at a specific height and/or spread.
e. This technique of tree pruning shall only be applied when larger growing trees
endanger overhead utility lines or where excessive growth of trees interferes
with adjacent structures or otherwise creates a specific hazard to persons or
property.
f. Head Back prune should not be attempted or used if the metabolism of a tree
would be seriously unbalanced by the use of this technique or where the
structure of the tree would be weakened by such action. Irreparable trees
shall be removed rather than be worked on with this mode of tree pruning.
4. Spot Prune: This operation of tree pruning shall consist of the removal of one or more
branches localized in a particular area of the crown of a tree.
a. Trees shall be pruned in such a manner as to prevent branch and foliage
interference with requirements of safe public passage. Over-street clearance
shall be kept to a minimum of 14' above the paved surface of the street and 8'
over the surface of the public sidewalk or pedestrian way.
b. Sprout or sucker growth shall be removed to a minimum height of 8' above the
ground level. Exceptions are allowed for young trees which would be
irreparably damaged by such trimming action.
c. Individual or scattered dead or broken limbs shall be properly removed without
the necessity of performing other work not immediately urgent for protection
of the public or property, or the health of the tree.
3.06 CLEANING AND MULCHING
A. Site Cleaning: Leave the site in a clean condition, free from branches, roots, demolished site
features or other surface debris, ready for installation of new structure and site work as
required by the Contract Documents.
B. Mulching: Tree branches removed through pruning shall be mulched on site, with mulch
material deposited in a location on the property as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
02221 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 02221
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Excavating, backfilling, grading and compacting of sitework for utility trenches and subsurface
drainage systems.
B. Cap off and seal discontinued utility services and remove portions of lines within excavated
areas.
C. Shore and brace excavations as required.
D. Dewater excavations as necessary.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01046, Access to Site.
2. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
3. Section 01410, Testing.
4. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
5. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
6. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
7. Section 02100, Site Preparation.
8. Section 02115, Selective Clearing and Pruning.
9. Section 02200, Earthwork.
10. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading.
11. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting.
12. Section 02720, Sanitary Sewerage Systems.
13. Applicable Sections of Division 2 Landscaping Sections: Finish grading and preparation
of topsoil.
14. Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical
specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
B. Soil Compaction Tests:
1. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of
Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer and a 12-inch drop.
a. Use method A, B, C or D, as appropriate, based on soil condition and judgment
of the testing laboratory.
b. Sample tests will be representative of materials to be placed.
c. Determine and provide optimum density curve for each type of material
encountered or utilized.
d. Include Atterberg Limits, grain size determination and specific gravity.
2. ASTM D2049 - Test for Relative Density of Cohesion less soils.
C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to enable Architect/Engineer to determine
compliance with the Specifications for imported materials from each proposed source or
supplier.
1. Provide with this certificate a density test of a typical sample, in accordance with the
following reference standards.
a. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99.
b. ASTM D2049.
02221 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Right-of-Way Work Permit: Contractor shall obtain a right-of-way work permit for any
trenching and utility work within a public street, alley or other public right-of-way, as required
by the City of Fort Collins. Refer to Section 01060.
1.04 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by Empire Labs
dated May 1981, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity
between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect. The
Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom.
1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request
written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow.
B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then determine for
himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface conditions normally
considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test hole borings be
encountered, the Contractor may be compensated for additional expenses resulting from such
conditions.
C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings.
D. Underground Obstructions: Underground obstructions known to Architect/Engineer are shown
on Drawings. However, locations shown may prove inaccurate and other obstructions not known
to Architect/Engineer may be encountered.
1. Notify each utility owner and request that utilities be field located by surface
reference at least 48 hours prior to trenching or excavation.
2. Expose and verify size, location and elevation of underground utilities and other
obstructions where conflicts may exist sufficiently in advance to permit changes in the
event of conflict.
a. Notify Architect/Engineer in case of conflict.
b. In case of conflict the proposed Work may be changed by the Architect/
Engineer.
3. Maintain, protect and support by shoring, bracing or other means existing utilities and
appurtenances.
4. If Contractor elects to remove underground obstructions, the following conditions shall
apply:
a. Replace all other underground obstructions with new materials.
b. Restore to original conditions or better.
5. Clean drainage culverts so they are free of sediment after construction.
E. Exploratory Excavations:
1. Before commencing work, obtain information concerning location, type and extent of
concealed existing utilities on the site and adjacent properties. Consult records and
personnel of local utility companies, municipal utility departments and
telephone/cable television companies. File appropriate Notice of Excavation with
these agencies prior to commencing work.
2. Conduct exploratory excavations and pot-holing as required to confirm proposed
pipeline corridors are clear prior to commencing construction.
a. No excavation shall occur until utility locates have been provided by Utility
Notification Center of Colorado, or local equivalent.
b. No excavation shall occur outside the area covered by utility locates.
c. Contractor shall acquire all necessary permits, excavate all materials to expose
utilities, survey the location (horizontal and vertical) of the utilities, and
backfill the excavation to existing grade lines with the excavated material or
other approved materials. Contractor shall immediately notify verbally and in
writing the Owner and Architect/Engineer if utilities are discovered that are
not on the Drawings or in a position different from that shown on the
topographic survey.
d. Contractor shall use all necessary caution during this work. All damage to
existing utility lines or adjacent facilities shall be repaired promptly at the
02221 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
Contractor’s expense, and in accordance with requirements of the damaged
utility.
F. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified. Excavation
includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed
in performance of the work, regardless of the type, character, composition or condition
thereof. Refer to Section 02225.
1.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from equipment and
vehicular traffic.
B. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in accordance
with requirements of Sections 01040, 01046, 01060 and 01510. Protect all utilities which are to
remain.
C. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning or other methods required
to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.
D. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including service
utilities and pipe chases.
E. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work in
affected area until notification to resume work.
F. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost.
G. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water runoff into excavation.
1.07 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING
A. Notify the Architect/Engineer at completion of each phase of excavation prior to placement of
formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Also notify the Architect/Engineer prior
to placement of backfill of all foundations. Notification shall be at least 48 hours prior to
proceeding with the next phase of work.
B. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory
submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and Owner. Testing fees shall be
paid in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions.
1. The Contractor will pay for costs of additional testing required due to improper
performance of the work.
C. Testing for Structural Excavations: Refer to Sections 01410 and 02225.
D. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing laboratory to
perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work until results have been
verified.
E. Compaction Tests:
1. Utility Trenches: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of
one (1) test for each 100 ln. ft., or fraction thereof, of trench length, unless otherwise
required by the Soils Report.
2. Concrete Flatwork: Refer to Section 02225.
3. Retaining Walls: Refer to Section 02220.
F. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove
defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.08 WARRANTIES
A. Maintain all backfill and resurfacing in a satisfactory condition for a period of one (1) year after
final acceptance by the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STABILIZATION MATERIAL
A. Top 6" of Pipe Subgrade: Granular bedding material.
02221 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Subgrade Below Top 6": Same as top 6", except that broken concrete and rock may be included
in sizes permitting compaction as specified without discernible voids.
2.02 BEDDING MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Refer to Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1. Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days minimum.
B. Granular Material: Angular or crushed, washed natural stone free of shale, clay, frozen
materials and debris, graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following limits:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
1" 100
3/4" 90-100
3/8" 20-55
#4 0-10
#8 0-5
C. Select soil placed below an elevation 12" above top of pipe.
1. Trench backfill material free from rocks, clods and stones greater than 2" in any
dimension; or
2. Granular material.
2.03 TRENCH BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Excavated or imported material free from frozen material, stumps, roots, brush, other organic
matter, cinders, peat or other corrosive material, debris and rocks or stones greater than
following dimensions:
1. 3" in any dimension for material placed within 1'-0" of finished surface.
2. 2" in any dimension for material placed within 1'-0" of pipe.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Silt Fence (Erosion Control): Woven filter fabric, type and size as required by the City of Fort
Collins and/or the State of Colorado. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation
Control.
B. Filter Fabric for Subsurface Drainage System: Refer to Section 02724.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Obtain Right-Of-Way Work Permit or any other approvals as required for work within a street,
alley or other public right-of-way.
B. Schedule street and sidewalk cuts, trenching and utility line installation in accordance with the
Owner's requirements for use of the facility and/or street. Refer to Section 01046.
C. Silt Fence: Install silt fence fabric using wooden posts and straw bales or other required
accessory erosion control materials where indicated on the Drainage and Erosion Control Plan,
or as required by the authority with jurisdiction over the work of the Project. Maintain in
place until such authority permits its removal. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and
Sedimentation Control.
D. Contractor shall examine the subsurface soil conditions encountered prior to installation of any
underground utility work and verify that materials specified for utility piping, joints,
accessories and other materials are suitable for the soil conditions. Notify Architect and
Engineer of any conditions which may adversely affect the successful installation or
performance of the completed utility systems. Do not commence work until such conditions
have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer.
E. Verify that stockpiled on-site fill has been approved for reuse as backfill material.
F. Ensure that trenches to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice or water and that ground
surfaces are not frozen.
02221 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
G. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.
H. Ensure that subgrade surfaces have been compacted to density requirements for backfill
material.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil as required for underground utility systems.
B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection, but not
wider than necessary.
1. Minimize the size of cuts in street, alley or other public rights-of-way.
C. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints.
3.03 BACKFILLING
A. Support pipe or conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill.
B. Place pipe or conduit bedding and backfill in accordance with the requirements of the Drawings
and this Section.
C. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations. Do not backfill over porous, wet or spongy
subgrade surfaces. Backfill as early as possible.
D. Place and compact select fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6" loose depth.
E. Place and compact common fill material in continuous layers.
F. Employ a placement method so as not to disturb or damage pipe.
G. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
H. Remove surplus backfill materials. Leave stockpile areas completely free of excess fill
materials.
I. Tolerances:
1. Top Surfaces of Backfilling: +/- 0.1'.
3.04 COMPACTION
A. Compact trench backfill to the following minimum densities, unless the following are
superseded by the requirements of an appropriate governmental authority:
1. Areas Adjacent to Building Foundations: Minimum 95% of Standard Proctor Density
(SPD) per ASTM D698-78, or as required in Section 02225, whichever is more stringent.
2. Building Slabs, Walks and Roadways: Minimum 95% of SPD.
3. Lawn and Planted Areas: Minimum of 90% of SPD.
3.05 SURFACE RESTORATION
A. Finish Grading: Refer to Section 02100. Fine grade all areas disturbed by the construction
operations after completion of backfilling and compacting. Areas which are to receive
pavements, surfacing, topsoil or landscaping shall be graded as required to allow installation of
the specific surface treatment. Grade all other areas to match the existing ground line.
B. Surface Improvement Repair and Replacement: Replace and repair any surface improvements
damaged or removed.
C. Refer to Section 02100 for placing topsoil, and other Division 2 sections for soil amendment and
installation of sod or other landscaping materials.
END OF SECTION
02225 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 02225
STRUCTURAL EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Excavating, backfilling, grading and compacting of site work related to building structures.
B. Prepare subgrade for building slabs, sidewalks, site pavements and other improvements.
C. Shore and brace excavations as required.
D. Dewater excavations as necessary.
E. Overexcavate existing native soils below new concrete foundation structures and/or slabs-on-
grade, recondition, recompact and replace in overexcavated area.
F. Furnish and install materials for passive and/or mechanical underslab ventilation system,
unless arranged for otherwise.
G. Finish grading and place topsoil adjacent to structures and other areas of the site disturbed by
construction activities, unless arranged for otherwise.
H. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01046, Access to Site.
2. Section 01410, Testing: Soils Report.
3. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
4. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
5. Section 02100, Site Preparation: Finish Grading.
6. Section 02115, Selective Clearing and Pruning.
7. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Compacting: Retaining walls and sitework
unrelated to structures.
8. Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
9. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Scarifying and compacting subgrade
below pavements.
10. Applicable Division 2 Landscaping Sections: Preparation of topsoil.
11. Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical
Specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
B. Soil Compaction Tests:
1. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99: Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of
Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer and a 12 inch drop.
a. Use method A, B, C or D, as appropriate, based on soil condition and judgment
of the testing laboratory.
b. Sample tests will be representative of materials to be placed.
c. Determine and provide optimum density curve for each type of material
encountered or utilized.
d. Include Atterberg Limits, grain size determination and specific gravity.
2. ASTM D2049: Test for Relative Density of Cohesion less soils.
C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to enable Architect/Engineer to determine
compliance with the Specifications for imported materials from each proposed source of
supplier.
1. Provide with this certificate a density test of a typical sample, in accordance with the
following reference standards.
a. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99.
b. ASTM D2049.
02225 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.03 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by Empire Labs
dated May 1981, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity
between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect. The
Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom.
1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request
written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow.
B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then determine for
himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface conditions normally
considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test hole borings be
encountered, the Contractor may be compensated for additional expenses resulting from such
conditions.
C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings.
D. Underground Obstructions:
1. Underground obstructions known to Architect/Engineer are shown on Drawings.
However, locations shown may prove inaccurate and other obstructions not known to
Architect/Engineer may be encountered.
2. Notify each utility owner and request that utilities be field located by surface
reference using flags at least 48 hours prior to trenching or excavation.
3. Expose and verify size, location and elevation of underground utilities and other
obstructions where conflicts might exist sufficiently in advance to permit changes in
the event of conflict.
a. Notify Architect/Engineer in case of conflict.
b. In case of conflict the proposed Work may be changed by the
Architect/Engineer.
4. Maintain, protect and support by shoring, bracing or other means existing utilities and
appurtenances.
5. If Contractor elects to remove underground obstructions, the following conditions shall
apply:
a. Replace all other underground obstructions with new materials.
b. Restore to original conditions or better.
6. Clean drainage culverts so they are free of sediment after construction.
E. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified. Excavation
includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed
in performance of the work, regardless of the type, character, composition or condition
thereof. Refer to paragraph 3.01.A.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from equipment and
vehicular traffic.
B. Protect existing trees to remain as specified in Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures. Take all
necessary care to prevent compaction of existing soil within the drip line of existing trees to
remain.
C. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in accordance
with requirements of Sections 01040, 01046 and 01060. Protect all utilities which are to
remain.
D. Protect excavations by shoring or bracing as required to maintain banks of excavation in safe
and stable condition and to protect adjacent existing and new construction.
E. Provide suitable protection against bodily injury in accordance with applicable codes and
governing authorities.
F. Underpin or otherwise support adjacent structures, service lines and pipe chases which may be
damaged by excavation work.
G. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath foundations from frost.
H. Notify Architect/Engineer of any unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue work in the
area until Architect/Engineer provides notification to resume work.
02225 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.05 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING
A. Notify the Architect/Engineer at completion of each phase of excavation prior to placement of
formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Also notify the Architect/Engineer prior
to placement of backfill of all foundations. Notification shall be at least 48 hours prior to
proceeding with the next phase of work.
B. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory
submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and Owner. Testing fees shall be
paid in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions.
1. The Contractor will pay for costs of additional testing required due to improper
performance of the work.
C. Soils Engineer shall make an open-hole inspection of the excavation for each building prior to
the placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Soils Engineer shall
also inspect structural backfill for building foundations prior to forming of footings or grade
beams, if not supported on undisturbed soil.
D. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing laboratory to
perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work until results have been
verified.
E. Compaction Tests:
1. Concrete Flatwork: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of
one (1) test for each 5,000 sq. ft., or portion thereof, of surface area for interior or
exterior concrete slabs-on-grade, sidewalks, aprons, or other flatwork, unless
otherwise modified by the Soils Report.
2. Foundation Walls: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of
one (1) test for each 50 lin. ft., or portion thereof, of building perimeter for
compaction adjacent to building foundation walls, unless otherwise modified by the
Soils Report.
3. Isolated Pad Footings: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate
of one (1) test under each group of four (4) pad footings, but not to exceed an area of
1,000 sq. ft.
4. Utility Trenches: Refer to Section 02221.
F. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove
defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Maintain and repair backfill, fill compaction and embankment settlement and make necessary
repairs to pavement, sidewalks or other structures which may be damaged as a result of
settlement for a period of one (1) year after Substantial Completion and acceptance of the
work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SELECTED FILL MATERIALS
A. General: Use onsite or imported soil approved by the Soils Engineer for rough fill and for
backfill against the outside of foundation walls except as specified below. Material shall be
clean, compactable earth, free of frozen material, debris, deleterious or organic substances or
large rocks.
B. Structural Fill: On-site natural soils, devoid of debris or imported granular materials approved
by the Soils Engineer, mechanically compacted as specified below and extended to original
undisturbed soil. Use under floor slabs and exterior concrete where approved on-site material
is available or where shown on the Drawings.
1. Material shall be uniformly graded of low permeability and a swell potential of less
than 1%.
C. Coarse Granular Fill: Clean, crushed, non-porous rock, crushed or uncrushed gravel graded
from 3/8" to 1-1/2".
02225 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
D. Fine Granular Fill: Natural or manufactured sand and pea gravel, clean and free of organic
debris graded from 3/8" to No. 100 sieve.
E. Topsoil: Refer to landscaping sections of Division 2. Topsoil stripped and stockpiled on-site
may be used if it meets the requirements of these Sections. Topsoil shall consist of selectively
excavated, loose, friable loam reasonably free of admixtures of subsoil, refuse, stumps, roots,
rocks, brush, weeds or other material which would be detrimental to the proper development
of vegetative growth.
F. Unsuitable Materials: All material removed in stripping and all material containing perishable
matter such as roots, sod, grass, decayed vegetable matter, debris or materials having
unsatisfactory compaction characteristics shall be classified as unsuitable for use in the work.
All excavation of unsuitable material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the
Contractor.
1. Materials which are temporarily unusable due to excessive moisture or improper
gradation will not be classified as unsuitable unless such material cannot be
satisfactorily reclaimed by screening, manipulation, aerating or blending with other
materials as determined by the Soils Engineer.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Silt Fence (Erosion Control): Woven filter fabric, type and size as required by the City of Fort
Collins and/or the State of Colorado. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation
Control.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Classification of Excavation: The following definitions shall only apply when additional
excavation is authorized by the Architect/Engineer and/or rock excavation is encountered. Do
not proceed with the work until the material has been cross-sectioned and classified.
1. Earth Excavation: Removal and disposal of on-site soils and other materials indicated
on the Drawings, and all other material as indicated by the subsurface soil data and not
classified as rock excavation.
2. Rock Excavation: Removal and disposal of materials that cannot be excavated without
drilling, blasting or ripping, or boulders larger than 1/2 cu. yd. in volume.
B. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and this Section. If the
foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to
this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section.
1. Ensure that modifications to the existing site irrigation system have been completed, or
lines shut off or capped within the area of construction, prior to beginning work.
C. Silt Fence: Install silt fence fabric using wooden posts and straw bales or other required
accessory erosion control materials where indicated on the Drainage and Erosion Control Plan,
or as required by the authority with jurisdiction over the work of the Project. Maintain in
place until such authority permits its removal. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and
Sedimentation Control.
D. Clear and strip surface vegetation, sod and organic topsoil for subgrades for areas within
construction boundaries as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Architect/Engineer. The
stripped topsoil shall be stored for later use in the site finish grading. Also refer to Section
02115.
1. Extent of Stripping: As required for new construction, as shown on the Drawings, or as
directed by the Architect/Engineer. Topsoil shall not be stripped or existing vegetative
cover disturbed in excess of these limits without written approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
E. Contractor shall take all necessary safety precautions to ensure the safety of all workers and
the public in and around excavations, including shoring, bracing and barricades.
02225 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
F. Brace and properly support all structural elements, including foundation walls, grade beams,
and pier caps prior to beginning and continuously during backfilling and compacting operations.
G. Soils Engineer: The Soils Engineer shall inspect the natural soil at the bottom of excavations
for structures, prior to forming or placing foundations. Provide Engineer with 48 hours notice
(exclusive of weekends and holidays) when the areas are expected to be ready for such
inspections.
1. Do not prepare subgrade or place concrete until such inspection has taken place (or
waived by Engineer) and resulting recommendations of Engineer have been carried out.
3.02 ROUGH GRADING
A. Rough grade site to required levels, profiles, contours and elevations ready for finish grading
and surface treatment. Maintain the following:
1. Planting Areas: 6" below finished grade elevation.
2. Concrete Sidewalks: 4" below finished grade elevation, unless granular backfill is
specified below walks.
3. Building Slabs: 8" minimum below finished slab elevation, or as required by the Soils
Report for the slab thickness and thickness of granular backfill specified.
B. Prior to placing fill material over undisturbed subsoil, scarify surface to depth of 6", bring to 2%
wet of optimum moisture and compact as follows:
1. Adjacent to Building Foundations: Minimum 95% of Standard Proctor Density at 2% wet
of optimum moisture content ASTM D698-78.
2. Pavement Areas: 95% of SPD at 2% wet of OMC, ASTM D698-78.
3. Planting Areas: 90% of SPD at 2% wet of OMC, ASTM D698-78.
C. Place fill in lifts of 6" to 8" maximum loose layers, bring to 2% wet of OMC and compact each
layer as specified above.
D. Stockpile existing topsoil and fill materials removed from excavation for reuse in final grading.
E. Contractor shall take special care in rough grading and filling of site areas which can lead to
non-uniform settling and compaction.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when
establishing grade elevations.
1. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Architect/Engineer.
Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect/Engineer,
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
2. Under footings, foundation walls, grade beams, retaining walls or other structural
elements, fill unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom elevation of
the footing or base to the excavation bottom without altering required top elevation.
3. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified in paragraph
3.02.C.
B. Blasting: No blasting will be permitted as a part this Project without written authorization
from the Owner's principal representative.
C. Stability of Excavation:
1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace
where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material
excavated.
2. Ensure the stability of materials under foundation structures of existing buildings
adjacent to new excavations. Shore and brace as required during excavation and
maintain until new foundations or compacted backfill materials are in place.
3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of
backfilling.
4. Verify that bottom of excavation for footings and foundations is on original undisturbed
soil. If it is not, overexcavate and fill with approved structural fill material extending
from original undisturbed soil to bottom of footings and foundations, compacting as
specified in paragraph 3.06.
02225 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
D. Sheeting and Shoring:
1. Sheet, shore or brace banks and trenches not cut back to a stable slope as necessary to
prevent sliding or caving to protect workmen and the work.
2. Design and build sheeting and shoring to withstand loads which might be caused by
earth movement and pressure and to be rigid, maintaining its shape and position.
3. Support sheeting in excavation in a manner so as not to concentrate loads or horizontal
thrusts on piping. Do not brace sheeting against the pipe.
E. Dewatering:
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface ground water from flowing into excavations and
from flooding project site and surrounding area.
2. Conduct dewatering operations in addition to good, positive drainage and eliminate
standing water. Dewater excavations for concrete structures extending below ground
water level by lowering and maintaining the water level beneath such excavations
minimum 24".
3. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening
of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability
of subgrades and adjacent foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points,
sumps, suction and discharge lines and other dewatering system components necessary
to convey water away from excavations.
4. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or run-off areas.
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary
drainage ditches.
5. Keep excavations dry during subgrade preparation and continuously thereafter until the
structure is built to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation or
other cause will result.
F. Material Storage:
1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials and topsoil until required for backfilling.
Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
3. Stockpile materials away from sidewalks, streets, alleys and other public areas that are
to remain accessible during construction. Maintain site access as required for workers
and the Owner. Refer to Section 01046 for required site access.
4. Dispose of excess soil materials and waste materials as specified in paragraph 3.09.
G. Excavation for Trenches: Refer to Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
H. Weather Protection:
1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than
35° F.
2. Do not backfill or construct fills or embankments during freezing weather.
3. Do not place backfill on frozen surfaces.
4. Do not place frozen materials, snow or ice in backfill, fill or embankment.
5. Do not deposit, stamp, roll or otherwise mechanically compact backfill in water.
3.04 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of +/- 0.10' and extending a
sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete
formwork, installation of services, other construction and inspection.
B. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to
required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete.
C. Verify that bottom of excavation for footings and foundations is on original undisturbed soil. If
it is not, overexcavate and fill with approved structural fill material extending from original
undisturbed soil to bottom of footings and foundations, compacting as specified in paragraph
3.06.
D. Do not interfere with normal 45° bearing splay of any foundation.
E. Under building slabs, remove minimum 8" of existing material below finished slab elevation.
Refer to paragraph 3.05 below for overexcavation of soils below slabs-on-grade.
02225 - 7
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
F. Bottom of perimeter drain shall be sloped uniformly at 0.5% minimum to sump pump or gravity
discharge, as shown on the Drawings.
3.05 OVEREXCAVATION OF EXISTING SOIL
A. Existing fill and/or native soil material below concrete footings, foundation structures and/or
slabs-on-grade shall be overexcavated and removed to a depth of 1'-0" below the foundations or
slabs, as recommended in the Soils Report, unless a structural floor slab is designed and shown
on the Drawings. Refer to the Structural Drawings.
B. Excavated native material shall be reconditioned as directed in the Soils Report, replaced in
the excavation and compacted as specified in this Section.
C. Reconditioned existing fill material shall extend from the level of undisturbed soil to the
bottom of the footings, foundation structures and/or slabs-on-grade, as directed by the Soils
Report.
3.06 BACKFILLING
A. Do not start backfilling until services and dampproofing or waterproofing systems have been
inspected.
B. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground
surfaces are not in a frozen condition.
C. Do not backfill over existing subgrade surfaces which are porous, wet or spongy.
D. Compact existing subgrade surfaces if densities are not equal to that required for backfill
materials.
E. Cut out soft areas of existing subgrade, backfill with subsoil and compact to required density.
F. Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations. Backfill systematically and as early as
possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction.
G. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8" loose depth. Use a
method so as not to disturb or damage building drainage system.
H. Where imbalanced pressures will develop on foundation walls in basement or crawlspace
situations, ensure that floor framing and decking is in place prior to backfilling.
I. Where temporary unbalanced pressures are liable to develop on walls before floor slabs are
placed, erect necessary shoring to counteract imbalance and leave in place until their removal
is approved by Architect/Engineer.
I. Maintain 2% wet of OMC of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
J. Backfill simultaneously on each side of foundation walls to equalize soil pressures.
K. Utility Trench Backfill: Refer to Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
L. Building Slab Backfill: Verify removal of existing material below slabs-on-grade, as specified in
paragraph 3.02 above.
M. Subsoil Treatment: Scarify the upper 6" of subgrade below and treat with 6 pounds of hydrated
lime per sq. yd., only if required by the Soils Report.
1. Wet treated soil 2% wet of OMC and compact to 95% of SPD per ASTM D698-78.
2. After scarification and compaction of the subgrade, place approved backfill materials
in uniform 6" to 8" lifts compacted 2% wet of OMC to at least 95% of SPD per ASTM
D698-78.
3.07 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION
A. Structural Backfill below Footings and Foundations: On-site natural soils, devoid of debris, or
imported, non-expansive granular materials approved by Soils Engineer, mechanically
compacted to a minimum of 98% of SPD.
B. Building Slabs: On-site natural soils or select granular non-expansive materials approved by the
Soils Engineer to underside of stabilizing base course, mechanically compacted to a minimum
of 95% of SPD.
C. Backfill Around Structures: Mechanically compact to a minimum of 95% of SPD.
D. Site Pavements and Sidewalks: Subsoil or approved fill to underside of stabilizing base course.
Compact each layer of fill material at 2% wet of OMC to a minimum 95% of SPD per ASTM D698-
78.
02225 - 8
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
E. Lawn and Landscaped Areas: Subsoil to top of subgrade elevation, compacted to 90% of SPD.
F. Compaction Equipment: Use compaction equipment suitable for the types of soils and
materials being compacted.
1. Sheepfoot Roller: If used provide with cleaner bars attached as to prevent the
accumulation of materials between the tamper feet.
2. Rollers: Use rollers so designed that the effective weight can be increased as required
to obtain specified compaction.
3. Vibrating plate compactors.
G. Ponding or flooding is not allowed for any compaction.
3.08 FINISH GRADING
A. Rough grade subsoil systematically to allow for a maximum amount of natural settlement and
compaction. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones,
etc. in excess of 3" in size. Remove subsoil which has been contaminated with petroleum
products.
B. Bring subsoil to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradually and
blend slopes into existing areas. Maintain tolerance within .10' of required subgrade, except
under building slabs where final grades shall be within 1/2" of required elevation.
C. Slope finish grade away from building minimum 5% for the first 10', unless indicated otherwise
on the Drawings.
D. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6" where topsoil is to be placed and compact as specified.
Provide depth allowances for topsoil placement.
E. Place and shape subgrade for landscape berms and other artificially created earthen features
as shown on the Drawings.
3.09 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. General: Spreading of topsoil shall be the responsibility of this Section, unless provided by
Section 02100, Site Preparation, or arranged for otherwise.
B. Place and spread topsoil with minimum depth of 6", using suitable stockpiled, on-site material,
supplemented with imported material as required.
C. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather.
D. Fine grade topsoil to within 1" of finish contours unless otherwise required for areas receiving
sod, mulch or other landscape treatment, eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive
drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades to tie new work into existing.
E. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, debris and other foreign materials while spreading.
F. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants and buildings to prevent compaction and damage
which may be caused by grading equipment.
G. Do not change elevation of finish grade around existing trees to remain more than 6" without
specific approval of the Architect.
H. Lightly compact placed topsoil and leave prepared for soil preparation and landscaping
specified in other Sections of Division 2.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Compaction Control: Field tests shall be conducted to determine compliance of
compaction methods with specified density in accordance with:
1. ASTM D2922 (AASHTO T238): Tests for Density of Soil and Soil - Aggregate In-Place by
Nuclear Methods, or,
2. ASTM D1556 (AASHTO T191): Tests for Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone
Method.
3. ASTM D2167 (AASHTO T205): Tests for Density of Soil In-Place by Rubber-Balloon
Method.
B. Compaction shall be to the minimum densities specified in paragraph 3.06 above.
C. Moisture Content: Compact soils within +/- 2% of optimum moisture. Add water, harrow, disc,
blade or otherwise work material as required to insure uniform moisture content and adequate
protection.
02225 - 9
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified
tolerances until Substantial Completion and acceptance of the work of this Section by the
Owner.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, or where topsoil has been compacted
in excess of the specified limits, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density prior
to further construction.
3.12 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Excess Fill: Remove and dispose of debris and excess materials off of Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
02930 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 02930
SODDING AND SEEDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare soil surfaces as specified.
B. Furnish soil amendment materials, fertilizers and other specified chemicals.
C. Furnish and install sod for lawn areas as shown on the Drawings.
D. Furnish and install seed for lawn areas as shown on the Drawings.
E. Maintain landscaping for minimum 60 days after acceptance.
F. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01410, Testing: Soils Investigation Report.
2. Section 02100, Site Preparation: Placement of topsoil.
3. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading.
4. Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
5. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
6. Section 02810, Underground Irrigation System.
7. Section 02950, Trees, Plants and Ground Cover.
1.02 CUTTING, DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Cut and roll sod for delivery with reasonable care and skill in accordance with recognized
standard practice. Cut sod in pieces approximately 3/4" to 1" thick.
B. Deliver on pallets and protect by placing in shade where possible, out of drying sun and wind.
Do not deliver more sod than can be laid in an 8-hour period.
1.03 INSPECTIONS
A. Sod materials shall be inspected upon delivery by the Landscape Contractor prior to
installation. Materials damaged by heat or drying or that do not meet standard requirements
will be rejected.
B. Pre-Maintenance Inspection:
1. As soon as all planting is completed, a planting review and preliminary inspection to
determine the condition of the plantings will be held by the Architect.
2. The Contractor shall have all planting areas free of weeds and neatly cultivated. All
plant basins shall be in good repair. Irrigation systems shall be fully operational with
all heads properly adjusted. All debris and litter shall be cleaned up, and all walkways
and curbs shall be cleaned of soil and debris left from planting operations. The
inspection shall not occur until these conditions are met.
3. If, after the inspection, the Architect is of the opinion that all work has been
performed as per the Contract Documents and that all plant materials are in
satisfactory growing condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of
acceptance, and the 60-day maintenance period shall begin.
4. Work requiring corrective action in the judgment of the Architect shall be performed
within the first ten (10) days of the maintenance period. Any work not performed
within this time will necessitate an equivalent extension of the maintenance period.
Corrective work and materials replacement shall be in accordance with the contract
documents and shall be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
C. Final Inspection:
1. At the completion of the maintenance period, final inspection shall be performed by
the Owner.
2. If, after the inspection, the Owner is of the opinion that all work has been performed
as per the Contract Documents and that all plant materials are in satisfactory growing
condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of acceptance and completion of
the formal maintenance period.
02930 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3. Final approval will not be given until all deficiencies are corrected.
1.04 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE
A. Warranty: All sod and other seed materials shall be guaranteed to take root, grow and thrive
for the following periods: Spring planting shall be until June 1 of the following year; fall
planting shall be for one (1) calendar year from final acceptance, or October 1 of the following
year, whichever is later. During this period, remove all materials which die or which in the
opinion of the Owner are in an unhealthy or impaired condition. At the appropriate planting
time, all previously removed materials shall be replaced with sod or seed materials of the same
kinds as the original specifications at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Maintenance Program: None required beyond the initial 60-day maintenance period and
warranty period specified above.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOD
A. General: Sod mix to be Tall Fescue, Smooth Brome and Bluegrass (verify with Owner's
Representative). Sod shall be weed- and pest-free, containing no more than 1% of other
grasses.
B. Sod shall be healthy, field grown and at least one (1) year old.
C. Sod shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick, harvested in rolls, fertilized 2-3 weeks before cutting
and delivered to the site within 24 hours of harvesting.
2.02 SOIL AMENDMENTS/FERTILIZERS
A. Composted Manure – Composted Dairy Cow or Sheep Manure: Free from lumps, stones, or other
foreign matter. Free from mineral matter or chemical composition harmful to plant life.
Manure that has received treatment with a bacterial enzyme culture raising the manure
temperature to 145° minimum for 3 weeks minimum, ages at least 18 months, yielding a soil
amendment with the following properties:
1. Organic Matter: 35-40% (oven-dry basis)
2. Total Nitrogen: 1.6-2.0%
3. Conductivity: 50.0 EC’s (max)
4. pH: 7.5 to 8.5
2.04 MULCH
A. Hydro Mulch: 100% virgin wood fiber mulch containing a specified range of fiber lengths, with
a minimum of 25% of the fibers averaging 0.4 inches long. Wood fibers shall have the following
properties:
1. Moisture Content: 12.0% ± 3%
2. Organic Matter: 99.3%
3. Inorganic (Ash) Content: 0.7%
4. pH at 3% Consistency in water (average): 4.7
5. Water-Holding Capacity: 1000g/100g
(1.2 gal/lb fiber)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Ensure that grading has been established to within +/- 1" of required finished grades. Notify
the Contractor in writing prior to commencing soil preparation work if existing grades are not
satisfactory, or assume responsibility for conditions as they exist.
02930 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Before proceeding with work, check and verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations
between the Drawings and the site to the Architect before proceeding with work.
C. Landscape Contractor shall inspect and approve in writing installation of site irrigation system
prior to beginning work, if irrigation system is furnished and installed by separate contract by
the Owner.
3.02 FINISH GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION
A. Prior to any soil preparation, existing vegetation not to remain and which might interfere with
the specified soil preparation shall be moved, grubbed, raked and the debris removed from the
site. Prior to grading or tillage operations, the ground surface shall be cleared of materials
which might hinder final operation.
B. Over all areas to be planted, well-decayed cow manure or equivalent organic matter shall be
applied uniformly at the rate of 3 cu. yds. per 1,000 sq. ft. Super phosphate shall be broadcast
at the rate of 25 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft. Areas to be planted shall be tilled to a depth of 6" and
raked to a suitable finish grade. All clods, debris and rocks not passing through a hand rake
shall be removed from the surface.
C. Apply fertilizer formulation of 18-46-0 spread to ensure one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 sq.
ft., with one-half being spread and incorporated into the soil during tilling. The second half
will be spread just prior to laying the sod.
D. Finish grade for areas to be planted shall be 3/4" to 1" below all adjacent curbs, headers, walls
or paved surfaces. Finish grade for areas to be mulched with rock or gravel shall be 3" below
adjacent curbs or paved surfaces. Finish grades shall conform to site grading plans and
produce a smooth surface without abrupt changes. All grades shall provide for natural run-off
of water without low spots or pockets. Flow-line grades shall be accurately set and shall be
not less than 2% gradient wherever possible.
3.03 SODDING
A. Approximate limits of new sodding are shown on the Drawings.
B. Lay sod as soon as possible, but no longer than eight (8) hours after delivery to avoid
deterioration.
C. Moisten sod bed thoroughly prior to installation.
D. Lay sod in rows with joints staggered. Butt sections closely without overlapping or leaving gaps
between sections. Cut out irregular or thin sections with a sharp knife.
E. Immediately water sodded areas after installation. Water in sufficient amounts to saturate sod
and upper 6" of soil. Water regularly as required to maintain healthy turf.
F. When surface of grass has dried, roll sod with a tight roller diagonally, leveling irregularities
and sealing joints. Repair and reroll areas with depressions, lumps or other irregularities.
G. Provide adequate protection of sodded areas against trespassing, erosion and damage of any
kind. Remove this protection after sodded areas have been accepted by Architect.
H. Replace damaged areas at no additional cost to Owner.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Landscape Contractor shall continuously maintain all sod and/or seed in turf areas included in
the work during the progress of the work and for a period of 60 days after completion of all
work until final acceptance of all Contract work by the Owner.
B. Clean-up of all debris shall be performed by the Landscape Contractor daily and a complete
cleanup accomplished upon completion of the job.
C. Protection: Protect planted and sodded areas against traffic or other use immediately after
seeding or sodding is completed by placing adequate warning signs and barricades.
END OF SECTION
02950 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 02950
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Excavate shrub and tree planting holes.
B. Furnish and install plant materials, weed barrier, edging, mulch and all other items necessary
to complete the installation and normally included in similar work, whether specifically shown
on the Construction Documents or not.
C. Furnish and install wire mesh protection fencing around groupings of plant materials, complete
with all accessories, transformers, wiring and controls.
D. Maintain landscaping for minimum 60 days after acceptance.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01410, Testing: Soils Investigation Report.
2. Section 02115, Selective Clearing: Pruning of existing trees.
3. Section 02810, Underground Irrigation Systems.
4. Section 02930, Sodding and Seeding.
5. Division 16, Electrical: Power for wire mesh fencing systems.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Plants shall meet standards as set forth in the current edition of "American Standard for
Nursery Stock" published by the American Association of Nurserymen.
B. Nomenclature shall be as set forth in the current edition of "American Joint Committee on
Horticultural Nomenclature".
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature, specifications, installation
and maintenance instructions for the low-voltage fencing system.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prepare, handle and pack plants for delivery with reasonable care and skill in accordance with
recognized standard practice for the type of plant concerned.
B. Whenever practicable, all material shall be planted the same day as delivered. If not possible,
protect all stock by placing in shade where possible, out of drying sun and wind.
C. Cover soil balls with mulch or dampened tarps and moisten tops and balls as necessary.
D. Lift and handle plants from the bottom of the ball only.
E. Conduct pruning only after delivery to the site.
1.05 INSPECTION
A. Pre-Planting Inspection:
1. All plant material must be inspected at the place of growth and/or on the project site
before planting commences. Plants shall be inspected for size, variety, condition,
defects or injury. The Architect reserves the right to reject unsatis-factory plant
material at any time during the work.
2. Notify the Architect of the source of material no later than 30 days after award of the
contract.
3. All fertilizers, pre-mixed backfill mixes, mulches and soil amendments will be
inspected at the site by the Architect before they are used in planting operations.
B. Planting Inspections: The Architect shall approve the staked location of all trees before digging
for those trees occurs.
02950 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
C. Pre-Maintenance Inspection:
1. As soon as all planting is completed, a planting review and preliminary inspection to
determine the condition of the planting will be held by the Architect.
2. The Contractor shall have all planting areas free of weeds and neatly cultivated. All
plant basins shall be in good repair. Irrigation systems shall be fully operational with
all heads properly adjusted. All debris and litter shall be cleaned up, and all walkways
and curbs shall be cleaned of soil and debris left from planting operations. The
inspection shall not occur until these conditions are met.
3. If, after the inspection, the Architect is of the opinion that all work has been
performed as per the Contract Documents and that all plant materials are in
satisfactory growing condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of
acceptance, and the 60-day maintenance period shall begin.
4. Work requiring corrective action in the judgment of the Architect shall be performed
within the first ten (10) days of the maintenance period. Any work not performed
within this time will necessitate an equivalent extension of the maintenance period.
Corrective work and materials replacement shall be in accordance with the contract
documents and shall be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
D. Final Inspection:
1. At the completion of the maintenance period, final inspection shall be performed by
the Owner.
2. If, after the inspection, the Architect is of the opinion that all work has been
performed as per the Contract Documents and that all plant materials are in
satisfactory growing condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of acceptance
and completion of the formal maintenance period shall begin.
3. Final approval will not be given until all deficiencies are corrected.
1.06 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE
A. Warranty: All trees, shrubs, groundcovers and other plant materials shall be guaranteed to
take root and grow and thrive for a period of one (1) calendar year after final acceptance of
the work.
B. Any trees or other plant materials that die back and lose the form and size originally specified
shall be replaced, even though they have taken root and are growing after the die-back.
C. Within 15 days of written notification by the Owner, remove and replace all guaranteed plant
materials which for any reason fail to meet requirements of guarantee. Replacement planting
for trees shall be done in the spring planting season only, except as approved otherwise.
Replacements shall be made to same specifications required for original materials and shall
carry the same guarantee from the time they are replaced.
D. Maintenance Program: None required beyond the initial 60-day maintenance period and
warranty period specified above.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANT MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Plant List on the Drawings for specified types of plants, plant sizes,
quantities and location. The Architect may modify location or spacing to suit field conditions
when the final field layout is made.
B. Furnish plant materials in quantities and sizes as per Plant List or as shown on the Drawings.
Plants larger in size than specified may be furnished with the approval of the Architect, but at
no change in contract price. For larger plants, the ball of earth or spread of roots shall be
proportional as specified in AAN standards.
C. All plants shall be first-class representatives of their normal species or varieties, healthy,
shapely and with well-developed branches and vigorous root systems. Roots shall show no
evidence of being restricted, deformed or rootbound, free from disfiguring knots, sunscale,
insects, bark abrasions, wind or freezing injury or other objectionable disfigurations.
02950 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
D. Furnish plants either balled and burlapped (B & B) or in containers, as specified in the
Drawings.
1. Conform to standards for minimum size of ball for B & B plants. Securely burlap B & B
plants to prevent cracking or mushrooming of balls during transit, handling and
planting.
2. Container plants shall meet standards as specified for specific plants, shall be well
established and typical of such plants. Container plants shall have been growing in the
container for one (1) growing season prior to planting.
E. Ground Covers: Container-grown, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. Space evenly to
produce a uniform effect, staggered in rows and intervals shown.
F. All plants shall be certified as having had at least one (1) complete growing season in Colorado
prior to delivery for this project.
G. Substitutions of plants other than those named in the Plant List will not be acceptable, unless
specifically approved in writing by the Architect. If proof is submitted that specified plants or
sizes are unobtainable, proposals will be considered for the nearest equivalent variety of size
with equitable adjustment of the contract.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Peat: Peat shall be a natural local product of Mountain Peat free from lumps, roots, stones or
other debris detrimental to the landscape planting.
B. Composted Manure: Composted dairy cow or sheep manure, free from lumps, stones or other
foreign matter and free from mineral matter or chemical composition harmful to plant life.
Manure that has received treatment with a bacterial enzyme culture raising the manure
temperature to 145° F minimum for three (3) weeks minimum, aged at least 18 months,
yielding a soil amendment with the following properties:
1. Organic Matter: 35-40% (over-dry basis).
2. Total Nitrogen: 1.6-2.0%.
3. Conductivity: 50.0 EC's (maximum).
4. Submit analysis as required by 1.04.
C. Fertilizer: Fertilizer for planting pits shall be a slow-release type similar to Agriform Planting
Tablets, tightly compressed, long-lasting, slow-release fertilizer tablets and having an analysis
of 20-10-5.
D. Edging: Steel edging shall be 14-gage minimum steel strap, to be installed vertically, bolted or
welded at joints. The top of edging shall be 1/2" above sod grade, and covered in protective
sleeving. Edging shall be notched for drainage where needed.
E. Weed Barrier: Typar, Mirafi, or Dewitt filter fabric or similar product.
F. Mulch:
1. Fibrous Wood Mulch: Natural Red Cedar peelings or fibrous mulch, free from weeds,
seeds or other foreign matter. Bark or chip mulch is not acceptable.
2. Gravel Mulch: River washed gravel, 1-1/2" nominal size (7/8" to 1-1/2" size range),
approximately 35% fractured faces maximum. Acceptable colors are gray or tan; pink
is not acceptable. Submit sample for approval.
3. Mulch shall be carefully hand-placed around plants in a uniform 3" thick compacted
layer over fine graded planting areas, 1"-2" in ground cover areas.
G. Materials for Staking, Guying and Wrapping Trees:
1. Tree Stakes: 6' long metal T-posts.
2. Guy Anchors: 24" long #3 rebar.
3. Guying and Staking Wire: Galvanized iron or steel 12-gage wire.
4. Webbing: 2" nylon webbing or rubberized cloth.
5. Tree Wrap: 4" minimum width commercial tree wrap.
2.03 LANDSCAPE PROTECTION FENCING
A. General: Furnish and install 1-1/2" steel "T"-stakes and 1" x 2" heavy-gage wire mesh fencing
system to protect trees, shrubs and other landscape materials from damage by wildlife.
02950 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Ensure that grading has been established to within +/- 1" of required finished grades. Notify the
Architect prior to commencing soil preparation work if existing grades are not satisfactory, or
assume responsibility for conditions as they exist.
B. Before proceeding with work, check and verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations
between the Drawings and the site to the Architect before proceeding with work.
C. Verify locations of all existing and new utility lines and services prior to excavation.
D. Landscape Contractor shall inspect and approve in writing installation of site irrigation system
prior to beginning work, if irrigation system is furnished and installed by separate contract by
the Owner.
3.02 FINISH GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION
A. Refer to Section 02930 for soil preparation. Finish grade for areas to be planted shall be 3/4"
to 1" below all adjacent curbs, headers, walls or paved surfaces. Finish grade for areas to be
mulched with rock or gravel shall be 3" below adjacent curbs or paved surfaces.
B. Finish grades shall conform to site grading plans and produce a smooth surface without abrupt
changes. All grades shall provide for natural run-off of water without low spots or pockets.
Flow-line grades shall be accurately set and shall be not less than 2% gradient wherever
possible.
3.03 PLANT MATERIAL INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install plant materials until all construction work has been completed and
sprinkler systems have been installed and tested. Planting areas shall have been graded and
prepared as herein specified and shall have been approved by the Architect.
B. Plant conifers so that the top of the ball is higher than ground level and cover with 1/2" of
conditioned soil, gently sloping down to ground level. All other plants shall be placed in pits at
such level after settlement that will have the same relation to the finished ground and
exposure as original growing location.
C. All planting holes shall be half again deeper and wider than the root ball of the plant. One (1)
unit of peat moss to three (3) units of topsoil shall be incorporated together for each planted
item. Add fertilizer tablets, following manufacturer's suggestions as to amount for various
sized plants. The plant shall be watered in thoroughly, leaving a mulched tree basin around
each plant, after settling and final backfilling.
D. Weed Barrier Installation: Shall be placed in all shrub beds except those containing ground
covers or perennials. At all edges of curbs, walls and edging, weed barrier should be turned
down 8" minimum into soil or overlap 8" and staple 18" o.c. with 11-gage 12" long staples.
E. Staking: Stake or guy trees in a vertical position. Guy all coniferous trees. Stake or guy all
trees immediately after planting. Drive stakes perpendicularly 3' into ground at edge of root
ball. Securely nail or bolt rubber straps to stakes, leave loose enough for 3" lateral
movements.
F. Wrapping: Wrap all deciduous trees no sooner than October 1st and no later than November
30th.
G. Mulching: All shrub beds shall be mulched with a 3" layer of specified mulch as indicated on
the Drawings. All tree basins shall be mulched with a 3" layer of mulch, minimum 3'-0"
diameter around trunk.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF LANDSCAPE PROTECTION FENCING
A. General: Install wire mesh fencing system in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations.
B. Install fencing around all groupings of trees/shrubs and other landscape materials, in
compliance with applicable City of Fort Collins standards.
02950 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance of plant materials shall be the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor during
the installation and for a period of 60 days after completion of all work until acceptance by the
Owner.
B. Replace any trees or other plant materials damaged during plating or by subsequent
construction activities.
C. Cleanup of all debris shall be performed by the landscape contractor daily and a complete
cleanup accomplished upon completion of the job.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
03100 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment necessary for the complete construction of required
formwork for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Furnish and install anchor bolts, connectors, embedded plates, dovetail slots and anchors and
other accessories required to be cast into concrete work.
C. Furnish materials and equipment necessary to strip and remove formwork.
D. Install embedded items furnished by other Sections.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading.
2. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
3. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Forming equipment.
4. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
5. Section 03480, Precast Concrete Accessories: Forms for plant-fabricated accessories.
6. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
7. Division 15, Mechanical.
8. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of ACI 301, "Specification
for Structural Concrete in Buildings", and ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete
Formwork", unless otherwise shown.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and engineering, construction and maintenance
of formwork, as well as its adequacy and safety.
C. Contractor shall design formwork for all loads and lateral pressures before and during
placement of concrete. Maintain position and shape of formwork at all times. Provide positive
means of adjustment for shores and forms which rest on compressible material.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, specifications and installation
instructions for all void form, form-coating materials, manufactured form systems, form ties
and accessories.
B. Samples: Submit pattern illustrations or samples for stamped pattern concrete forms for
selection by the Architect.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Fiber Forms: Store prefabricated fiber forms on site horizontally if length requires, supported
along the entire length of the form and elevated a minimum 4" off of ground, completely
covered with waterproof membrane including ends, and not stacked over 5'-0" high. If stored
vertically, the ends shall be covered with waterproof membrane and elevated a minimum 4" off
of ground.
03100 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE
A. Construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with prefabricated sections of metal-
framed/plywood-faced, metal or plastic panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight,
smooth, solid exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints. Do not use any forms having defects on contact surfaces.
1. Plywood forms will only be acceptable upon specific approval of the Architect, and
then only after visual inspection on the job site.
2. Plywood for facing of metal framed formwork shall be sufficiently thick to withstand
pressure of wet concrete without bow or deflection but shall not be less than 5/8"
thick, complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1, "B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete
Form, Class 1", or "B-B Exterior Type DFPA Plyform, Class 1".
B. Chamfer exposed external corners and edges, using chamfer strips accurately fabricated to
produce uniform smooth lines and tight-edge joints.
1. Chamfer Size(s): As indicated on the Drawings, or 3/4" minimum.
C. Refer to the Drawings for locations where special joints may be required.
D. Arrangement for sheets or liner sheets shall be orderly and symmetrical. Form ties shall be
spaced uniformly and aligned horizontally and vertically where locations are exposed to view in
the completed project.
2.02 FORMWORK FOR UNEXPOSED CONCRETE
A. Form concrete which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, boards, metal or
other acceptable material. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least two (2) edges and one
(1) side for a tight fit.
B. Earthen or trenched forms shall not be used for vertical formwork.
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Premolded Joint Fillers: In joints caulked or sealed with silicone or thiokol-based compound,
filler shall be non-bituminous, non-extruding, conforming to ASTM D1752. In all other joints,
filler shall be bituminous type conforming to ASTM D1751. Filler shall be 1/2" thick, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Non-Bituminous Filler: Sonoflex F by Sonneborne or equal.
B. Premolded Fiberboard Joint Fillers (Bituminous-Type): Preformed rigid cane fiberboard
material, impregnated with a durable asphaltic compound, conforming to AASHTO-M213.
Fillers shall be 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Bituminous Filler: Flexcell by Celotex or approved equal.
C. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings or required by the work, provide minimum two
(2) layers 15-lb. non-bituminous felt bond breaker.
D. Column Isolation Joints: Joints around columns may be formed with minimum 30# non-
bituminous building felt left in place with neatly trimmed top edge or approved joint filler
material.
E. Keyways: Provide nominal 1-1/2" deep keyways in all construction joints in walls, slabs and
joints between walls and slabs, unless otherwise shown.
F. Form Ties: Provide factory-fabricated break-back, removable, or snap-type form ties designed
to prevent spalling concrete surfaces on removal and which will leave no metal within 1/2" of
concrete surface. Use stainless steel, plastic-coated or hot-dipped galvanized at exposed con-
crete with cone-shaped tie heads, manufactured by Dayton, Gates, Heckman, Richmond or
approved equal.
G. Release Agent: Provide commercial formulated synthetic resin or oil-type form coating
compounds that will not bond with or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair
subsequent finish treatment of surfaces, manufactured by Protex Pro-Coat, Euclid Eucoslip, J &
P Tex-Mastic or approved equal.
1. Contractor shall ensure that release agent is compatible with the finish requirements of
concrete to be exposed to view.
03100 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
H. Metal Inserts: Provide adjustable wedge inserts of malleable cast iron complete with bolts,
nuts, washers, 3/4" bolt size, unless otherwise shown, manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard,
Gateway, Dayton or approved equal.
I. Embedded Dovetail Anchor Slots and Anchors: Refer to Section 03250, Concrete Accessories.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225. If the
foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to
this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section.
B. Expansion, Construction and Other Joints: Properly lay out work and make necessary
preparations for construction of specified joints in cast-in-place concrete work.
1. Take special care to provide joints to allow for removal of sections of concrete
foundations, walls or flatwork for future construction where shown on the Drawings.
3.02 FABRICATION
A. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions as
shown on the Drawings and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level
and plumb work in finished structures. Use selected material to obtain the required finishes.
Concrete tolerances shall be as specified in Section 03300.
B. Construct formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place
concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
C. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete
placement. Solidly butt all joints and provide backup materials at joints as may be required to
prevent leakage. Ensure that formwork is properly braced and tied.
D. Provide openings in forms as required to accommodate other work. Accurately place and
securely support all items required to be built into the forms. Size and locations of openings,
recesses, chases and other built-in items shall be obtained from the Contractor or the trades
involved.
3.03 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. Prior to each use, coat contact surfaces of forms with release agent prior to placement of
reinforcement, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not allow excess
coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against
which fresh concrete will be placed.
B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or
applied coverings which are affected by agent. Refer to Section 03300 for required concrete
finishes.
C. Ensure that all debris and frost has been removed from forms before placing concrete.
D. Clean, repair and recoat surfaces of forms that are to be reused. Split, frayed, delaminated or
otherwise damaged form facing materials will not be acceptable.
E. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces,
remove fins and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure all joints to avoid offsets.
3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete such as sides of grade beams, walls and similar
parts of work may be removed 48 hours after placing concrete, providing concrete is
sufficiently hard to not be damaged by removal operations and providing that curing and
protection operations are maintained. Refer to specific requirements for hot- and cold-
weather concreting in Section 03300.
03100 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Whenever formwork is removed during the curing period, cure exposed concrete as specified in
Section 03300.
C. Contractor shall verify required tolerances specified in Section 03300 immediately after
removal of forms.
D. Carefully remove fins or other minor surface defects from concrete to remain exposed in the
final construction, and leave surfaces prepared for sealers, paint, skim coats or other finishes.
Repair minor imperfections as specified in Section 03300.
END OF SECTION
03200 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish, bend and install all reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, ties and supports.
B. Furnish and install fiber reinforcing materials.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
2. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading.
3. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
4. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
5. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
6. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ACI 318, "ACI Standard Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
2. ACI 315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures".
3. ACI 301-72, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
4. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice".
5. CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars".
6. CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports".
7. AWS D12.1, "Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and
Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction".
8. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. General: Fabricate and place reinforcing steel in accordance with the latest edition of ACI
315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", and as
detailed on the Drawings.
C. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Refer to Section 03300 for requirements.
D. Contractor shall obtain specific approval from the Architect/Engineer for the following items:
1. Relocation of bars to an extent that causes placement tolerances to be violated.
2. Bar chairs and spacers.
3. Splices not shown on the Drawings and mechanical connectors.
4. Bending of reinforcement embedded in hardened concrete.
E. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all reinforcing steel larger than #3 bars, indicating
bending and cutting, preformed corners and intersections. Comply with ACI 315 showing bar
schedules, stirrup or tie spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement and assemblies as
required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement. Include all special
reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures. Show all grade beam and
wall reinforcement on elevations drawn at a scale of not less than 1/4" = 1'-0".
1. Shop drawing submittal may be waived for reinforcing bars small enough to be field
bent, if requested by Contractor in writing and approved by Structural Engineer.
Structural Engineer must observe reinforcement prior to concrete placement.
B. Certificates: Furnish, prior to fabrication, certified mill test reports covering physical and
chemical tests of reinforcing steel and post-tensioning strands, if requested by the Structural
03200 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
Engineer.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Notify the Owner's testing and inspection agency and Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours in
advance of closing of forms and/or placing concrete so that inspection of reinforcement in
place can be made. Do not cover any reinforcement with formwork or concrete until
reinforcement has been checked and approval given to proceed with formwork and/or
concreting operations.
B. Testing of reinforcing welds and splices will be as specified in Section 01410.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcing steel to site in strongly tied bundles with metal tags corresponding to bar
schedules and diagrams. Store on the site free of rust, scale, oil or other coating. Store bars
off the ground and protect from moisture, dirt, oil or deleterious coatings.
B. Deliver fiber reinforcing in manufacturer's original, sealed bags or containers. Store in dry
location, out of direct sunlight, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. If concreting is delayed for any considerable period of time after reinforcement is in place, it
shall be protected by suitable covering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Bars: ASTM A615 or ASTM A706, 60 KSI, deformed billet steel bars, plain finish, as indicated on
the Drawings. Bars shall be free of scale or other bond-reducing coatings.
B. Ties, Stirrups and Field Bent Bars: #3 or smaller, may be ASTM A615, 40 KSI.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 or A497, plain type in flat sheets, plain finish, welded
intersections, in sizes as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Steel Wire: Provide plain cold-drawn wire conforming to ASTM A82.
E. Fiber Reinforcing: Collated, fibrillated polypropylene fiber, Fiber Mesh I, Fiber Mesh, Inc.,
Chattanooga, TN, or equal.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 75% minimum.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section
01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Accessories shall be of suitable type conforming to ACI 315 and shall include spacers,
chairs, tie bars, support bars and all other devices for properly assembling, placing and
supporting reinforcement, weight of concrete and workmen without displacement of
03200 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
reinforcement. Wood, brick, block, concrete chips and other non-metallic devices are not
acceptable.
B. For concrete slab-on-grade use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where wetted
base materials will not support chair legs. Concrete briquettes for support of reinforcement
for slabs-on-grade shall be at least 2" wide x 3" long and of proper height.
C. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs which are hot-dipped galvanized, plastic protected or stainless steel
protected.
D. Wire Ties: Wire for tying shall be annealed, cold-drawn wire of at least 16-gage.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions with
fabrication tolerance complying with ACI 315. Cold bend bars in a manner which will not injure
material.
B. Straightening or rebending at site will not be permitted unless using ASTM A706, 60 KSI
reinforcing.
C. Where reinforcing bars are shown field welded to structural steel, bars shall be furnished by
rebar supplier and welded in place by structural steel erector. Reinforcing bars shown as shop
welded to a steel fabricated assembly shall be furnished and welded in place by the structural
steel fabricator.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225. If the
foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to
this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section.
3.02 SPLICES
A. Splices not shown on the Drawings must be approved by the Structural Engineer.
B. Lapped splices shall be securely wired together. Minimum laps shall be in accordance with
requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 301-72 and as shown on the Drawings. Offset vertical lap
splices at least one bar diameter.
C. Lapped splices for welded wire fabric shall be made so that overlap of outermost wires is not
less than two (2) full mesh spaces. Lace splices together with 16-gage wire.
3.03 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL
A. Prior to placing into position, thoroughly clean reinforcement of mill and excessive rust, scale,
dust, mud, oil, ice and all other deleterious coating which may destroy or reduce bond.
B. All reinforcing shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings and the "Manual of Standard
Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", ACI 315, ACI 301 and ACI 318.
C. Accurately place and support reinforcing steel with chairs, bar supports, spacers or hangers as
recommended by ACI detailing manual except in slab-on-grade work. Support bars in slabs-on-
grade and footings with approved accessories.
D. Place reinforcing bars to a tolerance of +/- 1/4", except that minimum spacings between bars
shall be to a tolerance of +/- 1/4". Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with
other reinforcing steel, conduit or embedded items. The Structural Engineer's approval must
be obtained prior to moving bars under these circumstances.
E. Securely anchor and tie reinforcing bars and dowels prior to placing concrete.
F. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete protection shown on
the Drawings and specified. Do not place reinforcement with additional concrete cover unless
expressly approved by the Structural Engineer.
03200 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
G. Install dowels before any concrete is placed. Locate column dowels accurately with aid of
template before concrete starts to set.
H. Steel reinforcing bars shall run continuous through cold joints.
3.04 PLACING WELDED WIRE FABRIC
A. Welded wire fabric shall be placed 2" below slab surface or as indicated on the Drawings and
shall not be permitted to be placed on subgrade prior to concrete placement and hooked into
position. Reinforcement shall be fully supported at required elevation prior to concrete
placement. Use continuous chairs or support bars in structural slabs to maintain proper
locations as shown on the Drawings.
B. Install welded wire fabric using full sheets as large as possible. Lap adjoining pieces as
specified herein. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction.
3.05 PLACING FIBER REINFORCING
A. Place fiber reinforcing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
1. 1-1/2 lbs. per cu. yd., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing materials shall be placed in quantities, sizes and spacing as shown on the Drawings
and/or as scheduled herein:
1. Reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric shall be installed where shown or scheduled on
the Drawings.
2. Fiber reinforcing shall be placed in all poured-in-place concrete flatwork, including
exterior concrete drives, apron pavements and curb and gutter sections, sidewalks,
etc., regardless of whether these already are reinforced with steel or wire materials.
3. Fiber reinforcing is not required in footings, foundation walls, grade beams.
END OF SECTION
03300 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete for footings, foundations, slabs-on-grade and any
other concrete work required but not itemized.
B. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete for thrust restraint, encasement or other work.
C. Furnish and install stained interior cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade, where specifically
shown on the Drawings or specified in Section 03355.
D. Furnish and place granular sub-base under slabs-on-grade.
E. Furnish and install patterned and/or colored concrete slabs-on-grade, where specifically shown
on the Drawings, using forms specified in Section 03100.
F. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete curb and gutter sections, valley pans, catch basins,
exterior concrete flatwork and other site concrete work, unless furnished and installed by
Section 02515.
G. Finishing and application of integral surfacing as scheduled, curing and sealing of slabs.
H. Furnishing and placing joint materials.
I. Furnish and install cast-in concrete accessories, unless arranged for otherwise.
J. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01410, Testing.
3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
4. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading.
5. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
6. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
7. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
8. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement.
9. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
10. Section 07150, Dampproofing.
11. Section 07190, Vapor Retarders.
12. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
13. Section 07215, Foundation Insulation
14. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
15. Section 09310, Ceramic Tile.
16. Division 15, Mechanical.
17. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
2. ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforcing Concrete".
4. ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete".
5. ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting".
6. ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting".
7. ASTM C94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete".
8. ASTM C33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates".
9. ASTM C150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement".
10. ASTM C260, "Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete".
03300 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
11. ASTM C494, "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete".
12. ASTM C618, "Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete".
13. Applicable provisions of Larimer County Urban Area Street Standards (LCUASS) or
similar document for specific jurisdictions, for concrete curb and gutter and concrete
pavement work within public rights-of-way.
14. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Contractor shall have in place a quality assurance
program to monitor the composition of the ready-mixed concrete provided for this project.
The quality assurance program shall detail:
1. Quality and types of aggregates, cement, mineral admixtures, chemical admixtures and
water.
2. Batching of these materials, including properties of the batched mix(es).
3. Delivery and placement requirements for the batched mix(es).
4. Regular contractor monitoring and testing of batched materials.
C. Contractor shall maintain a copy of ACI SP-15, "Field Reference Manual" in the field office at all
times.
D. Contractor shall employ an experienced and competent foreman for all concrete work. The
foreman shall be thoroughly familiar with all phases of concrete construction, including
formwork. Upon request submit records of qualifications and experience of the foreman to the
Architect.
E. All concrete work which does not conform to specified requirements, including strength,
tolerances and finishes, shall be corrected or removed and replaced as directed by the Archi-
tect/Engineer, at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the
cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from correction to concrete work
and for any additional testing of work in place which may be required.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Design: Submit proposed mix design(s) in accordance with ACI 301 for approval by the
Architect/Engineer. Submit written design mix reports for each class of concrete at least
fifteen (15) days prior to start of work. Include the following in each report:
1. Project identification.
2. Concrete class.
3. Specified properties for concrete.
4. Source of concrete aggregate and cement.
5. Cement type and brand.
6. Manufacturer and brand name of admixtures.
7. Proportions of concrete mixed per cubic yard.
8. Required strength qualification data for each property specified for design mix in
accordance with ACI 301.
9. Unit weight.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, color additives and concrete
stains, sealers, hardener and finishing compounds.
C. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Submit for review by the Architect/Engineer in
accordance with paragraph 1.02.B.
D. Certificates:
1. Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates.
2. Certification of appropriate use for hardening and sealing products, as specified in
paragraph 2.05.
E. Contractor shall retain for Architect/Engineer’s review, if requested, all delivery tickets for
each load delivered to the site. Tickets shall show truck number, concrete strength, cement
brand and type, cement content, water content (also expressed as water/cement ratio),
amount of course aggregate and fine aggregate, name and amount of admixture, number of
yards delivered, time of arrival at site and mixing time.
03300 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
F. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 INSPECTION
A. Provide free access for the Architect/Engineer/Inspection Agency to locations where concrete
materials are stored, proportioned or mixed. Do not place concrete until forming and
reinforcing for a given pour has been approved by the Architect/Engineer/Inspection Agency.
B. Provide minimum 48 hours advance notice for inspection to the Architect/Engineer/Inspection
Agency, but ensure that forming and reinforcing are substantially complete at the time of
notification.
1.05 TESTING
A. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by an independent testing agent
approved by the Architect. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General and
Supplementary Conditions.
B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with the appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed concrete mix design to the inspection and testing firm for review prior to
commencement of work.
D. Field Quality Control Testing: Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the
placement of concrete, as follows:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM
C94.
2. Slump: ASTM C143; one (1) test for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, one (1) test each set of compressive test
specimens, or when the indication of change requires.
4. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31; one (1) set of four (4) standard cylinders for
each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed.
5. Cast and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens and field-cured test
specimens as specified in ASTM C31.
E. Compressive Strength Tests:
1. ASTM C39: One (1) set for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof of each mix design
placed in any one day, or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; one (1)
specimen tested at seven (7) days, two (2) specimens tested at 28 days, and one (1)
specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
2. When the frequency of testing will provide less than three (3) strength tests for a given
mix design, conduct testing from at least five (5) randomly selected batches or from
each batch if fewer than three (3) are used.
3. Testing for Drilled Pier Concrete: If more than one pier is cast from the same
truckload, take one (1) set per truckload. If more than one truckload is placed in a
pier, take one (1) set per pier.
4. Report test results in writing to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer, Contractor
and ready-mix supplier on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive
strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of
concrete placement, the name of contractor, name of the concrete supplier and truck
number, name of the concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of
concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-
day tests and 28-day tests.
03300 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
5. The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results
indicate the specified concrete strengths and characteristics have not been attained in
the structure, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. The testing agency shall conduct
tests to determine the strength and other characteristics of the in-place concrete by
compression tests on cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, by load testing
specified in ACI 318 or other acceptable non-destructive testing methods, as directed.
The Contractor shall pay for this additional testing.
F. Slump Test: One (1) slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
G. Air Entrainment Test: One (1) air entrainment test will be taken for each set of test cylinders
taken.
H. Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40° F and below, and when 80° F and above
and each time a set of compression test specimens are made.
1.06 EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
A. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump or total air
content outside the specified values.
B. Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory if the
averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive compressive strength tests results equal or exceed
the 28-day design compressive strength of the type or class of concrete and no individual
strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
C. If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements specified, the
concrete represented by such tests will be considered deficient in strength and subject to
additional testing as herein specified or removal and replacement of the concrete which the
test represents.
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store cement in watertight enclosures and protect against dampness, contamination and
warehouse set.
B. Stockpile aggregates to prevent excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or
other sizes of aggregates. Use only one (1) supply source for each aggregate stockpile.
C. Store admixtures to prevent contamination, evaporation or damage. Protect liquid admixtures
from freezing or harmful temperature ranges.
D. Allow a maximum of 90 minutes between the time water is added and the time the concrete is
completely placed.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not place concrete during rain, sleet or snow, unless
adequate protection is provided. Do not allow rainwater to increase the mixing water or
damage the surface finish.
B. Cold Weather Concreting:
1. Refer to ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting".
2. Temperature of concrete when placed shall not be less than the following:
Minimum Concrete Temp. Degrees
Air Temp. F Section with Least Dimension
Degrees F Under 12" 12" and Over
30 to 45 60 50
0 to 30 65 55
Below 0 70 60
3. When placed, heated concrete shall not be warmer than 80° F.
4. Prior to placing concrete, all ice, snow, surface and subsurface frost shall be removed
and the temperature of the surfaces to be in contact with the new concrete shall be
raised above 35° F.
5. Protect the concrete from freezing during specified curing period.
03300 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
6. Heated enclosures shall be strong and windproof to ensure adequate protection of
corners, edges and thin sections. Do not permit heating units to locally heat or dry the
concrete. Do not use combustion heaters during the first 24 hours, unless the concrete
is protected from exposure to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide.
C. Hot Weather Concreting:
1. Refer to ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting".
2. Take precautions when the ambient air temperature is 90° F or above. Temperature of
concrete when placed shall not exceed 85° F.
3. Cool forms and reinforcing to a maximum of 90° F by spraying with water prior to
placing concrete.
4. Do not use cement that has reached a temperature of 270° F or more.
5. Do not place concrete when the evaporation rate (actual or anticipated) equals or
exceeds 0.20 pounds per sq. ft. per hour.
6. Approved set-retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used with the Archi-
tect/Engineer's approval when ambient air temperature is 90° F or above to offset the
accelerating effects of high temperatures.
1.09 WARRANTIES
A. Provide Installer’s written warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, and
subgrade failure for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance. Owner’s Representative
shall determine needs for repairs or replacement, and his/her decision shall be final and
obligatory upon the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. Use only one (1) brand of cement in any individual
structure.
B. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33.
C. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Clean, strong crushed gravel or stone
conforming to ASTM C33. Gradation shall be as specified under concrete mixes.
D. Water: Clean, fresh potable supply, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic materials or other
deleterious substances.
E. Admixtures: Use only when specified or approved by the Architect/Engineer.
1. Air-Entraining Agent: ASTM C260, manufactured by Master Builders MBVR, Sika AER,
Grace Darex AEA, Protex, or equal.
2. Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E.
3. Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B or D.
4. Water Reducer: ASTM C494, Type A, manufactured by Master Builders Pozzo-Lith,
Grace WRDA, Protex PDA 25XL, Sika Plastocrete, or equal.
5. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
6. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride are specifically prohibited.
7. Color Additive: To be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of
color(s), Davis Color or equal. Provide colored concrete where shown or scheduled on
the Drawings.
8. Fiber Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200 and paragraph 3.02 of this Section.
F. LEED Design Criteria: Refer to paragraph 3.02, Design Mixes, of this Section.
2.02 NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Provide premixed, factory-packaged non-shrink, non-metallic grouting compounds specified in
Section 05120.
03300 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2.03 CONCRETE BONDING AGENTS
A. Provide an aqueous phase, film forming, freeze-thaw resistant compound suitable for brush or
spray application, complying with Military Specification MIL-B-19235.
1. Chem Master Polyweld, Grace Daraweld-PBA, Larson Weldcrete, Euclid Eucoweld,
Protex Proweld-D, or equal.
B. Provide a two-component, all-purpose epoxy bonding agent for structural repair or corrections.
1. Protex Probond ET-150, Sika Colma-Dur, or equal.
2.04 SMOOTHING AND RESURFACING COATING
A. General: A blend of white and gray Portland cement, dry polymers and aggregates providing a
smooth, textured patching material for thin, vertical surface repairs and coating applications.
Product shall not contain gypsum.
B. Compressive Strength: 800 psi at 1 day; 3,000 psi at 7 days; 4,000 psi at 28 days.
C. Adhesion: Polymer modified for increased adhesion.
D. Color: To match concrete.
E. Approved Manufacturers:
1. 3-2-1 by U. S. Spec, Denver, CO, (303) 778-7227.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and
performance are acceptable.
2.05 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
A. Expansion and Isolation Joint Fillers: Refer to Section 03100.
B. Fiber Reinforcing: Polypropylene fiber reinforcing, specified in Section 03200.
2.06 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
A. Provide moisture-retaining cover of waterproof sheet materials complying with ASTM C171,
Type I or Type II, polyethylene sheeting complying with AASHO M-171, polyethylene coated
burlap.
- or, at Contractor's option -
A. Provide membrane-forming curing compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type I, specified
below. Where used, curing compound must be compatible with applied finishes.
2.07 HARDENING, SEALING AND FINISH MATERIALS
A. General: Apply all hardening, sealing and finishing treatments in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the schedule below for applications.
Supplier/Installer of slab finish materials shall certify that materials specified and/or furnished
for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications, for the following criteria:
1. Compatibility of finish material with concrete mix specified.
2. Compatibility of finish material with type and degree of weather exposure.
3. Compatibility of finish material with expected use of space.
4. Compatibility of finish material with expected exposure to chemical, acid, oil, fat or
other deleterious material.
B. Liquid Water-Based Curing, Sealing and Dustproofing: Kure-N-Seal W by Sonneborne or equal.
VOC not to exceed 350 g/L.
1. Color: Clear.
C. Liquid Chemical Hardener: Lapidolith by Sonneborne or equal. VOC not to exceed 350 g/L.
1. Color: White or gray, as scheduled.
D. Non-Slip Abrasive Aggregate: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits or crushed emery as abrasive
aggregate for non-slip finish, with emery aggregate containing not less than 40% aluminum
oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged, rust-
proof and non-glazing and that is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials
03300 - 7
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
(Sonneborne Frictex, Toch Brothers Toxgrip, Grace Durafax, Sonneborne Frictex 176), Grip-it.
E. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835-3434.
2. Thoro System Products, Miami, FL, and represented locally by The Rio Grande Co.,
Denver, CO, (303) 825-2211.
3. Zerovac Technology, LLC, Denver, CO, (303) 331-6181.
4. L. M. Scofield Company, Los Angeles, CA, (800) 800-9900, represented locally by
Conrep West, Englewood, CO, (303) 740-7787.
5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and
performance are acceptable, except as limited above.
2.08 UNDER-SLAB MATERIALS
A. Granular Sub-Base: 3/8" to 3/4" angular gravel or crushed rock, extent and thickness as shown
on the Drawings or as required by the Soils Report.
B. Vapor Barrier: Refer to Section 07190.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION
A. Notify any trades that may have items to be recessed or embedded in concrete, or that may
require openings in concrete, of placing schedule. Coordinate work to avoid cutting of
concrete and to avoid delays in the work. This work may include, but is not limited to:
1. Concrete reinforcing specified in Section 03200.
2. Concrete accessories specified in Section 03250.
3. Structural steel specified in Section 05120.
4. Mechanical work specified in Division 15.
5. Electrical work specified in Division 16.
B. Surfaces shall be true to line and grade and free from loose earth, frost, ice, mud and standing
or running water. Protect bottom of excavation against freezing. Do not deposit concrete
against frozen ground.
C. Make all preparations required for protection of concrete during placing and curing under
detrimental weather conditions.
D. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours prior to placing of any concrete. Do not deposit
any concrete before the Architect/Engineer has observed reinforcement and other work in
place and given permission to proceed. Such inspection and permission to proceed shall in no
way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for proper placement of reinforcement and
placing of concrete and of responsibility for adherence to other requirements of the
Construction Documents.
E. Form and install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, except as amended by this Section.
Concrete formwork shall be as specified in Section 03100.
F. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225. If the
foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to
this requirement, advise the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section.
G. Ensure that form inserts for all exposed edges and corners requiring chamfers are properly
placed, as specified in Section 03100.
H. Ensure that sleeves and other site items to be installed under concrete work are properly
located and installed, as specified in other Sections.
I. Smoothing and Resurfacing Coating: All surfaces in contact with coating shall be free of dirt,
oil, grease, laitance and other contaminants.
3.02 DESIGN MIXES
A. Structural and Architectural Concrete: Concrete mixes shall be as itemized on the Structural
Drawings or specified herein for specific locations.
03300 - 8
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Concrete which does not meet the minimum requirements for strength at 28 days shall be
reviewed and is subject to removal at the option of the Architect/Engineer.
C. Proportion normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1. Concrete for all parts of the
work shall be of the specified quality, capable of being placed without excessive segregation
and, when hardened, of developing all characteristics required by these Specifications and the
Contract Documents. Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which will work readily into
the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcements by the methods of placing and
consolidation employed on the work.
D. Design mixes shall be made and reported by an approved testing laboratory for each class of
concrete, at the Contractor's expense.
E. Design mixes shall contain all admixtures required by these specifications and/or proposed by
the Contractor to be used in concrete.
F. Proportion concrete design mixes so that compressive strength of laboratory-cured cylinders
will be at least 15% greater than minimum specified strength. Refer to paragraph 1.05 for
testing requirements.
G. Color Additive(s): Include specified color additives as indicated on the Drawings or specified
herein.
H. Concrete Mixes:
1. Class II: For foundation walls and grade beams, 3,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type
I cement/cubic yard (minimum), maximum aggregate size 3/4", 2" to 4" slump, air
entrained 5% to 7%.
2. Class III: For interior slabs, 4,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type I cement/cubic
yard (minimum), 3" to 4" slump, air entrained 4% to 6%, fibermesh.
3. Class IV: For exterior flatwork, 4,000 psi (minimum), 6.0 sacks of Type II Portland
cement/cubic yard, 3" to 4" slump, 5% to 7% air entrainment, fibermesh. Add selected
color additive where shown on the Drawings.
4. Class VII: For exterior curbs, gutters, concrete pavements and sitework: Conform to
City of Fort Collins engineering standards, unless otherwise directed by the Owner or
Engineer.
5. Except as excluded, fly ash may be substituted for Portland cement to a maximum of
15% by weight; 20% maximum where exposed in the final structure. If used, no further
cement reduction due to use of water-reducing agent will be allowed.
- or -
H. Concrete Mixes: Contractor shall submit proposed design mixes for each type of concrete
required for the work for approval by the Structural Engineer. Structural requirements shall be
as specified above or on the Structural Drawings.
I. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content:
a. Recycled Aggregate: 50% minimum.
b. Fly Ash: As specified in subparagraph 3.02 H above or on the Structural
Drawings.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
4. Credit EQ 4.2, Low Emitting Materials: As specified in paragraph 2.07 above.
J. In lieu of designing new mixes for this project, existing mix designs meeting all requirements
specified for each concrete mix and used successfully on previous projects under conditions
similar to those anticipated on this project may be used, providing the following are submitted
for the Architect/Engineer's approval for each class of concrete:
1. Reports of concrete mix design and test results.
2. Reports of sufficient consecutive sets of 7- and 28-day concrete strength test made
during the last six (6) months and the calculations of standard deviation for these tests.
3. Reports of compliance tests of fine and coarse aggregates made during the last six (6)
months.
03300 - 9
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
4. Mix submittals and required statistical strengths shall be in accordance with ACI 301.
5. Documentation of compliance with specified LEED design criteria.
K. Concrete Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200.
3.03 CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING
A. Ready-mixed batch plant equipment and facilities must comply with the requirements of ACI
614 and ASTM C94. The plant must have sufficient capacity to produce and deliver concrete of
specified qualities in quantities required to meet the construction schedule.
B. Site-mixed concrete will not be permitted. Measure, mix and deliver concrete in accordance
with ASTM C94, except as specified herein.
C. All concrete not placed within 90 minutes of initial contact of cement and water shall be
rejected.
D. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump is prohibited. Obtain the Architect/
Engineer's approval for any addition of water. Do not exceed the maximum permissible
water/cement ratio or maximum slump under any circumstances.
3.04 PLACING UNDER-SLAB MATERIALS
A. Granular Sub-Base: Place a minimum of 4" (200mm) of gravel over compacted sub-base, level
and compact thoroughly, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
B. Vapor Barrier: Install underslab vapor barrier as specified in Section 07190.
3.05 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Transit-mixed concrete shall be truck-mixed in accordance with "Specification for Ready-Mixed
Concrete", ASTM C94-67.
B. Concrete shall have a temperature of 70° F +/- 20° F at the time of placing, unless prior
permission has been granted in writing by the Architect/Engineer to exceed these tolerances.
C. Transport the concrete from mixer to final position as rapidly as practical without segregation,
contamination or loss of material. Maximum not-to-exceed from introduction of water to
placement of concrete is 90 minutes. Place concrete in forms with drop chutes, baffles or
other methods which will prevent segregation. Comply with the requirements of ACI 614.
1. Contractor shall assess the placement requirements of the site, construction staging
and other factors, and provide concrete pumping equipment for concrete placement as
may be necessary, at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Concrete foundation structures shall be placed on undisturbed, clean surfaces free from frost,
ice, mud, standing or running water.
E. Ensure that hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris have been removed from
the interior of the forms and all hardened concrete and foreign materials have been removed
from the inner surfaces of the mixing and conveying equipment. Forms shall be wetted, oiled
or treated with an approved form-coating material prior to placing concrete. Reinforcement
shall be cleaned, secured in position, inspected and approved by the Architect/Engineer before
starting the pouring of concrete.
F. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as nearly as practical in its final position so as to avoid
rehandling. Special care shall be exercised to prevent splashing the forms or reinforcement
with concrete in advance of pouring.
G. Place concrete in horizontal layers not more than 24" thick, unless otherwise required by
specific conditions of the work, i.e., round, tubular fiber-formed columns. Place successive
layers at such speed so that the preceding layer is still plastic.
H. Immediately after depositing, the concrete shall be compacted to force out all air pockets,
working the mixture into corners, around reinforcement and inserts to prevent the formation of
voids. Consolidate concrete by vibration, spading or rodding. Do not over-vibrate or use
vibrators to transport concrete. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced
locations not farther apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert
vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set.
1. Mechanical vibrators need not be used for thrust restraints.
03300 - 10
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. When vibrating is not practical, concrete shall be consolidated and all faces well
spaced by continuous working with a suitable tool in a manner acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer.
3.06 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Complete finishing operation within 24 hours after stripping forms. Patch repairable defective
areas immediately after form removal.
B. Subgrade Surfaces: Rough form finish is acceptable on all subgrade surfaces, except as
indicated otherwise. Patch all defective areas.
C. Exposed Surfaces: Provide smooth rubbed finish on any formed surfaces exposed to view,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Foundation walls or grade beams with 12" or more of exposed vertical surface shall
receive rubbed finish.
2. Retaining walls and foundation walls at loading dock.
D. Strip forms while concrete is still green and steel trowel surfaces to a dense, hard finish with
corners, intersections and terminations chamfered 1/2" and smooth.
1. Repair and patch all tie holes and defects with mortar. Remove all fins and
projections.
2. Tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed
surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed and floated to a texture
consistent to that of formed surfaces. Final treatment of formed surfaces shall
continue uniformly across unformed surfaces.
3. Strike chamfered edges and corners of exposed concrete clean, straight and true to
line.
E. Honeycombing or spillage through forms shall be repaired or replaced as specified below in this
section.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF JOINTS
A. Joint Materials: Refer to Section 03100, Concrete Formwork, and paragraph 2.05 of this
Section.
B. General: Locate and install construction joints which are not shown on the Drawings so as not
to impair the strength and appearance of the structure. In general, locate near the middle of
the span of slabs, beams and grade beams, unless a beam intersects a girder at this point.
Obtain the Architect/Engineer's approval for joint locations.
C. Pour floor slabs in pattern indicated on the Drawings. Form control joints and place expansion
joints as indicated on the Drawings, but in no case exceed the following requirements:
1. Control joints shall be spaced at 15'-0" maximum intervals each way so as not to
encompass an area to exceed 225 sq. ft., or other spacing and pattern(s) as shown on
the Drawings, or as required by the Soils Report.
2. Place control joints at internal corners, columns or other points of natural weakness.
3. Refer to Section 03365 for restrictions on joints in post-tensioned concrete slabs.
D. Before depositing new concrete, remove all laitance and loose aggregates immediately before
placing fresh concrete. Dampen but do not saturate the joint surface. At slabs and beams,
apply a neat cement grout.
E. Expansion or Isolation Joints: Where expansion joints are indicated on the Drawings, place
filler strips to within 1/2" of finished surface. Joint recess shall be formed with a separate
removable filler section to provide a clean, true recess to receive sealant as specified in
Section 07900.
F. Interior Construction and Control Joints: Keyed construction joints shall be formed with
prefabricated joint materials and shall adhere to the control joint pattern shown.
1. Refer to the Drawings for special control joint patterns.
G. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings, provide minimum two (2) layers 15# non-
bituminous felt bond breaker between interior or exterior slabs-on-grade and vertical wall
surfaces.
H. Column Isolation Joints: Joints around columns may be formed with minimum 30# non-
bituminous building felt left in place with neatly trimmed top edge or approved joint filler
03300 - 11
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
material.
I. Exterior Slab, Curb and Gutter Control Joints: Tool or saw joints to a depth of one-fourth (1/4)
the thickness of the slab, where indicated on the plans. Refer to Section 02515 for joint
spacing in concrete curb and gutter, sidewalk and exterior flatwork sections.
3.08 FINISHING FLATWORK
A. General: Verify all flatwork finishes with the Architect in the field prior to proceeding with
this work.
B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as hereinafter specified. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do
not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or
when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both.
Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible
to power units. Check and level surface plane to required tolerance. Cut down high spots and
fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface
to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view,
unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint
or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using
a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the
trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate the concrete surface by final hand-troweling
operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, with a surface plane
tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface
defects which would telegraph through applied floor coverings system.
D. Non-Slip Broom Finish: After completion of floated finish, draw a broom or a burlap belt
transversely across the surface perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use broom finish after
floating for surfaces to receive topping or cementitious finishes. Coordinate final texture with
the Architect prior to application.
E. Finishing Slabs at Floor Drains: Hold elevation of concrete slabs-on-grade around floor drains
level to within 16" around each drain location, then shape surface to elevation of drains as
shown on the Drawings. Refer to the Drawings for special sloped areas of concrete slabs-on-
grade to floor or trench drains.
F. Grinding/Polishing of Concrete Flatwork: Refer to Section 03355.
G. Slab Finish Schedule: Refer to Part 4, Schedules, at the end of this Section.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain the following tolerances for all cast-in-place concrete work. Defective work shall be
removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
1. Variation from Plumb:
a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum.
b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum.
2. Variation in Thickness: 1/4" to 1/2" standard, 5% for footings.
3. Variation in Grade:
a. 0-10': 1/4" standard, 1/8" for floor slabs.
b. 10-20': 3/8" standard, 1/4" for floor slabs.
c. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, 3/8" for floor slabs.
4. Variation in Plan:
a. 0-20': 1/2".
b. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, +1/2" for footings.
5. Variation in Eccentricity: 2% for footings.
6. Variation in Openings:
a. Location: 1/4".
B. Slab Tolerances:
1. Interior Floor Slabs: 1/8" in 10' maximum.
2. Exterior Sidewalks, Slabs and Ramps: 1/4" in 10' maximum.
03300 - 12
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.10 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of
time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening.
B. Refer to Section 03100 for stripping and removal of formwork after curing.
C. Refer to Section 03355, Specialty Integral Concrete Flatwork Finishes, for specific curing
requirements for slabs to receive chemically-reactive stains or integral coloring as part of
specialty flatwork finishes.
D. Refer to Section 09800, Special Coatings, for specific curing requirements for slabs to receive
roll-on floor finish for ice rinks.
E. Start curing immediately after finishing. Cure for at least seven (7) days, not necessarily
consecutive, during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50° F. Wood forms
shall be kept wet. If forms are removed during curing period, an approved curing method must
be started immediately.
F. Cure slabs by approved moisture-retaining coverings, lapped and sealed, and kept continuously
wet. Approved curing compounds may be used if compatible with specified finishes. Specific
approval is required from the Architect/Engineer. Curing compounds shall be applied in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of freshly placed concrete from vandalism,
accidental damage by workmen or equipment, or damage resulting from subgrade settlement
or subsequent construction traffic. Take adequate precautions to restrict traffic in the area of
fresh concrete during the curing period. Damaged concrete shall be repaired or replaced by
the Contractor at the Owner's discretion.
H. Comply with the requirements of ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist. Temperature of
concrete when placed shall be less than 90° F. When necessary to prevent premature drying,
arrangements for installation of windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding or a wet
covering of light color shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures
shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow.
I. Comply with the requirements of ACI 306 when cold weather conditions exist. When
atmospheric temperature is 40° F and below, maintain concrete temperature at not less than
50° F for at least six (6) days. When necessary, make arrangements before concrete placing for
heating, covering insulation or housing as required to maintain specified temperature and
moisture conditions without injury due to concentration of heat.
J. Maintain protective cover on concrete so that changes in temperatures of concrete shall be as
uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5° F in any one (1) hour or 50° F in any 24-hour period.
3.11 SEALING AND FINISH APPLICATIONS
A. General: Consult with the manufacturer's representative prior to application. Follow the
manufacturer's printed instructions for applying materials.
B. Schedule of Exterior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete curing,
sealing and hardening products for exterior concrete in accordance with the following
schedule:
1. Concrete Sidewalks, Slabs, Aprons and Curb and Gutter Sections: Damp cure and
Lapidolith, white pigment.
2. Exposed Surfaces of Retaining Walls: Kure-N-Seal.
3. Concrete not Scheduled for Other Finishes: Kure-N-Seal.
C. Schedule of Interior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete curing,
sealing and hardening products for interior floor slabs in accordance with the following
schedule. Refer to paragraph 2.06 for certification of appropriate use.
1. Slabs to Receive No Flooring: Kure-N-Seal.
D. Application Process: Apply curing, hardening and sealing products in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
E. Apply materials only after concrete surfaces are completely cured and dry. Follow the
manufacturer's recommended application instructions, generally applying it in three (3) coats
with ample drying time between coats. Remove surplus hardener after final application has
dried.
03300 - 13
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE APPLICATIONS
A. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on the Drawings or required by the work. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment
to template at correct elevations. Comply with certified diagrams or templates of the
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
B. Site Concrete Work: Provide miscellaneous site cast-in-place concrete items as detailed on the
Drawings or specified herein, to include but not be limited to:
1. Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Specified in Section 02515.
2. Concrete retaining walls and seating walls.
3.13 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Remove and replace defective concrete not conforming to required line, detail and elevation
as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other
defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete, except upon express
direction of the Architect.
C. Concrete damaged after placement shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the
Owner's discretion.
3.14 PATCHING AND POINTING
A. Patch and point all vertical and horizontal formed concrete surfaces where exposed to view, as
defined herein.
B. Fill holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless
otherwise shown or directed, after such work is in place.
C. Mix, place and cure concrete to blend with in-place construction.
D. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the work.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Exposed cast-in-place concrete work shall be subject to evaluation to the satisfaction of the
Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics:
1. Slab finishes.
2. Tolerances specified.
3. Wall and corner surfaces, including patching and pointing.
4. Joint materials and placement.
5. Surfaces of fiber formed architectural columns.
6. Specialty slab finishes, i.e. stamped pattern concrete, for accuracy of placement,
alignment and flushness of pattern, surfaces and finishes.
B. Power wash, or clean by other acceptable means, all dampproofing or waterproofing overspray
or other surface visual defect.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 EXTERIOR FLATWORK FINISHES
A. Exterior Sidewalks and Ramps: Non-slip broom or sweat finish.
B. Exterior Pavilion Slabs: Non-slip broom or sweat finish.
C. Exterior Slabs and Aprons: Non-slip broom or sweat finish, unless scheduled for other finishes.
4.02 INTERIOR FLATWORK FINISHES
A. Interior Floor Slabs: Troweled finish.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
04100 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 04100
MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install mortar, with integral water repellent, and grout materials for new concrete
block masonry units.
G. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry.
4. Section 05120, Structural Steel: Non-shrink structural grout.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ASTM, American Society of Testing and Materials.
2. ASTM C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
3. ASTM C150, Portland Cement.
4. ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
5. ASTM C270, Mortar Mix.
6. ASTM C476, Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry.
7. ASTM E514, Moisture Resistance in Masonry Assemblies.
8. PCA, current edition.
9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and specifications for each type of mortar
specified, including certification that each type complies with the specifications.
B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full range of mortar colors for selection by the
Architect.
C. Sample Panel: Refer to Section 04210 and/or 04220 (04520) for sample panel requirements.
Mortar color shall be reviewed for approval by the Architect.
D. Mortar Analysis: Submit three (3) copies of the existing mortar analysis specified in paragraph
1.04.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 TESTING
A. Inspection and testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory, approved by
the Architect, conforming to ASTM E149, E514 and C270. Testing fees shall be paid as specified
04100 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
in the General and Supplementary Conditions. Test samples shall be taken at random to
provide sampling over the course of work. Materials not conforming to these specifications
shall be removed from the job and replaced.
1. Refer to Section 04210, 04220 and/or 04400 for testing requirements.
B. Mortar Analysis: Contractor shall obtain an independent mortar analysis of the existing mortar
to determine the composition and proportions of materials in the mortar. Mortar shall be
sampled in a minimum of three (3) random locations throughout the existing building for
verification and averaging of these results. Submit the results of the mortar analysis in written
form to the Architect as specified above.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70° F and 100° F.
B. Contractor shall use only one (1) type mortar to ensure uniform color. Masonry cement is not
permitted.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, natural.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S for new construction.
C. Aggregate Sand: ASTM C144.
D. Coarse Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404, less than 3/8".
E. Water: ASTM C270, clean and suitable for domestic consumption.
F. Admixtures: Pozzolan with approval; calcium chloride not permitted.
G. Integral Water Repellent: Integral polymeric-based water repellent admixture, conforming to
ASTM E514 and achieving an E (Excellent) rating, RainBlok for Mortar by ACM Chemistries, Inc.,
Norcross, GA, (877) 226-1766, or approved equal.
1. Integral water repellent shall be used in all exterior brick, concrete unit and/or stone
masonry construction.
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar Mixes for Structural Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S mortar with hydrated
lime for all new masonry construction. Minimum compressive strength of 1,800 psi at 28 days,
or as indicated on the Structural Drawings:
1. 1 part Portland cement, Type 1.
2. 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime.
3. 2-1/4 to 3-1/2 parts damp, loose sand.
4. Integral water repellent.
5. Mortar coloring.
B. Mortar Mixes for Concrete Unit Veneer: ASTM C270, Type N mortar with hydrated lime for all
new veneer masonry construction. Minimum compressive strength of 750 psi at 28 days, or as
indicated on the Structural Drawings:
C. Masonry Grout Mix: Minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days:
1. 1 part Portland cement, Type 1.
2. 2-1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose sand.
3. 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate.
4. Pozzolan as per manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Air entrainment shall be not more than 5% by volume.
D. Mixtures may change as per manufacturer's recommendations to meet requirements.
E. Non-Shrink Structural Grout: Refer to Section 05120.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
04100 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in
compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Masonry installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which masonry is to be installed
and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the masonry installer.
3.02 BATCH CONTROL
A. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight such that the required proportions for
mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained.
B. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of five (5) minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Do not
use mortar which has begun to set or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing.
Retemper mortar during 2-1/2 hour period as required to restore workability.
1. Ensure addition of integral water repellent for all exterior masonry construction,
proportioned as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Use mortar within two (2) hours of mixing at temperatures over 80° F, and 2-1/2 hours at
temperatures under 50° F.
3.03 JOINTS
A. General: Lay coursed modular units with 3/8" joints, unless otherwise indicated, except for
minor variations required to maintain bond alignment.
B. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Lay units with "buttered" joints, thickness to match
existing, unless otherwise indicated to maintain bond alignment with existing brick masonry
work.
C. Bond Pattern and Joint Type: Refer to Section 04210 and/or 04220.
D. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown.
E. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of work.
F. Point out or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work.
G. Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces.
Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.
END OF SECTION
04220 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry, with integral water repellent, including units and
special shapes, mortar, ties, anchors and accessories.
B. Furnish and install concrete unit veneer masonry, with integral water repellent, including units
and special shapes, mortar, ties, anchors and accessories.
C. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry as structural back-up material in composite wall
construction, including units, mortar, ties, anchors and accessories.
D. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry horizontal joint and vertical reinforcing.
E. Furnish and install flexible masonry flashings, cavity filter fabric, cavity filler, and create
weepholes in veneer and/or composite wall construction.
F. Install all bolts, nailing blocks, inserts, door frames, steel lintels, vents, conduits and other
related work furnished by others to be built into concrete unit masonry.
G. Furnish and install masonry grout for grouted cells of concrete unit masonry.
H. Furnish test specimens and samples of materials to be built into work.
I. Install composite wall and foamed-in masonry cell insulation materials, furnished by others.
J. Clean new concrete unit masonry and remove surplus material and waste.
K. Furnish and apply sealer, if specified.
L. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 04100, Mortar.
4. Section 04270, Glass Block Masonry.
5. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
6. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
7. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
8. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. ASTM C90, Standard Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
2. ASTM C150, Portland Cement.
3. ASTM E514, Moisture Resistance in Masonry Assemblies.
4. ANSI A-41.1, Building Code Requirements for Masonry.
5. ACI 530.1, Standard Specification for Tolerances.
6. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) "Specification for the Design and
Construction of Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry".
7. Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute.
8. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 TESTING
A. Test reports for each type of concrete masonry unit shall be submitted to the
Architect/Engineer for approval. Testing is to be performed by an independent testing
laboratory, in accordance with ASTM C140-63T and E514. Reports shall include the following:
1. Compressive strength.
04220 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Water absorption.
3. Complete identification of units, including size, grade and type.
B. If results of test and/or inspections do not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents
or are otherwise unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall proceed as directed by the
Architect/Engineer. Additional costs resulting because of retesting, load testing, removal and
replacement of masonry, damage to the work of other trades shall be borne by the Contractor.
C. Structural Engineer shall have the right to order tests of any material entering into the masonry
work or any other tests deemed necessary to determine whether materials and methods in use
are such as to produce work of necessary quality, to order test under load of any portion of
completed structure when conditions have been such as to leave doubt as to adequacy of the
structure to serve purposes for which it is intended and to order change in proportions or
material at Contractor's expense, if work of required quality cannot be obtained with materials
and/or proportions furnished by the Contractor.
D. Materials or proportions of materials entering into masonry walls shall not be changed, unless
approved by the Structural Engineer. Materials from any new source or changes in proportions
shall be subject to all required tests, which shall be made at the Contractor's expense.
E. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Cooperate and provide every assistance to facilitate inspection and testing.
2. Furnish mix designs for mortar and grout prior to commencement of work, submit to
the Architect mix designs and test results for each type of grout, all with materials and
in proportions proposed to be used in the actual construction. No work shall commence
until the mix designs have been reviewed and approved by the Structural Engineer.
3. Furnish materials and labor required to make and handle test specimens at the project
site under proposed job conditions.
4. Furnish temporary facilities for field-cured specimens.
5. Advise testing agency sufficiently in advance of operation to allow for completion of
quality tests.
1.04 CERTIFICATION
A. Prior to delivery, furnish Architect with certificates, letters or test reports attesting
compliance with the applicable specifications for the following:
1. Masonry units.
2. Mortar and grout materials.
3. Reinforcing steel.
B. Prior to installation, provide Architect with certificates or other documentation attesting to
date of block casting.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples of each specified masonry unit for approval before delivery to the
site, unless only standard, plain concrete unit masonry is used. Samples shall include shapes,
sizes and kinds in sufficient number to show full range of color and texture of each type of
masonry unit specified. Final approval shall be by the Architect. One (1) color and size for
each different type of unit specified shall be used throughout the project.
B. Sample Panel: Erect minimum 4'-0" x 4'-0" sample panel consisting of approved concrete unit
masonry that satisfactorily shows proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar and
workmanship. Sample panel of materials using split-face or other textured block shall be
constructed showing a corner condition.
1. Contractor shall not continue work until Architect and Owner's representative have
accepted sample panel.
2. Sample panel shall remain on site until work of this Section is complete and will be
used as standard of comparison for balance of work.
3. Sample panel may be constructed as a part of the permanent building construction if
approved by the Architect.
C. Certificates: Submit certificates with test data or other supporting documentation attesting to
test results and date of block casting, as specified above.
04220 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
D. Masonry Wall Reinforcing Drawings: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing
bars. Comply with ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement”. Show
elevations of reinforced walls including: bar sizes, location and quantities of reinforcing steel,
location and arrangement of supporting and spacing devices, bending and cutting schedules,
size and location of all openings, pockets, embedments and anchor bolts, top and bottom
elevations of walls and bearing elevations of all elements supported, all masonry control joints
and all other framing and/or special conditions affecting the work.
E. Masonry Preconstruction Prism Testing Results:
1. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, per ASTM C1314.
2. Current Prism Test: Prisms shall be ungrouted with only face shell bedding and
capping.
3. Include mortar and grout proportions used in test specimens.
4. One set of five (5) prisms of each type of unit and each type of masonry assemblage
shall be built and tested using the materials and proportions specified for the project.
The average of the prisms shall exceed the specified 28-day strength (f’m). As an
alternate, a prism test record consisting of at least 30 prism tests may be submitted to
substantiate f’m. These prisms shall have been constructed under the observations of
and have been constructed with similar materials to these specified for this Project.
The average compressive strength of these tests shall exceed 1.33 f’m.
F. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.06 TESTING OF MORTAR AND GROUT
A. Mortar: Make one (1) set of three (3) 2" x 4" cylinders for each type of mortar each day that
mortar is laid. Break one (1) cylinder at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days.
1. Spread mortar on masonry units between 1/2" and 3/4" thick and allow to stand one (1)
minute.
2. Remove mortar and place it in a 2" x 4" cylinder in two (2) layers, compressing mortar
into cylinder using a flat-end stick or fingers.
3. Lightly tap mold on opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep
them damp until taken to laboratory.
4. Contractor’s Option: Contractor may substitute a prism test of in-place concrete unit
masonry construction, in lieu of specified mortar testing, upon prior approval of the
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
B. Grout: Make one (1) set of three (3) 3" x 3" x 6" high specimens for each type of grout and type
of wall where used each day grout is poured. Break one (1) specimen at seven (7) days and two
(2) at 28 days.
1. On a flat non-absorbent base, form a space 3" x 3" x 6" high, using masonry units having
same moisture condition as those being laid.
2. Line the space with permeable paper or porous separator so that water may pass
through the liner into masonry units.
3. Thoroughly mix the grout to obtain fully representative mix and place into molds in two
(2) layers. Puddle each layer with 1" x 2" stick to eliminate air bubbles.
4. Level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to the
laboratory.
C. After 48-hour set, remove molds, cap the specimens and place them in fog room until tested in
damp condition, in accordance with ASTM C31.
D. Test in accordance with ASTM C39. From each set of cylinders, break one (1) at seven (7) days
and two (2) at 28 days.
04220 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
E. Reports shall include location and description of wall, dates, weather conditions, temperature
of mortar and grout, description of mortar and grout mixes, description of masonry prisms,
breaking stresses and nature of break.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site on platforms or pallets. Keep masonry units completely covered
and free from frost, ice and snow. Handle masonry units carefully to avoid chipping, breakage,
contact with soil or contaminating materials. Protect steel materials from moisture and keep
free from rust or scale. Store mortar materials in dry place. Damaged materials shall not be
used.
B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction
activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work.
C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50° F prior to, during and 48
hours after completion of masonry work.
B. During freezing or near-freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a
minimum temperature of 50° F and to protect masonry work completed or in progress.
C. Protect partially completed masonry against weather when work is not in progress by covering
top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2'
down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place.
D. Walls which may be exposed to high winds during erection shall be adequately braced until
permanent support is provided at floor or roof level immediately above the story under
construction.
E. Cold Weather Masonry Installation:
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
2. Do not use antifreeze compounds, calcium chloride or substances containing calcium
chloride in mortar or grout.
3. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or
freezing.
4. Protect masonry being placed from wind with enclosures or shields when air
temperature is below 32° F.
5. Do not heat water above 106° F.
6. When mortar or grout materials have been combined, temperature of the mixture shall
not be less than 50° F or more than 100° F.
7. Masonry materials shall be preconditioned and completed masonry protected as
follows:
a. When air temperature is below 40° F and above 32° F, heat mixing water.
Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by means of waterproof covers.
b. When air temperature is below 32° F and above 20° F, heat both sand and
mixing water. Maintain a temperature of at least 40° F on both sides of walls
by means of suitable covers or enclosures for 24 hours.
c. When air temperature is 20° F and below, heat sand, mixing water and block
and provide heated enclosures. A temperature of at least 40° F shall be
maintained within enclosures for 48 hours.
d. Periods required for protection and maintenance of specified temperatures
may be reduced to 1/2 of those specified herein before if Type III Portland
cement is used with the Engineer's approval.
F. Hot Weather Masonry Installation:
1. During very hot weather and drying wind, the Architect may order very light fog spray
of mortar bedding areas several times during the first 24 hours to prevent premature
drying of mortar.
04220 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Plain Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C90, Grade N, minimum 1,900 psi light-weight, load-
bearing units.
1. Size: Nominal 8" high x 16" long face dimension x 8" deep units, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Color: Natural.
3. Integral Water Repellent: Integral polymeric-based water repellent admixture,
conforming to ASTM E514 and achieving an E (Excellent) rating, RainBlok by ACM
Chemistries, Inc., Norcross, GA, (877) 226-1766, or approved equal.
a. None required for plain concrete unit masonry used as structural back-up
material in composite wall construction, or for interior walls.
b. None required for plain concrete unit masonry where covered with stucco
and/or plaster on both faces.
4. Appearance: Units shall have smooth, dense, exposed surfaces free of cracks, chips or
deleterious matter.
5. Special shapes as shown on the Drawings or as required:
a. Knock-out bond beam units at bearing and top course of walls and in other
locations shown on the Drawings.
b. Bullnose external corners where shown on the Drawings.
c. Bullnose units and caps for partial-height, interior partition walls.
d. Double-X ventilating block where shown on the Drawings.
B. Scored Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C90, Grade N, minimum 1,900 psi light-weight, load-
bearing units.
1. Size: Nominal 8" high x 16" long face dimension x 8" deep split-face units, with 8
vertical scores per 16" face dimension.
2. Color: Natural, to be field finished.
3. Integral Water Repellent: Integral polymeric-based water repellent admixture,
conforming to ASTM E514, and achieving an E (Excellent) rating, RainBlok by ACM
Chemistries, Inc., Norcross, GA, (877) 226-1766, or approved equal.
4. Appearance: Units shall have smooth, dense, exposed surfaces free of cracks, chips or
deleterious matter. Vertical scores shall be formed or saw cut into units at the block
plant. Representative sample in sample panel subject to approval by Architect.
a. Units shall have matching scored split-face finish on all exposed surfaces,
including ends.
b. Matching finishes shall not be required at exposed surfaces in interior rooms or
spaces to be sealed, painted, or where scheduled to be left unfinished.
5. Special shapes as shown on the Drawings or as required:
a. Special shapes as shown on the Drawings or as required:
b. 8-score, split-face corner units for external corners.
C. Bond Beam Units: All bond beam units shall have knockout webs and open bottoms, except at
masonry lintels over openings. Match unit sizes and appearances specified in paragraph 2.01.
D. Lintel Units: All lintel units shall have solid bottoms, cast as U-shaped units in lengths as
required for project conditions. Match unit sizes and appearances specified in paragraph 2.01.
E. Tolerances: No overall dimension of width, height or length shall vary by more than 1/8" from
the specified standard dimension.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section
01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
04220 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
G. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Robinson Block Co., Colorado Springs, CO, (719) 390-5477, (800) 284-8037.
2. Basalite Concrete Products LLC, Denver, CO, (303) 292-2345.
3. Powers Masonry Supply, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 484-1292.
4. Trenwyth by Superlite Block, Phoenix, AZ, (800) 331-9823.
5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, appearance, quality, performance
and range of selection, including matching the selected product(s) specified above in
the sole opinion of the Architect, are acceptable.
2.02 REINFORCING STEEL, ANCHORS AND TIES
A. General: Corrosion-resistant metal meeting or exceeding applicable standards ASTM A153 and
ASTM A116.
B. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Section 03200.
C. Veneer and Horizontal Reinforcing Types:
1. Wire Mesh: Minimum 30-gage plain wire. Mesh shall be 1/2" width, 1" (25mm) less
than width of masonry.
2. Composite Wall Construction: Two-component, composite wall system consisting of
truss type reinforcing specified above, with truss double eyes welded to trusses at 16"
o.c. and separate double hook tabs for veneer wythe.
D. Veneer Ties: Standard 7/8" x 6-3/4" long, 18-gage rigid hot-dipped galvanized wall ties.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL, and distributed locally at Denver, CO, (303) 321-
1836.
2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL, (800) 621-4140.
3. Manufacturers providing products of same performance and function are acceptable.
2.03 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Color Additives and Special Aggregates: Manufacturer's standard to achieve specified color and
consistency.
B. Flexible Masonry Flashings: Non-reinforced homogenous, waterproof elastomeric sheeting, 20
mil minimum thickness.
1. Tensile Strength: 2200 psi minimum, ASTM D412.
2. Elongation: 250% minimum, ASTM D412.
3. Puncture Resistance: 200 lbs. minimum.
4. Flashing shall retain flexibility to a temperature of -20° F minimum.
5. Materials and adhesive shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular
application.
6. Approved Manufacturer: Vi-Seal Plastic Flashing by AFCO Products, Inc., Somerville,
MA, (800) 397-2687, or approved equal.
C. Control Joints: Non-asphaltic-type foam backer rod by Celotex or equal. Thicknesses as shown
on the Drawings.
D. Cavity Filter Fabric: Refer to paragraph 2.06 below for drainage course material.
E. Weeps: Cotton sash cord or other prefabricated material intended to create weeps.
2.04 INSULATION
A. Composite Wall Insulation: Refer to Section 07210, Building Insulation.
B. Foam Masonry Cell Insulation: Refer to Section 07210, Building Insulation.
04220 - 7
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2.05 SEALER
A. Integral Water Repellent: Specified in paragraph 2.01 above.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Cavity Filler for Drainage Course: Pea gravel, mortar net or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION, COORDINATION AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Ensure items built-in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized.
B. Establish all lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Place concrete unit masonry
in accordance with lines and levels indicated on the Drawings.
C. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of
uniform thickness.
D. Ensure that minimum 1" air space between masonry veneer units and composite wall rigid
board insulation, wall sheathing or masonry backup construction is maintained.
E. Chases and recesses shall be built in and not cut in. Provide not less than 16" of masonry
between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.
F. Unfinished masonry walls shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Do not tooth.
G. Cutting and fitting of masonry, including that required to accommodate the work of other
Sections, shall be done by masonry mechanics with masonry saws.
H. Bearing for horizontal load-carrying members shall be of grouted masonry as shown on the
Drawings. If no detail is shown, bearing under beams shall consist of grouted masonry at least
8" x 16" in plan and 16" deep.
I. Mask or otherwise protect doors and frames, louvers, mechanical and electrical equipment and
other miscellaneous accessories not scheduled to receive masonry sealers prior to application
of spray- or brush-applied sealers.
3.02 CURING OF MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Concrete masonry units shall be cured for minimum of 28 days from the date of
casting before being delivered to the site and installed in masonry walls. Consult with Rocky
Mountain Masonry Institute as necessary.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. General: Install masonry flashings in locations specified herein as shown on the Drawings.
Place flashings, filter fabric and other cavity drainage materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and as detailed on the Drawings.
B. Cavity Filter Fabric and Drainage Course: Drape cavity filter fabric above weep level in
accordance with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. Place cavity filler in
filter fabric.
C. Place weep holes through bottom course of single wythe veneer, single wythe structural,
composite or cavity wall masonry construction as shown on the Drawings, but in no case to
exceed 48" o.c. Form weep holes with specified cotton sash cord or other approved material,
spaced as specified. Coordinate with Architect in the field as necessary.
C. Composite Wall Construction: Extend flashings through concrete block masonry, roll up face of
concrete block masonry or concrete back-up construction minimum 6" and bed into mortar
joint of concrete block as shown on the Drawings. Lap end joints minimum 6" and seal
watertight. Use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Cavity Wall Construction: Refer to Section 04210, Brick Masonry, for installation of thru-wall
flashings for cavity wall construction.
04220 - 8
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
A. Refer to Section 04100, Mortar, for installation and workmanship requirements for mortar and
grout mixes.
B. Ensure that concrete masonry units have properly cured prior to installation, as specified in
3.02 above.
C. Masonry Veneer: Install specified rigid galvanized wall ties anchored to wood stud framing as
shown on the Drawings at the following spacing:
1. Vertically: 16" o.c. maximum.
2. Horizontally: 24" o.c. maximum.
D. Masonry Veneer Composite or Cavity Wall Reinforcement: Install ladder- or truss-type
horizontal reinforcing and 2-piece composite adjustable tab reinforcing as specified in
paragraph 3.07 below.
E. Lay masonry veneer units offset on foundation wall or brick ledge as required to maintain
minimum 1" air space between masonry units and structural concrete unit masonry back-up,
composite wall rigid board insulation or wall sheathing.
4. Keep air space free from excess mortar.
5. Maintain continuous vent through soffit or other construction at top of air space in
composite or cavity wall construction, as shown on the Drawings.
F. Lay, level and align corner units first. Lay concrete unit masonry in running (stack) bond,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Course one (1) block unit and
mortar joint to equal 8" vertically. Lay external and internal courses as shown on the
Drawings.
G. Lay first course of concrete unit masonry in full bed of mortar, except at locations of filled
cores. Lay subsequent courses in face-shell mortar bedding properly jointed with other work.
Fully mortar webs around each core to be grouted. Fully bond external and internal corners
and intersections.
1. Provide 4" high starter course where shown on the Drawings.
2. Masonry Veneer: External corners shall be fully bonded, minimum 4" (8") return.
Mitered corners are not acceptable.
H. Align cells to be filled with grout to provide continuous, unobstructed vertical space.
I. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper power tools to provide straight, true and
unchipped edges.
1. Cut masonry units forming gable ends accurately to form straight and uniform gable
lines.
J. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be
made, remove mortar and replace.
K. Where knock-out bond beams are specified, place wire mesh in joints below bond beam to stop
flow of grout, except at reinforced vertical cells.
L. Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking block corners. Clean
excess mortar from cores to be grouted.
M. Tolerances: Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit: 1/8".
N. Tooling and Joints: Refer to paragraph 3.06.
O. Elevator Hoistway: In addition to the specified installation requirements in this Section,
adhere to all of the elevator manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for
concrete unit masonry hoistway construction.
3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS
A. Head joints shall be well buttered for thickness equal to face shell of unit and shall be shoved
tightly so that mortar bonds well to both units. Do not slush head joints.
B. Hollow Concrete Masonry Units: Lay with full mortar coverage over horizontal and vertical face
shells.
C. Starting Joint: Provide full mortar coverage on bed, except that area where grout occurs shall
be kept free from mortar.
D. Mortar protrusions extending more than 3/8" into cells or cavities to be reinforced and/or
filled, or into air space for veneer masonry, shall be removed.
E. Joint width shall be 3/8", unless otherwise shown.
04220 - 9
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
F. Non-Bearing Walls: Provide masonry bond at all corners. Except at bonded corners, walls shall
be tied together with strips of wire mesh placed not more than 16" o.c. vertically.
3.06 TOOLING
A. Exposed Joints: Tool joints as scheduled. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of
caulking or sealants where required.
1. Exterior Face of Exterior Walls: Tooled concave joints for all masonry unit types.
2. Interior Face of Exterior Walls: Tooled concave joints.
3. Both Faces of Interior Walls: Tooled concave joints.
B. Concealed Joints: Cut joints flush, unless otherwise shown.
C. Joints to be covered with paint shall be filled flush and then sacked to produce dense surface
without sheen.
D. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed and then tooled.
E. Weeps: When mortar has reached proper consistency, remove cotton sash cord material to
form smooth, dense weep holes.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Reinforce all walls with continuous ladder- or truss-type horizontal joint
reinforcement, unless specifically shown otherwise. Provide special shapes where shown on
the Drawings. Lap reinforcement minimum 6" at splices.
B. At each level, place reinforcement in bed joint between first and second course and then at
regular intervals not exceeding 16" o.c. vertically.
C. Place reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are located over face-shell mortar beds and are
fully embedded in mortar for their entire length with minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on
exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations.
D. Composite Wall Reinforcing with Adjustable Tabs: Place truss reinforcing in structural concrete
unit masonry wythe as specified above, and so that welded eyes project into wall cavity.
Install double hook tabs in veneer wythe, interlocked in eyes. Ensure free vertical movement
of tabs.
1. Composite Wall Veneer Course: Install ladder- or truss-type horizontal reinforcing in
veneer course at 16" o.c., staggered 8" from adjustable structural wall reinforcing.
E. Bed Joints Between Concrete Unit Masonry and Brick/Stone Masonry: Install ladder- or truss-
type horizontal reinforcing at all bed joints of dissimilar masonry materials, rake joint and
install caulking or sealant.
F. Unless otherwise shown, provide reinforcement in first and second bed joints immediately
above and below openings or recesses in walls. Reinforcement shall extend minimum 24"
beyond end of sills or lintels or to end of panel if distance to end of panel is less than 24".
G. Use only prefabricated "L" and "T" units at corners and intersections, respectively.
H. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcement, unless shown on the Drawings.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF VENEER TIES
A. General: Install corrugated masonry veneer tie to solid wall sheathing or other substrate at
spacing specified in paragraph 3.03 above.
3.09 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING BARS
A. Reinforcing bars shall be straight, except for bends around corners and where bends or hooks
are detailed. Bars partially embedded in masonry shall not be field-bent, except as shown on
the Drawings or specifically permitted by the Structural Engineer.
B. Bars shall be free of loose rust, mud, oil or other coatings that would destroy or reduce bond.
C. Splices shall be made only at locations shown on the Drawings or where specifically permitted
by the Structural Engineer. Bars shall be lapped as specified in the Structural Drawings and be
separated by 1 bar diameter or wired together.
D. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed into position indicated on the Drawings using
reinforcing bar positioners and secured rigidly against displacement within a tolerance of 1/4".
04220 - 10
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
E. Vertical reinforcing shall have a minimum clearance of 1/2" from masonry and not less than 1
bar diameter between bars.
F. Vertical reinforcing shall be placed in masonry cores as shown or specified on the Drawings,
including but not limited to the following locations:
1. Load-bearing masonry walls, reinforcing bars spaced as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Cores in jambs of all door and window openings in load-bearing walls.
3. Cores below bearing of structural members, as indicated on the Drawings and specified
in paragraph 3.01 above.
G. Horizontal bars shall be placed in continuous masonry courses, consisting of bond-beam or
through-block units and shall be solidly grouted in place.
H. When foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical unit core, it shall not be sloped more
than 1 horizontal in 6 vertical. Dowel shall be grouted into core in vertical alignment, even
though it is in an adjacent cell to vertical wall reinforcing.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ANCHORS
A. Embedded Anchor Slots and Masonry Anchors: Refer to Section 03250.
B. Provide masonry anchors at maximum 16" o.c. vertically at each embedded anchor slot
location, unless otherwise indicated.
3.11 GROUTING OF MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Grout cells of hollow concrete unit masonry where indicated on the Drawings or
required by project conditions, including but not limited to the following locations:
1. All vertical cells to be reinforced as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.
2. All horizontal cells of bond beam or lintel beam units as indicated on the Drawings or
specified herein.
3. Walls Supporting Fixtures: Non-bearing walls supporting wall-hung toilet fixtures or
other equipment or accessories shall be fully grouted at cores containing anchorage
devices.
B. When laying masonry units, extreme care shall be taken to prevent excess mortar from
squeezing out and falling into air space or cells to be grouted or sand-filled. Mortar which
projects more than 3/8" into grout space shall be removed.
C. Grout shall be puddled or vibrated in place.
D. To control area to be grouted, use metal lath or masonry dam. Do not use paper or wood.
E. Pour grout into horizontal members at maximum 48" o.c.
F. Grouting of beams over openings shall be done in one (1) continuous operation.
G. Vertical cells containing reinforcement and cells of walls scheduled to be filled shall be
grouted solidly. Pours shall be stopped 1-1/2" below top of course, except at top of wall, to
form a key at pour joints. Provide clean-out openings at bottom of each pour for inspection.
H. Grouting Masonry of Hollow Units: Walls shall be erected and grouted in lifts not higher than
8'. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment and shall have clear unobstructed
cell area of at least 2" x 3".
I. Grout Spaces Less Than 2" in Width: Walls shall be grouted in heights of less than 8" or six (6)
times the grout joint thickness, whichever is less. Pour grout up to 1" from top of lower wythe.
One (1) wythe of wall shall be laid up higher than the other, but not more than 16". Grout
joint shall be at least 1" wide and shall be filled solidly with grout.
J. Grout Spaces 2" or More in Width: Grout space must be cleaned and inspected before grouting.
Wall shall be grouted in heights of 2' or less for spaces less than 4" wide and in heights of 4' or
less for spaces 4" or wider.
3.12 INSTALLATION OF LINTELS
A. General: Install loose lintels where shown on the Drawings or required for a complete
installation.
B. Masonry Lintels: Provide masonry unit lintels where shown and whenever openings of more
than 12" but less than 30" are shown without steel or other lintels. Temporarily support
formed-in-place lintels.
04220 - 11
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1. Unless otherwise shown, provide one (1) #5 reinforcing bar for each 4" of wall
thickness. Fill lintel units solidly with grout.
2. Refer to the Structural Drawings for loose lintel schedule.
C. Bearing: Unless otherwise shown, provide minimum bearing of 6" for openings less than 6'-0"
wide and 8" for wider openings.
D. Place control joint materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, recessed
in joint for caulking as specified in Section 07900.
3.13 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Locate vertical control, expansion and isolation joints in concrete unit masonry as shown on the
Drawings. Joints shall be continuous through depth of the masonry work, unless otherwise
detailed.
B. Maintain control joint voids clear of mortar, grout and debris. Rake out mortar in preparation
for application of caulking and sealants.
C. Control Joint Spacing: Refer to the Drawings for joint locations. If location of control joints is
not shown, place vertical joints maximum 20'-0" o.c. for unbroken lengths of concrete unit
masonry, except as specified herein:
1. Locate joints at points of natural weakness in supporting structure, at wall openings
and at control joints located in the floor slab when walls are supported on the slab.
2. Wall Openings: Where doors, windows, louvers or other wall openings in masonry
occur, control joints shall be placed on one (1) side of openings less than 6'-0" wide, on
both (2) sides of openings 6'-0" wide or greater, or at locations and spacings shown on
the Drawings, but in no case less than 12'-0" o.c. Joints at lintels or headers shall be
offset 4" (6") (8") or as required by structural bearing requirements, with joint offset
using slip plane formed by building paper or other approved material.
3. External Corners: Place control joints at maximum 4'-0" to 6'-0" from all bonded
external corners.
4. Internal Corners: Form cold isolation joints at all internal corners.
5. Masonry Veneer: Locate vertical control joints in continuous runs of masonry veneer so
ratio of horizontal run to vertical height of veneer does not exceed 4:1, or 20'-0",
whichever is greater.
6. Masonry Veneer: Locate control joints within 2'-0" maximum of all bonded external
corners.
7. Masonry Veneer: Provide at least one (1) control joint in each wall plane.
3.14 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build-in hollow metal frames, signage, electrical and mechanical
accessories, anchor bolts, plates, specialties and other items supplied by others. Place items
plumb and true to line.
3.15 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit sleeves and other items as required. Cooperate fully with
other Sections to ensure correct size, shape and location.
B. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on the
Drawings or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work.
3.16 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION AND OTHER FILL MATERIALS
A. Composite Wall Insulation: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions
and recommendations. Refer to Section 07210.
B. Foam Masonry Cell Insulation: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations. Refer to Section 07210.
C. Acoustical Sand Fill: Install in all non-grouted cells of concrete unit masonry, in locations
shown on the Drawings.
04220 - 12
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.17 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. General: All new and/or existing concrete unit masonry, where exposed to view in the
completed work and not scheduled to be painted, shall be thoroughly cleaned upon completion
of the work.
B. Adhere to the following procedures for cleaning concrete unit masonry. Never clean concrete
unit masonry before mortar has set, minimum 14 days.
1. Dry clean wall with wood paddles or scrapers, removing large particles of mortar.
2. Presoak wall with clean water, scrub with a solution of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate
and 1/3 cup household detergent to one gallon of water. Scrub with a stiff fiber brush
only.
3. Thoroughly rinse with clean, low-pressure water immediately after scrubbing to remove
all cleaning solution, dirt, and mortar crumbs. Water pressure shall not exceed 500
psi.
C. Clean soiled surfaces exposed to view using a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry
or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non-
metallic tools in cleaning operations. Leave surfaces prepared for further sealers or coatings,
if specified.
D. Remove and replace any chipped or broken concrete masonry units. Remove excess mortar and
smears upon completion of masonry work. Point or replace defective mortar to match adjacent
work.
3.18 APPLICATION OF MASONRY SEALER
A. Ensure that concrete masonry units have been properly cleaned and dried prior to applying
sealer. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces from overspray of sealer.
B. Ensure that sealants for control and expansion joints have been installed prior to applying
sealer.
C. Ensure that proper precautions are taken for handling products near sources of heat or open
flames.
D. Prior to full application, test panels of approximately 4' x 4' shall be treated to determine the
degree of color change in the masonry and precise application procedures.
E. Apply sealer at consistency and rate of application in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
F. Apply sealer to all exterior exposed masonry surfaces, unless otherwise noted or scheduled to
receive other finishes.
G. Clean excess sealer from concrete masonry units and adjacent surfaces.
3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Installation of masonry units, mortar and grout, special curing and workmanship of
joints shall be in accordance with the standards approved in the sample panel.
B. All concrete unit masonry units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that may
interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the
construction.
C. Where masonry units are to be exposed in the completed construction, the face or faces that
are exposed shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections to the satisfaction of the
Architect, except that chips not larger than 1/4" will be considered acceptable.
D. Contractor shall promptly remove any rejected masonry units or portions of the work and
replace to match the quality of the approved sample panel.
E. Special Inspection: Special inspection shall be performed for compliance with drawings and
standards cited herein. Special inspection shall include the following:
1. Observe preparation of all masonry prisms and preparation of all grout and mortar
specimens.
2. Verify all embedded bolts, plates and dowels are installed, are the correct size, have
the proper embedment, and are otherwise as specified.
3. Verify masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate and all other materials
meet the requirements of the contract documents. Verify all materials are properly
04220 - 13
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
stored.
4. For masonry constructed by low-lift grouting techniques, observe the following at least
two (2) times each day that masonry construction is in progress (low-lift grouting is
grouting which does not require clean-outs):
a. Observe proportioning, mixing and placing of mortar and grout. Observe
cleanliness of grout cavities. Observe placement of masonry units including
construction details, procedures and workmanship. Observe grout
consolidation and reconsolidation.
b. Observe type, size and location of reinforcing, ties and accessories. Observe
placement, splice locations and splice lengths.
5. For masonry construction by high-lift grouting techniques, observe the following (high-
lift grouting is grouting which requires clean-outs):
a. Observe proportioning, mixing and placing of mortar including provision for
removal of mortar fins from inside of cells to be grouted.
b. Observe placement of masonry units including construction details, procedures
and workmanship. Observe the size and location of clean-out openings.
c. Observe type, size and location of joint reinforcing, ties and accessories.
d. The above shall be observed at least once each day that masonry construction
is in progress.
e. Immediately prior to the closing of clean-out openings for each section of
masonry to be grouted, verify the following:
1) Verify all cells to be grouted are free of obstructions (including mortar
fins) which would inhibit proper placement and consolidation of grout.
2) Verify bottom of all cells to be grouted have been thoroughly cleaned
of all loose mortar and debris.
3) Verify proper size, type and placement of all reinforcement in cells to
be grouted. Verify reinforcement location, length of splices and
provision for maintaining proper position of reinforcing during grouting.
f. Continuously observe all grouting operations to verify proper slump,
consolidation and reconsolidation of grout, proper height of each grout lift, and
elapsed time between placement of successive lifts.
6. Daily reports of all special inspections shall be prepared and distributed as specified in
Section 01400, Quality Control, with 48 hours of the time the inspections were made.
Provide other reports as required by the governing building code.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
05999 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 05999
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install miscellaneous fabricated items of ferrous and non-ferrous metals as shown
on the Drawings or required by the work, including but not limited to:
1. Steel plate toilet partition screens and toilet accessories.
2. Miscellaneous steel beams, channels, angles, lintels, and straps, if not furnished by
other Sections.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 09900, Painting.
1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED BY OTHERS
A. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Loose lintels and metal fabrications laid into concrete
block masonry.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ASTM A36: Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A307: Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners.
3. ASTM A325: High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
4. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code.
5. FS TT-P-86: Paint, Red-Lead Base, Ready Mixed.
6. FS TT-P-645: Primer, Paint, Zinc-Chromate, Alkyd Type.
7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar
size and complexity.
C. Welding Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by welders or welding operators
currently certified in accordance with the AWS Code to perform the type of welding involved.
1. All welders shall have evidence of current certification.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for any miscellaneous or
specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of expanded metal mesh screen/steel angle frame
panels, illustrating dimensions, components, spacing of predrilled holes for anchorage, finishes
and shop welds or other attachments.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not
submitted under separate Sections.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
05999 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts, loose lintels and other anchorage
devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry construction to the project
site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete operations. Provide
setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices.
B. Handle members in a manner to prevent damage, distortion or abrasion of shop paint. Repair
or replace damaged materials, members or structures as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Storage of Steel Materials: Structural steel members stored at the project site shall be above
ground on platforms, skids or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect
steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use.
Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: Conform to ASTM A572-50, 50 ksi. Refer to the Drawings for thicknesses
and/or gages.
1. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: High-strength type recommended for structural steel joints,
ASTM A307.
2. Plate for Toilet Partition Screens: 11-gage sheet steel.
3. Welding Materials: Applicable AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.
4. Primer: Zinc-chromate alkyd FS TT-P-645.
B. Structural Tubular Steel: Square, cold-rolled steel tubing, fully welded construction. Conform
to ASTM A500, Grade B.
C. Structural Steel Pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, Grade B.
D. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 60% minimum.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section
01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop-fabricate and assemble items in largest practical components for delivery and installation
on the site. Extent of shop assembly shall be as approved in the shop drawings.
B. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.
C. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces.
1. All welds exposed to view to be "Architectural Grade".
D. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage
and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, unless otherwise
specified.
E. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to prime painting.
F. Prime paint items for field finishing as specified in Section 09900. Do not shop-prime surfaces
in contact with concrete or requiring field welding. Shop-prime in one (1) coat.
05999 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing
work of this Section. Notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies or conditions which may
affect the successful installation of the work. Do not begin work until such conditions are
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions affecting the work of this Section and coordinate fit
and installation details with related trades prior to fabrication.
C. Ensure that items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry are supplied to
the site prior to concrete or masonry work, complete with necessary setting templates.
D. Ensure that ferrous metal surfaces have been properly painted where in contact with aluminum
or other dissimilar metals as required to prevent electrolysis.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install prefabricated items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
and recommendations. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from
distortion.
B. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.
C. Replace items damaged in course of installation.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Miscellaneous Steel Beams, Channels, Angles, Lintels and Straps: Furnish under this Section,
unless arranged for otherwise.
B. Steel Plate Toilet Partition Screens and Toilet Accessories:
1. Fabricate and install steel plate toilet partition screens without doors as detailed on
the Drawings or attached hereto.
2. Fabricate and install steel toilet paper holders for installation on steel plate toilet
partition screens as detailed on the Drawings or attached hereto.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
06100 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish materials and labor for installation of rough carpentry, including but not limited to:
1. Studs, joists, bridging, blocking and plates for wall, roof, ceiling and soffit framing.
2. Furring, stripping, blocking and sleepers.
3. Fireblocking and draft stops.
4. Plywood and/or oriented strand board (OSB) wall, roof and floor sheathing.
5. Miscellaneous wall-mounted plywood backer boards for electrical, audio/visual, sound
and related equipment.
B. Furnish nails, screws, bolts, fasteners, construction adhesives, and other related or accessory
materials required for a complete installation.
C. Installation of prefabricated wood beams, floor joists, roof trusses and miscellaneous blocking
and bridging.
D. Installation of primed hardboard siding and trims, unless arranged for otherwise.
E. Furnish and install prefabricated wood siding and trims, unless arranged for otherwise.
F. Furnish and install light-gage metal joist/truss connectors.
G. Coordination of all other trades as required for a complete installation.
H. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
4. Section 06170, Prefabricated Structural Wood.
5. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
6. Section 07221, Tapered Rigid Insulation.
7. Section 07270, Air Infiltration Barriers.
8. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
9. Division 15, Mechanical.
10. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. PS 1: Construction and Industrial Plywood.
2. PS 2-92: Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural Use Panels.
3. PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard.
4. NFPA National Forest Products Association National Design Specification for Wood
Construction.
5. APA: American Plywood Association, Plywood Specification and Grade Guide.
6. AWPA: American Wood-Preservers' Association.
a. AWPA C1: All timber products – preservative treatment by pressure processes.
b. AWPA C2: Lumber, timber, bridge ties and mine ties – preservative treatment
by pressure processes.
c. AWPA C4: Poles – preservative treatment by pressure processes.
d. AWPA C9: Plywood - preservative treatment by pressure processes.
e. AWPA C14: Wood for highway construction - preservative treatment by
pressure processes.
f. AWPA C15: Wood for commercial-residential construction – preservative
treatment by pressure processes.
g. AWPA C16: Wood used on farms - preservative treatment by pressure
processes.
06100 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
h. AWPA C17: Playground equipment treated with inorganic preservatives -
preservative treatment by pressure processes.
i. AWPA C22: Lumber and plywood for permanent wood foundations -
preservative treatment by pressure processes.
7. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
8. California Redwood Association.
9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Materials shall carry the visible grade stamp of agency certified by
National Forest Products Association (NFPA).
C. Plywood panels shall be identified with APA grade trademark of the American Plywood
Association.
D. Grading of lumber shall be in accordance with the current edition of the Western Wood
Products Association.
E. Pressure-Treated Lumber: Pressure-treated lumber materials shall not contain chromated
copper arsenate (CCA).
F. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for all construction adhesives.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
2. Credit EQ 4.4: Product data for composite wood or agrifiber products indicating that
they do not contain any added urea-formaldehyde in resins.
3. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
4. Credit MR 7: Invoices and chain of custody certificates for products containing FSC
certified wood. Include statement of cost for each certified wood product, excluding
labor and costs for installation. Invoices must show the chain of custody number.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover in transit and at jobsite.
B. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required to be installed in the work.
C. Store on level racks and keep free of the ground to avoid warping. Stack to ensure proper
ventilation and drainage.
D. Pressure-Treated Wood Materials: Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional
changes, in accordance with instructions from treating plant.
E. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's original unbroken boxes, cartons or containers,
with labels intact. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1.05 COMPLIANCE
A. Do not permit materials not complying with the provisions of this Section to be brought onto or
to be stored at the jobsite.
B. Promptly remove non-complying materials from the jobsite and replace with materials meeting
the requirements of this Section.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written lifetime warranty for pressure-treated wood products covering
defects in materials and workmanship.
06100 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Provide manufacturer's written 1-year warranty for epoxy-type wood repair materials covering
defects in materials and workmanship.
1. Installation Warranty: Installing contractor shall provide a 2-year written warranty
covering installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. Framing Lumber: PS 20, grade in accordance with established WPA grading rules, maximum
moisture content of 12% to 19% (S-Dry) S4S, of the following species and grades:
1. Structural Framing: Hem-Fir #2 or better, minimum 1,200 psi fiber stress in bending,
unless other grades and stresses are indicated on the Structural Drawings.
2. Non-Structural Light Framing: Douglas Fir or Hem-Fir, construction grade or better.
3. Blocking and Miscellaneous Furring and Stripping: Douglas Fir or Hem-Fir, construction
grade or better.
4. Sill Plates: Redwood or pressure-treated Hem-Fir, where in contact with concrete or
masonry. Pressure-treated lumber shall not contain CCA.
B. Waferboard: Oriented strand board (OSB), 7/16" thick or as shown on the Drawings, exterior
APA.
C. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for
Multi-Purpose Construction Adhesives, 140 g/L for Structural Wood Adhesives or 250
g/L for architectural sealants.
2. Credit EQ 4.4: Composite wood and agrifiber products containing no added urea
formaldehyde in binding agents.
3. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
4. Credit MR 7: At least 50% by cost FSC certified wood products.
2.02 PRESSURE-TREATED ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. Deck and Porch Joists, Beams and other Semi-Concealed Structural Members: PS 20, grade in
accordance with established WPA grading rules, maximum moisture content of 12% to 19% (S-
Dry) S4S, with preservative treatment specified below, of the following species and grades:
1. Structural Framing: Hem-Fir #2 or better, 1,200 psi fiber stress in bending.
2. Non-Structural Light Framing: Douglas Fir or Hem-Fir, construction grade or better.
3. Sill Plates: Redwood or pressure-treated Hem-Fir, where in contact with concrete.
4. Landscape Timbers: 4" x 4" pressure-treated Hem-Fir for site retaining walls to match
existing of Lot 1.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. ACQ Preserve by Chemical Specialties, Inc., Charlotte, NC, and distributed locally by
ECO Products, Boulder, CO, (303) 449-1876, as basis of design.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality, and
meeting the requirements of paragraph 2.0__ below, are acceptable.
2.03 PLYWOOD MATERIALS
A. General: APA-rated softwood plywood, meeting the grading requirements of PS-1.
1. Sizes: Manufacturer's standard 4'-0" wide x 8'-0" long x thicknesses as shown on the
Drawings.
2. Edges: Square, butt.
B. Exterior/Interior Plywood Structural Sheathing: As specified on the Drawings, Exterior APA.
C. Exterior Concealed Plywood: CDX, Exterior APA.
D. Interior Concealed Plywood: C/D plugged, Interior APA with exterior glue.
06100 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for
Multi-Purpose Construction Adhesives, 140 g/L for Structural Wood Adhesives or 250
g/L for architectural sealants.
2. Credit EQ 4.4: Composite wood and agrifiber products containing no added urea
formaldehyde in resins.
3. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
4. Credit MR 7: At least 50% by cost FSC certified wood products.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Weyerhaeuser Corp., Tacoma, WA.
2. Georgia Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, (404) 652-4000.
3. Manufacturers providing products of the same design, function, quality and
performance are acceptable.
2.04 FASTENERS, ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Metal Wall Bracing: Galvanized metal "T" profile wall and corner bracing, 20-gage.
1. Ampcor "T"-Brace Series 6700 by Anderson Metal Products Co., Taylorsville, MS, (800)
426-7267, or equal.
B. Nails: Size and type to suit application. (As indicated on the Structural Drawings.)
1. Framing: 8d to 12d rosin-coated box.
2. Sheathing: 8d, 2 1/2" long box nails, zinc-coated.
C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application or as indicated
on the Drawings.
1. Medium Carbon Steel: Galvanized for exterior locations, high-humidity locations and
treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations or when in contact with concrete.
D. Prefabricated Soffit and Roof Vents: Specified in Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and
Trim.
E. Gable End Vents: Prefabricated metal gable end louvered vents.
2.05 CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVES
A. Construction Adhesives: Low-viscosity, mastic-type, multipurpose adhesive, formulated for
field-gluing for interior or exterior use, meeting the following specifications:
1. Reference Standards: Comply with the following minimum standards:
a. APA Spec. AFG-01.
b. ASTM D3498 and C557.
c. HUD/FHA requirements in Bulletin #60.
2. Type: Synthetic elastomeric polymer, VOC compliant.
a. Calculated VOC: 47 g/L maximum.
3. Base: Synthetic elastomer.
4. Consistency: Approx. 130,000 cps, Brookfield viscometer.
5. Weight/Gallon: 10.4 lbs. minimum.
6. Solids content: 78%.
7. Strength: ASTM D3498.
8. Aging: Retains flexibility after 500 hrs. at 300 psi and 158° F by ASTM D572-61.
9. Water Resistance: Waterproof.
10. Application Method: Caulking gun or trowel.
11. Application Temperature: 0°-100° F.
12. Service Range: -20° to 120° F.
13. Material Suitability: Select appropriate adhesive product(s) for materials/products to
be field bonded, including but not limited to:
a. Medium- and heavy-duty construction adhesives.
b. Drywall adhesive.
c. Subfloor adhesive.
d. Polyurethane adhesive.
e. Repair construction adhesive.
06100 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
f. Resilient base adhesive.
g. FRP adhesive.
h. Multipurpose flooring adhesive.
i. Ceramic tile adhesive.
j. Ceiling tile adhesive.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for
Multi-Purpose Construction Adhesives or 140 g/L for Structural Wood Adhesives.
C. Approved Product and Manufacturer:
1. Titebond VOC-Compliant Adhesives, manufactured by Franklin International, Columbus,
OH, (888) 533-9043, as basis of design.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same type, design, quality, performance and VOC
compliance are acceptable.
2.06 LIGHT-GAGE METAL JOIST/TRUSS CONNECTORS
A. General: Light-gage, galvanized metal hangers, clips, straps, base and column caps, size and
type as indicated on the Drawings, as required to suit job conditions or as recommended by
manufacturer for intended application.
B. Finishes:
1. In contact with preservative treated wood for above ground use: Galvanized, ASTM
A653, G185.
2. In contact with preservative treated wood for other than above ground use: Type 304
or 316 stainless steel.
3. All other applications: Galvanized, ASMT G653, G90.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA, (800) 999-5099.
2. Timber Engineering Co.
3. KC Metal Products Inc., San Jose, CA, (408) 436-8754.
4. Semco, Jacksonville, FL, (800) 874-0335.
5. Manufacturers providing framing connectors and accessories of same design, function,
performance and structural capabilities are acceptable.
2.07 WOOD TREATMENTS
A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated on the Drawings or specified
herein to be pressure-treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA standards C2, C9,
C14, C15, C16, C17 or ICBO ER4981, as applicable. Pressure-treat items with waterborne
preservatives complying with WPA LP-2, except that in no case shall chromated copper
arsenate (CCA) be used. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of 19% for
lumber and 18% for plywood. Mark each treated item with the WPA quality mark requirements.
1. Application Rates: Apply specified preservative treatment as follows, or as
recommended by approved manufacturers:
a. Preservative treatment for above ground use: 0.25 lb./cu.ft. minimum.
b. Preservative treatment where in contact with ground: 0.40 lb./cu.ft.
minimum.
c. Preservative treatment for wood foundation systems: 0.60 lb./cu.ft. minimum.
2. Treated wood products shall be used in the following locations, unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings:
a. In contact with roofing, flashing or waterproofing.
b. In contact with masonry or concrete.
c. In contact, or within 6" of grade.
d. Exposed to weather.
e. Other locations indicated.
06100 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. General: For new construction, the Contractor shall inspect the concrete or masonry walls and
foundation structures and/or concrete flatwork that will support the rough carpentry structures
associated with the work of this project, and notify the Architect/Engineer of any condition
that may affect the structural integrity, quality or appearance of the completed project. Do
not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the
Contractor.
B. General: For renovation or restoration projects, the Contractor shall be responsible for the
inspection of all existing structural wood components of the structure associated with the work
of this project, and notify the Architect of any condition that may affect the structural
integrity, quality or appearance of the completed project. This shall include, but not be
limited to, the following general areas:
1. Wood roof joists.
C. Upon inspection by the Architect and Owner, the deteriorated materials will be replaced on a
unit price basis. Refer to Section 01022.
D. Contractor shall verify the rough opening requirements for interior stair construction and
adjust the opening dimensions in the field as necessary, depending upon the type of stair
construction selected. Coordinate with the Architect/Engineer as necessary.
E. Ensure that prefabricated roof trusses are properly sized and marked upon delivery to the site.
Check connector plate sizes for compliance with specification requirements.
F. Selection of Lumber Pieces:
1. Carefully select the members. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious de-
fects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing and will allow for proper
connections.
2. Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended function.
3. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect/Engineer, whether or not it has been
installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus or mold, as well as for
improper cutting and fitting, provided such defects exceed the criteria allowed by
referenced standards for the lumber grade specified. The Contractor shall replace
rejected material at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. Do not shim any framing component.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. General:
1. Erect wood framing, furring, stripping and nailing members true to lines and levels; do
not deviate from true alignment more than 1/4" in 10'-0".
2. Space members as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein.
3. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.
4. Construct and erect required built-up beams, headers and curbs.
5. Produce joints which are tight, true and well nailed, with members assembled in
accordance with the Drawings and with applicable codes and regulations.
6. Set horizontal and sloped members with the crown up. Crowns to be set in the same
direction for vertical or horizontal application.
7. Make bearings full and uniform for solid support.
8. On framing members to receive a finished surface, align the finish subsurface to vary
not more than 1/8" from the plane of surfaces of adjacent furring and framing
members.
9. Where scheduled, leave wood surfaces prepared for finishing specified in Section
09900, Painting, and Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.
10. Coordinate rough openings for non-cased and trimmed doors and windows where
gypsum board returns are detailed at jambs and headers. Framed opening shall be
square and plumb to within 1/16" vertically from floor to header at trimmer and 1/16"
horizontally between trimmers at header.
06100 - 7
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Fastening:
1. Nailing shall be in accordance with the requirements of applicable sections of the
building code, current edition, unless indicated otherwise.
a. Nail without splitting wood.
b. Prebore as required.
c. Remove split members and replace with members complying with the specified
requirements.
2. Bolting:
a. Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than the bolts being used.
b. Drill straight and true from one side only.
c. Do not bear bolt heads on wood, but use washers under head and nut where
both bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts.
3. Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root of
threads, enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank.
C. Roof Framing: Conform to the framing requirements of the jurisdiction with authority over this
Project, unless more stringent requirements are shown on the Structural Drawings or specified
herein.
1. Rafter Framing: Dimensional framing at 12", 16" and/or 24" o.c., lumber sizes as
indicated on the Structural Drawings.
2. Prefabricated Roof Truss Framing: 24" o.c., or as indicated on the Structural Drawings.
Refer to paragraph 3.04.
3. Bridging and Blocking: As shown on the Drawings or as required by applicable Building
Codes and the jurisdiction with authority over the project. Also refer to paragraphs
3.03 and 3.05 below.
4. Overframing: Provide 2x6 overframing at 24" o.c., where indicated on the Drawings or
required by project conditions.
5. Miscellaneous: Provide ridge boards, valley rafters and other roof framing components
as required, one (1) size larger than rafter members unless otherwise approved by the
jurisdiction with authority over the project.
6. Roof Sheathing: Specified in paragraph 3.06 below.
D. Lowered Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 2x4 stud framing at 24" o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Support from floor or roof trusses above at intermediate points as required by applicable
codes.
E. Furring and Stripping: Member sizes as indicated on the Drawings spaced at maximum 24" o.c.,
unless otherwise indicated.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BLOCKING
A. Miscellaneous Blocking: Provide solid blocking for all recessed and surface-mounted equipment
and accessories, unless furnished and installed by Section 09110, including but not limited to:
1. Wall-mounted finish hardware, including wall stops.
2. Wall-mounted handrail brackets.
3. Toilet partitions and urinal screens.
4. Toilet and bath accessories, including grab bars.
5. Cabinets and shelving systems.
6. Fire extinguishers and cabinets.
7. Signage systems and plaques.
8. Head track assemblies for window coverings.
9. Wall bumper guardrails.
10. Plumbing fixtures.
11. Electrical equipment and fixtures.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD
A. Roof Trusses:
1. Handle trusses carefully to prevent damage or separation of members and to maintain
structural capacity.
2. Do not install damaged or broken trusses.
06100 - 8
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3. Adequately support and brace work until tied into building structure to ensure against
collapse due to wind or other forces.
4. Attach or hang trusses and laterally brace trusses using specified light-gage metal
hangers and other attachments. Comply with all applicable building codes and
regulations for attachments.
5. Install blocking, bracing and bridging as required by applicable Building Codes for
particular location, span and application. Bracing of roof trusses shall be in accordance
with the requirements and recommendations of the Truss Plate Institute, "Bracing
Wood Trusses: Commentary and Recommendations".
3.05 INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING
A. General: Install plywood and/or oriented strand board (OSB) sheathing as shown on the
Drawings or specified herein.
1. Roof Sheathing: Exterior plywood.
B. Roof Sheathing:
1. Place sheathing with face grain perpendicular to framing members, except where
plywood diaphragm must be continuous to shear walls.
2. Place sheathing with end joints staggered.
3. Protect sheathing from moisture until roofings are installed.
4. Install prefabricated continuous roof vents in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations, unless arranged for otherwise.
a. Refer to the Drawings for extent of work.
5. Place textured and routed plywood sheathing in pattern and direction shown on the
Drawings.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF WOOD SIDING AND TRIM
A. General: Installation of wood siding and trim shall be work of this Section, unless arranged for
otherwise.
B. Refer to Section 07466 for installation specifications.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD SIDING, SOFFITS AND CEILINGS
A. General: Installation of plywood siding, soffits, ceiling panels, etc., shall be work of this
Section, unless arranged for otherwise.
B. Refer to Section 07466 for installation specifications.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain the following tolerances for all rough carpentry work. Defective work shall be
removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
1. Variation from Plumb:
a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum
2. Variation in Plan:
a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum
b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum
3. Variation in Openings:
a. Size: +/-1/8"
b. Location: +/-1/4"
3.09 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect oriented strand board (OSB) and plywood sheathing from exposure to
excessive moisture and accumulations of snow. Broom snow off uncovered floor sheathing
within 4 hours of snowfall.
B. Replace sheathing panels that exhibit delamination, swelling or other deterioration from
exposure to moisture, or as directed by the Architect.
06100 - 9
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.10 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination required by all other Sections of the
Specifications as a part of the work of this Section. Coordination shall be provided to ensure
the proper, timely and complete installation of all materials, equipment and systems of the
project.
END OF SECTION
06116 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 06116
EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install exterior gypsum sheathing on exterior soffits.
B. Furnish and install prefinished insect screening for soffit vents.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
2. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
3. Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site in original, unopened packages, containers or bundles with labels
intact bearing type, brand name and name of manufacturer.
B. Handle wallboard carefully to avoid abrading surfaces or edges.
C. Store materials flat, under cover, on level platforms, with edges, ends and surfaces properly
protected from weather, undue sagging and damage.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures at not less than 55° F for a period of 24 hours before drywall
finishing, during installation and until compounds are dry.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. General: Provide gypsum wallboard materials in accordance with recommendations of GA 216.
B. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing on Exterior Walls and Soffits: 5/8" thick, maximum permissible
length(s), tapered edges.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. United States Gypsum Co., (USG), Chicago, IL, and represented locally in Denver, CO,
(303) 721-9394.
2. Gold Bond Building Products, Charlotte, NC, and represented locally in Lakewood, CO,
(303) 988-5005.
3. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
2.02 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide gypsum wallboard accessories in accordance with GA 216.
B. Corner Beads and Edge Trims: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel beaded units with
flanges for concealment in joint compound.
C. Joint Tape: Type required for listed fire-rated assembly and recommended by manufacturer
for particular exterior installation.
06116 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
D. Joint Compound: Ready-mixed, type as recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
E. Channels: 7/8" furring channels and 1/2" resilient channels as shown on the Drawings, or
required for rated assemblies.
F. Fasteners: Type "S" bugle-head screws, lengths as recommended by manufacturer of gypsum
wallboard material for light-gage steel construction.
G. Control Joints: As shown on the Drawings.
H. Texturing: None.
I. Adhesive: Manufacturer-approved drywall adhesive, oil-based.
1. Ohio Sealants, Inc. or equal.
J. Insect Screening: Prefinished black screening, 18 x 14 mesh, 0.013" diameter aluminum wire.
K. Provide auxiliary materials and accessories for gypsum drywall work of the type and grade
recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrates and the spaces to receive exterior gypsum drywall and
the conditions under which gypsum drywall is to be installed and shall notify Contractor in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Installer.
B. Installer shall comply with all applicable instructions and recommendations of the exterior
insulation and finish system manufacturer.
C. Install prefinished insect screening at continuous soffit vents as detailed on the Drawings.
3.02 GYPSUM WALLBOARD INSTALLATION
A. General: Install exterior gypsum sheathing in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and the recommendations of GA 253. All construction shall be in compliance with
the required fire-rated wall assemblies.
B. Fire-Rated Gypsum Sheathing: Apply gypsum sheathing panels of maximum practical length
with long dimensions at right angles to studs with "V" edge up and fasten with type "5" screws,
spaced as required by the manufacturer for the span and thickness specified. End joints shall
occur over supports with end joints staggered. Properly support panels around cutouts and
openings.
C. Place control joints at locations as indicated on the Drawings or as per manufacturer's
recommendations. Joints shall not be placed at intervals greater than that recommended by
gypsum wallboard manufacturer for the particular application.
D. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical lengths. Place edge trim where
gypsum wallboard abuts dissimilar materials and at reveals. Tape joints as required for listed
fire-rated assembly. Tape, fill and sand exposed joints, edges, corners, openings and fixings to
produce surface ready to receive surface finishes.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Remove soil, stain and extraneous materials caused by installing of drywall materials from
adjacent surfaces.
B. Remove and replace items and materials that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned.
C. Leave surfaces clean and prepared for further finish work.
3.04 PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protection of the exterior gypsum
sheathing work from damage and deterioration during the remainder of the construction
period.
END OF SECTION
06170 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 06170
PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish prefabricated roof trusses and connectors.
B. Furnish steel hardware and connector plates, saddles, beam seats, post caps, etc., unless
furnished by Division 5, Metals.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 05120, Structural Steel: Steel connector plates and beam seats.
4. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Hangers and clips, and installation of prefabricated
wood items.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards and Source Quality Control: Conform to the current requirements of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. Fabricator shall be licensed by American or Canadian Institute of Timber Construction.
2. Fabricate in accordance with Voluntary Product Standard PS 56-73 and bear AITC or
CITC quality mark.
3. Parallel Strand Lumber Beams: Design and fabricate in accordance with National
Evaluation Service Inc., NER-481, or Canadian Construction Materials Centre, CCMC-
11161-R.
4. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications
showing compliance with requirements of this Section.
1. Include drawings, specifications and product data for all components and parts of
structural system, spacing and layout of members, gusset plates and connectors.
Clearly mark all components and parts. Show critical dimensions for determining fit
and placement in building, as well as the loads that members are designed to support.
2. Indicate compliance with specified design criteria.
3. Include erection drawings for identification and assembly of parts.
4. Indicate loads for all joist hangers and other connectors.
5. Drawings: Stamp and signature of licensed Colorado Professional Engineer responsible
for preparation of shop drawings.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Truss Design Calculations: Submit in accordance with Division 1. Calculations shall be
stamped and signed by a licensed Colorado Professional Engineer.
2. Testing Data:
a. Fire assemblies as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Sound control assemblies as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Building Permit: Prepare and submit drawings, calculations, specifications and other
information as may be required to secure building permit by local building authority.
D. Refer to paragraph 2.01.C. for submittals required prior to bidding for approval of equals.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
06170 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
2. Credit EQ 4.4: Product data for composite wood or agrifiber products indicating that
they do not contain any added urea-formaldehyde in binding agents.
3. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
4. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
a. Include statement that indicates costs for each product having recycled
content.
1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Prefabricated structural wood members and components shall be designed under the
supervision of a licensed Colorado Professional Engineer. Designs shall be in accordance with
allowable values assigned by the local building official. Only connections and webs currently
approved by Research Committee of ICBO are acceptable for use.
B. Design and fabricate in compliance with latest edition of the applicable building code. Refer
to Section 01060.
C. Structural Requirements: Design and construct structural system to comply with the criteria
indicated on the Structural Drawings:
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prefabricated wood beams shall be wrapped separately with heavy water-repellent cover.
Protect against damage in transit and on site.
B. Prefabricated wood decking shall be bundled and wrapped with heavy water-repellent cover.
Protect against damage in transit and on site.
C. Store and handle to ensure maintenance of appearance and to prevent damage.
D. Store joists in vertical position, on racks to prevent contact with the ground and cover until
ready for installation.
E. Store roof trusses on site to prevent warping or splitting of members or loosening of gusset
plate connectors. Store on racks to prevent contact with the ground and cover until ready for
installation.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written lifetime warranty for all prefabricated wood products covering
manufacturing errors, and defects in materials and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PREFABRICATED ROOF TRUSSES
A. Materials: Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, select structural #1 or #2, maximum moisture content
of 12-19%, S4S.
B. Construction: Nominal 2x4 or 2x6 construction with raised heel or as detailed on the Drawings
and approved in shop drawings.
C. Configuration: Fan or Howe type or as recommended by truss fabricator.
1. Gable End Trusses: Provide gable end truss configuration where shown on the Drawings
or recommended by truss fabricator.
06170 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Jack and Hip Trusses: Provide truncated jack and/or hip truss configuration where
shown on the Drawings or recommended by truss fabricator.
D. Connector Plates: Galvanized gusset plates, sized as per fabricators requirements, except that
no plate shall be less than 15 sq. in.
1. Gang-Nail Systems, Inc., Miami, FL, or equal.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
2.02 LIGHT-GAGE METAL TRUSS/JOIST CONNECTORS
A. Joist Hangers, Connectors, Column Bases and Caps: Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
B. Truss Connector Plates: Galvanized gusset plates, sized as per fabricator's requirements,
except that no plate shall be less than 15 sq. in.
1. Refer to the Drawings for specific size requirements of truss connector plates at
exposed truss locations.
C. Finishes:
1. In contact with preservative treated wood for above ground use: Galvanized, ASTM
A653, G185.
2. In contact with preservative treated wood for other than above ground use: Type 304
or 316 stainless steel.
3. All other applications: Galvanized, ASMT G653, G90.
D. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
E. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Gang-Nail Systems, Inc., Miami, FL.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, design and performance are
acceptable.
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Glue: Exterior type with mold inhibitor.
B. Miscellaneous Hardware: Refer to Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals.
C. Steel Connector Plates and Beam Seats: Refer to Section 05120, Structural Steel.
2.04 FABRICATION OF PREFABRICATED ROOF TRUSSES
A. General: Fabricate trusses from the approved shop drawings, in accordance with industry
standards.
B. Fabricate trusses in jigs with members accurately cut to provide good bearing at joints. Joints
shall be acceptable if the average opening between ends of members immediately after
fabrication is less than 1/16", except that truss compression chord joints at splices and ridges
shall have full contact between members.
C. Each chord section shall extend through two (2) panel points before being spliced.
D. Provide 1/8" camber for each 6' of truss, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Accurately place connector plates over truss members, as required to provide the attachment
area into each member per the approved shop drawings, except that no plate shall be less than
06170 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
15 sq. in.
1. Press plates into members to obtain full penetration without crushing outer surface of
wood. Plate embedment is acceptable if the opening between the plate and the wood
surface is less than 1/32".
2. Lumber defects and plate misplacement, in combination, shall not reduce the plate
area or number of effective teeth, prones or nails by more than 10%.
F. Do not apply metal gusset plates after shop fabrication. Field repairs, additions and splices
shall maintain design strength.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Do not proceed with fabrication and/or cutting until shop drawings and design calculations
(when required) have been reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Installer shall examine the foundations, rough framing and other substrates under which the
prefabricated structural wood components are to be installed, and notify the Contractor in
writing of any condition that will prevent the successful installation of the work of this Section.
Do not proceed with the installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
a manner acceptable to the Installer. Proceeding with the work shall be considered
acceptance of substrates and site conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD
A. Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
B. Bracing of roof trusses shall be in accordance with the requirements and recommendations of
the Truss Plate Institute, "Bracing Wood Trusses: Commentary and Recommendations".
END OF SECTION
06200 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all softwood finish carpentry, running and standing trim.
B. Furnish and install prefabricated wood millwork, trims and ornamentation.
C. Fabrication and field workmanship standards for miscellaneous exterior and interior wood
materials specified in other Sections.
D. Installation of the following items, unless arranged for otherwise:
1. Architectural woodwork.
2. Hollow metal doors and frames.
3. Solid surface countertops.
4. Finish hardware specified in Division 8.
5. Building specialties specified in Division 10.
6. Miscellaneous equipment and accessories as specified elsewhere.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals: Mounting Brackets.
4. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Redwood fascia and trim.
5. Section 06170, Prefabricated Structural Wood.
6. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
7. Section 08700, Finish Hardware.
8. Section 09900, Painting.
9. Section 10520, Fire Protection Specialties.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations and quality standards of
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
B. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and quality requirements of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified:
1. PS 51: Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
2. PS 58: Basic Hardwood.
3. NFPA (National Forest Products Association) National Design Specification for Wood
Construction.
4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
5. California Redwood Association.
6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
C. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature illustrating all items of
specified shelving hardware.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for all prefabricated millwork
components.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
06200 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Credit EQ 4.2: Manufacturer's product data for paints and stains, including printed
statement of VOC content and chemical components.
3. Credit EQ 4.4:
a. Product data for composite wood or agrifiber products indicating that they do
not contain any added urea-formaldehyde in resins.
b. Adhesive manufacturer's product data for each adhesive used indicating that
the adhesive contains no urea formaldehyde.
4. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data indicating percentages by weight of
postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content.
1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Handrail and guardrail components shall be fabricated and installed to meet all current
building code requirements, whether detailed on the Drawings or not.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver materials and fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are prepared to
receive the work. Protect items from weather while in transit.
B. Store indoors in ventilated areas with a constant, minimum temperature of 60° F, maximum
relative humidity of 25-55%.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship for all hardware and shelving components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Softwood: Graded in accordance with AWI requirements.
1. Finger-Jointed Hem-Fir or Pine, Paint Grade, S4S:
a. Running and standing interior wood trim for opaque finish.
B. Miscellaneous Trim Sizes:
1. 3/4" thick x widths detailed on the Drawings or required for project conditions.
2. 1-1/2" thick x widths detailed on the Drawings or required for project conditions.
C. Nails: Size and type to suit application.
D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application; non-rust finish
in concealed location and finish to match material in exposed locations.
E. Exterior Wood Trims: Refer to Section 07466, Wood Siding.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: Wood glues with VOC content not exceeding 30 g/L;
adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for multi-purpose
construction adhesives, 140 g/L for structural wood adhesives or 250 g/L for
architectural sealants.
3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products, indicating
that product contains no added urea formaldehyde.
4. Credit MR 7: At least 50% by cost FSC certified wood products.
06200 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall field measure conditions as required for the successful installation of all finish
carpentry items.
B. Installer shall examine the rough framing, wall blocking, (plaster,) gypsum wallboard and other
substrates and finishes under which the finish carpentry work is to be performed and notify the
Contractor in writing of any condition that will prevent the successful installation of the work
of this Section. Do not proceed with the installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Proceeding with the work shall be
considered acceptance of substrates and site conditions.
C. Installer shall be responsible for inspecting all finish carpentry materials and culling any
material not meeting the quality standards of these Specifications, or that exhibit defects such
as knots, checks, splits, warping, bowing or excessive variation in color or grain. All materials
installed in the finished construction shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.
D. Prefabricated Millwork: Prefabricated components indicated on the Drawings show dimensions
established to accomplish the intended visual result and to conform to the existing structural
configuration. Contractor shall verify that the components will fit the building’s structural
elements and conform to the design criteria indicated on the Drawings without materially
altering profiles and alignments.
1. Ensure that the rough framing of beams, columns, or other supporting structures have
been properly located and constructed prior to beginning installation of the
prefabricated millwork.
2. Provide any additional support or backing as may be required as a part of the work of
this Section.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP FOR SITE-FABRICATED FINISH CARPENTRY
A. General: Site fabricate running and standing trim, casings, base and other finish carpentry
items in accordance with recommendations of AWI and in accordance with site-determined
measurements.
B. Scribe, miter and join running and standing trim accurately and neatly to conform to details.
C. Layout running and standing trim and other site-fabricated finish carpentry work to balance
lengths of material at each end of runs. Use longest possible lengths of material; joints will
not be allowed where single-length pieces can be used, in accordance with the following:
1. Running and standing trim, where grain is parallel to the length of the piece: 8'-0" long
minimum.
2. Running and standing trim, where grain is perpendicular to the length of the piece: 4'-
0" long minimum.
3. No lengths less than 24" long will be allowed.
D. All vertical end joints of finished carpentry along the run of running or standing trim shall have
scarf-type joints.
E. Tolerances: Conform to applicable AWI Standards for custom grade finish carpentry.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. General: Set and secure finish carpentry items in place rigid, plumb and square in a manner
consistent with AWI requirements and recommendations.
B. Materials shall be installed in accordance with site-determined measurements. When
necessary to cut and fit on site, make material with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim
for scribing and site cutting. Ensure tolerances of not more than 1/8" in 10'.
C. Tolerances: Conform to applicable AWI Standards for custom grade finish carpentry.
D. Countersink semi-concealed anchorage devices used for wall-mount components and conceal
with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood. Place flush and ensure that direction of
grain matches surrounding wood where scheduled for transparent finish.
06200 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OTHER SECTIONS
A. Install doors and frames, windows, finish hardware, fixtures, accessories, specialties and
equipment supplied under other Sections for installation. Install items in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
3.05 PREPARATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY FOR FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
1. Items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
2. Items to receive opaque finishes, caulk all joints in running and standing trim.
C. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, outlet boxes and other fixtures and equipment.
Verify locations of cutouts from site dimensions.
D. Fiberboard: MDF carpentry items shall be factory primed.
E. Refer to Sections 09900, Painting, and 09930, Transparent Finishes, for field finishing.
3.06 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Install finish carpentry items at mounting heights shown on the Drawings or specified herein.
All items in handicapped accessible areas shall comply with American National Standards
Institute, Inc. (ANSI) publication A117.1-1992 and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
1990.
B. Consult with Architect for mounting heights of items not specifically listed.
END OF SECTION
06650 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
90% Construction Documents
SECTION 06650
SOLID POLYMER COUNTERTOP FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish solid polymer lavatory countertops, aprons and backsplashes.
B. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals.
4. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
5. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
6. Section 10800, Toilet Accessories.
7. Division 15, Mechanical: Under-lavatory countertop mounted sinks and faucets.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ANSI A117.1-1986, Handicapped Accessibility.
2. ASTM D638: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties.
3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Certification: Furnish Certificate of Compliance attesting that all materials meet the
requirements of this Section.
C. All components and assemblies shall meet applicable requirements of the Americans with
Disabilities Act, 1990, for handicapped accessibility.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature, technical specifications, and
installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating anchorage and mounting details, coordination
of work specified in other Sections, finishes and all relevant dimensions.
C. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full line of colors for selection by the Architect.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
2. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all solid polymer components in manufacturer's original packaging with protective
covers intact. Marred, scratched or stained surfaces will not be acceptable.
B. Store in a manner in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
06650 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
90% Construction Documents
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's 10-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship,
including breakage, corrosion and delamination.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOLID POLYMER COUNTERTOP FABRICATIONS
A. General: Lavatory countertops to be solid polymer sheets, fabricated from polymer resins
under high pressure, forming single component sections that are waterproof, corrosion-proof,
impact-resistant and non-absorbent.
1. Material Thickness: 1/2".
2. Molded-in Accessories: Provide molded-in sinks where specifically shown on the
Drawings or specified herein.
B. Support Panels: Furnish intermediate support panels, wall-hung type, where shown on the
Drawings, but not exceeding 3'-0" o.c.
C. Backsplashes and Aprons: Provide miscellaneous fabrications as shown on the Drawings or
required for a complete installation.
D. Color(s): Solid plastic components shall be fabricated with color homogenous throughout the
material. Color(s) to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard
colors
E. Attachments, Screws and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamperproof type, 304 satin finish where
exposed.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
G. Approved Styles and Manufacturers:
1. Corian Surfaces by Dupont Co., Scranton, PA, (800) 368-5002.
2. Avonite Surfaces by Aristech Acrylics L.L.C., Florence, KY, (800) 354-9858.
3. Swanstone by The Swan Corporation, St. Louis, MO.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, quality, performance and
appearance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricator/installer shall be approved by solid polymer manufacturer.
B. Dimensions: Fabricate units in manufacturer's standard sizes, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings or specified herein:
1. Vanities, Apron and Splashes: 24" wide x full length of vanity, one-piece construction
for each component of vanity, apron and backsplash.
C. Provide factory cutouts in lavatory countertops for sinks, faucets and other accessories. Refer
to Divisions 10 and 15.
D. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all cutouts and sand edges
smooth. Repair or replace defective or inaccurate work.
E. Edge Type:
1. Chamfer all exposed edges 1/4" uniformly.
2. Ease all exposed edges uniformly.
F. Finish: All surfaces shall have uniform finish.
1. Semi-gloss, gloss rating 25-50.
2.03 ADHESIVES, GROUTS AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for composite stone and ceramic tile and
recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated.
B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: Conforming to ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D, by W. R. Bonsal Company, Bonstone
Materials Corp., Custom Building Products, Laticrete International, MAPEI Corp. or equal.
06650 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
90% Construction Documents
C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: Conforming to ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-
cleanable, tile-setting and –grouting epoxy, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D, by Boirdi Products Corp., W. R. Bonsal Company,
Bostik Findley Inc., Custom Building Products, Laticrete International, MAPEI Corp. or equal.
1. Color(s) to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard
colors.
D. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below,
complying with the applicable requirements of Section 07900 and will not stain the composite
stone materials.
1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
3. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for
multi-purpose construction adhesives and 250 g/L for architectural sealants.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall inspect the rooms, substrates and conditions under which the vanities,
countertops, backsplashes and aprons and miscellaneous fabrications are to be installed prior
to commencing work of this Section. Notify the Contractor of any discrepancies in dimensions,
tolerances or conditions which may affect the successful installation of the work. Do not begin
work until such conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Installer shall field verify site dimensions affecting this work prior to fabrication.
C. Obtain cutout requirements for sinks and faucets from the Contractor.
1. Ensure correct spacing of plumbing fixtures.
2. Ensure correct location of built-in framing, anchorage and bracing, where required.
3. Ensure locations of cutouts for accessories and plumbing fixtures.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install solid polymer lavatory countertops, backsplashes, aprons and other
miscellaneous fabrications in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
B. Install units plumb, level and square with manufacturer's standard brackets and tamper-proof
bolts, nuts and washers.
C. Mount accessories and plumbing fixtures using manufacturer’s recommended adhesives and
hardware.
D. Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16" in 48".
2. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8" in 96", 1/4" maximum.
3. Variation in Joint Width: Hairline.
4. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64" difference between planes
of adjacent units.
5. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64" difference between
edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Damaged, scratched, stained or marred materials will not be acceptable and shall be replaced
with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Remove protective coverings and thoroughly clean solid plastic surfaces and hardware in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
07210 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 07210
THERMAL BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install building insulation materials to provide thermal and vapor barrier for
building elements and spaces, including:
1. Blown-in-place insulation in exterior attic/roof construction.
2. Foamed-in masonry cell insulation for hollow core masonry construction.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Installation of foamed-in insulation.
4. Section 06160, Exterior Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing.
5. Section 07150, Dampproofing: Protection board.
6. Section 07190, Vapor Retarders.
7. Section 07212, Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System: Thermal insulation materials for
back-up wall systems for rainscreen assemblies.
8. Section 07215, Foundation Insulation
9. Section 07270, Air Infiltration Barriers.
10. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim: Insulation baffles.
11. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
12. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Requirements for foamed insulation
in hollow metal doors and frames.
13. Section 09110, Non-Load-Bearing Metal Framing: Z-Channel wall furring.
14. Division 15, Mechanical: Ductwork and piping insulations.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. FS HH-I-524: Insulation Board, Thermal (Polystyrene).
2. FS L-P-375C (2): Plastic Film, Flexible, Vinyl-Chloride.
3. FS HH-I-521: Insulation Blankets, Thermal Fiber, for ambient temperatures.
4. FS HH-I-103B: Insulation, Blown-in Fiberglass.
5. ASTM E 84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
6. ASTM C665: Faced Insulation Materials.
7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free of asbestos and
added urea formaldehyde and are non-toxic.
C. Certification: Fiberglass materials for interior building installations shall be GreenGuard
certified for indoor air quality.
D. Certification: Installer shall install an insulation certification card upon completion of the
insulation work as specified in paragraph 3.04.
E. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product literature and specifications indicating
compliance with the requirements of this Section for each type of insulation material specified.
Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of insulation material being furnished.
07210 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
2. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Furnish materials in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation instructions.
B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's torches.
C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or
equal.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide the manufacturer's written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of
R-value of insulation materials for the following terms:
1. Faced and Unfaced Blanket Insulation: One (1) year.
2. Rigid Board Insulation: Fifteen (15) years.
3. Foamed-in Masonry Cell Insulation: One (1) year.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION
A. General: Comply with FS HH-I-524C, Type IV, high-density, extruded polystyrene rigid board
insulation, square edges. Compressive strength of 25 psi. R-value of 5.0 minimum per inch at
75° F K-value of 0.20.
1. Apply at exterior walls as indicated on the Drawings.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Styrofoam SM, Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI, (800) 232-2436.
2. Foamular 250, UC Industries, Chicago, IL.
3. Amofoam CM or RCY, Amoco Foam Products Co., Atlanta, GA, (800) 241-4402.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
2.02 BLOWN-IN-PLACE INSULATION
A. General: FS HH-I-1030B and ASTM C764. Blown-in fiberglass suitable for intended use. Class
A, flame spread of 5 or less (ASTM E84) and smoke developed of 5, non-combustible (ASTM
E136).
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% minimum.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Insul-Safe III by Certainteed, Valley Forge, PA, (913) 342-5759.
2. Knauf Insulation GmbH, Shelbyville, IN, (800) 825-4434.
07210 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
2.03 FOAMED-IN MASONRY CELL INSULATION
A. General: Two-component foamed-in-place insulation system, consisting of amino-plast resin
and a catalyst foaming agent surfactant, Class A fire rating when tested in accordance with
ESTM E-84. R-value of 9.1 when installed in 8" thick concrete unit masonry walls.
1. Apply in all non-grouted cells of exterior hollow concrete unit masonry walls where
shown on the Drawings.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% minimum.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Core-Fill 500 by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc., Hickory, NC, (800) 627-1687.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
2.04 INSULATION ATTACHMENTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive or Attachments: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, capable of securely
adhering insulation to applicable surfaces.
B. Vapor Barrier: Specified in Section 07190.
C. Insulation Baffles: Specified in Section 07621.
D. Tape: 2" wide self-adhering type, polyethylene-faced.
E. Air Infiltration Wrap: Specified in Section 07270.
F. Suspension Wire: Type and gage as recommended by insulation manufacturer, as required to
hang anticipated weight of insulation blankets.
G. Insulation Netting:
H. Provide other accessories as required for a complete and thermally enclosed installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the surfaces, substrates, wall, floor and attic/ceiling cavities and
conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in
writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Ensure that building shell has been completely and properly "dried in" prior to installation of
thermal insulation materials.
C. Ensure that insulation baffles have been properly installed in attic spaces.
D. Ensure that all electrical lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment and other devices protruding
into rafter, attic or soffit cavities are properly rated to be in contact with insulation. If they
are not, Contractor shall build enclosures around such fixtures to hold insulation materials
away as required by the fixture manufacturer's warranty and installation requirements.
Maintain tops of enclosures open to allow adequate ventilation of fixtures and devices. (Notify
Architect of any non-complying materials.)
E. Ensure that all existing and/or new electrical wiring and other devices protruding into wall
cavities are properly rated to be in contact with foamed-in insulation materials.
F. Installer shall discuss specific site conditions with the Architect concerning the proper selection
of appropriate materials for ceiling/attic installations, as referenced in Paragraph 3.03.
07210 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight.
B. Install insulation to fit tightly between framing members and fill all voids.
C. Fit insulation tight against mechanical, electrical and other items which protrude through plane
of insulation; fit insulation to outside of plumbing in exterior walls.
D. Ensure that cavities, chases and other void spaces open to attics, crawlspaces, etc. are sealed
with insulation, unless used as approved mechanical plenums.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION
A. General: Install rigid board insulation materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations. If instructions do not apply to project conditions, consult
with manufacturer's technical representative before proceeding with the work.
B. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive board insulation are clean, free of deleterious matter
and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation.
C. Install rigid insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building
spaces and elements. Use board insulation free of broken or chipped edges.
D. Refer to Section 07215 for installation of rigid insulation on perimeter foundation walls and
underside of slabs.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF BLOWN-IN INSULATION
A. General: Install blown-in-place insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case. If instructions do not
apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative before proceeding
with the work.
B. Do not use blown-in insulation in vaulted ceiling cavities steeper than 3 in 12 pitch, where
vaulted attic cavity is too narrow to allow the proper installation of blown-in materials, or
where blown-in insulation will not remain in place due to ceiling/roof slope, ventilation of
drafts through the attic or other potential cause of insulation displacement. Install blanket-
type insulation materials in these conditions.
1. Install blanket-type insulation in attic areas within 48" of perimeter eave soffit vents.
C. Where blown-in-place insulation is used in lieu of faced blanket-type batt insulation, install
specified vapor barrier to the warm side of the attic prior to placing insulation. Ensure full
coverage of vapor barrier.
1. Lap seams minimum 6" and seal joints with vapor-resistant tape of type recommended
by manufacturer.
2. Attach and seal edges to perimeter wood plates as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Install insulation in attic cavities in a manner to completely fill all voids.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF FOAMED-IN MASONRY CELL INSULATION
A. General: Install foamed-in-place insulation in all non-grouted areas of exterior 8" hollow
concrete unit masonry, in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and
recommendations.
B. Drill holes in mortar joints in increments recommended by the manufacturer, unless insulation
is to be installed from the top of uncapped walls.
C. Install insulation to completely fill all cavities and voids.
D. Patch holes in mortar joints upon completion of installation.
3.06 SPECIFIC INSTALLATION APPLICATIONS
A. Attic Access Doors: Install insulation over doors to maintain thermal barrier.
1. Batt Insulation: Tape seal insulation to attic side of doors, cut to fit tightly.
2. Blown-in-Place Insulation: Adhere two (2) layers of rigid board insulation specified
above to attic side of doors, minimum R-value of 20.
07210 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.07 INSULATION CERTIFICATION
A. Upon completion, the Installer shall install an insulation certification card in the attic space of
each unit or applicable portion of building, at the access panel, stating the following
information:
1. Name of installer.
2. Date of installation.
3. Manufacturer(s) of insulation materials installed.
4. Types of insulation materials installed.
5. R-values of insulation materials installed.
END OF SECTION
07215-1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 07215
FOUNDATION INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install foundation insulation materials to provide thermal and vapor barrier for
building elements, including:
1. Unfaced rigid board insulation at exterior perimeter foundation walls.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting: Foundation
excavation.
4. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
5. Section 07150, Dampproofing: Rigid board insulation as protection board.
6. Section 07190, Vapor Retarders.
7. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. FS HH-I-524: Insulation Board, Thermal (Polystyrene).
2. FS L-P-375C(2): Plastic Film, Flexible, Vinyl-Chloride.
3. FS HH-I-521: Insulation Blankets, Thermal Fiber, for ambient temperatures.
4. ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free of asbestos and
urea formaldehyde and are non-toxic.
C. Certification: Fiberglass materials for interior crawlspace installations shall be GreenGuard
certified for indoor air quality.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s product literature and specifications indicating
compliance with the requirements of Section for each type of insulation material specified.
Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of insulation material being furnished.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Furnish materials in manufacturer’s original packaging, complete with installation instructions.
B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder’s torches.
C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or
equal.
07215-2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide the manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of
R-value of insulation materials for the following terms:
1. Faced Blanket Insulation: One (1) year.
2. Extruded Polystyrene Rigid Board Insulation: One (1) year.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION
A. General: Comply with FS HH-I-524C, Type IV, high-density, extruded polystyrene rigid board
insulation, square edges. Compressive strength of 25 psi. R-value of 5.0 minimum per inch at
75° F. K-value of 0.20.
1. Apply at perimeter foundation walls of new construction as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Apply at perimeter grade beams of new construction as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Apply as protection board where specified as part of waterproofing and/or
dampproofing systems. Refer to Sections 07130 and 07150.
4. Thickness(es): As required to meet R-Value shown on the Drawings.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% minimum.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Styrofoam SM, Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI, (800) 232-2436.
2. Foamular 250, UC Industries, Chicago, IL.
3. Amofoam CM or RCY, Amoco Foam Products Co., Atlanta, GA, (800) 241-4402.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the foundation and/or grade beam surfaces and crawlspace conditions
under which the foundation insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in
writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Ensure that dampproofing or waterproofing has been properly applied, inspected and approved
prior to beginning installation of foundation insulation system.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight. Fit insulation
tight against mechanical, electrical and other items which protrude through plane of
insulation.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION
A. General: Install rigid board insulation materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
instructions and recommendations. If instructions do not apply to project conditions, consult
with manufacturer’s technical representative before proceeding with the work.
B. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive board insulation are clean, free of deleterious matter
and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation.
1. Existing Foundations: Clean existing concrete and/or concrete block masonry
foundation walls and footings prior to installation of insulation, removing loose dirt,
debris and deleterious materials.
C. Install rigid insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building
spaces and elements. Use board insulation free of broken or chipped edges.
07215-3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
D. Secure rigid insulation on perimeter foundation walls and/or grade beams with specified
adhesive or other attachment using spot or bead method in accordance with insulation
manufacturer’s recommendations. Place insulation horizontally and stagger vertical joints.
E. For conditions where rigid board insulation is installed to the exterior face of foundation walls
and/or grade beams, extend insulation to within 2" of finished grade elevation, and protect top
edge with flexible fabric-type flashing membrane approved by insulation manufacturer. Attach
flashing to foundation wall and/or grade beam and extend down face of rigid board insulation
12" minimum. Where concrete sidewalks or aprons abut the exterior foundation, extend
insulation up to underside of sidewalk or apron unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
F. As Dampproofing or Waterproofing Protection Board: Refer to Sections 07130 or 07150.
END OF SECTION
07270 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 07270
AIR INFILTRATION BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install self-adhesive moisture/air infiltration flashings at windows and doors in
composite wall construction.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Sill seal.
4. Section 07190, Vapor Retarders and Barriers: Vapor non-permeable barriers.
5. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
6. Section 072121, Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System.
7. Section 07240, Exterior Insulation and Finish System.
8. Section 07245, Exterior Portland Cement Stucco System.
9. Section 07430, Composite Facade Panel System: Exterior rainscreen assembly.
10. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
11. Division 8, Doors and Windows.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to current requirements of applicable portions of standards,
codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
1. ASTM D-779-03, Standard Test Method for Water Resistance of Paper, Paperboard, and
Other Sheet Materials by the Dry Indicator Method.
2. ASTM D-829-97, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Paper, Paperboard Using
Constant-Rate-of-Elongation Apparatus.
3. ASTM E-96-95, Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
4. ASTM E-331-00, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
5. ASTM F-1249-01, Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through
Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor.
6. FS UU-B-790a, Type 1, Grade A, Style 4, ICBO Evaluation Report No. 1025.
7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Installer: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the work of this Section.
C. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature, specifications or technical data
indicating compliance with the requirements of this Section for each type of air/moisture
infiltration material specified.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product Data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC
content.
2. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
07270 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Furnish materials in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation instructions.
B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's torches.
C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or
equal.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. General: Follow manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations for product handling
and application.
B. Ensure that surface temperature or the surrounding air temperature is between 40° F and 120° F
before installation. Consult manufacturer if installation must be done at temperatures below the
minimum.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s written one-year warranty for materials and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR INFILTRATION WRAP - COMMERCIAL
A. General: Sheet-type air infiltration membrane designed to prevent airflow through wood (metal)
framed wall cavities, hold out bulk water and wind-driven rain/snow, and act as breathable
membrane to allow moisture vapor to escape from within walls.
B. Material: Spunbonded Olefin fiber, non-woven, non-perforated secondary weather-resistant
barrier.
1. Roll Size: 9' x 100' or as required by site conditions.
2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard.
C. Compliance: Materials shall meet or exceed the following standards:
1. Air Penetration, ASTM E-1677: Type 1 minimum.
2. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E-96, Method B: 10 perms minimum/90 perms
maximum.
3. Water Penetration Resistance, AATCC-127: 280 cm.
4. Basis Weight, TAPPI T-41D: 2.7 oz./sq. yd.
5. Breaking Strength, ASTM D-882: 38/35 lbs./in.
6. Tear Resistance, ASTM D-117: 12/10 lbs.
7. Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E-84: Class A flame spread and Class A smoke
developed.
D. Steel Stud Attachments: Provide 1-5/8" long full drill-point coated screw attachment with
manufacturer's standard 2" diameter plastic reinforcing disk for anchoring to steel stud
construction, 12- to 20-gage, Tyvek Wrap Caps or approved equal.
E. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
F. Approved Materials and Manufacturers:
1. Tyvek CommercialWrap by DuPont, Wilmington, DE, (800) 448-9835, as basis of design.
2. Green Guard by Pactiv Building Products, (800) 241-4402.
3. Typar Commercial Wrap by BBB Fiberweb, Old Hickory, TN, (800) 284-2780.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality are
acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
07270 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2.02 MOISTURE/AIR INFILTRATION FLASHINGS
A. General: Self-adhesive, flexible moisture/air infiltration flashing, designed to prevent incidental
moisture intrusion around windows and doors in concealed perimeter flashing system.
B. Material: Fiberglass-reinforced membrane coated on both sides with water-resistant
polyethylene, backed with an aggressive 3" wide self-adhesive, self-sealing attachment band.
1. Strip Width: Minimum 6", use width recommended by manufacturer for specific
application(s).
2. Thickness: 12 mil minimum (membrane); 35 mil minimum (membrane plus adhesive
band).
3. Roll Length: 75', or manufacturer's standard.
C. Compliance: Materials shall meet or exceed the following standards:
1. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E-96: Less than 0.30 perms.
2. Water Resistance, ASTM D-779: 24 hours minimum.
3. Tensile Strength, ASTM D-828: MD - 20 lbs. f/inch.
CD – 20 lbs. f/inch
D. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
E. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Moistop E-Z Seal by Fortifiber Building Systems Group, (800) 773-4777.
2. StraightFlash and FlexWrap by DuPont, Wilmington, DE, (800) 448-9835.
3. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality are
acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
F. Sill Seal: Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the wall substrates, window and door openings, and other conditions
under which air infiltration barrier materials are to be installed and notify the Contractor in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Installer.
B. Ensure that surfaces of wall sheathing and/or insulation, windows and door frame flanges and
other substrate materials are dry and clean, free of dirt, oil, construction debris or other
substances that may interfere with adhesion or the system performance.
3.02 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. General: Contractor shall conduct a pre-installation meeting to discuss installation requirements
for the vapor permeable air infiltration wrap system, to include:
1. General Contractor.
2. Installing Contractor.
3. Manufacturer's Technical Representative.
B. Manufacturer shall have no responsibility for inspection of the completed installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF SHEET-TYPE AIR INFILTRATION WRAP
A. General: Apply air infiltration wrap materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
07270 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
instructions and recommendations.
B. Install air infiltration wrap after wall sheathing has been installed and approved, but prior to
installation of exterior doors and windows.
C. Install rolls horizontally beginning at the floor line and moving up the walls. Lap bottom edge
minimum 1" below joint at top of foundation.
D. Lap rolls minimum 6" at horizontal seams. Vertical seams shall be lapped 6-12".
E. Attach membrane with manufacturer-approved anchorages. If staples are used, they must have
1" minimum crown. Secure at 12-18" o.c. along vertical stud lines.
F. Wrap air infiltration membrane down over roof/wall flashing transitions.
G. Cut modified "I" in the membrane at window and door openings. Fold side and bottom flaps into
opening and secure. Cut head flap and flip up to expose sheathing, and temporarily secure.
H. Install flexible sill flashing, specified below.
I. Apply continuous bead of sealant along sides (jambs) and across head of rough opening. Position
such that window or door frame flange will contact sealant. Do not apply sealant across bottom
of opening, to allow moisture to escape.
J. Install windows and/or door frames, specified elsewhere.
K. Install jamb and then head flashings, specified below. Flip down head section of air infiltration
wrap and secure with tape.
L. Apply sealant to rear side of window sill sections.
M. Tape all vertical and horizontal seams in wrap.
N. Tape all plumbing, mechanical and electrical fixtures, equipment, piping and conduit protruding
through air infiltration wrap.
O. Upon completion of air infiltration wrap installation, inspect wrap for holes, tears and punctures
and repair damaged areas. Wrap shall be airtight and free from holes, tears and punctures.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF MOISTURE/AIR INFILTRATION FLASHINGS
A. General: Apply self-adhesive flashing materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
B. Installation Sequence:
1. Ensure that air infiltration wrap has been properly installed, cut at window and/or door
openings and wrapped through the rough openings, as specified above.
2. Install self-adhesive, flexible strip flashings to sills and lower jambs of window and/or
door openings.
3. Apply compatible sealant to back surface of window and/or door frame flanges, and
install windows and/or door frames.
C. Peel away release paper and place self-adhesive strip flashings over window and/or door frame
sill flanges, then jambs, then heads, extending material beyond the flange opening and lapping
materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Apply firm pressure with a metal or wood roller
along the entire adhesive strip to ensure continuous seal.
D. Upon completion of installation, inspect strip flashings for gaps, holes, tears and punctures and
repair damaged areas. Flashings shall be airtight and free from holes, tears and punctures.
E. Cover installation as soon as possible. Do not leave strip flashings exposed to sunlight longer than
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
07612 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 07612
PREFINISHED CORRUGATED SCREWED-DOWN METAL ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install prefinished corrugated metal roofing, screw-down installation, complete
with all associated copings, flashings and trims.
B. Furnish and install prefinished, ventilated soffit systems, complete with all associated
attachments and trims.
C. Furnish and install protective underlayments.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
4. Section 07810, Skylights.
5. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ASTM D226: Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt.
2. NAAMM: Metal Finishes Handbook.
3. SMACNA: Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
4. ASTM B209: Aluminum.
5. ASTM A446: Hot-Dipped Galvanized Steel.
6. International (Uniform) Building Code, current edition.
7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Prefinished roofing material shall be by a manufacturer who has
been in business for a minimum of ten (10) years.
C. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by an installer with minimum of five (5) years
successful experience on projects of similar scale and complexity.
1. Certification: Installer shall be a manufacturer-certified installer, and provide copy of
such certification as specified in paragraph 1.03 below.
D. Manufacturer shall ensure the compatibility of all components, accessories and equipment that
are part of the fabrication of the roofing and the overall quality and reliability of the system.
E. Manufacturer shall be responsible for any redesign of the basic building components, roof panel
layout or accessories required by variance between the manufacturer's standard fabrication
process and that shown on the Drawings as the basis of design.
F. Design Criteria:
1. Roof Live Load (snow): 30 psf.
2. Horizontal Wind Load: 100 mph wind loading, Exposure C, UBC current edition.
G. Manufacturer will provide a field representative for on-site inspection of the components to
ensure that the installation is complete and weathertight and meets the factory quality control
requirements of the manufacturer and as specified in this Section.
H. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements for
Credits MR 4.1, 4.2, 5.1 and 5.2.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's written product literature and specifications
illustrating the proposed roofing materials and components showing compliance with the
07612 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
requirements of this Section.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating proposed panelization of the roofs, fabrication
and mechanical-seaming details, trims, closures and accessories, and installation details and
instructions.
C. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full line of prefinished metal textures and colors
for selection by the Architect.
1. Submit sample of roofing system, minimum 12" x 12", illustrating typical screw-down
seaming condition.
D. Installer Certification: Submit manufacturer’s letter or certificate demonstrating certification
by the manufacturer.
E. Test Data: Submit air infiltration test data specified in paragraph 1.05 below.
F. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data indicating percentages by weight of
postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for metal roofing.
a. Include statement that indicates costs for each product having recycled
content.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Installer shall coordinate the delivery schedule for the roofing systems with the Contractor to
assure that all roof and wall substrates are properly prepared when the components are
delivered to the site.
1.05 TESTING
A. Manufacturer shall submit negative load test performed by an independent testing laboratory in
accordance with ASTM E330-70 (Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet
Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference). When tested in
multiple spans of three (3) or more sections, the .032" (0.81mm) aluminum roofing/siding
material shall span 5'-6" (1.68m) and withstand a negative load of 40 psf (1915.2 pascals)
without damage; .040" (1.02mm) aluminum roofing/siding material shall span 6'-8" (2.03m) and
withstand a negative load of 50 psf (2394.0 pascals) without damage.
B. Seals between pans shall be affected such that at 18 psf (8862 pascals) static pressure, air
infiltration shall not exceed .012 cfm per sq. ft. (.0037 cu. meters per minute per sq. meter).
Manufacturer shall submit air infiltration tests performed by an independent testing laboratory
in accordance with ASTM E1680 (Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Metal Roof Panel Systems).
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written one-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship, including installation on the site.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard 20-year warranty covering failure of the specified finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GALVANIZED CORRUGATED SCREWED-DOWN METAL ROOFING
A. General: Galvanized metal roofing shall be factory fabricated, rolled and finished for delivery
to the site. System shall include all ridge and hip caps, parapet flashings and caps, copings,
trims and accessories necessary for a complete and weathertight installation.
1. Specified system is intended to remain as an exposed galvanized finish, with no further
field finishing required.
B. Materials: 24-gage minimum, structural quality galvanized steel coil stock, conforming to ASTM
A653, Grade C minimum.
1. Exterior Roofing Profile: Manufacturer's standard 1/2" high corrugated profile, with
corrugations at 2" o.c.
07612 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. Texture: Standard mill finish/texture.
3. Finish: Prefinished by manufacturer, galvanizing to conform to ASTM A525-87, with
standard G90 class finish. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Fabrication: Roll-form manufacturer's prefinished coil stock to produce finished, exposed panel
width of 40" maximum, flat panel.
1. Panelization of roofing shall be as shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise approved.
Factory fabricate to the greatest extent possible.
2. Panel Clips: 30-gage stainless steel, fabricated to be interlockable with sheet, if used.
3. Panel Lengths: 40'-0" maximum. Form corrugated panels to run full length from eave
or pitch break to ridge, without horizontal joints except where shown on the Drawings.
4. Form material for ridge caps, hip caps, parapet flashings, roof edge flashings and other
required trims to match roofing pans.
D. Installation Type: Overlapping ribs, screw-down attachment.
E. Fasteners: All fasteners shall be galvanized steel, stainless steel, or other material compatible
with the roofing system as recommended by the manufacturer.
1. All exposed screws in exterior and interior applications shall be set in manufacturer's
standard neoprene washers for weathertightness.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide
information on recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor
to provide information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section
01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
G. Approved System and Manufacturers:
1. Straight "S" Deck by Berridge Manufacturing, Houston, TX, and represented in Denver,
CO, (800) 735-3703, as the basis the design.
2. ASC Pacific, Sacramento, CA, (800) 726-2727.
3. Atas Aluminum Corp., Allentown, PA, (215) 395-8445.
4. AEP Span, Dallas, TX, (800) 527-2503.
5. Binkley Building Products, St. Louis, MO, (314) 434-7110.
6. Carlisle, Stafford, TX, (800) 669-9324.
7. Flexospan, Sandy Lake, PA, (800) 245-0396.
8. McElroy Metal Inc., Adelanto, CA, (800) 950-6536.
9. Morin Corp., Bristol, Ct, (203) 584-0900.
10. Robertson, Pittsburgh, PA, (412) 928-7500.
11. Smith Steelite, Moon Township, PA, (800) 759-7474.
12. United Steel Deck Inc., Summit, NJ, (908) 277-1617.
13. Vicwest Steel, Louisville, KY, (502) 339-7222.
14. Fabral, Alcan Building Products, Lancaster, PA, (717) 397-2741.
15. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corp., Sellersburg, IN, (812) 246-0819.
16. Manufacturers providing prefinished metal roofing systems of same design, appearance,
function, quality, performance and components are acceptable as approved by the
Architect prior to bidding. All systems shall be based upon the specified systems and
components. Alternate manufacturers accepted by the Architect prior to bid date shall
not relieve the manufacturers of an obligation to, at his own expense, make changes in
the structure, etc. as necessary to accommodate the alternate systems.
2.02 ASSOCIATED FLASHINGS AND TRIMS
A. Contractor shall coordinate the furnishing of associated flashings, trims, gutters and
downspouts specified in other Sections for exposed locations with the work of this Section.
Such work shall be by the same manufacturer/installer as the prefinished metal roofing to the
greatest extent possible.
B. Gage: Provide the following minimum gages for accessory materials:
1. 24-gage for roof edge, parapet cap and step flashings.
07612 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2. 24-gage for gutters and open-face box downspouts.
3. 24-gage for conductor heads and thru-wall scrupper flashings.
4. 24-gage for ridge and hip cap flashings.
5. 26-gage for valley flashings.
6. 24-gage for other miscellaneous trims not specified for other gages.
2.03 UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Primary Underlayment: Asphalt saturated and coated organic felt base sheet meeting
requirements of ASTM D-2626-81 without perforations. Provide minimum 30 lb. weight for felt
sheets, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
B. Secondary Underlayment: Unreinforced elastomeric sheet roofing, minimum 45 mil thickness,
black, 3'-0" and/or 6'-0" wide rolls, Sure-Seal Elastomeric Membrane by Carlisle Tire and Rubber
Co., Carlisle, PA, (800) 433-5326, or equal.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. General: Prefinished metal roofing system shall be factory fabricated and finished for field
installation.
B. Valley Pans: All metal valley pans shall be fabricated with inverted dams at the center of the
valley.
C. Panel Edges: All exposed edges of corrugated panels, including pan edges at valleys, shall have
clean, straight cuts with burrs removed.
1. Corrugated Panel Closure Trims: Provide prefinished, prefabricated end closure trims
at all roof eave and valley conditions.
D. Copings and Trims: Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and
other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
1. Copings, Cap Flashings and other Trims: Form sections in maximum lengths possible.
Provide for thermal expansion at 10' intervals, unless otherwise shown. Use material in
longest practical lengths. Sections shorter than 3'-0" will not be allowed.
2. Joints and seams exposed to view are to be flat-lock type, except corners, or detailed
as flat-butt joints with back-up plate. Open-lap seams are not permitted for joints
exposed to view. Seal all seams with elastic cement.
3. Hem exposed edges of flashings to underside 1/2". Hemmed edges shall be straight,
square design, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
2. Backpaint materials with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with
cementitious materials or dissimilar metals.
E. Profiles shall conform to current SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual standards and
details.
1. Hip, Drip/Fascia Flashings: Per manufacturer's standard details.
F. Galvanized Valley and Sill Flashings: Refer to Section 07621.
2.05 FIELD EQUIPMENT
A. Installer shall furnish and maintain all site-based cutting and forming equipment as necessary
to fabricate and install all metal flashings, accessories and trim for a complete and
weathertight installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which metal roofing, (siding) and
soffit work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions
which would prevent the successful completion of this work. Do not start work until
unacceptable conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
07612 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Installer shall be responsible for ensuring delivery of the prefinished materials and forming
equipment to the site, as specified in paragraph 1.04, at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Installer shall coordinate the work of this Section with other contractors and equipment
suppliers as required for a complete and weathertight installation. Equipment to be furnished
and field installed in the building by others affecting the work of this Section includes, but is
not limited to, the following:
1. Self-contained through-wall air conditioning/heat units.
2. Exhaust and intake, through-wall dampers, louvers, filters, screens and motors.
3. Waveguide tube entries and associated supports and trims for waveguide cable systems
between the tower and the building.
D. Ensure that substrate is sound, dry, properly sloped for drainage and securely anchored in
position.
E. Ensure that provision has been made for roof drains, scuppers, flashings and all other interface
items attaching to or penetrating through the prefinished metal roofing.
F. Ensure that adjacent work of other trades has been completed and approved prior to beginning
work, to the greatest extent possible.
G. Verify requirements for secondary underlayments with the Building Official with jurisdiction
over this Project.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROOF CRICKETS
A. General: Install built-up roof crickets, minimum 1/4" per foot slope, whether specifically shown
on the Drawings or not, as required for adequate roof drainage, including but not limited to the
following locations:
1. Skylight curbs.
2. Other equipment curbs or other items projecting through the roof surface.
B. Crickets shall be constructed or plywood or other specified roof sheathing material, or tapered
rigid insulation, at the Contractor’s option, unless otherwise specifically called for on the
Drawings.
1. Insulated Roof Decks: Where crickets are a part of an insulated roof deck assembly,
construction shall maintain the minimum R-value specified for the assembly.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT
A. Primary Underlayment:
1. Over entire roof deck area, place piles of 36" wide underlayment, with ends and edges
weatherlapped minimum 6". Stagger end joints of each consecutive layer. Nail
underlayment sufficiently to hold in place.
2. Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof.
3. Weatherlap and seal with plastic cement items protecting through or mounted on roof.
B. Secondary Underlayment:
1. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and
recommendations.
2. Install in locations as shown on the Drawings, or specified herein, but in no case less
than as required by local codes.
3. Apply one (1) width of secondary underlayment at gutters and overhanging eaves,
width as required to completely cover projected eaves, wrap concealed gutters and
other features where shown on the Drawings, and extend up the slope of the roof
minimum 24" or to the minimum extent required by the local jurisdiction. Lap end
joints 4" and side joints 2". Use multiple widths or larger single-width rolls if required
by project conditions.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PREFINISHED CORRUGATED METAL ROOFING
A. General: Field fabrication and installation shall be done in accordance with all applicable
building codes, standards and the written instructions and recommendations of the
manufacturer of the approved prefinished metal roofing. Roofing shall be anchored firmly into
position, forming a completely watertight and weathertight installation.
07612 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1. Field Fabrication Details: All aspects of field cutting and installation processes shall be
in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations,
including but not limited to, the following:
a. Ridge cap flashings.
b. Hip cap flashings.
c. Drip edge flashings at gutters.
d. Eave and rake edge flashings.
2. Fabricate and install prefinished metal roofing to allow for expansion and contraction
of all components and assemblies without compromising the structural capacity or
weathertightness of the system.
B. Roofing shall be factory fabricated in continuous lengths, manufactured to actual field
measurements, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Owner and Architect. Horizontal
lap joints are not acceptable. Neoprene secured by metal profile closures shall be provided
when a one-piece change of direction is not applicable. Hold-down brackets shall allow for
thermal movement and shall be installed at each panel joint. Longitudinal spacing of hold-
down brackets shall be arranged to allow for positive uniform load of 40 psf (1915.2 pascals),
negative uniform load of 30 psf (1436.4 pascals) or other required loading. No perforations
shall be made in roofing or siding by fasteners, except as shown on the Drawings.
C. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual specifications shall govern for material and
workmanship not otherwise specified herein.
D. Screwed-Down Installation: Corrugated panels shall be screw-attached into structural framing,
decking or other approved solid substrate. Panels shall be lapped along their edge by one (1)
corrugation. Install with manufacturer's standard 1" tape sealer at overlapping corrugations.
1. Spacing of screw attachments shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
requirements and recommendations for dead, live and wind loads specified in
paragraph 1.02.
2. Screw pattern shall be uniform and evenly spaced, both horizontally and vertically for
all applications. Consult with Architect prior to commencing attachment.
3. Provide manufacturer's standard neoprene washers at each screw attachment point.
Exterior washers shall be set in roofing mastic or other approved sealant.
4. Install prefinished panel end closure trims at all roof eave and valley conditions.
E. Ridge Closures: Ridge lines of the prefinished corrugated roof system shall be closed with
manufacturer’s standard ridge cap flashing trims, unless a continuous pan break over the ridge
is specifically specified.
F. Hip Closures: Hip lines of the prefinished corrugated roof system shall be closed with manufac-
turer's standard hip cap flashing trims, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified
herein.
G. Miscellaneous Flashings and Break Metal: Form sheet materials as detailed on the Drawings for
miscellaneous flashings, counterflashings and trims.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED SNOW GUARDS
A. General: Install prefabricated snow guards in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and recommendations.
B. Install guards in locations shown on the Drawings or recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Install in pattern shown on the Drawings, using specified installation appearance.
D. Adhesive Installation: Conform to the installation requirements of the manufacturer for this
installation method.
1. Apply thin coat of primer to roof surface.
2. Peel release paper backing off adhesive tape on snow guard base.
3. Place snow guard in position on metal surface, applying form, even pressure
perpendicular to roof surface.
4. Apply bead of sealant around snow guard perimeter.
5. Contact manufacturer for time periods and ambient temperatures required for full
curing of 3M adhesive tape.
07612 - 7
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Installer shall thoroughly clean installed prefinished roof panels and trim, using only cleaning
products recommended by the manufacturer for this application. Cleaning operation shall not
mar or abrade the metal finish.
B. Do not permit unnecessary walking on the finished roofing system. Require all personnel to
wear rubber-soled shoes when installing or walking on the finished roof.
C. Remove all excess material and scraps from the site.
END OF SECTION
07621 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 07621
GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install new galvanized sheet metal reglets and counterflashings, as indicated on
the Drawings.
B. Furnish and install galvanized sheet metal valley and drip flashings.
C. Furnish and install galvanized sheet metal sill flashings at masonry veneer/caps, and
miscellaneous trims.
D. Furnish and install prefinished metal soffit vents and roof vents.
E. Furnish and install new galvanized sheet metal attic insulation baffles.
F. Furnish miscellaneous metal flashings to other Sections as required.
G. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Flexible masonry flashings.
4. Section 06116, Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: Prefinished insect screening at soffit vents.
5. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation.
6. Section 07212, Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System.
7. Section 07612, Prefinished Corrugated Screwed-Down Metal Roofing: Prefinished trim.
8. Section 07710, Prefabricated Roof Specialties.
9. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
10. Section 09900, Painting.
11. Section 10210, Metal Wall Louvers: Prefinished gable end vents.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. SMACNA, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition.
2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Fabrication and installation shall be by manufacturer's personnel or manufacturer approved
Subcontractor with minimum five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar size and
complexity. Installation of fascias, parapet and cap flashings, or other areas exposed to view,
shall not be performed by the roofing Subcontractor, unless they meet the qualifications
specified herein and are approved by the Architect and Owner.
C. Design Criteria:
1. Wind Resistance: 100 mph, Exposure C (IBC) for galvanized metal flashing and trim.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and shop drawings indicating proposed
materials, shapes, proposed layout of joints, special details and intersections, and fabrication
and assembly details.
B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard colors of prefinished flashings, gutters and
downspouts for selection by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard profiles of galvanized flashings and trim for selection
by the Architect.
07621 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written 5-, 10-, 15-year (edit as necessary) system warranty covering
defects in materials and workmanship, and covering all specified design criteria. Warranty
shall be written to cover the wind resistance specified in paragraph 1.02 C above.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. General: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A525, except ASTM 527 for lock-forming
hot-dipped galvanized, standard G90 class finish. Use in applications not exposed to view,
unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings.
1. Gages:
a. 24-gage for cap flashings and step flashings.
b. 24-gage for open-faced box downspouts.
c. 24-gage for reglets and counterflashings.
d. 24-gage for gravel stops and kick flashings.
e. 22-gage for clips, retainers and other concealed backer materials.
f. 26-gage for concealed edge and drip flashings, valley flashings and other
miscellaneous trims not specified for other gages.
2. Finish: Supply sheet metal flashings and trim with manufacturer's standard galvanized
finish. No further field finishing will be performed where unexposed to view in the
completed project.
3. Profiles: Specified in paragraph 2.04 below.
4. Drip Flashing: Provide roof edge drip flashings, unless integral with gutter section.
5. Downspout Extensions: Provide 2'-0" (4'-0") minimum length extensions for all
downspout discharges, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
B. Prefinished Gutters and Downspouts: Refer to Section 07610 for gutters, downspouts and trims
provided as part of the prefinished metal roofing system.
C. Galvanized Gutters and Downspouts: Refer to Section 07610 for gutters, downspouts and trims
provided as part of the galvanized metal roofing system.
D. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% post-consumer minimum.
2.02 PREFINISHED GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Prefinished Galvanized Metal: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A525, except ASTM
527 for lock-forming hot-dipped galvanized: G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized. Use in
locations exposed to view, unless shown or indicated on the Drawings for other materials.
1. Gages:
a. 22-gage for vertical fascias. Refer to fabrication requirements in paragraph
2.0__ below.
b. 24-gage for cap flashings and exposed step flashings.
c. 24-gage for gutters and open-face box downspouts.
d. 24-gage for conductor heads and thru-wall scupper flashings.
e. 24-gage for kick flashings.
f. 22-gage for clips, retainers and other concealed backer materials.
g. 26-gage for edge flashings and other miscellaneous trims not specified for other
gages.
2. Finish: Supply galvanized sheet metal flashings and trim with manufacturer's standard
baked-on enamel finish. Color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full
07621 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
line of standard colors.
3. Profiles: Specified in paragraph 2.04 below, shop formed to extent possible.
4. Downspout Extensions: Provide 2'-0" (4'-0") minimum length extensions for all
downspout discharges, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
B. Prefinished Gutters and Downspouts: Refer to Section 07610 for gutters, downspouts and trims
provided as part of the prefinished metal roofing system.
C. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% post-consumer minimum.
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Fasteners: Concealed clip-type of same material as flashings, sized to suit application.
B. Nails: Hot-dipped galvanized steel roofing type.
C. Screws: Hot-dipped galvanized Phillips head, with neoprene washers.
D. Solder and Flux: Type recommended for materials being used.
E. Bituminous Paint: Acid- and alkali-resistant type, black color.
F. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type, FS SS-C-00153a.
G. Sealant: One (1) component silicone, conforming to FS TT-S-00230, non-staining, non-bleeding,
non-sagging, of color suitable for material matching.
1. Dow 790 or equal.
H. Soffit Vents (Disk Type): Galvanized sheet metal round disk vents for installation in soffits or
rafter rim joints/blocking, 26-gage.
1. Size: 2" diameter or manufacturer’s standard.
2. Finish: Galvanized for field finishing.
I. Roof Vents: Refer to Section 07710 for prefabricated, curb-mounted metal roof vents.
J. Gable End Vents: Prefinished metal wall louvers, specified in Section 10210.
K. Insulation Baffles: Galvanized sheet metal insulation baffles for installation between roof
trusses or rafters.
1. Size: 24" wide (or as required for condition) x 31" overall length.
2. Approved Manufacturer: Ampcor Series BV by Anderson Metal Products Co.,
Taylorsville, MS, or equal.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects
detrimental to appearance or performance.
B. Form sections in maximum lengths possible. Make allowances for expansion and contraction at
joints.
1. Provide for thermal expansion at 10' intervals, unless otherwise shown. Use material in
longest practical lengths. Sections shorter than 3'-0" will not be allowed.
C. Joints and Seams: Fabricate joints and seams along running lengths of metal as flat-lock type,
except corners, or detailed as flat-butt joints with back-up plate, where exposed to view.
Open-lap seams are not permitted for joints exposed to view.
D. Corners: Fabricate corners minimum 18" x 18", mitered, soldered and sealed as one (1) piece.
Seal all seams with elastic cement.
E. Fascias: Fabricate prefinished metal fascias with material of specified gage. Where dimension
of vertical fascias exceeds 12", fabricate as stepped fascia as detailed on the Drawings; or if
not shown, fabricate with one (1) horizontal rigidizing striation rib for each 6" of fascia depth
exceeding 12". Coordinate with Architect as necessary.
F. Form stepped parapet cap flashings as detailed on the Drawings or required by project
conditions. Provide mitered intersections between horizontal and vertical sections.
G. Integral Gutters: Fabricate integral gutters with fully soldered joints. Lapped or sealed joints
are not permitted for these conditions.
H. Wipe and wash clean soldered joints to remove traces of flux immediately after soldering.
I. Hem exposed edges of flashings to underside 1/2". Hemmed edges shall be straight, square
design, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
J. Backpaint flashings with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with cementitious
materials or dissimilar metals.
07621 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
K. Profiles shall conform to current SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual standards and
details.
1. Cap Flashings, Reglets and Counterflashings: As shown on the Drawings.
2. Drip/Fascia Flashings: As shown on the Drawings or as required by project conditions.
3. Kick Flashings: As required for specific project conditions, but in no case less than 2"
high x 4" long.
4. Curb Cap Flashings: As shown on the Drawings.
5. Sill Flashings at Masonry Veneer: As shown on the Drawings.
2.06 FIELD EQUIPMENT
A. Installer shall furnish and maintain any site-based cutting, forming and seaming equipment as
necessary to fabricate and install all metal flashings, accessories and trims (not factory
fabricated) for a complete and weathertight installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which flashing and trim work is
to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions which would
prevent the successful completion of this work. Do not start work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Ensure miscellaneous galvanized metal flashings and trims are fabricated in accordance with
paragraph 2.0__ above.
C. Coordinate installation of flashings with Contractor for membrane sheet roofing and fiberglass
shingles as required.
D. Coordinate installation of flashings with Contractor for prefinished metal roofing as required.
E. Coordinate installation of valley and edge/drip flashings with primary and secondary roof
underlayments specified in other sections.
F. Coordinate installation of sill flashings with Contractor for masonry veneer.
G. Coordinate installation of miscellaneous drip and sill flashings and counterflashings with
Contractor for wood siding as required.
H. Coordinate installation of miscellaneous drip and sill flashings and counterflashings with
Contractor for composite facade panel/rainscreen assemblies as required.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF GALVANIZED SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General: Install fascias, flashings, reglets, counterflashings and trim in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
1. Ensure adequate clearances for thermal expansion and contraction of fabricated
sections of materials.
2. Refer to paragraph 2.0__ above for special fabrication/installation requirements for
sheet metal fascias.
B. Secure flashings in place using specified fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations
approved by Architect. When using exposed fasteners, they are to be of same finish as
flashings.
C. Conform to applicable SMACNA details, unless otherwise shown. Consult with Architect as
necessary.
D. Install kick flashings at all roof edge or eave conditions adjacent to vertical walls and other
conditions requiring diversion of drainage away from a particular point. Coordinate specific
conditions with Architect as necessary.
E. Apply sealing compound at junction of metal flashings and asphalt felt flashings.
F. Lock seams and end joints. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and
straight in planes and lines accurate to profiles.
G. Counterflash mechanical, plumbing and electrical items projecting through roofing.
1. Mechanical, plumbing and electrical details may be schematic in nature. Install all
07621 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
flashings in accordance with current SMACNA requirements.
2. Refer to the Drawings for any special flashing conditions.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean all exposed galvanized surfaces and leave prepared for field finishing as specified in
Section 09900.
1. Remove excess sealants, flux, plastic cement and bituminous paint.
2. Clean soiled surfaces with a solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces.
B. Clean all exposed prefinished galvanized surfaces. Remove smudges and other imperfections
using cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer. Remove excess sealant from
prefinished materials and leave installation in clean condition.
C. Advise Contractor of measures to be taken to protect prefinished surfaces from damage during
the balance of construction.
END OF SECTION
07810 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 07810
SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish prefabricated, round tubular skylight units, complete with domed cap, tubular metal
shaft, integral roof curbs/flashings and interior diffusers.
B. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 07220, Roof Insulation.
4. Section 07612, Prefinished Corrugated Screwed Down Metal Roofing.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have minimum five (5) years experience fabricating modular
skylight units for projects of similar scale and complexity.
C. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements for
Credits MR 4.1, 4.2, 5.1 and 5.2.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and/or shop drawings indicating
materials, unit sizes and assembly and installation details.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product Data for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of
VOC content.
2. Credit MR 4.1 and 4.2: Product Data indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer
and preconsumer recycled content for skylight units.
a. Include statement that indicates costs for each product having recycled
content.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in unbroken factory cartons.
B. Store in a secure location and protect finishes and glazing from damage until installation.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard written five-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship and unit leakage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TUBULAR UNIT SKYLIGHTS
A. General: Factory-fabricated round tubular skylight units, complete with domed cap, tubular
reflective metal shaft sections, integral roof curbs, flashings, interior ceiling diffusers and all
07810 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
related accessories and trims.
1. Size(s): 10" diameter.
B. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact-resistant dome with flashing base
supporting dome and top of tube.
1. Outer Dome Glazing: 0.125" minimum thickness injection molded acrylic classified as
CC2 material and meeting characteristics of DR-101 blend.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard prismatic pattern molded into dome to capture low
angle sunlight.
3. Reflector: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015", positioned in dome to capture low angle
sunlight.
C. Flashing Base: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome
and tope of tube.
1. Base Material: Sheet steel, corrosion resistant, meeting ASTM A653/A A653M or ASTM
A463/A 463M, 0.028" thick.
2. Base Pitch (Slope): 22.5° slope from horizontal.
D. Dome Ring: Attached to top of base section, 0.090" nominal thickness, injection molded high
impact acrylic, to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel
condensed moisture out of tubing.
E. Reflective Extension Tube: Aluminum sheet, 0.015" thickness.
1. Interior Finish: High reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface greater
than 99%. Total solar spectrum less than 93%.
2. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed +2 or be less than
–2 as determined in accordance with ASTM E308.
3. Tube Diameter: Approximately 10" (14").
F. Reflective 30° Adjustable Tube: Aluminum sheet, thickness .015".
1. Interior Finish: High reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface greater
than 99%. Total solar spectrum less than 93%.
G. Reflective 90° Adjustable Tube: Aluminum sheet, thickness .018".
1. Interior Finish: High reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface greater
than 99%. Total solar spectrum less than 93%.
H. Ceiling Ring: Injection molded impact resistant acrylic, 0.100" nominal thickness.
I. Dress Ring: Injection molded impact resistant acrylic, 0.100" nominal thickness. Prevents air
infiltration and condensation from attic spaces.
J. Dual Glazed Diffuser Assembly:
1. Upper Glazing: Acrylic plastic classified as CC2 material, 0.040" nominal thickness.
2. Lower Glazing: Molded polycarbonate plastic classified as CC1 material, 0.022" nominal
thickness.
3. Lower Glazing: Acrylic plastic classified as CC2 material, 0.090" nominal thickness.
K. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal
of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon.
L. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by
manufacturer.
M. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
N. Performance Criteria: Completed tubular skylight system assemblies shall be capable of
meeting the following performance requirements:
1. Air Infiltration Test: Air infiltration will not exceed .30 cfm/sf aperture, with a
pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.
2. Water Resistance Test: No uncontrolled water leakage at 16.5 psf pressure
differential, with water rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E331.
07810 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3. Uniform Load Test:
a. No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to
make system inoperable or cause permanent deflection of any section in excess
of 1% of its span at a positive load of 110 psf or negative load of 60 psf.
b. All units shall be tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive pressure and (2)
for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM
E330.
4. Fire Testing:
a. Class B Burning Brand: Burning brand shall self-extinguish without transferring
the fire to the dome, in accordance with UBC Standard 15-2, ASTM E108 and UL
790.
b. Self-Ignition Temperature - greater than 650° F: In accordance with ASTM
D1929-68 (1975).
c. Smoke Density – Rating no greater than 75: No greater than 450, in accordance
with ASTM E84-91A in way intended for use.
d. Rate of Burn – Minimum Burning Rate: 2.5"/min, classification CC-2, in
accordance with ASTM D635-74.
O. Approved Models and Manufacturers:
1. Model 160DS (10") Daylighting System by Solatube International Inc., Vista, CA, (888)
765-2882, as basis of design.
2. Manufacturers providing prefabricated, tubular skylight units of the same type, design,
appearance, quality and performance are acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prepare mounting substrate as per manufacturer's requirements.
B. Coordinate size of new framed curb opening with manufacturer’s standard unit approved by
Architect and pre-engineered metal roof curb supplied by the steel building supplier.
C. Ensure that structural framing and edge angles for new curb openings have been properly
installed, in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
D. Ensure that existing self-flashing curbs to be reused are securely anchored to existing roof
deck.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install prefabricated skylight units in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations.
B. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water
test in presence of Owner and Contractor. Make corrections in installation methods if needed
prior to proceeding with installation of subsequent units.
C. Protect installed skylights and glazing from damage by adjacent construction. Units with
marred surfaces or scratched glazing shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
08110 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 08110
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish standard exterior hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Grout cores of exterior hollow metal frames, unless arranged for otherwise.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Anchorages.
4. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Anchorages.
5. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation of doors and frames.
6. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation: Foam insulation at perimeter of door and
window frames.
7. Section 07270, Air Infiltration Barriers.
8. Section 08700, Finish Hardware.
9. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
10. Section 09900, Painting.
11. Division 15 Mechanical: Mechanical units and louvers installed in hollow metal doors
and/or frames.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. SDI-100: Recommended Specifications of Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel
Door Institute (SDI).
2. ASTM A366: Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
3. NFPA 80: Fire-rated door assemblies.
4. NFPA 65: Smoke-control door assemblies.
5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Manufacturer: Member of Steel Door Institute (SDI).
C. Manufacturer shall comply with all requirements of Underwriters Laboratories where labeled
doors and frames are required.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature and door installation
schedules.
B. Door Schedules: Submit schedule of doors and frames, using same reference marks or numbers
for doors and details as that shown on the Drawings.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating general construction, configurations, jointing
methods, reinforcement and location of cutouts for louvers or glazing.
D. Samples: Submit representative sample of corner section of standard hollow metal doors and
frames to Architect for approval. Sample section shall indicate all details of construction and
finish.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
08110 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle all hollow metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage
and deterioration.
B. Provide packaging, including corner guards, separators, spreaders, banding and, if prefinished,
plastic or vinyl wrappings as required to protect all metal doors and frames during
transportation and storage.
C. Store doors upright, in a protected area, off the ground, with air space between individual
pieces. Protect all finished surfaces.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer’s written one-year warranty for standard steel doors and frames,
covering materials and workmanship, including dimensional stability, flushness of door faces,
squareness of doors and frames, and shop finishes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Hollow Metal Doors: Doors shall be cold-rolled, pickled and oiled, stretcher-leveled, all
bonderized steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces, complying with Steel Door Institute SDI-
100, except as amended in this Section.
1. Type: Composite construction with flush faces and seamless with hemmed edges.
Provide insulated doors where scheduled.
a. Exterior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 1, full flush design.
b. Interior Doors: Grade I, standard-duty, Model 1, full flush design.
2. Construction: Steel face sheets bonded to 1-3/4" honeycomb or unitized steel core,
14-gage top and bottom channels and 7-gage hinge reinforcement. Provide full
urethane core on exterior doors or where scheduled to be insulated door. Furnish the
following minimum face sheets:
a. Exterior Doors: 16-gage.
b. Interior Doors over 36" Wide or 84" High: 16-gage.
c. All Other Interior Doors: 18-gage.
3. Sizes: As scheduled on the Drawings, 1-3/4" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Style:
a. "Regent Door" by Ceco as basis of design for honeycomb core.
b. "Imperial Door" by Ceco as basis of design for insulated core.
c. "Medallion Door" by Ceco as basis of design for unitized steel core.
5. Finish: Shop-prime as specified below.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% post-consumer minimum.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Ceco Corp., Brentwood, TN, distributed locally by Architectural Doors, Denver, CO,
(303) 322-1410.
2. Curries, Mason City, IA, (515) 423-1334.
3. Kewanee Corp., Kewanee, IL, (800) 447-5687.
4. Republic Doors, distributed by Hahl-Kern Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 733-5909.
5. Manufacturers providing products of same design, performance and function are
acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
2.02 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Hollow Metal Frames: Frames shall be cold-rolled or hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel, all
bonderized sheets, complying with Steel Door Institute SDI-100, except as amended by this
08110 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
Section. Except where other gages are indicated or specified, fabricate frames from steel not
lighter than the following:
a. Exterior Doors: 14-gage.
b. Pairs of Interior Doors: 14-gage.
c. Single Interior Doors over 36" Wide or 84" High: 14-gage.
d. All Other Frames: 16-gage.
1. Type: Mitered corners, fully welded frames. Knockdown-type frames are not
permitted, unless approved for use in interior fire-rated assemblies.
2. Sizes: As shown and scheduled on the Drawings.
3. Finish: Shop-primed as specified below.
4. Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type, minimum three (3) per jamb, equally
spaced.
5. Jamb Anchors:
a. Masonry or Architectural Precast Concrete Construction: Corrugated or other
deformed type, adjustable anchors, four (4) per jamb.
6. Floor Anchors: 16-gage, one (1) per jamb.
B. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 25% post-consumer minimum.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Ceco Corp., Oak Brook, IL, distributed locally by Ceco Door Division, Fountain, CO,
(303) 382-7930.
2. Curries, Mason City, IA, (515) 423-1334.
3. Kewanee Corp., Kewanee, IL, (800) 447-5687.
4. Republic Doors, distributed by Hahl-Kern Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 733-5909.
5. Manufacturers shall be the same as those for hollow metal doors.
2.03 PROFILES
A. Hollow Metal Frames for Doors: Jamb sections shall be standard 2" wide x 5-3/4" deep, double-
rabbeted, with 7/16" returns, or as shown on the Drawings or required by specified wall
construction, except as noted below. Fabricator to verify profile specified with wall
construction and furnish jamb sections with the required depth.
1. Head Sections: Provide 4" head sections for frames where shown or scheduled on the
Drawings.
B. Hollow Metal Frames for Windows: Jamb sections shall be standard 2" wide x 3" deep, single-
rabbeted, with 1/2" returns.
1. Sill and Intermediate Sections: Match jamb sections, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
C. Miscellaneous Filler and Closure Shapes: Fully weld to standard profiles and grind smooth as
detailed on the Drawings.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors: Fabricate doors in accordance with Steel Door Institute requirements and
recommendations.
1. Fabricate doors of type, sizes, materials and designs indicated. Provide door clearance
of 1/8" at jambs and heads and 5/8" at bottoms. Doors shall have lock edges beveled
1/8" in 2".
2. Finished work shall be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Form moulded
members straight and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed and in true
alignment. All welded joints on exposed surfaces shall be dressed smooth so they are
invisible after finishing.
3. Mechanically interlock longitudinal seams. Leave seams invisible or weld, fill and grind
smooth. Close top and bottom edges of all hollow metal exterior doors to provide a
weather seal, provided as part of door construction.
4. Fabricate exterior doors with face sheets welded to perimeter stiles and inner frame
members. Form perimeter frame with continuous one-piece channel at hinge edge,
continuous one-piece channel at lock edge and channels at top and bottom. Inner
08110 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
frame members shall be continuous one-piece vertical steel rib stiffeners spaced not to
exceed 6" o.c. Face sheets are to be continuously arc welded to perimeter channels.
Weld face sheets to interior frame members in manner to provide a door with smooth
surfaces. Spaces between stiffeners shall be sound-deadened and insulated full height
of door where scheduled.
5. Fabricate interior doors with honeycomb core and steel face sheets welded to
perimeter stiles and inner frame members, same as specified above.
6. Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for hardware
requirements. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors at factory to receive all mortise-
type hardware. Provide reinforcing only for doors to receive surface-applied hardware
as required. Gages of metal for reinforcing plates shall comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for type of hardware used and size and thickness of doors.
7. Reinforce and prepare doors and/or frames to receive access control systems and other
specialty hardware. Refer to Section 08710 and Division 16, Electrical, for hardware
and wiring requirements.
8. Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth uniform finish.
9. Prepare cutouts for louvers or glazing where scheduled on the Drawings and factory
install louvers where possible.
10. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with Steel Door Institute requirements
and recommendations.
1. Form frames of steel to sizes, gages, profiles and shapes as detailed. Frames shall be
combination-type with integral trim and fabricated with full-welded type construction
at joints.
2. Form frames with full mitered corners and stops, butt T-joints of frames and
continuously weld all joints for full depth and width of frame and trim. Close all
contact edges tight and dress all welds on exposed surfaces smooth and flush.
3. Mullions and transom bars shall be closed or tubular construction and shall join with
and be secured to heads and jambs with continuous butt-welded joints. Reinforce
joints between members with concealed clip angles of same thickness as frame.
4. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects.
Fabricate moulded members straight and true with corner joints well formed, in true
alignment and fastenings concealed.
5. Reinforce and prepare frames to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for
hardware requirements.
a. Prepare frames at factory by templates for installation of specified type
hardware. Welding of hinges to frames is not acceptable. Provide frames to
receive surface-applied hardware with reinforcing plates only. Provide cover
boxes in back of all hardware cutouts.
6. Provide jamb anchors per Steel Door Institute recommendations for type of wall
substrate.
a. Fabricate jambs of frames with dimples for machine bolt anchorage specified
in paragraph 2.02 above.
7. Provide floor anchors per Steel Door Institute recommendations for anchoring frame to
type of floor construction. Clips shall be adjustable and drilled for two (2) 3/8" anchor
bolts.
8. Removable Mullions: Provide manufacturer's standard machine screw connections,
including mullion clips.
9. Provide predrilled holes or other attachment or anchorage devices supplied by or
required by other Sections.
10. Place minimum of three (3) silencers on each interior single door frame. Space equally
along jamb strike. Set out and adjust lock strikes to provide clearance for silencers.
Delete silencers where door jamb gaskets or continuous weather-stripping are specified
in Section 08700.
11. Fill surface depressions of hollow metal frames with metallic paste filler and grind to
smooth finish.
12. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer as specified below.
08110 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
2.06 FINISHES
A. Shop-prime by manufacturer using a phosphatized treatment followed by a prime coat paint
finish to all surfaces. Clean and chemically treat surfaces to ensure complete paint adherence.
Follow with a baked-on coat of rust-inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc-chromate or synthetic resin
primer on all surfaces. Air-drying is acceptable when metal is electro-galvanized. Field
finishing is specified in Section 09900.
B. Shop-prime by manufacturer using a hot-dipped galvanized process in accordance with ASTM
A525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. Field finishing is specified in
Section 09900.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrates, wall openings and conditions under which the hollow
metal door and frames are to be installed and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental
to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Contractor shall field verify dimensions and conditions governing the work of this Section prior
to beginning fabrication.
C. Contractor shall verify depth of all frames with specified wall constructions prior to
fabrication. Notify Architect of any discrepancies or propose required modifications in the
shop drawings, noted as deviations as specified in Section 01340.
D. For welded frames, provide temporary steel shipping spreaders fastened across bottom of
frames. Where construction will permit concealment, leave spreaders in place after
installation; otherwise remove spreaders when frames are set and anchored. In place of
spreaders, frames may be strapped together in pairs with heads inverted for bracing during
shipment. Before shipping, label each frame with metal or plastic tags to show their location,
size, door swing and other pertinent information. Number frames to correspond to opening
numbers on construction drawings.
E. For doors and frames to be installed in prefabricated steel structures erected by others,
Contractor shall ensure that framed opening structurals are properly sized and erected, with
clearances provided as required by the hollow metal fabricator. Furnish welded frames to the
site in a timely manner so as not to interfere with the erection schedule of the buildings.
F. Ensure that air infiltration wrap has been properly installed and approved prior to beginning
installation of the door frames.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. General: Installation of hollow metal doors and frames is specified in Section 06200, Finish
Carpentry.
B. Install frames and doors in accordance with SDI-100, except as amended in this Section.
Remove shipping spreaders, set frames in position, plumb, align and brace securely until
permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with expansion bolts or with
power fasteners. Provide wood spreaders to maintain jamb alignment. Build wall anchors into
walls, or secure to adjoining construction as indicated or specified. Where frames require
ceiling struts or other overhead bracing, they shall be anchored securely to ceilings or
structural framing above, as indicated or as required by site conditions.
C. Frames: Install hollow metal frames plumb and square with maximum diagonal distortion of
1/16". Ensure frames are accurately and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction.
D. Multiple Frame Sections: Field weld multiple sections of built-up clerestory window frames, as
approved in the shop drawings. All field welds shall be full welds, and meet workmanship
quality standards of shop welding for flushness and smoothness.
E. Grout all exterior hollow metal frames full with masonry mortar after installation in masonry or
concrete construction; foam in insulation in frames scheduled for insulated doors in other
construction, and frames in fire-rated assemblies where required by the applicable assembly.
08110 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
F. Ensure that foam insulation, specified in Section 07210, has been installed around all door and
window frames prior to installation of gypsum wallboard and/or interior casings and trims.
G. Doors: Install hollow metal doors plumb and square with maximum diagonal distortion of
1/16". Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08700 and adjust as
necessary for proper operation.
H. After installation, touch-up scratched or damaged surfaces. Use type of primer identical to
that used for shop coat.
I. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing in doors, sidelites, and transoms, where scheduled.
J. Coordinate installation of mechanical units or louvers, furnished by Division 15, into hollow
metal doors and/or frames, if applicable. Ensure the compatibility of sizes, materials, finishes
and anchorages.
K. Doors are to be finished without hardware. Coordinate with painting trades. Masking of
hardware is unacceptable.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect doors and frames from damage during transportation and at site. After installation,
protect doors and frames from damage during subsequent construction activities. Damaged
work will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Clean all surfaces of hollow metal doors and frames, and leave prepared for field finishing.
Refer to Section 09900, Painting.
END OF SECTION
08700 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 08700
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish finish hardware for new exterior doors.
B. Furnish keys in keyed groups as indicated, and deliver keys to Owner as specified.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Limitations on substitute products, if
applicable.
3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
4. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation.
5. Section 06410, Custom Cabinetwork: Cabinet hardware.
6. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
7. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. BHMA: Applicable standards for finish door hardware.
2. ANSI A115.2: Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4"
Doors.
3. ANSI A115.4: Door and Frame Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts.
4. ANSI A115.9: Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single-Acting.
5. ANSI A156.1: Butts and Hinges.
6. ANSI A156.2: Locks and Lock Trim.
7. ANSI A156.4: Door Controls (Closers).
8. ANSI A156.6: Architectural Door Trim.
9. ANSI A117.1, Current Edition: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility.
10. Americans with Disabilities Act, 1990: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility.
11. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Manufacturer: Manufacturers shall have minimum five (5) years experience in the
manufacturing of finish hardware items of the specified type, function, durability, quality and
performance.
C. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule of each type of hardware required for the Project in
accordance with Section 01340, indicating door location, type, quantity required, style, finish
and keying group.
B. Product Data: Supplemental to the Hardware Schedule, submit manufacturer's written product
literature for each hardware item specified. Clearly indicate which model number, trims,
accessories and finish are proposed by the submittal.
C. Templates: Supply hardware templates to Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, and respective
Sections of Divisions 8 and 13 prior to hardware installation.
D. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's parts list and maintenance
instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary tools required for proper
maintenance of hardware.
08700 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 KEYING
A. Temporary Construction Locks: Provide five (5) temporary project lock keys to the City of Fort
Collins project manager.
B. Provide two (2) change keys for each lock.
C. Provide two (2) master keys for each master keyed group.
D. Provide two (2) grand master keys, if required.
E. Provide one (1) master key for installation in each key access box, specified in Section 10520,
for fire department use.
F. Master Key Groups (review with Owner):
1. Key entire building to Owner's existing Master key system.
2. Key all building entry doors together.
3. Key all maintenance service rooms together.
G. Stamp or engrave each key with appropriate keying designation (MASTER, 1AA, 2AA, etc.).
When keys are turned over to Owner at completion of the project, secure keys with same
keying designation on same ring, one (1) ring for each keying designation.
H. Key Blanks: Provide Owner with specified quantity of blanks for keying separate from this
contract.
1. Quantity: 5.
I. Deliver keys to the Owner as specified in paragraph 1.06.B. below.
1.05 HARDWARE FUNCTIONS – CYLINDER LOCKS (BHMA)
A. F-81 (451) Office or Entry Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by knob from either side,
except when outside knob is locked by turn button in inside knob. When outside knob is
locked, latchbolt is operated by key in outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Turn button
must be manually rotated to unlock outside knob.
B. F-86 (457) Storeroom/Utility Space Door Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by key in
outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Outside knob is always fixed.
C. F-91 Door Locks: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by key from both sides.
D. Deadlocks:
1. E-2141: Deadbolt operated by key from either side. Bolt automatically deadlocks
when fully thrown.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Neatly and securely package hardware items and identify for individual location and use.
B. Keys shall be delivered directly to the Owner by certified mail, unless arranged otherwise at
the Pre-Construction Conference or by subsequent written direction from the Owner.
1.07 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH HARDWARE
A. General: Furnish hardware items of the type, function, quality and quantity to meet the
requirements of this Section and for a complete and operational installation. Products listed
08700 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
are indicative of the design, grade, type, construction, size and performance to be used by the
listed manufacturer. Alternate products of same quality, function, performance and design are
acceptable in conformance with Section 01600, unless limited by the specific requirements of
Section 01600 or this Section.
1. Hinges: Stanley, Bommer, Hager, Mont-Hard or McKinney.
2. Cylinder Locksets and Latchsets:
a. Commercial Line: Schlage only.
2. Closers: LCN, Norton or Dorma.
3. Deadbolts: Schlage only.
4. Thresholds and Weatherstripping: Pemko, Reese, Zero, Master Manufacturers or
Barrier Systems by Hager.
5. Trim, Stop and Holders: Hager, Trimco, Rockwood, Quality or Master Manufacturers.
6. Electric Power Supply: Securitron, BPS-24-1 with battery.
7. Panic Set: Securitron, TSB-3CL touch bar.
8. Electronic Timer: Access Support, DT-7.
9. Electromagnetic Lock: Magnalock Model 62, with bracket as required by location.
10. Door Gaskets and Sweeps: Pemko, Reese, Zero, National Guard Products Inc. or Barrier
Systems by Hager.
11. Manufacturers furnishing finish hardware items of the same function, design,
appearance, quality and performance are acceptable as approved by the Architect
prior to bidding except where restricted in Section 01600 or elsewhere in this Section.
B. Consistency: Hardware lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer, at a
minimum to the extent scheduled:
1. All closers shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the project.
2. All cylinders, locksets and passage sets shall be by the same manufacturer and of the
same finish, unless otherwise indicated. Coordination of keying shall be the
responsibility of the hardware supplier for these items.
3. All panic hardware shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the Project.
4. All finish door hardware shall be of the same, or correlated (brushed stainless steel
with satin chrome), finish, unless specifically indicated for different finish(es).
5. All reproduction locksets and latchsets shall be by the same manufacturer throughout
the project.
6. Deviations from consistency of one manufacturer are only acceptable when available
designs are not satisfactory.
C. Handing: Handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier, to be reviewed by the
Architect as a part of the Hardware Schedule submittal.
D. Special Requirements:
1. All hinges shall be ball-bearing type, unless otherwise indicated. Provide non-
removable pins in all hinges of exterior outswinging doors.
2. All cores of cylinder locksets shall be interchangeable, unless otherwise specified.
3. All deadbolts specified for required exit or egress doors shall be provided with lever or
paddle type operators on the interior.
4. Provide concave-shaped wall stops where scheduled with privacy-type push button
locksets. Use convex-shaped wall stops elsewhere.
5. Where kickplates are specified for only one side of each door leaf, install on active
side, or as recommended by the supplier.
6. Closers shall be provided with hold-open capability, except where part of a fire-rated
door assembly.
7. Closers shall be parallel arm type for push side applications, and mounted on the room
side of all doors where possible. Regular arm-type closers are acceptable for pull side
applications.
E. Accessibility: Door hardware shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A117.1, current
edition, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) for handicapped accessibility, and the
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards.
1. All doors shall have lever trim as scheduled in this Section.
F. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
08700 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
G. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Refer to paragraph 2.01.A. above for approved manufacturers for specific types of
finish hardware.
2. Bommer, Landrum, SC, (800) 334-1654.
3. Dorma Architectural Hardware, Reamstown, PA, (800) 523-8483.
4. Emtek Products, Inc., Industry, CA, (800) 356-2741.
5. Glynn-Johnson, Indianapolis, IN, (317) 613-8940.
6. Hager Companies, St. Louis, MO, (800) 325-9995.
7. Ilco Unican, Winston Salem, NC, (800) 849-8324.
8. LCN, Princeton, IL, (800) 526-2400.
9. Pemko, Ventura, CA, (800) 283-9988.
10. Omnia Industries Inc., (800) 310-7960.
11. Schlage Lock Co., Colorado Springs, CO, (719) 264-5300.
12. The Stanley Works, New Britain, CT, (800) 337-4393.
13. Trimco, Los Angeles, CA, (323) 262-4191.
14. Von Duprin, Indianapolis, IN, (800) 999-0408.
15. Weiser Lock, Tuscon, AZ, (800) 677-5625.
16. Manufacturers providing products of same quality, function, performance, design and
finishes are acceptable in conformance with Section 01600, unless limited by the
specific requirements of Section 01600 or this Section.
2.02 COMMERCIAL HARDWARE DESIGNS AND FINISHES
A. General: Design of finish hardware shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph
2.01 above.
B. Commercial Line: Heavy-duty, commercial grade hardware, D-Series by Schlage as basis of
design.
C. Commercial Grade Trims:
1. Lever trim: Omega by Schlage as basis of design.
2. Knob trim: Orbit by Schlage as basis of design.
D. Panic Set Trims: FLW Design by Sargent or equal.
E. Commercial Line Finish:
1. US26D, Satin Chromium.
2. US3, Bright Brass.
3. US10, Satin Brass.
4. US5, Satin Brass Oxidized.
5. US10B, Antique Bronze Oiled.
6. Match existing.
F. Threshold Finish: Mill finish cast.
2.03 SCHEDULE OF HARDWARE ITEMS
A. Electronic, Timer-Controlled Magnetic Lock: Low-voltage electronic magnetic lock with a
holding force of at least 1,200 lbs. for standard 1-3/4" hollow metal door applications.
1. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC.
2. Current Draw: 0.50 amp at 24 volts.
3. Door/Frame Mounting Position: Manufacturer's standard head mounting.
4. Options: Provide manufacturer's standard adjustable time delay to allow automatic
delay relocking signal from 4 to 30 seconds.
5. Power Supply: UL-listed modular power unit with plug-in dual control modules and
field-selectable 12/24V output voltage, 510 Series by Locknetics or approved equal.
Provide the following power supply options:
a. Time Delay Module: Plug-in PC card providing an adjustable (0-30 seconds)
delay on relock.
6. Accessories and Hardware: Provide all required accessories, strikes, hardware, trims
and other items necessary for a complete and operational locking system.
7. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish, to match finishes specified in paragraph 2.02
above.
08700 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
8. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Magforce 390.
b. 510 Series by Locknetics, Hamden, CT, as basis of design.
c. Manufacturers providing products of same design, function, performance and
quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
B. Electronic Lockset Controller: Manufacturer's standard, general-purpose 24-hour digital timer,
to be compatible with the electronic lockset specified in paragraph A above, with single pole,
single throw heavy duty switch rated for 40 amps at 120 volts.
1. Controller shall provide accurate, dependable, fully automatic control on a daily
repeating cycle for a 7-day period.
2. Time of Day Clock: Manufacturer's standard 60-minute vernier time digital clock.
3. Housing: NEMA-1 type indoor cabinet of heavy gage sheet steel with permanently
hinged, lockable cover. Provide manufacturer's standard knockouts for conduit/wire
connections.
4. Manual Control: Provide manufacturer's standard manual operation by means of an
ON/OFF switch. Such manual override will not interfere with subsequent automatic
operations or require reprogramming of the timer.
5. Finish: Housing shall be manufacturer's standard gray enamel finish.
6. Approved Manufacturers:
a. DT7 Automatic Time Switch by Securitron, Sparks, NV, as basis of design.
b. Manufacturer providing products of same design, function, performance and
quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding, provided
controller is by the same manufacturer as the specified electronic lockset.
C. Control Stations: Manufacturer’s standard manual override/emergency exit touch bar, to allow
the electronic magnet to be released from the inside of the room.
1. Touch Bar: Manufacturer’s standard 36" long touch bar, handicapped accessible, clear
finish.
2. Status Indicator Lights: None.
3. Provide one (1) manual touch bar in each restroom and change room equipped with the
specified electronic magnetic lock.
4. Approved Manufacturers:
a. TSB Series by Securitron, Sparks, NV, as basis of design.
b. Manufacturers providing products of same design, function, performance and
quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding, provided
manual control station is by the same manufacturer as the specified electronic
lockset.
D. Secondary Control Stations: Use motion detector/occupancy sensor for secondary control
station. Magnetic lock shall not engage while occupancy sensor identifies room as occupied.
See Electrical for specified occupancy sensor.
2.04 SPECIALTY FINISH HARDWARE
A. General: Refer to Section 08710 for specialty hardware items, including access control
systems, automatic door operators, electronic or biometric access control systems, etc.
B. Electronic, Timer-Controlled Magnetic Lock: Low-voltage electronic magnetic lock with a
holding force of at least 1,200 lbs. for standard 1-3/4" hollow metal door applications.
1. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC.
2. Current Draw: 0.50 amp at 24 volts.
3. Door/Frame Mounting Position: Manufacturer's standard head mounting.
4. Options: Provide manufacturer's standard adjustable time delay to allow automatic
delay relocking signal from 4 to 30 seconds.
5. Power Supply: UL-listed modular power unit with plug-in dual control modules and
field-selectable 12/24V output voltage, 510 Series by Locknetics or approved equal.
Provide the following power supply options:
a. Time Delay Module: Plug-in PC card providing an adjustable (0-30 seconds)
delay on relock.
6. Accessories and Hardware: Provide all required accessories, strikes, hardware, trims
and other items necessary for a complete and operational locking system.
08700 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
7. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish, to match finishes specified in paragraph 2.02
above.
8. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Magforce 390.
b. 510 Series by Locknetics, Hamden, CT, as basis of design.
c. Manufacturers providing products of same design, function, performance and
quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
C. Electronic Lockset Controller: Manufacturer's standard, general-purpose 24-hour digital timer,
to be compatible with the electronic lockset specified in paragraph A above, with single pole,
single throw heavy duty switch rated for 40 amps at 120 volts.
1. Controller shall provide accurate, dependable, fully automatic control on a daily
repeating cycle for a 7-day period.
2. Time of Day Clock: Manufacturer's standard 60-minute vernier time digital clock.
3. Housing: NEMA-1 type indoor cabinet of heavy gage sheet steel with permanently
hinged, lockable cover. Provide manufacturer's standard knockouts for conduit/wire
connections.
4. Manual Control: Provide manufacturer's standard manual operation by means of an
ON/OFF switch. Such manual override will not interfere with subsequent automatic
operations or require reprogramming of the timer.
5. Finish: Housing shall be manufacturer's standard gray enamel finish.
6. Approved Manufacturers:
a. DT7 Automatic Time Switch by Securitron, Sparks, NV, as basis of design.
b. Manufacturers providing products of same design, function, performance and
quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding, provided
controller is by the same manufacturer as the specified electronic lockset.
D. Secondary Control Stations: Use motion detector/occupancy sensor for secondary control
station. Magnetic lock shall not engage while occupancy sensor identifies room as occupied.
See Electrical for specified occupancy sensor.
E. Door Alarms: Rim-type panic set with integral emergency exit alarm.
1. Hardware shall be in compliance with the applicable requirements of ANSI A156.3,
Grade 1, UL 305 and NFPA 101 standards.
2. Power Supply: 9-volt battery. (Hard-wired with 9-volt battery back-up.)
3. Emergency Alarm: Manufacturer's standard horn alarm, 100 decibel.
4. Emergency Alarm Signage: Manufacturer's standard signage applied to full length of
panic device operator, reading "EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY – ALARM WILL SOUND", white
letters on red background.
5. Exterior Trim: Manufacturer's standard handicapped accessible lever-type trim.
6. Finish: Match finish specified for other door hardware.
7. Approved Product and Manufacturers:
a. Guard-X by Von Duprin, Indianapolis, IN, (800) 999-0408.
b. Manufacturer's providing products of same design, function, performance and
quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding, unless
restricted by other provisions of Section 01600 or this Section.
F. Power-Assisted, Handicapped Door Operator: Refer to Section 08710.
G. Mechanical Push-Button Access Control Locksets: Refer to Section 08710.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the doors, frames and other substrates that are to receive finish
hardware and notify the Contractor of any existing condition that will be detrimental to the
successful installation and performance of the hardware. Do not install hardware until such
conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer.
B. Ensure that door cutouts or bores for hardware and frame cutouts for strike plates are properly
aligned.
08700 - 7
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
C. Ensure that the Owner's existing security alarm, resident call, automatic locking or other
communicating systems tied to the door hardware have been bypassed prior to commencing
work. These systems shall remain powered for all doors not affected by new work.
D. Do not install finish hardware until doors, frames and other substrates have been painted,
stained or otherwise finished as specified in other Sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE
A. General: Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations, using proper templates. Installation is specified in Section 06200.
B. Mounting Heights: Maintain following mounting heights for new doors, from finished floor to
center line of hardware item:
1. Locksets and Latchsets: 40", unless special height requirements are specified elsewhere.
2. Pulls and Push Plates: 39".
3. Deadlocks: 48".
C. Verify compliance of mounting heights with current ANSI A117.1 and ADA requirements.
D. Contractor shall ensure that proper blocking has been provided for all wall-mounted hardware
in gypsum wallboard partitions, particularly door stops.
E. Reconnect existing security alarm, resident call, automatic locking or other communicating
systems which have been altered or disconnected for work of this Section. Test in the
presence of the Owner's principal representative to verify proper operation. Systems shall be
tied into new doors of the same function, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Ensure proper operation of all finish hardware items. Adjust alignments as necessary for
smooth operation.
G. Adjust operating force for all door closers for compliance with applicable codes and
handicapped accessibility standards.
3.03 HARDWARE FURNISHED TO OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Hardware supplier to provide templates to
door fabricator.
3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: While the following Hardware Schedule is intended to cover all doors and other
movable parts of the project and establish a type and standard of quality, it shall be the
specific responsibility of the finish hardware supplier to examine the Drawings and
Specifications and furnish proper hardware for all openings, whether listed or not. If there are
any omissions in the hardware groups, the hardware supplier shall notify the Architect prior to
bid opening for instructions; otherwise, the list will be considered complete. No extras will be
allowed by the Owner or the Architect.
B. It is intended that the following groups be complete in the coverage of required items, but it is
the responsibility of the hardware supplier to furnish finish hardware necessary for a complete
installation, particularly in regard to fire-rated door assemblies. Where items are referred to
in the singular, they shall be furnished in numbers sufficient for a complete installation.
C. Every attempt has been made to coordinate the finish hardware items between each other and
with doors, etc. to which they are to be installed. It is the responsibility of the hardware
supplier to ensure the compatibility of the finish hardware supplied with both related hardware
items and the doors, etc. to which they are to be used.
D. Hardware Notes:
1. Ea. refers to each leaf.
2. LH refers to left-hand leaf only.
3. RH refers to right-hand leaf only.
4. All other handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier.
08700 - 8
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
PART 4 SCHEDULE
4.01 HARDWARE GROUPS
Group A
1 ea. Deadlock
1 ea. Emergency exit touch bar
1 ea. Magnetic lock
1-1/2 pr. ea. leaf Hinges (1 electric hinge)
1 ea. Closer
1 ea. Threshold
2 ea. Kickplates
1 ea. Push/pull
1 ea. Door stop
1 ea. Door bottom
1 set Weatherstripping
1 Power supply
1 Battery
1 Timer
Group B
1 ea. Lockset F-86
1 ea. Deadlock
1-1/2 pr. ea. leaf Hinges
1 ea. Closer
1 ea. Kickplate
1 ea. Door stop w/hold open
1 ea. Door bottom
1 set Weatherstripping
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
09260 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install exterior gypsum wallboard, adhesives, accessories and trim, except exterior
gypsum sheathing specified elsewhere.
C. Tape and finish joints of gypsum wallboard.
D. Texture and finish gypsum wallboard surfaces to the level specified.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01410, Testing: Acoustical wall and floor/ceiling assemblies.
3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
4. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
5. Section 06160, Exterior Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing.
6. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
7. Section 07270, Air Infiltration Barriers.
8. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
9. Section 08210, Wood Doors.
10. Section 09900, Painting.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. ASTM C473, Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products.
2. ASTM C518, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
3. ASTM C630, Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
4. ASTM C840, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
5. ASTM C1396, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
6. ASTM C1658, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels.
7. ASTM D3273, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
8. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Install gypsum wallboard in accordance with applicable Gypsum Association (GA) publications,
including but not limited to:
1. Gypsum Board Finishes: GA-214-96.
2. Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board: GA-216-96.
3. Fire-Rated Door Frames in Fire-Rated Partitions: GA-219.
4. Weather Protection: GA-220.
5. Gypsum Board Applied to Curved Surfaces: GA-226.
6. Application of Gypsum Sheathing: GA-253.
7. Application of Gypsum Board as a Roofing Substrate: GA-275.
8. Fire-Resistive Construction: GA-600-92.
C. Certifications: Manufacturer shall certify that materials supplied under this Section contain no
asbestos.
D. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
09260 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature for all gypsum wallboard
materials and accessory products specified or required for Project conditions.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature for all specialty gypsum
wallboard products specified or required for Project conditions, including by not limited to:
C. Samples: Texturing subcontractor shall prepare a series of minimum 24" x 24" samples of each
type of finish/texture specified for approval of the Architect.
D. Sample Area: Contractor shall prepare a wall/ceiling area within one room for approval of
general quality and workmanship by the Owner and Architect, to include gypsum wallboard
installation, taping, joint preparation, sanding, finishing and texturing, if applicable. Sample
area, when approved, shall be used for the standard of comparison for the balance of work.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing
system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed
in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification
sections.
2. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
3. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical
address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is
considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site in original unopened packages, containers or bundles with labels
intact bearing type, sizes and thicknesses, brand name and name of manufacturer.
B. Handle wallboard carefully to avoid abrading surfaces or edges.
C. Store materials flat, under cover, on level platforms, with edges, ends and surfaces properly
protected from weather, undue sagging and damage.
D. Protection During Construction: Contractor shall adequately protect all gypsum wallboard
materials, wall and roof/ceiling assemblies during construction from weather and moisture
penetration, when these materials are installed prior to the structure being enclosed and
"dried-in". Also refer to paragraph 3.01 below.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures at not less than 55° F for the period of 24 hours before drywall
finishing, during installation and until compounds are dry.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. General: Provide gypsum wallboard materials in 48" widths complying with FS SS-L-30D.
B. Fire-rated, Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: UL-rated, 5/8" thick, maximum permissible lengths,
tapered edges, exterior-grade facings.
C. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: 40% minimum.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
09260 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
Section 01015.
D. Approved Manufacturers:
1. United States Gypsum Co. Chicago, IL, and represented locally in Denver, CO, (303)
721-9394.
2. G-P Gypsum (Georgia-Pacific) Corp., (800) 225-6119.
3. Gold Bond Building Products, Charlotte, NC, and represented locally in Lakewood, CO,
(303) 988-5005.
4. American Gypsum, Albuquerque, NM, (800) 545-6302.
5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
2.02 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide gypsum wallboard accessories in accordance with GA 216.
B. Corner Beads and Edge Trim: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel beaded units with
flanges for concealment in joint compound.
C. Radius Corners, Coves and Special Mouldings: Aluminum or galvanized steel units with flanges
for concealment in joint compound. Refer to the Drawings for specific conditions or details.
1. Beadex Drywall Accessories, Renton, WA, (800) 726-2397, or equal.
D. Shims: 2" wide cardboard or paper drywall shims, for shimming wood or metal stud frame
construction.
E. Joint Tape: Perforated or nylon mesh type, as recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Joint Compound and Finishing Systems: ASTM C474 and C475, Type I and Type II, ready-mixed
vinyl type for interior use. Use two (2) separate grades: one specifically for bedding tapes and
filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding. (Compounds shall be hypoallergenic.)
1. Beadex Drywall Accessories, Renton, WA, (800) 726-2397.
2. Hamilton Materials, Orange, CA, (714) 637-2770.
3. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.
G. Channels: Refer to Section 09110, Non-Load-Bearing Metal Framing.
H. Fasteners: Screws:
1. Type W bugle head, lengths as recommended by manufacturer of gypsum wallboard
material for installation in wood construction.
2. Type S bugle head, lengths as recommended by manufacturers of gypsum wallboard
material for installation in steel stud construction.
I. Control Joints: E-Z strip vinyl expansion joint or as recommended by manufacturer of gypsum
wallboard.
J. Primer: Products as recommended by the manufacturer, compatible with both the gypsum
wallboard and texturing materials furnished.
K. Texturing: Provide materials, equipment and accessories as required to provide
finish/texture(s).
1. Spray-Applied Texture: Light orange peel texture, USG Spray Texture Finish, or equal.
L. Adhesive: Manufacturer-approved drywall adhesive, oil-based. Adhesives shall have a VOC
content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Formula 38 Drywall and Construction Adhesive, Ohio Sealants, Inc. or equal.
M. Provide auxiliary materials and accessories for gypsum drywall work of the type and grade
recommended by the gypsum wallboard manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the wall, ceiling and soffit rough framing, and other substrates to
receive gypsum drywall and the conditions under which gypsum drywall is to be installed and
notify Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Ensure that wood or metal stud framing has been properly installed, providing substrates that
will permit the gypsum wallboard systems to be installed creating level, smooth and flush
09260 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
surfaces, sharp and straight edges and corners, and plumb and even returns.
1. Install gypsum wallboard shims where necessary to remove minor variations in framing
and to provide finished surfaces of specified levelness and flushness.
2. Advise Contractor to remove and replace sections of wall, ceiling or soffit framing that
cannot adequately be corrected by the installation of shims.
C. Underlayment Applications: Ensure that plywood underlayment has been properly installed
over metal framing for interior gypsum wallboard applications where indicated on the
Drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. General: Install gypsum wallboard in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions,
specifications and applicable Gypsum Association (GA) publications, including but not limited
to:
1. Gypsum Board Finishes: GA-214-96.
2. Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board: GA-216-96.
3. Fire-Rated Door Frames in Fire-Rated Partitions: GA-219.
4. Weather Protection: GA-220.
5. Gypsum Board Applied to Curved Surfaces: GA-226.
6. Application of Gypsum Sheathing: GA-253.
7. Application of Gypsum Board as a Roofing Substrate: GA-275.
8. Fire-Resistive Construction: GA-600-92.
B. Install gypsum wallboard in locations as specified in the Installation Schedule at the end of this
Section, or as required by applicable codes or standards.
C. Installation Method: Gypsum Wallboard for Soffits and Ceilings: Screw only.
D. Extend gypsum wallboard full height on exterior and interior walls, where shown on the
Drawings or required by applicable building code requirements, i.e., covering unfaced
insulation materials at ceiling spaces used as return air plenums. Seal materials to deck and
around structural members, piping, ductwork, conduit and other penetrations. Coordinate
with requirements of Sections 07210, 07250, 07900 and other applicable specifications.
E. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture-resistant gypsum wallboard with sealant.
F. Wood Frame Construction: Install specified cardboard or paper shims as necessary to correct
minor defects and alignment in wood framing members.
G. Refer to paragraph 3.04 for installation of expansion joints, corner and edge trims, and other
miscellaneous trims.
H. Tape, fill and sand exposed joints, edges, corners, openings and fixtures to produce surface
ready to receive surface finishes. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is
maximum 1/32". Taping, filling and sanding are required at all locations. Apply primer coat
prior to texturing.
I. Tolerances: Install, tape and finish all gypsum wallboard surfaces to maintain tolerances
required by the referenced standards. Refer to paragraph 3.08 for specified level(s) of gypsum
wallboard finishes.
J. Remove and reinstall defective work.
K. Refer to Section 09270 for installation of tile backer wallboard materials.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BLOCKING AND DRAFT STOPS
A. General: The Installer shall furnish and install gypsum wallboard for miscellaneous blocking and
draft stops, whether specifically indicated on the Drawings or not, including but not limited to:
1. Draft stops in attic spaces.
2. Draft stops in soffit or other concealed spaces.
3. Blocking in wall cavities where required to isolate electrical outlet boxes, switch
boxes, or other penetrations in fire-rated partitions or party walls.
4. Other areas as may be required by applicable building codes, or by state or local
building officials or inspectors.
B. Coordinate installation of required fireblocking and draft stops with firestops and blocking
specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry, and/or Section 09110, Non-Load-Bearing Metal
Framing.
09260 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Coordinate installation of acoustical barrier and isolation materials with gypsum
wallboard installation for sound and/or firewall and roof/ceiling assemblies. Refer to Section
09830.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS TRIMS
A. General: Install specified metal corner, edge and joint trims as specified herein or shown on
the Drawings, or where required by field conditions to provide a complete and finished
installation.
1. Install radius corner, bullnose, cove or other special trims as specified herein or shown
on the Drawings.
B. Expansion and Control Joints: Place expansion/control joints at locations as indicated on the
Drawings or in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Joints shall not be
placed at intervals greater than that recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer.
Coordinate locations where joints are not specifically shown with the Architect in the field
prior to layout.
1. Install control/expansion joints at wall or ceilings of dissimilar materials straight and
flush with surfaces.
2. Install control/expansion joints at vertical intersections where interior partition walls
abut exterior walls.
C. Corner Beads: Place corner beads at all external corners using longest practical lengths, in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
D. Edge and Miscellaneous Trims: Place edge trim where gypsum wallboard abuts dissimilar
materials and at reveals, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Wrap all
exposed edges of gypsum wallboard with specified edge or reveal trim, unless conditions allow
the use of full-size corner bead trims.
1. Install trims at walls or ceilings of dissimilar materials straight and flush with surfaces.
2. Install trims at columns, beams or other materials protruding from the plane of the
gypsum wallboard straight and accurate, with consistent tolerance of 1/4" maximum
joint width, unless otherwise shown.
3.06 PRIMING OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. General: Prime all gypsum wallboard surfaces to receive texturing and further finishing in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Use only priming
materials that are compatible with the drywall and texturing materials to which they are
applied.
B. Application of primer coat shall occur prior to texturing, unless otherwise approved.
C. Additional priming after texturing, if any, shall be provided by the painting subcontractor as
specified in Section 09900.
3.07 FINISHING OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. General: Apply texturing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced standards. Ensure uniform coverage and appearance, using specified equipment.
Do not texture walls to receive ceramic tile, porcelain tile, thin-cut stone tile, vinyl wall
coverings, adhered acoustical tile ceilings or other similar finishes.
B. Specified Level(s) of Gypsum Wallboard Finish: Finishes shall comply with current standards
and recommendations of the Gypsum Association (GA) for the finish level(s) specified. Refer to
publication GA-214.
1. Level 4: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and
two (2) separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one (1)
separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and
accessories shall be covered with three (3) separate coats of joint compound. All joint
compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: It is recommended
09260 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
that the prepared surface be coated with a drywall primer prior to the application of
final finishes.
a. Locations: Interior wall and ceiling surfaces to receive light spray- or hand-
applied textures. Do not use where gloss or semi-gloss painted finishes are
specified.
C. Spray-Applied Texture: Spray-applied texturing shall be applied with commercial truck-
mounted spray equipment. Use of hopper-type equipment will be permitted only with the
specific approval of the Architect and Owner.
D. Refer to Section 06160, Exterior Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing, for areas of glass mat sheathing
to receive finishing and texturing.
3.08 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove soil, stains and extraneous materials from adjacent surfaces caused by installation of
drywall materials. Remove and replace materials that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned.
B. Leave gypsum wallboard surfaces clean and prepared for further finish work specified in other
Sections.
C. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protection of the gypsum wallboard
work from damage and deterioration during the remainder of the construction period.
D. Refer to paragraph 3.03 above for other protection requirements during construction.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Finishes and/or texturing shall be subject to evaluation to the satisfaction of the Architect,
including but not limited to, the following characteristics:
1. Consistency.
2. Coverage.
3. Uniformity.
4. Compliance with specified finish levels and approved sample(s).
5. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Satisfactory match to adjacent surfaces.
B. Texturing which exhibits bubbles after drying shall be removed and reapplied.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Install 5/8" fire-rated, exterior gypsum soffit wallboard in the following locations:
1. All exterior soffits.
2. All interior ceilings.
B. Refer to Section 06160 for areas to receive finished exterior glass mat gypsum sheathing as
finished ceilings or soffits.
END OF SECTION
09900 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare surfaces to receive opaque painted finishes as specified.
B. Furnish materials and finish surfaces as indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section.
Generally, the scope of work shall include painting all exposed surfaces, whether specifically
noted or not, and certain concealed surfaces, except where materials are prefinished or where
intended to remain unfinished as described in paragraph 1.02 below.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Maintenance materials.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard: Priming.
4. Division 15, Mechanical.
5. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and
inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces and
duct shafts.
B. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and
similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section, except as may be so
specified.
C. Materials, fixtures and equipment specified or supplied by the manufacturer as prefinished
shall not be painted, unless otherwise indicated in the Schedule at the end of this Section.
Materials supplied with factory-applied primer coats shall be field finished by this Section,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical or electrical parts such as valve
operators, linkages, sensing devices and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Priming or finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory-applied or installer-
performed under other Sections.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Finish work shall be performed only by qualified personnel employed by firms specializing in
work of this type, with a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar
size and complexity.
C. Materials shall be applied with appropriate equipment and tools as specified herein, or as
required to provide the specified quality.
D. Coordination of Paint Finishes, Primers and Substrates:
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used.
2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to
be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various
substrates.
3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials
to assure that compatible prime coats are used.
4. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers or remove the primer and reprime
as required.
09900 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating
systems over prime coatings or substrates supplied under other Sections.
E. Certification: Supplier shall certify that all paint materials supplied contain no lead or other
toxic substances.
F. Certification: Paint materials used in interior building applications shall be GreenGuard
certified for indoor air quality.
G. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications to show compliance
with the specified requirements.
B. Materials List: Submit materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this Section.
C. Samples: Painting Contractor shall prepare samples of each substrate and finish specified, as
directed by the Architect, including but not limited to:
1. Paint samples for typical exterior and interior exposed structural steel beams, columns,
joists and metal decking.
2. Paint samples for typical interior plaster and gypsum wallboard.
3. Paint samples for interior wood casings, trim and interior doors.
4. Paint samples for typical exterior wood siding, casings and trims.
5. Paint samples for interior and exterior metal doors, pipe railings and miscellaneous
metal work.
6. Paint samples for exterior wood storefront systems.
7. Paint samples for exterior, exposed wood trusses at entries and picnic shelters.
8. Paint samples for typical interior concrete unit masonry to receive epoxy finish.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for interior paints and coatings (if used) used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each
product used does not exceed the limits listed in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the
requirements of individual specification sections. Indicate VOC content in g/L
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. The calculation of VOC shall exclude water and tinting color added at the point of sale.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver paint materials in original, sealed and labeled containers bearing manufacturer's name,
type of paint, brand name, color, designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing.
B. Provide adequate storage facilities to store materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45°
F in a well-ventilated area.
C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. General: Follow manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations for product
handling and application. Adhere to all applicable OSHA regulations related to product
application and handling of removed paint, rinse water and other residual materials.
B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes, unless moisture contents of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12%.
2. Interior Wood: 6%.
3. Exterior Wood: 15%.
C. Ensure that surface temperature or the surrounding air temperature is above 40° F before
applying finishes. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints for interior work is 45°
F; 50° F for exterior work.
D. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain
temperatures above 45° F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes.
E. Provide minimum 15 footcandles of lighting on surfaces to be finished.
09900 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1.07 PROTECTION
A. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of
inadequate or unsuitable protection.
B. Furnish sufficient dropcloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings
from soiling surfaces not being painted and, in particular, surfaces within storage and
preparation area.
C. Place cotton cloths and any material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed, metal
containers and remove daily from the site.
D. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to painting
operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of
work in each area. Do not use solvents to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer
finish.
1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall furnish Owner additional maintenance stock of not less than five (5) gallons of
each color of finish coating, except that one (1) gallon shall be adequate for all accent and
trim colors.
B. Containers are to be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Paints, Enamels and Fillers: Type and brand scheduled herein, ready-mixed, except field-
catalyzed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining a soft paste consistency, capable of
readily and uniformly being dispersed to a complete homogeneous mixture. Paints shall have
good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
1. Paint materials shall contain no lead or other toxic substances. Refer to paragraph
1.03.C.
2. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products
that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to
a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and
the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or
finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
a. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
b. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
c. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L.
d. Floor Coatings: VOC content of not more than 100 g/L.
e. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0% by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or
more benzene rings).
f. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
1) Acrolein 14) Formaldehyde
2) Acrylonitrile 15) Hexavalent chromium
3) Antimony 16) Isophorone
4) Benzene 17) Lead
5) Butyl benzyl phthalate 18) Mercury
6) Cadmium 19) Methyl ethyl ketone
7) Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate 20) Methyl isobutyl ketone
8) Di-n-butyl phthalate 21) Methylene chloride
9) Di-n-octyl phthalate 22) Naphthalene
10) 1,2-dichlorobenzene 23) Toluene (methylbenzene)
11) Diethyl phthalate 24) 1,1,1-trichloroethane
12) Dimethyl phthalate 25) Vinyl chloride
13) Ethylbenzene
09900 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Paint Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically
indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified, of high quality and approved
manufacturer.
C. Color(s) as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full color selection, unless otherwise
indicated. Painter shall prepare samples for the Architect's approval of each paint color
selected. Remake samples until approved, at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credit EQ 4.2: Provide paints and coatings not exceeding the VOC limits listed in
paragraph 2.01.A above and Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
E. Approved Manufacturers: Use the same brand throughout the project for each type of paint
material specified:
1. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Series, as basis of design.
2. Paint: Pittsburgh, Diamond Vogel, ICI Dulux, Fuller O'Brien, Benjamin Moore, Kelly
Moore, Kwal-Howell and Sophir Morris. Using product lines of same quality, function
and performance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
3. Stain, varnish and other transparent finishes: Refer to Section 09930.
4. Strippers and Paint Removers: Refer to Section 09905.
5. Refer to Section 08336 for high heat-resistant paint required for smoke containment
system and elevator hoistway door components.
2.02 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
A. For application of the specified paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for
application of the particular paint by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect, except
as limited by paragraph 2.02.C.
B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually
compatible with the material to be applied and that integrity of the finish will not be
jeopardized by use of this equipment.
C. Contractor shall use the following application equipment for the specific condition listed,
unless otherwise approved:
1. Exposed Structural Steel: Spray application only. Brushing or rolling is not permitted.
2. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Spray application only. Brushing or rolling is not
permitted.
3. Other areas indicated in paragraph 3.03.
2.03 COLOR SCHEDULES
A. The Architect will prepare marked-up elevations or a color schedule with samples for guidance
in painting. Contractor shall furnish samples of all other related finish materials for
coordination in preparation of the color schedule.
B. The Architect may select, allocate and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the work,
subject to the following:
1. Exterior Work: A maximum of three (3) different colors will be used, plus variations for
trim, doors, miscellaneous work and metal work.
2. Interior Work: A maximum of three (3) different pigmented colors will be used, plus
variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots.
3. Dark Tones: A maximum of two (2) dark tones will be used as accent colors for
interior.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted or finished prior to
commencing work. Notify the Architect of any condition that may potentially affect proper
application and final appearance. Do not commence work until such defects have been
09900 - 5
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
corrected to the satisfaction of the painting subcontractor. Beginning work shall be considered
acceptance of surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. General: All preparatory work shall be subject to evaluation and acceptance by the Architect.
Painting subcontractor will accept responsibility for the preparation of all surfaces, as specified
herein, prior to finishing.
B. Cleaning of all surfaces shall be done with non-toxic, biodegradable products that comply with
the California Code of Regulations, Title 17, Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning
products.
C. Ensure that the Contractor has corrected defects in all surfaces which may adversely affect
work of this Section, including but not limited to:
1. Ceramic tile and porcelain tile.
2. Hollow metal doors and frames.
3. Finish carpentry items.
4. Exposed structural steel.
5. Gypsum wallboard surfaces and texturing.
6. Welding and other attachments.
7. Steel plate connectors at exposed wood trusses.
D. New Wood Surfaces: Wipe dust and grit from hardwood and softwood items and millwork prior
to priming. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections with sealer. Fill knots, imperfec-
tions, nail holes and cracks after primer has dried and sand smooth. Back-prime interior and
exterior woodwork.
1. Back-prime interior woodwork which is to receive paint of enamel finish with enamel
undercoat paint.
2. Back-prime exterior wood with manufacturer's recommended primer.
E. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse well with
clean water and allow the surface to dry completely.
F. Remove surface contamination and oils from galvanized surfaces and wash with solvent. Apply
a coat of etching-type primer.
G. Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust from steel, ferrous metal and iron surfaces. Where
heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing, sandblasting or any other
necessary method.
1. Clean unprimed surfaces by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric
acid solution, ensuring that weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime
surfaces as required.
2. Sand and scrape shop-primed surfaces to remove loose primer and rust. Feather out
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent and prime
surfaces as required.
3. Back-prime structural steel and ferrous metal surfaces to be in contact with concrete,
unless furnished by other Sections.
4. Ensure that excess weld slag or flux deposits are removed, and that all exposed welds
are ground or sanded to specified appearance.
H. Priming of gypsum wallboard prior to application of texturing is specified in Section 09260,
Gypsum Wallboard. No further priming is required for the drywall surfaces by this Section,
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.
I. Prime top and bottom edges of metal doors with enamel undercoat when they are to be
painted.
J. Remove all hardware from doors before painting. Masking of hardware is unacceptable.
K. Schedule painting prior to installation of prefinished materials, specialties, furnishings and
fixtures to the extent possible, including but not limited to:
1. Toilet and bath fixtures and accessories.
2. Finish hardware.
3. Cabinetry and casework.
4. Vinyl component handrail and wall bumper systems.
5. Fire extinguisher cabinets and other specialties.
09900 - 6
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
6. Surface-mounted mechanical and electrical devices such as thermostats, prefinished
grilles and diffusers, switchplates and outlet cover plates, etc.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply finish materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Ensure that surfaces have been properly prepared and primed prior to
application of finish coats.
B. Apply each coat at the proper consistency. Allow each coat of finish to dry before the
following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. Sand lightly between
coats to achieve the required finish.
C. Brush Applications:
1. Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film.
2. Finish coats shall be finished by roping the paint, moving from wet to dry areas.
3. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other surface
imperfections will not be acceptable.
D. Spray Applications:
1. Except as specified in paragraph 2.02 or as specifically otherwise approved by the
Architect, confine spray application to metal framework and similar surfaces where
hand brush work would be inferior.
2. Gypsum wallboard and interior plaster walls, ceilings and soffits shall be finished by
spray application, then back-rolled with roller equipment to result in specified mil
thickness, moving from wet to dry areas.
3. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of
brush coats.
4. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two (2) coats in
one (1) pass.
E. For completed work, match the approved samples as to texture, color and coverage. Remove,
refinish or repaint work not in compliance with the specified requirements.
3.04 PAINTING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Painting of exposed equipment, louvers, ductwork, piping, conduits, etc. shall be
work of this Section, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Paint all ductwork, piping, conduit and devices to be exposed to view in the completed
project, unless prefinished or in concealed areas as defined in paragraph 1.02.
2. Coordinate extent of field finishing of mechanical and electrical equipment with the
Architect as necessary.
3. Architect retains the right to require prefinished diffusers, grilles and other mechanical
or electrical devices to be field finished, whether or not specifically called for.
4. Prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare ducts,
hangers, brackets, collars and supports in exposed locations, except where items are
plated or covered with a prefinished coating, or where located in mechanical chase
spaces. Finish paint primed equipment to color selected.
B. Color Coding: Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Sections for requirements concerning color
coding, identification branding of equipment, ducting, piping and conduit, if required.
1. Color code equipment, piping, conduit and exposed ductwork in accordance with
requirements indicated.
2. Color banding and identification (flow arrows, naming, numbering, etc.).
C. Remove grilles, covers and access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from location
and paint separately.
D. Paint face(s) and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing
backboards and mounting equipment on them.
1. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted
over or spattered.
E. Do not paint gas meters, electric meters and similar exterior equipment provided by outside
utility providers, if not permitted by those agencies. Coordinate requirements with the
appropriate Subcontractor prior to painting.
09900 - 7
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
1. Exposed gas piping leading to the gas meters shall be painted.
2. Exterior surface-mounted meter centers, disconnects, CT cabinets, exposed conduit
and similar equipment shall be painted, where not specifically excluded above.
3. Interior panelboard cabinet frames and doors shall not be painted, unless specified
elsewhere.
3.05 PAINTING ROOFTOP ACCESSORIES
A. Paint exposed roof penetrations, flues, roof vents, exhaust vent caps, pipe vents, etc., where
located on sloped roofs or otherwise exposed to view, unless prefinished or otherwise
indicated.
B. Paint housings of rooftop mechanical equipment when not prefinished, as directed by the
Architect.
1. Rooftop mechanical equipment, exhaust fan hoods, roof access and smoke hatches,
pipe vents and other roof penetrations need not be painted where concealed from view
by parapet walls at least 2'-0" high or other obstructions, as determined by the
Architect. The Architect retains the right to require these items to be painted, if in his
sole opinion, they are exposed to view.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Promptly remove paint from adjacent materials or surfaces as work proceeds where spilled,
splashed or splattered.
B. Cleaning of all surfaces shall be done with non-toxic, biodegradable products that comply with
the California Code of Regulations, Title 17, Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning
products.
C. During progress of work, keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials and debris.
D. Place cotton cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers
and remove daily from the site.
E. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
3.08 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Painted finishes shall be subject to evaluation and approval to the satisfaction of the Architect,
including but not limited to, the following characteristics:
1. Consistency and smoothness of surface.
2. Coverage and mil thickness.
3. Color match between adjacent areas.
4. Compliance with approved sample(s).
5. Renovation Projects: Satisfactory match to adjacent materials or surfaces, where
entire wall or ceiling area is not scheduled to receive new finish.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 EXTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE
NOTE: MWF indicates minimum wet film thickness which is a per coat measurement in mils thickness.
Systems are based on Sherwin-Williams (S-W) or as noted.
A. Exterior Exposed Steel Surfaces:
1. Location: Exposed surfaces of exterior steel.
2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils.
4. Product: S-W Industrial Enamel.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
09900 - 8
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Exterior Hollow Metal or Ferrous Metal Surfaces:
1. Location: Hollow metal doors and frames, insulated steel doors, pipe bollards, site
signage poles, ornamental fencing, handrails and guardrails.
2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils.
4. Product: S-W Industrial Enamel.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
C. Exterior Wood Surfaces (Latex):
1. Location: Exterior wood trim.
2. Primer: Preprimed by manufacturer.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, satin, MWF 4.0 mils.
4. Product: S-W A-100 Satin Latex House and Trim.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
D. Exterior Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces:
1. Location: Exterior gypsum wallboard soffits.
2. Primer: One (1) coat exterior vinyl emulsion sealer, flat, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, satin, MWF 3.6 mils per coat.
4. Product: S-W A-100 Satin Latex House and Trim.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
E. Metal Boxes, Conduits and Mechanical Equipment:
1. Location: As shown on the Drawings or required by project conditions.
2. Primer: One (1) coat, factory primed.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, MWF 3.6 mils where not factory finished.
4. Product: S-W A-100 Satin Latex House and Trim.
5. Color: To match adjacent surfaces.
F. Exterior Galvanized Surfaces:
1. Location: Galvanized metal decking, flashings, downspouts, roof vents and flues,
where exposed to view.
2. Primer: One (1) coat galvanized steel primer, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd-resin enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils.
4. Product: S-W Industrial Enamel.
5. Color: To match adjacent surfaces, or as selected.
G. Exterior Concrete or Concrete Unit Masonry Surfaces:
1. Location: Exposed concrete or concrete unit masonry foundation walls, retaining walls
indicated to be painted.
2. Primer: One (1) coat vinyl-acrylic emulsion block filler.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, low-lustre MWF 3.6 mils.
4. Product: S-W A-100 Satin Latex House and Trim.
5. Color: As selected.
H. Louvers: Paint where not prefinished by manufacturer.
I. Gutter and Downspouts: Prefinished coil stock by manufacturer for seamless installation.
J. Modular skylight structures: Prefinished by manufacturer.
4.02 INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE
A. Interior Exposed Steel Surfaces:
1. Location: Exposed surfaces of interior steel components.
2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, stain, MWF 4.4 mils.
4. Product: S-W ProMar 200 (Harmony) Alkyd Satin Enamel.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
B. Interior Hollow Metal or Ferrous Metal Surfaces:
1. Location: Hollow metal doors and frames, handrails and guardrails, and miscellaneous
metals.
2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils.
4. Product: S-W ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
09900 - 9
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
C. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled for Epoxy Finish:
1. Location: Walls of restrooms.
2. Primer: One (1) coat vinyl-acrylic emulsion block filler, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats two-part acrylic epoxy, semi-gloss, MWF 3.0 mils.
4. Product: S-W Water-Based Catalyzed Epoxy.
1. Color: To be selected.
D. Interior Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces Scheduled for Epoxy Finish:
1. Location: Walls, ceilings and soffits as scheduled on the Drawings.
2. Primer: Latex emulsion sealer, flat, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats two-part acrylic epoxy, semi-gloss satin, MWF 6 mils.
4. Product: S-W Water-Based Catalyzed Epoxy.
5. Color: To be selected.
E. Fire Protection Specialties: Prefinished by manufacturer.
F. Toilet and Bath Accessories: Prefinished by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
10430 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 10430
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE FOR BUILDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish surface-mounted, plaque-type or logo signage at exterior building walls, where shown
on the Drawings.
B. Furnish surface-mounted address signage on exterior building walls, where shown on the
Drawings.
C. Furnish handicapped accessibility symbol signage at all accessible building entries.
D. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
B. Signage systems shall comply with all applicable requirements of the Americans with
Disabilities Act, 1990, including signage size, lettering style, symbols, raised Braille and signage
location, placement and mounting heights.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's product literature, shop drawings and
schedule of required signage indicating type, size, style and method of installation.
1. Shop drawings and schedule shall illustrate each required sign for size, style and copy,
and indicate quantity required for each.
B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full line of standard colors and finishes for
selection by the Architect. Submit one full-size sample representative of each signage system
specified. Sample will be returned upon approval.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Package separately or in like groups, as applicable. Include installation template, hardware or
adhesive specified and installation instructions.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer’s written one-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BUILDING ADDRESS SIGNAGE
A. Type: Surface-mounted, individual letter and plaque-type signage, cast or laser cut.
B. Letter and Plaque Material: 3/8" or 1/4" aluminum or brass plate, as recommended by the
fabricator.
C. Mounting: Surface-mounted with countersunk screws at building address signage.
10430 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
D. Finish:
1. Plaque to be enamel finished with enameled graphics. Exposed fasteners to have same
finish as plaques.
2. Individual letters to be manufacturer's standard anodized aluminum finish.
E. Color(s): The Architect shall select color(s) from fabricator's standard color selections.
F. Letter/Numeral Style: Optima.
G. Letter/Numeral Sizes:
1. Building Address Signage: 6" high. Fabricator is to verify size required with City of Fort
Collins.
H. Copy Position: Centered.
I. Letter Spacing: Normal.
J. Capitalization: All caps.
K. Copy:
1. Building Address Signage: To be determined. Signage will indicate street address.
L. Symbols: Universal handicapped accessibility symbol for all accessible building entries.
1. All signage shall carry raised Braille symbols as required by the Americans with
Disabilities Act, 1990.
M. Quantities:
1. Building Address Signage: One (1), locations to be coordinated.
N. Approved Signage Fabricators:
1. DaVinci Sign Systems, Inc., Fort Collins, CO, Mike Long, (970) 203-9292.
2. Adcon Signs, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 484-3637.
3. Gardner Signs, Inc., Fort Collins, CO, (970) 482-3976.
4. Shaw Signs, Fort Collins, CO (970) 493-6244.
5. ABC Sign Works, Inc., Fort Collins, CO, (970) 223-9211.
6. Custom signage companies offering design services and fabrication capabilities meeting
the design intent of this Section are acceptable.
2.03 ENGRAVED FIBERGLASS SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
A. Type: 1/4" fiberglass for modular signage systems, color core contrasting to exterior face
color, with engraving through face layer to expose core layer and 1/32" raised characters. All
signage shall include raised Grade 2 Braille symbols.
B. Mounting: Screw or other tamper-proof mounting system recommended by the
supplier/installer.
C. Size: 6" high x 6" long, or as required to adequately accept specified messages.
D. Letter Size: 5/8".
E. Copy Position: Center/Center.
F. Letter Spacing: Normal.
G. Capitalization: All caps.
H. Letter Style: Caslon.
I. Copy: As scheduled in Part 4 below. Men's and women's restrooms shall have "MEN" and
"WOMEN" names as well as symbols.
J. Symbols: As required by standards of the Americans with Disabilities Act.
1. Accessible restrooms and change room shall have handicapped accessibility symbol.
K. Edges: Beveled.
L. Plaque Finish: Suede.
M. Frames: None.
N. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard color selection.
O. Approved Signage Fabricators:
1. HC200 ADA System by Best Manufacturing Sign Systems, Montrose, CO, (800) 235-2378,
as basis for design.
2. ABC Sign Works Inc., Fort Collins, CO, (970) 223-9211.
3. Adcon Signs, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 484-3637.
4. Gardner Signs, Inc., Fort Collins, CO, (970) 482-3976.
5. Shaw Signs, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 493-6244.
6. Custom signage companies offering design services and fabrication capabilities meeting
the design intent of this Section are acceptable upon approval by the Architect prior to
10430 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
bidding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Installer shall inspect the surfaces, substrates and conditions under which the signage is to be
installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions which will prevent the successful
installation of the signage.
B. Exact copy for all address signage is to be verified with the City of Fort Collins Engineering
Department and coordinated with the Architect prior to fabrication.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Installation shall be by qualified signage fabrication company personnel in
accordance with accepted industry standards.
B. Building-mounted signage shall be installed in locations indicated on the Drawings and
coordinated with components of the building materials and finish systems.
3.03 COORDINATION WITH OWNER-FURNISHED SIGNAGE CONTRACTOR
A. General: Contractor shall coordinate and provide all preparatory work necessary for
installation of the internally-lighted cabinet sign(s) provided by separate contract.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
A. Building address signage shall be installed in the locations as required by local authorities.
Refer to paragraph 2.02 above for quantities.
B. Modular component exterior signage shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings
or as specified herein:
1. Restrooms.
2. Chase.
END OF SECTION
10520 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 10520
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish portable fire extinguishers, complete with surface-mounted wall brackets.
B. Furnish key access box(es) for use by the local fire department, complete with mounting
hardware.
C. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers".
2. UL Labels: Provide units that have been approved and listed by Underwriters
Laboratories.
3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. All fire protection specialties shall be furnished by one (1) manufacturer throughout the
project.
C. Certification: Supplier shall certify that the fire extinguisher type specified for each space or
building is appropriate for the type of materials and/or hazards anticipated to be encountered
in each space, particularly specialized areas such as electrical equipment rooms.
D. LEED Compliance: Not applicable.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data on all fire protection accessories and
specialties for approval by the Architect.
B. LEED Submittals: Not applicable.
1.04 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PORTABLE MULTIPURPOSE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Type: Units shall be 10-lb. multipurpose dry chemical pressurized type equipped with pressure
gauge and which do not need recharging, except after use.
1. Units shall be tested and approved by UL with a minimum 4A-60BC rating. UL rating
shall appear on extinguisher labels and be attached to, and a part of, fire extinguisher
units.
2. Ensure that units are properly charged prior to installation.
3. Instructions for repairs, maintenance and recharging shall be attached.
4. Refer to certification requirements specified in paragraph 1.02 above.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. MP Series by Larsen Manufacturing, Minneapolis, MN, (800) 527-7367, as basis of design.
2. JL Industries, Bloomington, MN, (800) 554-6077.
10520 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
3. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
acceptable.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER WALL BRACKETS
A. Type: Manufacturer’s standard mounting bracket, suited to fire extinguisher supplied, white
baked enamel finish, complete with anchorage devices.
1. Supply each bracket with one (1) fire extinguisher specified above.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. B Series by Larsen Manufacturing, Minneapolis, MN, (800) 527-7367, as basis of design.
2. JL Industries, Bloomington, MN, (800) 554-6077.
3. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
acceptable.
2.03 KEY ACCESS BOX
A. Furnish fully-recessed, heavy-duty key access box, complete with all mounting hardware, as
required by the governing fire authority, located as shown on the Drawings.
1. Series 3200 Knox-Box, manufactured by the Knox Company, Newport Beach, CA, (714)
650-2885, or equal approved by the agency with jurisdiction.
B. Quantity: One (1).
C. Owner shall furnish a facility master key for use by the fire department.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrates and conditions under which the fire protection specialties
are to be installed and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Contractor shall field verify dimensions and conditions governing the work of this Section.
Ensure that openings for recessed or semi-recessed cabinets or accessories are properly sized
and located.
C. Ensure that blocking in walls for semi-recessed and surface-mounted specialties is properly
installed.
D. Ensure that recessed wall cavities for cabinets to be installed into fire-rated wall assemblies
have been properly constructed and lined with fire-rated gypsum wallboard.
E. Verify servicing, charging and tagging of all fire extinguishers.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire protection accessories where shown on the Drawings and in accordance
with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Securely fasten all
components in position, square and plumb, in accordance with recognized industry practices.
B. Install multipurpose extinguishers in locations as shown on the Drawings or as required to
comply with governing regulations.
C. Install fire extinguishers and/or cabinets at mounting height to comply with handicapped
accessibility requirements:
1. Cabinet: 48" to centerline of handle.
D. Install key access box in location(s) as shown on the Drawings and at mounting height to comply
with requirements of the governing fire department:
1. Knox-Box: 6'-0" to centerline of access door, or as required by the governing fire
authority.
END OF SECTION
10800 - 1
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install stainless steel, commercial quality toilet, bath and janitorial accessories
and associated hardware.
B. Furnish electric hand dryers.
C. Installation of Owner-furnished toilet and bath accessories.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01015, LEED Requirements.
2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal.
3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry.
4. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals: Sheet steel toilet partitions.
5. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Framing of rough openings and blocking.
6. Section 08800, Glazing: Mirrors.
7. Section 09110, Non-Load Bearing Metal Framing: Framing of rough openings and
blocking.
8. Section 09310, Ceramic Tile.
9. Division 15, Mechanical.
1.02 RELATED WORK FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A. Certain toilet accessories shall be furnished by the Owner for installation by the Contractor as
scheduled in this Section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
1. ASTM A167: Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
2. ASTM A366: Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets, Commercial Quality.
3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any
jurisdiction with authority over this Project.
B. Accessory lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer throughout the project.
C. LEED Compliance: Refer to Section 01015 for submittal and documentation requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product list and data sheets indicating materials,
components, finishes and method of installation.
B. Samples: Provide one (1) sample of representative accessory specified herein, upon request by
the Architect. Sample will be returned upon approval.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or other documentation from material
manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer
recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having
recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to
receive them.
10800 - 2
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
B. Pack accessories individually in a manner to protect accessory and its finish.
C. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage during installation of the
work of this Section.
D. Owner-Furnished Accessories: Contractor shall receive, store and protect the accessories
furnished by the Owner.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty for all accessories covering
defects in materials and workmanship.
B. Electric Hand Dryers (Fastaire): Provide manufacturer's 3-year written warranty covering
defects in materials and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A. Type: Surface-mounted or semi-recessed construction, commercial quality accessories, as
scheduled in paragraph 2.02.
B. Stainless Steel or Metal Components:
1. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, cold-rolled stretcher leveled, 1.25 oz./sq. ft. galvanized
coating.
2. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, commercial grade, 22-gage.
3. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, commercial grade, seamless welded.
4. Brass: Solid brass alloy.
C. Anchorage and Attachment Devices:
1. Adhesive: Epoxy-type contact cement.
2. Fasteners, Screws and Bolts: Hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel.
3. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead or rubber as recommended by manufacturer for
component and substrate.
4. Anchor Plates: Steel anchor plates as recommended by manufacturer for secure
installation.
D. Fabrication:
1. Weld and grind smooth all joints of fabricated components.
2. Form exposed surfaces from one (1) sheet of stock, free of joints.
3. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes.
4. Form surfaces flat and without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or
dents.
5. Back-prime components where accessories will be in contact with dissimilar building
finishes to prevent electrolysis.
6. Hot-dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.
7. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
E. Keying: Key all new accessories together.
F. Finishes: Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin finish.
G. Mounting: Concealed-screw mounting, unless otherwise indicated. Surface-mounted type,
unless scheduled as semi-recessed.
H. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
I. Approved Manufacturers:
1. General: Accessory lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer
throughout the project, at least to the extent scheduled. Deviations from consistency
of one manufacturer are only acceptable when available designs are not satisfactory.
2. Commercial Accessories: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., N. Hollywood, CA, (818)
982-9600, and represented locally in Denver, CO, (303) 429-0133, as basis of design.
3. Bradley Corporation, Menomonee Falls, WI, (414) 354-0100.
4. American Specialties, Inc., Yonkers, NY, (914) 476-9000.
10800 - 3
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
5. A&J Washroom Accessories, New Windsor, NY, (914) 562-3332.
6. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (Gamco), Durant, OK, (800) 451-5766.
7. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance, design and
appearance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
2.02 ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS
A. General: Fully-recessed type, porcelain enameled steel housing, U.L.-listed, 115V, 20 amp,
2300 watts, 50/60 Hz.
B. Operation: Manual push-button.
C. Drying Cycle: 30 seconds.
D. Features:
1. Fixed nozzle.
2. Provide ground fault interrupter type (GFI) where required by mounting location and
governing codes.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard porcelain enamel, with stainless steel nozzle, push button and
trims.
F. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors.
G. LEED Design Criteria:
1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor
to provide information on recycled content.
2. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally manufactured products, in compliance with Section 01015.
3. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide
information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with
Section 01015.
H. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Model RA-5, manual operation, by World Dryer, Berkeley, IL, (800) 449-6950. No
exceptions.
2.03 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES
A. Grab Bars, as basis of design:
1. 3-Piece Horizontal and Vertical at HC Accessible Toilet Compartments: Bobrick B-6206
x 18", 36" and 42" to 48" lengths with peened gripping surfaces, concealed mounting, 1-
1/2" diameter.
B. Toilet Paper Dispensers/Holders: Furnished by Owner; installed by Contractor.
C. Mirrors: Bobrick B-1556 surface-mounted sheet stainless steel, 24" x 36" unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings, with mounting screws.
D. Feminine Hygiene Accessories, as basis of design:
1. Feminine Napkin Disposal: Bobrick B-254 surface-mounted disposals with concealed
mounting.
E. Mop and Broom Holders: Bobrick B-223 surface-mounted holder, 24" long with three (3)
holders.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to the job site at appropriate time for building into the
work. Provide templates and rough-in measurements to the Contractor as required.
B. Before starting work, notify the Contractor in writing of any conflicts detrimental to the
installation or operation of the accessories.
C. Ensure that cutouts in specified toilet partitions for thru-partition mounted accessories have
been properly located and sized. Provide templates and rough-in dimensions to the toilet
partition manufacturer.
D. Coordinate exact location of accessories with the Architect as necessary.
10800 - 4
Rolland Moore Playground Restroom
100% Construction Documents
E. Ensure that electrical conduit has been properly located and installed to location(s) of electric
hand dryers.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. General: Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations.
B. Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A. Install Owner-furnished toilet and bath accessories as scheduled on the Drawings or specified
herein, including but not limited to:
1. Surface-mounted toilet paper holders.
3.04 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Install accessories in public restrooms at mounting heights to comply with American National
Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) publication A117.1-2003 and the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA), 1990, for handicapped accessible accessories:
1. Mounting Heights (above finished floor):
a. Horizontal Grab Bars, Toilet Compartments: 33"-36".
b. Vertical Grab Bars, Toilet Compartments: 39"-41" from wall and finished floor.
c. Grab Bars, Showers: 33"-36".
d. Toilet Paper Dispensers: 20" to centerline of roller. Verify clearances with
grab bars.
e. Paper Towel Waste Receptacles: 42" to 46" to top of unit.
f. Mirrors: 38" to bottom edge, or as shown on the Drawings.
g. Electric Hand Dryers: 48" maximum to operating device.
B. Balance of accessories not located in handicapped accessible areas to be mounted at
manufacturer's recommended height. Comply with all governing regulations.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Quantities are the responsibility of the Contractor. Refer to the Drawings for locations.
B. Women's Restroom #101:
1. Grab bars, 3-piece, as shown on the Drawings.
2. Toilet Paper Holders: One (1) multi-roll holder per toilet compartment.
3. Feminine Napkin Disposal: One (1) disposal per toilet compartment.
4. Mirror.
C. Men's Restroom #102:
1. Grab bars, 3-piece, as shown on the Drawings.
2. Toilet Paper Holders: One (1) multi-roll holder per toilet compartment.
3. Mirror.
D. Chase #103:
1. Mop and Broom Holder: One (1) per mop sink.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
15010 - 1
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
SECTION 15010
MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and the applicable provi-
sions of General Requirements are hereby adopted and made part of Division
15, Mechanical Work.
B. The Mechanical Drawings and the Division 15 sections listed below constitute
the Mechanical Construction portion of this project.
15010 Mechanical Special Conditions
15050 Materials and Methods
15250 Mechanical Systems Insulation
15440 Plumbing
15850 Heating and Ventilating
15950 Automatic Temperature Control
15990 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
C. Where "Project Manager" is used in this Specification, we mean that person so
designated by the Owner.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. These specifications are for the building plumbing, heating, ventilation, make-up
air, and temperature control systems only.
1.03 DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Contract drawings for mechanical work are in part diagrammatic, intended to
convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, ducts,
conduits, piping, and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and outlets.
Mechanical trades shall follow these drawings in laying out their work, consult
general construction drawings to familiarize themselves with all conditions
affecting their work, and shall verify spaces in which their work will be installed.
Coordinate work with other trades as job conditions reasonably require.
B. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and
arrangement, make such changes without extra cost to Owner.
C. The drawings are not intended to be scaled for roughing in measurements nor to
serve as shop drawings.
D. The installation details, instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer of
the product used, modified, to obtain the best end result shall form the basis of
installation of the products for usage on this project except where definite and
specific instructions are set forth therein or details are shown on plans.
15010 - 2
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
1.04 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A. Shop Drawings must be submitted for the following equipment:
1. Valves
2. Insulation
3. Plumbing Piping
4. Plumbing Fixtures
5. Wall Hydrants
6. Dampers
7. Exhaust Fans
8. Louvers
9. Fan-coil & Unit Heaters
10. Temperature Controls
11. All items followed by '*'
B. Shop Drawings must first be checked by the Contractor for space conformance
and for performance characteristics established by Plans and/or Specifications,
and so stamped. Contractor's stamp shall include name and address of Contrac-
tor, specification paragraph, item designation and the following statement:
"Item(s) has (have) been checked for compliance with specification requirements
and space limitations and will meet these conditions; checked by; Date."
1. Shop Drawings not stamped as specified will be returned to the
Contractor without action.
2. Contractor must submit a minimum of 5 sets of complete drawings to
Engineer.
3. Alternately, Contractor shall have the option of submitting 1 compete set
of electronic shop drawings to the Engineer for review.
1.05 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A. Materials or products specified by name of manufacturer, brand, trade name, or
catalog reference, shall be furnished under the contract unless changed by an
Addendum or a Contract Modification. Where two or more materials are named,
the choice of these shall be optional with the Contractor.
B. Prior to award of the Contract, interested parties may request approval of substi-
tute materials. Such request shall be made in writing and be delivered to the
Engineer no later than 6 days (excluding Sundays and holidays) prior to date and
time of receipt of bids. All substitutions approved will be listed in an Addendum.
One set of specific detailed technical data for each item shall be delivered to the
Engineer.
C. See Section 01030, Alternates and Basic Section 01600, Material and
Equipment, for Alternates and Substitutions.
D. After the award of the Contract, any request for a substitution must be made in
writing by the Contractor (not material supplier or subcontractor). Such request
shall state the name of the product specified, the name of the product proposed
for substitution, the reason for requesting the substitution, and any change in
Contract Amount resulting from the substitution. No such substitution shall be
made until an appropriate Contract Modification has been issued and approved
by the Engineer and the Owner.
15010 - 3
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
E. The cost of any changes to the work of other trades and the work of the
submitting Contractor as a result of use of the substitution materials or
equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor submitting such materials
or equipment.
1.06 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, AND CODES
A. All work shall be executed in accordance with the following codes applicable to
the trade affected and be subject to the inspection of these departments:
1. 2009 International Building Code
2. 2009 International Energy Conservation Code
3. 2009 International Plumbing Code
4. 2009 International Mechanical Code
5. All Local, State, and other attending codes, rules, regulations, and
amendments.
B. Obtain all permits and licenses required for work performed under Division 15
and pay all fees in connection with same.
C. Where work required by the drawings and specifications is above the standard
required by local regulations, it shall be done as shown and/or specified.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials, apparatus and equipment for the work shall be new and shall be of
first class quality, presently being manufactured. Absolutely NO "close-out" type
materials, apparatus or equipment shall be allowed. All materials, apparatus and
equipment shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every
detail, and shall be selected and arranged to fit properly into the allotted space
allowing proper room for maintenance.
1.08 TESTS
A. Tests shall be performed on the systems specified herein. Any one or all of the
systems listed herein may be provided. See Drawings and Specification Section
to determine which systems are to be provided. Tests shall be repeated until
each system is proven acceptable. All tests shall be made in the presence of the
Engineer and/or the Owners. A letter must be obtained by the Contractor and be
filed with the Engineer's Office, if the tests were witnessed by the Owner. Where
required, perform such tests in the presence of local or state building inspection
officials.
B. GENERAL
1. The pipe systems shall be tested to assure they are installed leak tight
and structurally safe for the intended purpose.
2. Cleaning and flushing tests and approvals shall be completed before
performing pipe system tests to eliminate retesting.
3. If the pipe tests fail, the pipe system shall be repaired and retested.
4. The installing supervisor shall confirm the safe test pressure for vessels,
equipment and accessories in the pipe system from drawings,
specifications, or name plate data.
5. Notify the Owner's Project Manager 24 hours in advance of each test.
15010 - 4
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
C. NEW SYSTEM TEST
1. Instruments, vessels, equipment and accessories which cannot
withstand the test pressure required of attached piping shall be isolated
from the piping. Remove or block and vent direct operated or self-
contained regulators. Each part of a pipe system shall be tested, divided
as indicated, for the time specified for the given class of test.
2. Safety valves, relief valves, and rupture discs shall be removed during
the pipe system test and reinstalled after the test. New gaskets shall be
used when reinstalling all flanged items. Do not change spring settings
or make inoperative any safety and relief valves, except valves designed
to be pinned or yoked. Normally closed control valves shall be opened
before test.
3. Piping and vessels shall be vented when draining them to prevent their
collapse by vacuum.
4. The pipe system installer shall provide all necessary connections, vents
and drains to test and drain the system completely.
5. Allowance shall be made by the Project Manager for variations of pres-
sure and volume due to temperature changes in determining satisfactory
maintained test pressure.
6. The Project Manager shall check the test pressure at the beginning and
end of each test before acceptance of the system.
7. Pipe systems shall be tested and accepted before insulation, paint, or
other covering or coating is applied. The only exceptions are for those
parts, including vessels, which have been painted, covered or coated,
and have had previous certification tests.
8. The test shall be a hydrostatic test, or as otherwise specified.
D. TEST PRESSURES
1. The final test pressure shall be as follows:
a. 125 psig for domestic water systems
b. 12 ft. of water head or 5 psig air pressure held for 30 minutes for
waste and vent systems.
2. Domestic Water Systems
a. An initial test pressure of 24 psig shall be applied and a visual
inspection of the piping system conducted for leaks. The pressure
shall then be raised to .75 times the design pressure and rechecked
for leaks, after which the final test pressure shall be applied and a
final inspection of the piping system performed.
b. Clean domestic water shall be used as the test medium.
c. Trapped air shall be removed.
d. A test gauge with a minimum 4 1/2" diameter dial and a test pressure
reading between 1/2 to 3/4 of full scale shall be used. Test gauges
approved by the inspector shall be used.
e. The final test pressure shall be held for 4 hours, then visually
inspected for leaks. Pressure loss during the 4 hour test period may
be cause for rejection of the system.
f. Retesting Retest piping failing initial tests following correction of
defective work. Requirements of initial tests shall apply.
15010 - 5
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
3. Final Test
a. After final connections to the existing system are made and prior to
application of insulation, a final test shall be made of the complete
new system.
b. The test shall be visual inspection in normal service test.
c. Systems to be tested - ALL piping systems.
d. The test pressure shall be the working pressure as a minimum or as
specified.
e. The test medium shall be the system's working fluid, or as specified.
f. Trapped air shall be removed.
g. Piping shall be visually inspected for leaks.
E. REPORT
1. The Report shall contain the following and be submitted within 24 hours
of each test:
a. Date, time and place of test
b. Duration of test
c. Person responsible for testing
d. Results of test
e. Action taken to correct deficiency
f. Outside dry bulb temperature Inside dry bulb temperature
g. Specific section of piping tested
2. The Report shall be required for final payment.
3. Notify the Project Manager after successful testing.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. All systems shall be warranted for one (1) year after Owner occupancy in
accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, etc. of
the contract.
B. In addition, the Contractor is hereby forewarned that expansive soils may exist in
the construction area. Any slab heave and resulting damage during the above
warranty period attributable to moisture from any leaking water, sewer, or storm
drainage piping installed under this Contract shall be corrected at no cost to the
Owner. Restore structure and repair all damage.
C. All lubrication, filter changes, and normal maintenance shall be the responsibility
of the Owner.
1.10 START-UP
A. At a time set by the Contractor and agreed to by Owner, arrange to place
equipment in operation and have available at that time, if required,
representatives of the manufacturer of equipment to assist in starting equipment,
to make necessary adjustments to equipment, and to prove satisfactory
operation prior to turning facility over to Owner.
B. Any irregularities, faulty equipment, etc., shall be repaired or replaced as re-
quired prior to acceptance.
15010 - 6
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
C. Run operating test for (3) 8 hour periods and submit test data for approval.
D. All equipment shall be freshly oiled, cleaned, filters changed with clean media
and installation completely finished prior to acceptance.
1.11 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prepare three (3) typed portfolios with complete sets of high quality copies of
Shop Drawings used in the erection of mechanical system. Each piece of
equipment shall have information on installation, testing, cleaning, and
maintenance instructions, list of materials for maintenance, parts list, wiring
diagrams, and name and address of authorized service organization, with 24
hour phone number. List shall be alphabetized, within each category.
B. Complete manuals shall also include "As Built" temperature control drawings,
and final balance report.
C. Include operating instructions for complete system, including emergency
procedures for fire or failure of major equipment, normal starting, operating and
shut down, and long term shut down.
D. Include maintenance instructions, identified equipment lists, proper lubricants
and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment, necessary cleaning,
replacement and/or adjustment schedule.
E. Information shall be folded, if necessary, and included in 8-1/2" x 11" hard cover,
indexed, loose-leaf 3 ring binders. Multiple binders shall be used if required to
contain materials. All material shall be properly identified with job name, date,
name and address of Contractor, Architect, and Engineer.
F. Portfolios shall be submitted to the Engineer for review of material and
completeness, and when approved by Engineer, portfolios will be turned over to
the Owner.
G. Where indicated in the specification, provide the services of a factory trained
representative to instruct the Owner's authorized personnel in the operation,
control, and maintenance of equipment. Contractor shall instruct Owner's Project
Manager and Maintenance Supervisor in the operation and maintenance of all
other equipment and systems, using the O & M Manual as a guide, including
paragraph C above. Final payment will not be made until this is done to the
Owner's satisfaction.
1.12 PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. All sheaves, belts, gears, couplings, and moving parts are to be protected by
approved permanent guards, casings, or railings.
1.13 PROTECTIVE COVERING FOR EQUIPMENT
A. Provide covering and shielding for all equipment (including open-ended piping
and ductwork) provided under Division 15 and equipment furnished by Owner for
installation under Division 15 to protect from mortar, paint, debris, etc., during
construction. A polyethylene covering tied securely around the equipment will be
acceptable for this purpose.
15010 - 7
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
1.14 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting from Mechanical Con-
tractor's work or operations, leaving the job and equipment in a clean condition.
All existing areas in which work is performed shall be cleaned and restored to
their original condition upon completion of the project.
B. Air surfaces of all coils, fans, air units, air filters, etc., shall be wiped clean or
washed if required. All plumbing fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned of all for-
eign matter, including stickers. Clean all items furnished, such as motors, etc.,
leaving the entire installation in a first-class condition.
C. Equipment and materials provided under Division 15 will be painted by the
General Contractor except where specified otherwise. However, any mechanical
equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish
coats of paint shall be restored to the original condition and appearance prior to
application of finish paint.
1.15 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing to
make arrangements for a final inspection.
B. After the final inspection is made, the Contractor will receive a list of items
requiring adjustment, correction, replacement or completion.
C. The Contractor shall comply completely with all the listed requirements within
thirty (30) days of receipt of list. Should the Contractor fail to perform within this
time limit, the Engineer and/or Owner reserves the right to have the work
completed by others and the cost deducted from the contract price.
D. The Contractor shall initial and date each item as completed and return copy to
Engineer prior to re-inspection.
1.16 EXISTING OUTSIDE UTILITIES
A. Utility companies shall be contacted and advised of proposed work prior to the
start of excavation.
B. Active Utilities: When encountered in work, protect, brace, support existing active
sewers, gas, electric, other services where required for proper execution of work.
If existing active utilities are encountered that are not indicated and which
required relocation, make request in writing for determination. Do not proceed
with work until written directions are received. Do not prevent or disturb
operation of active services that are to remain.
C. Inactive Utilities: When encountered in work, remove, cap, or plug inactive
services. Notify utility companies or municipal agencies having jurisdiction;
protect or remove these services as directed.
15010 - 8
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
D. Interruption of Utilities: Where work makes temporary shutdown of services
unavoidable, shut down at night, or at such times as approved by Owner, which
will cause least interference with established operating routine. Arrange to work
continuously, including overtime, if required, to make necessary connections to
existing work.
1.17 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Brady
2. Seton
3. Westline Products
4. Approved Equal
B. Mark all pipe on both sides of partitions and slabs, at take-offs, valves,
connections to equipment and at intervals not exceeding 25 feet, identifying
markers, black on background color band; over 3" diameter pipe, 2" letters on 2
1/4" color band. Marker shall indicate domestic "CW", etc.
C. Show flow direction with arrows, immediately adjacent to all pipe identification
markers. 1 1/8" x 4 2/3" arrows shall be black on background color scheduled for
respective service.
D. Attach identifying markers and arrows on lower quadrant of overhead pipes, and
tape ends.
E. Application on soft insulation or chalky surface; binding tape shall be spirally
wrapped and overlapped around the circumference of the insulation for a
sufficient distance to mount identification markers and arrows to taped surface.
F. Pipe Identification List - Note: Any one or all of the following services may be
provided. See Drawings and Specifications Sections to determine which servic-
es are to be provided.
IDENTIFICATION BACKGROUND COLOR
Cold Water Green
Sanitary, Vent, Drain Green
Domestic Hot Water/Tempered Water Yellow
1.18 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all key equipment, fans, thermostats, controls, relays, dampers, etc.,
using Dymo Embossing Tape punched with M-3 Dymomite hand embossing tool.
Punch out 3/32" holes at each side of label and secure with Parker-Kalon self-
tapping screws in addition to adhesive.
B. Coordinate the location of all ceiling access panels for gypboard ceilings with the
General Contractor, so that there is access to each valve, volume damper, fire
damper or other equipment or temperature controls.
C. Familiarize the Owner's maintenance personnel with the locations of equipment
identified above.
15010 - 9
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
1.19 TEMPORARY HEATING OF BUILDING
A. Provide temporary smokeless unit heaters as required. Installation, maintenance,
and fuel cost for temporary heat shall be at the expense of this Contractor,
OR
B. As specified in the General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of
this Specification. Permanent heating system shall not be used for temporary
heat, without specific approval by the Owner in writing, during construction until
all walls are taped, textured, and ready for painting.
1.20 ASBESTOS
A. Products, equipment or materials that contain asbestos shall not be allowed in
the construction of the mechanical and plumbing systems on this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
15050 - 1
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
SECTION 15050
MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including references to applicable
provisions of the General Requirements, is hereby adopted and made part of this section of the
specifications.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Materials and methods specified herein apply to all sections under Division 15 of the
specifications. Intent of this section is to set forth common requirements and to avoid repetition
under each particular section. See drawings and/or Division 15 Specification sections to
determine which systems are to be provided.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect piping, fittings, valves, plumbing equipment, and HVAC equipment from moisture and dirt.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Provide pipe and fittings of type and materials scheduled herein, of quantities shown on the
drawings and as required to connect fixtures and equipment. All fittings shall have ANSI
tolerances and dimensions and have ASTM materials for conformance with piping below.
B. Provide standard weight IPS brass nipples and adapters where required between copper tubing
and fixtures. Steel or iron nipples are not permitted between copper lines and brass valves or
trim.
C. Joints: Joints in all copper domestic piping systems shall be made using 95/5 tin/antimony or
equal tensile strength solder that contains no lead. Engelhard "Silvabrite 100", Oatey "Safeflo" or
Canfield "Watersafe" are all acceptable. Use flux recommended by solder manufacturer.
Absolutely no lead containing solders or fluxes will be allowed in any portion of the work. The
Owner reserves the right to inspect solders, fluxes and joints. Any joint found containing lead
solder shall be cause for resoldering all joints made in all systems in the building.
D. Pipe and Fitting Schedule
1. Building sanitary sewer below grade.
a. Hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe and fittings, service weight, centrifugally spun,
ASTM A-74 and CISPI 301. Fittings cast iron hub and spigot. Pipe and fittings to
bear the mark of CISPI. Joints positive-seal elastomeric compression type
complying with ASTM-C564. Tyler Ty-Seal or equal.
b. Solid core Schedule 40 PVC DWV pipe and fittings with solvent welded joints.
ASTM D 1784.
15050 - 2
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
2. Soil, waste, and vent piping in building above ground.
a. Hubless cast iron, service weight, centrifugally spun per CISPI-301. Fittings
hubless cast iron. Joints - neoprene sleeve and stainless steel retaining band
with double screw connectors bearing the mark of NSF, installed per manufactur-
er's recommendations. CISPI-310, latest edition.
b. Solid core schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings ASTM D 1784 are allowable if the
material is rated for installation in a return air plenum. Joints shall be solvent
welded.
3. Domestic water (hot and cold water) in building above ground.
a. 3” and smaller: Piping shall be Type "L" hard drawn copper water tube, per
ASTM B88. Fittings wrought copper, solder joint, ASTM B75 and ANSI 16.22.
b. Except as otherwise specified elsewhere, Type "L" soft drawn copper may be
used adjacent to fixtures and equipment.
4. Water service and water in building underground.
a. Piping 2 1/2" and smaller, Type "K" soft drawn copper water tube ASTM B88.
Fittings, buried in ground, wrought copper, solder joint, ASTM B75 and ANSI
16.22. There shall be no buried fittings under the building.
5. Miscellaneous drain lines receiving condensate, etc.
a. Piping shall be Type "DWV" or “M” copper, fittings wrought copper, solder joint.
b. Schedule 40 PVC DWV with solvent welded joints in non-return air mechanical
chases only.
2.02 VALVES*
A. Provide valves in piping where indicated and provide shut-off valves in lines serving each piece
of equipment, including mixing valves, wall hydrants, sill cocks, pumps, water heaters, plumbing
fixtures, etc. Also isolate each major zone, building wing, loop, etc.
1. Ball valves shall be manufactured by Apollo, Nibco or Watts.
2. Check valves shall be manufactured by Stockham, Crane, Nibco, Watts, Jenkins,
Lunkenheimer, Milwaukee, Powell or Walworth.
3. Valves by other manufacturers must have prior approval.
B. Valve Schedule.
1. Shut-off valves for domestic water shall be full flow ball valves, rated at 600 psig WOG.
a. Apollo 77............Bronze Threaded or Soldered Ball Valve
b. Nibco 585...........Bronze Threaded or Soldered Ball Valve
c. Watts LBF6080/LBF6081...Bronze Threaded or Soldered Ball Valve.
2. Where ball valves are used in insulated piping, handle extensions shall be provided.
Extension shall be manufactured as an option for the valve furnished and shall extend
the handle a minimum of 1/4" beyond the insulation jacket.
3. Swing check valves shall be bronze with regrindable seat and renewable disc, Class 125.
15050 - 3
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
a. Stockham Fig. Number:
B-309......Bronze Soldered End
B-319......Bronze Threaded End
b. Or approved equal
4. Drain valves shall have 3/4" hose threaded adapter with cap, rated at 600psig WOG, and
may be globe type with composition disc or ball type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 UNIONS
A. Make connections at each piece of equipment with unions located for quick/easy disconnect for
maintenance. Provide unions on:
1. Equipment
2. Meters
3. Tanks
B. Use the same materials and finish as the piping system.
C. Use dielectric unions or flanges where copper or brass piping is connected to ferrous piping or
equipment. Epco Model FX, FB, EA. (All junctions of dissimilar metals).
D. Unions and flanges are not required at equipment where flanged valves, strainers, control valves,
etc., are used.
E. Omit unions and flanges in straight pipe runs or in concealed locations, except for flanged valve
applications.
F. Union Schedule:
1. Copper Piping
a. All pipe sizes: Copper, ground joint union. Chase 402, Mueller WC407.
3.02 PIPE AND DUCT SLEEVES
A. Provide sleeves for all pipes and ducts passing through floors, roofs, walls, and full height
partitions. Ducts passing through gypboard walls do not require sleeves.
B. For sleeves passing through fire rated walls/floors, fill void with fire stop material.
C. At points where a duct passes through a fire rated wall/floor and a fire damper is being installed,
the duct sleeve can be eliminated.
D. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Floor Sleeves in Exposed Areas: Schedule 40 PVC pipe, reamed, extending 2" above
floor in equipment rooms and wet areas and 1/4" above the floor in all other locations.
2. Masonry Wall Sleeves: Schedule 40 PVC pipe reamed, and finished flush with wall.
3. Roof Sleeves and Floor Sleeves in Concealed Locations (as in chases)--Schedule 40
PVC.
15050 - 4
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
4. Make pipe sleeves 1/2" larger inside diameter than the outside diameter of the pipe or
pipe insulation, where insulated. Fabricate sleeves from new materials, with ends cut
square.
5. Floor Sleeves, where water is to be kept out--fill with graphite packing and caulking
compound.
E. Sealing of all other sleeves shall be as specified under Section for Mechanical Systems
Insulation.
F. Sleeve Flashing, Caulking. For sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe,
except as otherwise specified herein, provide 16 oz. soft sheet copper or 4 pound lead per
square foot flashing extending 9" beyond sleeve in all directions; secure to waterproofing or lead
safe; turn down flashing into space between pipe and sleeve, insert oakum gasket, pour lead,
caulk water tight. Over air plenums caulk all sleeves with polysulfite base sealing compound
conforming to ASA A116.1 (Thiokol).
1. Where sleeves are indicated with flashing flanges provide Josam, or equal, 26420 series
threaded riser sleeve with anchor lugs, flashing flange, steel pipe extensions.
3.03 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES
A. Plates shall be installed on all exposed pipe passing through walls, floors, or ceilings. Plates
shall be as manufactured by Ritter Pattern and Casting Company, 120 Walker Street, New York,
New York 10013, or approved equal, chrome plated steel plates with set screw and concealed
hinge. Cut plates to fit flush at close-spaced piping locations.
3.04 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS*
A. Provide pipe hangers, supports, anchors, and guides as specified herein and/or indicated,
conforming to manufacturer's standardization society specification SP-69. Locate at changes in
direction and at concentrated loads. Hanger design shall permit vertical adjustment and lateral
movement to allow pipe expansion. Double nut hangers where piping is subject to water
hammer, i.e. near flush valves and solenoid valves.
B. Bear hot piping directly on hangers or on insulation shields and cold piping on insulation, shielded
as described under article for insulation.
Provide pipe hangers of ample diameter for cold piping insulation and vapor barrier jacket.
C. Use carbon steel adjustable hangers as follows:
1. Steel and cast iron, 2 1/2" and larger. Grinnell Fig. 260, Fee and Mason Fig. 239, Elcen
Fig. 12.
2. Steel, plastic and cast iron, 2" and smaller. Grinnell Fig. 69, Fee and Mason Fig. 400,
Elcen Fig. 202.
3. Copper pipe 2" and smaller. Grinnell Fig. CT-69, Fee and Mason Fig. 389, Elcen Fig.
389.
D. Three or more pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers using 2 clevis hangers and a capped
pipe cross member. Isolate copper pipe from bearing on the cross member with an electrically
insulating material.
1. Where indicated trapeze hangers shall be "Unistrut" or equal, double channel with drop
rods. Where pipes are indicated to be supported from the underside of trapeze hanger
15050 - 5
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
provide "Unistrut" or equal speed clamps. Isolate copper pipe from cross member same
as specified above.
E. Support horizontal steel piping per SP-69 or as follows, whichever is more stringent:
Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing
Up to 1 1/4" 3/8" 8 ft.
1 1/2” to 3 1/2" 1/2" 8 ft.
4” & 5" 5/8" 12 ft.
6” 3/4” 12 ft.
F. Support horizontal copper piping per SP-69 or as follows, whichever is more stringent:
Nom. Tubing Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing
Up to 1 1/2" 3/8" 6 ft.
2” to 2 1/2" 3/8" 8 ft.
3” 1/2” 9 ft.
G. Support horizontal hub and spigot pipe at every hub, 10 ft. max. spacing.
H. Support horizontal hubless cast iron pipe at every joint and at each horizontal branch connection.
Sway brace to prevent shear.
I. Support plastic pipe every 4 ft.
J. Support vertical piping as follows:
1. Steel--Every other floor
2. Cast iron and Copper--Every floor, 10 ft. max. intervals
K. Hanging from one pipe to another is prohibited.
L. Support piping racked on walls with Uni-strut hangers and channel supports or equal. Copper
piping shall be insulated from contact with the steel channels.
3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are nominal pipe sizes, not outside diameters. Use
straight round pipe reamed to full size after cutting. Remove all chips from reaming.
2. Arrange pipe in group runs where feasible. Coordinate locations with all trades. Avoid
traps in piping.
3. The right is reserved to authorize minor changes in pipe location to avoid conflicts with
other trades at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Waste and Vent Piping
1. All waste and vent piping shall be properly pitched at 1/4 inch to the foot (or 2%)
minimum for 3" and smaller pipe and 1/8 inch (or 1%) minimum for 4 inch and larger,
unless otherwise indicated. Piping shall be properly supported so that it will not sag and
form pockets. Exceptions must be approved in writing by the Engineer, Owner and by
the Administrative Authority.
2. The manufacturer's recommendations shall be carefully followed when installing pipe
using neoprene gasketed joints.
15050 - 6
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
3. Locate vertical hubs of underground piping below partition walls for concealment. In
locations where hubs will project beyond finish partition wall, set hubs 1" below finished
floor.
C. Domestic Water Distribution Piping
1. All unnecessary traps in circulating lines shall be avoided.
3.06 DISINFECTING AND SPECIAL CLEANING
A. Domestic Water Systems
1. General: All new potable water systems shall be cleaned as herein specified prior to
testing or application of insulation. Testing must be witnessed by the State or County
Department of Health personnel and report filed with the Owner to receive final payment.
2. Notification: Notify State or County Department of Health in writing, 48 hours in advance
of the beginning of the cleaning process.
3. Witness: The cleaning process will not be deemed acceptable unless witnessed and
approved by the State or County Department of Health's representative.
4. Procedure: Comply with City of Fort Collins standards, Larimer County, or Colorado
State Department of Health requirements, whichever is more stringent.
5. Report: The report shall contain the following and be submitted to the Owner’s Project
Manager within 24 hours of the cleaning:
- Date, time and place of cleaning
- Duration
- Person responsible
- Solutions concentration and temperature
- Signature of County or State Department of Health representative
- Results
6. The report and its timely submission shall be required for final payment.
3.07 THERMOMETERS*
A. Furnish and install thermometers in pipe lines and equipment as scheduled and/or indicated.
Thermometers shall be Ashcroft, Weiss, Trerice, or approved equal. Nine inch scale with
separable socket, cast aluminum case, adjustable industrial type complete with thermometer
wells. Scale range shall be 30°F to 240°F with 2 degree divisions.
B. Thermometer installation will not be accepted unless they can be easily read by an operator
standing on the floor.
C. Install one thermometer in the domestic water heater hot water discharge pipe.
3.08 ELECTRICAL
A. Electric Motors.
1. Provide electric motors with all equipment furnished and installed under Division 15,
unless specified otherwise.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers
a. G.E.
b. U.S. Motors
c. MagneTek (Century)
15050 - 7
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
3. Include the following features on all motors:
a. Ball bearings with lube lines extended to accessible location.
b. Cast iron or steel base with provision for slide adjustment unless directed
otherwise.
c. Conduit box with ample room for lead terminal connections.
d. Numbered leads of ample length for connection, terminating in the conduit box.
e. Permanently stamped nameplate.
f. Single speed 1750 RPM, unless specified otherwise.
g. Rated for continuous duty in ambient not exceeding 40 degrees C.
4. All motor wiring and windings shall be copper.
5. Power Factor
a. Motors shall have a labeled power factor, at name plate rating and rated voltage,
of not less than 85%. If a motor draws less than 1000 watts labeled rating, it is
excluded from the 85% P.F. requirement. If, through motor or design (i.e. RPM
less than 1200), an 85% power factor is not available, the supplier of that motor
shall furnish power factor correction components capable of correcting that non-
conforming motor to 90% or better.
6. Horsepower ratings -- in V-belt drive applications, size motor for 120 percent of brake
horsepower requirement, or scheduled horsepower, whichever is greater.
7. Single phase motors-- furnish for all applications 1/6 through 3/4 HP, single phase,
capacitor start, capacitor run, dripproof, thermally protected motors, unless indicated
otherwise, for 120 volt 60 hertz current.
B. Unit manufacturer shall provide belt guard.
C. Motor starters will be provided under Division 15, Mechanical, as specified below.
1. Starters shall be across-the-line, with manual reset, trip-free thermal overload relay in
each ungrounded conductor, necessary auxiliary contacts, proper NEMA Standard
enclosure for location, and hand-off-automatic switches in cover. Provide manual motor
starters for locally controlled single phase motors. For single phase motors which are
interlocked with external devices provide H-O-A magnetic starters or relay and switch
rated at locked rotor motor amps and manual starter. Starters, except those furnished
mounted in or on equipment, shall be by the same one of the following manufacturers:
a. Allen-Bradley
b. Cutler Hammer
c. Square D
D. Electrical wiring, except where otherwise specified in Division 15, will be provided under Division
16, Electrical Work.
1. Electrical wiring provided under Division 15 of the Specifications shall conform to all
applicable requirements of Division 16, Electrical Work.
2. Control Wiring: Consists of wiring in pilot circuits of contactors, starters, relays, etc., and
wiring for valve and damper operators.
3. For single-phase devices where power current passes through controller and device,
wiring shall be considered power wiring.
E. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls for Division 15 equipment
shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule:
15050 - 8
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
Set In Power Control
Furnished Place Wiring Wiring
Under Under Under Under
ITEM Division Division Division Division
Equipment Motors 15 15 16 -
Starters/Contactors:
Separate 15 16 16 15
Factory Mounted
and Wired 15 15 16 15
Pushbutton Stations:
Separate 15 16 - 15
In Starter Enclosure 15 16 - 15
Disconnect Switches 16 16 16 -
Thermal Overload Switches 16 16 16 -
Control Relays 15 15 - 15
Control Transformers 15 16 16 15
Operating Switches 16 16 16 -
Line Voltage Thermostat 15 15 - 15
Low Voltage Thermostat 15 15 - 15
Sub-Base Low Voltage 15 15 - 15
Time Switches Not In
Control Panel 15 15 16 15
Thermostat and Controls
Integral with Equipment
of Directly Attached to
Ducts, Pipes, etc. 15 15 - 15
Equipment in Temperature
Control Panels 15 15 - 15
Valve Motors, Damper
Motors, Solenoid Valves,
etc. 15 15 - 15
Control Circuit Outlets 16 16 16 -
Smoke Detectors Including
Relays for Fan Control 16 15 16 15
Equipment Interlocks 15 15 - 15
Note: Any one or all of the above devices may be provided. See Drawings and Specifications
Sections to determine which devices are to be provided.
15050 - 9
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
END OF SECTION
15250 - 1
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer-
ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050,
Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the
specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. The work involved in this section of the specification consists of furnishing all
labor, equipment, accessories and materials and in performing all operations
necessary for the installation of all insulation for the plumbing and duct systems,
and sealing of sleeves.
B. All insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled workmen
engaged in this type of work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS*
A. All insulations shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings not exceeding the fol-
lowing unless otherwise specified:
Flame Spread 25
Smoke Developed 50
B. Insulation on all cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used shall be
applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal (hangers on outside of insulation
jacket).
C. Support inserts for cold water piping shall be installed at all outside hanger
points. Inserts between the pipe and pipe hangers shall consist of wood or rigid
insulation sections of equal thickness of the pipe insulation.
D. Inserts shall be installed in a manner to completely support the pipe and not
crush the insulation or damage the vapor barrier.
E. Hangers, supports, anchors, etc., that are secured directly to cold surfaces must
be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.
2.02 MATERIAL APPROVAL CODE
A. Code I Fiberglass Pipe Insulation
1. Owens-Corning One or Two Piece Pipe Insulation
a. Fiberglass 25 ASJ - All service jacket
b. Fiberglass 25 ASJ - SSL - All service jacket
15250 - 2
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
2. Schuller Flame Safe Pipe Insulation
a. All purpose jacket - AP
b. All purpose jacket - AP self-sealing lap system
3. Certain-Teed Manson Fiberglass Pipe Insulation
a. All service jacket
b. All service jacket - self-sealing lap system
4. Or Equal by Knauf
5. Vapor barrier to be kraft paper reinforced foil with integral self-sealing
pressure sensitive adhesive longitudinal seam sealing strips. Insulation
maximum thermal conductivity shall be .25 at 75 deg. F per inch. No
staples shall be used.
B. Code II One Piece PVC Insulated Fitting Covers
1. Ceelco
2. Zeston
3. Perma-Jac
4. Proto LoSmoke
5. Or prior approved equal
C. Code VIII Elastomeric Pipe Insulation
1. Insulation shall not exceed the following fire hazard ratings:
Flame Spread 25
Smoke Developed (3/4") 225
2. For service - 40 degrees F. to 200 degrees F.
3. Armstrong FR Armaflex
4. Or Equal by IMCOA or Nomaco
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COLD PIPING
A. Domestic Cold Water: All piping in concealed and exposed areas shall be insu-
lated with fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jacket or grades mentioned in
Code I. Thickness shall conform to the following schedule:
Service & Size Insulation Thickness
Domestic Cold Water:
1” and smaller 1/2"
1-1/4” and larger 1"
B. Piping in cores of block wall may be insulated with Code VIII insulation, thick-
ness as above in paragraph 3.01.A.
C. Jackets and end laps shall be sealed with Chicago mastic 17-465, or equal,
applied to two surfaces or with self-sealing type lap system.
3.02 HOT PIPING
15250 - 3
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
A. All piping in concealed and exposed areas shall be insulated with fiberglass pipe
insulation with all service jacket of grades mentioned in Code I. Thickness shall
conform to the following schedule:
Service and Size Insulation Thickness
Domestic Hot Water/Tempered Water:
2” and smaller 1"
B. Piping in cores of block wall may be insulated with Code VIII insulation, thickness
as above.
C. Jackets and end laps shall be sealed with Chicago mastic 17-465, or equal,
applied to two surfaces or with self-sealing type lap system.
3.03 FITTINGS, VALVE BODIES
A. PVC insulated fitting covers as mentioned in Code II.
1. The pre-cut insulation shall be applied to the fitting to make a snug fit of
equal thickness against the adjoining pipe insulation. The fitting covers
shall be secured by vapor barrier adhesive.
2. On cold services all seam edges shall be additionally sealed with vapor
barrier adhesive.
3.04 SHIELDS
A. Provide sheet metal insulation shields at all hanger locations for cold services.
Form the shields to bear on the lower 1/3 periphery of the insulated pipe. Use 20
gauge sheet metal for pipes less than 4", 16 gauge for larger pipes. Comply with
the following table for shield length:
Pipe Size Length
4” and smaller 9"
6” to 10" 12"
3.05 SEALING OF SLEEVES
A. All sleeves for pipes, ductwork, etc., furnished under Division 15 of the specifi-
cations, penetrating floors, and walls and full height partitions shall be sealed in
accordance with the following:
1. All insulated services shall have the specified insulation terminated on
either side of sleeve. Services which require a vapor barrier jacket shall
have segment through sleeve insulated with calcium-silicate having a
minimum thickness same as specified for service. Entire void space
between inside of sleeve and outside of duct, pipe, and/or calcium- sili-
cate insulation shall be packed with fiber insulation, conforming to HHI-
521E Type 3 or HHI-558B Form A and having an ASTM fire class E-84
with fiber melt point in excess of 2000 deg. F., to a point 1/8 inch from
ends of pipe sleeve. After void is packed with fiber insulation, services
which are specified to be insulated shall have a section of insulation
installed on each side of sleeve, insulation to be fitted tight to sleeve
insulation. Balance of space in sleeve to be filled with non-hardening
15250 - 4
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
silicone conforming to TTS-00230 and of type which will allow 50 percent
movement in one direction.
3.06 DUCTWORK
A. External wrap (thermal):
1. Insulation: Fiberglass blanket, 1 lb. density, vapor barrier jacketed with 2"
tab. Jacket - laminated aluminum foil, glass reinforced kraft paper.
2. Application: Secure to metal leaving no voids at the edges, with strips of
insulation adhesive. Lap all joints 2", seal with lap adhesive and staple
6"on center. Seal over staple with matching tape patches. Further secure
the bottom side insulation on ducts over 24" wide with welded pins and
mechanical fasteners, not over 18" on center and seal over with tape
matching patches.
3. Do not install insulation over access panels.
B. Insulation shall be in accordance to the following schedule for new ducts:
Ductwork Insulation Insulation
Type Type Thickness
Supply External 1-1/2"
Outside Air External 1-1/2"
END OF SECTION
15440 - 1
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer-
ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050,
Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the
specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists
of performing all labor and furnishing of all material and equipment necessary to
install all complete systems listed below, including minor items obviously neces-
sary for complete and operating installation.
1. Sanitary Drainage System
2. Domestic Water System
3. Plumbing Fixtures
1.03 CONNECTIONS TO MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Make all domestic water, waste, vent, drain, etc., connections to all equipment in
his building whether or not such equipment is furnished under this section or un-
der other sections of this specification. This includes installation, furnishing piping
and shut-off valves on branches to and from each piece of equipment from mains
or branch mains.
1.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning:
1. At completion clean strainers, traps, aerators, and valves of debris, sand
and dirt. Thoroughly clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
B. Adjusting:
1. Adjust flush valves, faucets, and bubblers for proper flow, after cleaning
and flushing operations are accomplished.
1.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect fixtures and related components from damage before, during and after
installation to date of Final Acceptance or Owner move-in. Provide protective
coverings or other protection as required.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Supply two sets of faucet washers, o-rings, and other wearing parts for each fix-
ture type and turn over to Owner.
15440 - 2
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOOR DRAINS and CLEANOUTS*
A. Acceptable Manufactures:
1. Josam
2. JR Smith
3. Wade
4. Zurn
5. Prior Approved Equal
B. Floor Drains:
1. Floor drains shall be cast iron with double drainage flange, nickel-bronze
rim and strainer unless otherwise indicated, drain size as noted on the
plans. Provide clamping ring when installed in floors which have
waterproof membrane. Drains connected to cast iron soil pipe shall have
spigot outlets.
2. FD-1 Zurn ZN-415B (Restrooms and utility type rooms, in slab)
a. Floor drain with 6" diameter Type 'B' strainer and Zurn Z1000
cast iron deep seal P-trap.
C. Cleanouts (FCO, GCO, & WCO):
1. Inside caulk or spigot connections, bronze cleanout plug, straight
threaded with tapered shoulder and caulked lead seat.
2. Screwed pipe cleanouts - bronze pipe threaded plug with four raised
square lugs or counter sunk plug.
3. Floor cleanouts (FCO): frame and cover threaded for 1 1/2" vertical
adjustment, threads protected with shield to be removed when concrete
is set. Covers--nickel bronze round frame and cover, deep flange tractor
type. Extra heavy type in heavy traffic areas.
4. Wall cleanouts (WCO): square nickel bronze frame and cover with
minimum opening of 6" x 6".
5. Grade Cleanouts (GCO): cast iron cleanout with round, heavy duty
scoriated, non-tilt cast iron top, bronze pipe threaded plug, cleanout
ferrule, adjustable to finished grade level.
2.02 VENTS THRU ROOF
A. Do not install vents within two feet of roof edge, parapet or wall line of an "on-the-
roof structure."
B. Metal roof:
1. Flash vents through roof with galvanized roof jack with neoprene gasket
at neck.
2. Oakey 11853 or equal, no-caulk roof flashing, size as required.
2.03 SHOCK ABSORBERS (SA-1)*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
15440 - 3
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
1. Jay R. Smith
2. Josam
3. Wade
4. Zurn
5. Prior approved equal
B. Shock absorbers shall be the gas filled stainless steel bellows type, sized and in-
stalled per requirements of PDI-WH-201.
C. Shock absorbers shall be furnished and installed at all solenoids and other quick
closing valves and flush valves.
D. Each shock absorber shall have a line size shut-off ball valve for replacement.
2.04 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. A.O. Smith
2. Rheem
3. State
4. Prior approved equal
Provide where indicated, domestic water heater with capacities and characteris-
tics scheduled on plans.
B. Heater shall have ASHRAE 90.1b-1992 seal of approval, UL certified.
C. Tank shall be suitable for 150 PSI working pressure and shall be glass lined.
D. Assembly shall include P/T relief valve, magnesium anode rod, high limit cut off,
foam insulation, sheet metal jacket with baked enamel finish and drain valve.
E. 1 year limited warranty for commercial installation.
2.05 EXPANSION TANK – DOMESTIC HOT WATER*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. State
2. Amtrol
3. Bell & Gossett
4. A.O. Smith
5. Taco
6. Approved Equal.
B. Tank shall be designed for potable water systems. Tank shall be constructed of
steel with a maximum working pressure of 150 PSI and a maximum temperature
of 200oF.
C. Tank shall have an internal butyl diaphragm with a polymer lining or butyl bladder.
All internal parts must comply with FDA regulations and approvals.
D. Size as specified and as required for proper venting pressure or as scheduled on
plans.
15440 - 4
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
E. Domestic Hot Water Expansion Tank shall have a line size ball shut off valve in-
stalled for maintenance.
2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR (Reduced pressure)*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and models:
1. Watts Model 909, all sizes
2. Febco 825, 3/4" to 2"
3. Wilkins
4. Or prior approved equal
B. Shall be the reduced pressure type with atmospheric vent.
1. Bronze body and accessory construction and replaceable seats.
2. Bronze body ball valve test cocks and 1/4 turn ball valves on inlet and
outlet.
3. With bronze strainer, flanged adapter ends or unions, and air gap drain
fitting sized to fit unit. Pipe air gap drain fitting to floor drain.
2.07 HOSE BIB*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. J.R. Smith
2. Josam
3. Wade
4. Woodford
5. Zurn
6. Prior Approved Equal
B. Install hose bibs where indicated on the drawings.
C. HB-1 to be Woodford Model B74 backflow protected close coupled wall hydrant
with testable backflow preventer and loose key handle in bronze box with chrome
finish with loose key operable cover.
2.08 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Leonard
2. Symmons
3. Watts
4. Wilkins
5. Prior approved equal
B. A domestic water thermostatic mixing valve shall be provided on the domestic
hot water piping to all lavatories. Valve may be for individual or multiple fixture
applications as indicated on the plans.
C. Valve shall be ASSE 1070 listed.
D. Valve shall be of bronze body construction, adjustable outlet temperature, and
suitable for inlet temperatures up to 180 degrees F.
15440 - 5
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
E. Valve shall be initially set for 110 degrees F. discharge temperature.
F. Install in a location that is easily accessible for temperature adjustment,
maintenance and replacement.
G. TMV-1 to be Watts Series LFMMV, 3/4" size.
2.09 FWH-1 FREEZE PROOF WALL HYDRANT*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. J.R. Smith
2. Josam
3. Wade
4. Woodford
5. Zurn
6. Prior approved equal
B. Provide a freeze proof wall hydrant where indicated on the plans.
C. WH-1 to be Woodford B65 complying with ASSE 1019-B, with ¾” male hose
thread equipped vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011, listed with IAPMO.
2.10 JF-1 JUG FILLER*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Murdock
2. Most Dependable
3. Haws
4. Elkay
5. Stern-Williams
6. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide a wall mounted jug filler where indicated on the plans.
C. JF-1 to be Most Dependable WMSS. Provide shut-off and drain valve in Chase for
winterization.
2.11 LAV-1 COUNTERTOP MOUNT LAVATORY*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Elkay
2. Just
3. Kohler
4. Advance Tabco
5. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide a countertop mount sink where indicated on the plans.
C. LAV-1 to be Just CLF-14, type 304 stainless steel, 18 ga, with built-in overflow,
and one 1 ¼” faucet drilling. Provide with Just J-ADA-115-FS chrome plated 17
ga, 1 ¼” offset drain with flat chrome plated brass strainer and 1 ¼” 17 ga
15440 - 6
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
chrome plated brass tailpiece. Provide and install Just J-ADA-125 drain safety
cover.
D. Faucet to be Chicago 333-E2805-665PSHCP, self-closing vandal resistant push
button valve, 0.5 gpm.
2.12 UR-1 URINAL*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Acorn
2. Bradley
3. Willoughby
4. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide urinals where indicated on the plans.
C. Urinal to be Willoughby 1412-WO-BS-0.5-MT-WS-FVT wall mount washout uri-
nal with all welded 14 ga type 304 stainless steel construction, 0.5 GPF con-
sumption, ¾” back spud, satin finish, stainless steel beehive strainer, and an in-
tegral all welded type 304 stainless steel “P” trap with back 2” NPT connection.
D. Flush valve to be Sloan Royal 995-0.5-MBFW, concealed flush valve with back-
check, angle stop, vacuum breaker, elbow flush connection, vandal-proof ADA
rated hydraulically operated metal push button.
2.13 WC-1 WATER CLOSET (Handicapped)*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Acorn
2. Bradley
3. Willoughby
4. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide water closets where indicated on the plan.
C. Water Closet to be Acorn Model 2120-W-3-ULF(1.6 GPF)-FVBO-ADA-FVT-HS-
OFLC, Siphon Jet type, 16 gauge stainless steel, satin finish, floor mount, 4" floor
outlet, 1.5" back spud water inlet, 1.6 GPF, and hinged seat.
D. Flush valve to be Sloan Royal 952-1.6-MBFW, concealed flush valve with back-
check, angle stop, vacuum breaker, elbow flush connection, vandal-proof ADA
rated hydraulically operated metal push button.
2.14 MSB-1 MOP SERVICE BASIN*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Fiat
2. Zurn
3. Stern-Williams
4. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide mop service basins where indicated on the drawings.
15440 - 7
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
C. Mop service basin to be: Zurn Z1996-24, 24”x24”x10” molded high density compo-
site basin, PVC drain body, stainless steel dome strainer/lint basket, and 3” gas-
keted outlet connection. Provide with stainless steel bumper guards and one
stainless steel wall guard.
Faucet to be Zurn Z843M1 polished chrome-plated cast brass 8” service sink
faucet with quarter turn ceramic disc cartridges, integral service stops, and 6”
cast brass spout with chemical resistant atmospheric vacuum breaker, ¾” hose
threaded outlet, pail hook, and adjustable wall brace. Provide with lever handles.
2.15 DF-1 Drinking Fountain (Bi-level wall mounted, Handicapped)*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Murdock
2. Most Dependable
3. Haws
4. Elkay
5. Prior Approved Equal
B. Provide fountains where indicated on the drawings.
C. Fountain to be Haws Model 1119.14, 14 Ga. Stainless Steel. W/ vandal-resistant
bottom plates. Wall mount fountain with handicapped accessible bowl. Bowl
and mouth guard shall be stainless steel. With drain, bubbler, and replaceable
valve. Fountain to meet NSF-61 requirements and have a UL approved label with
UL tracking number. Mount on masonry wall with manufacturer recommended
concealed carriers. Connect to 1/2" copper water supply and 2" Sanitary sewer
as shown on the drawings and per manufacturer's recommendations. Install
plumb using vandal resistant nuts. Provide shut off valves, drain valves, and
blow-out fittings for winterization.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING
A. Waste Piping
1. Provide new waste piping as indicated on the plans.
2. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall careful-
ly survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the piping in-
stallation, in order to avoid unforeseen obstructions, such as telephone
cables, cisterns, electric conduits, large tree roots, etc.
3. This Contractor shall include all costs for this work, including repair,
permits, etc., in his bid.
B. Water Piping
1. Provide new water piping as indicated on the plans. Provide new re-
duced pressure back flow preventer, size as indicated on the plan.
2. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall careful-
ly survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the piping in-
stallation, in order to avoid unforeseen obstructions, such as telephone
cables, cisterns, electric conduits, large tree roots, etc.
3. This Contractor shall include all costs for this work, including repair,
15440 - 8
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
permits, etc., in his bid.
C. Fixtures
1. Furnish stop valves and traps for all fixtures and equipment.
2. The exposed flush, waste, and supply pipes at the fixtures, except those
installed in Chase Room Number 103, shall be chromium plated brass
pipe, iron pipe size. Fittings and traps for brass pipe shall be cast brass,
chromium plated.
3. Install chromium-plated brass wall or floor plates where piping passes
through walls or floors and is exposed in a finished space.
4. Where reference is made to chromium-plated brass, same shall mean
polished brass, first nickel plated and finished with chromium plate.
5. Fixture Mounting Heights: Mount fixtures to the following heights above
finish floor:
a. Water Closet
i. Handicapped 17 - 19 inches to top of seat
b. Urinal:
ii. Handicapped 17 inches to lowest part of lip
c. Wall Hydrants and Hose Bibs:
iii. Standard 24 inches to outlet
6. Coordinate all fixture rough-ins with masonry contractor.
END OF SECTION
15850 - 1
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
SECTION 15850
HEATING AND VENTILATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer-
ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050,
Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the
specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work in this section of the specification and the accompanying drawings
consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all material and equipment
necessary to install heating and air handling systems as indicated on drawings
and specified herein, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and
operating systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.03 STATIONARY LOUVERS*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. American Warming and Ventilating
2. Arrow
3. Dowco
4. Greenheck
5. Industrial Louvers
6. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.
7. Ruskin
8. Prior approved equal.
B. Provide stationary outside air intake and exhaust louvers where indicated on the
plans.
C. See schedule on the plans for exact type, construction, and accessories.
2.02 ELECTRIC FAN-COIL*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Berko
2. Markel
3. Q-mark
4. Prior approved equal
B. Manufacturer, Model, and Size:
1. As scheduled on the plans.
15850 - 2
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
C. Description:
1. Test operate prior to shipment to insure proper operation.
Completely factory assembled with all controls installed. U.L.
Rated.
2. Aluminum-finned, copper clad steel sheath heating element.
3. Heavy gauge cold rolled steel cabinet with baked-on paint finish,
insulated. Horizontal throw with duct flange.
4. With 24 VA control transformer factory installed with automatic
fan delay and thermal cutout. Or 120V controls.
5. Direct drive, centrifugal forward curved fan statically and
dynamically balanced, internally isolated. Internal overload
protected motor with rubber-in-shear isolators.
6. With wall-mounted thermostat.
7. With mounting brackets as required.
8. Solid state motor speed controller.
9. Throw-away filters.
10. Cabinet access panels.
2.03 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Berko
2. Indeeco
3. Markel
4. Q-mark
5. Prior approved equal
B. Manufacturer, Model, and Size:
1. As scheduled on the plans.
C. Description:
1. Test operate prior to shipment to insure proper operation.
Completely factory assembled with all controls installed. U.L.
Rated.
2. 18 ga steel cabinet with powder coat finish and adjustable
horizontal discharge louvers.
3. Aluminum finned, copper clad steel sheath heating element with
capillary type automatic reset thermal overload protection.
4. Draw thru fan shall be direct drive with aluminum blades. Fan
motor shall be totally enclosed designed for continuous heavy
duty operation with integral thermal overload protection.
5. Electric Unit Heater shall have a 24 VAC control transformer.
6. Electric Unit Heaters shall be UL listed and meet the
requirements of the National Electric Code.
2.04 EXHAUST FANS*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Greenheck.
2. PennBarry.
15850 - 3
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
3. Loren Cook
4. Twin City.
5. Prior approved equal.
B. Provide where indicated and as scheduled on the plans. Arrangement shall be as
shown on the plans. Provide with 12” roof curb and neoprene gasket.
C. All fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced at the factory.
D. Fan ratings shall be based upon tests performed in strict accordance with the
AMCA Standard 210-67 Test Code for Air Moving Devices. Each fan shall carry,
near the manufacturer's nameplate, the seal authorized by AMCA indicating that
ratings are certified. Fans not bearing this seal will not be acceptable.
E. Controls:
1. Controls for roof mounted exhaust fan to be provided by the
Temperature Control Contractor under Section 15950
“Automatic Temperature Control”.
2.05 SHEET METAL WORK - LOW VELOCITY SYSTEMS
A. Low velocity sheet metal work includes all ducts serving supply, return, and
exhaust air systems operating at a maximum of 2" W.G. of pressure.
B. Construction. Construct ducts from zinc coated iron or steel sheets conforming
accurately to the dimensions indicated on the drawings. All ducts shall be
straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. Construct ducts in
accordance with the recommendations in the current edition of the "SMACNA"
duct construction standards, 2" W.G. pressure class.
C. All ductwork transverse joints shall be made airtight by using duct sealer in
accordance with SMACNA standards. No open joints at the corners or else-
where will be allowed. All seams in horizontal ducts will be standing seams with
separate cleats mitering at the corners. All seams in vertical duct or risers shall
be self-supporting. All ducts shall be complete in themselves. No single
thickness partitions between ducts allowed. All ducts over 18" wide to be cross-
broken.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Securely attach all ductwork to the building construction in a manner to be free
from vibration and swaying under all conditions of operation. Hanger attach-
ments shall be appropriate for the building structure and shall be subject to the
Engineer's approval. Hang ducts from beams and joists whenever possible.
B. Ducts shall be substantially supported with hangers located at a maximum of 8
feet on centers, or less as conditions dictate, for the length of the duct. All
hangers shall be made of 1" wide galvanized iron straps, 18 gauge for hangers
spaced at 8 feet centers, 22 gauge for 4 feet centers, both for ducts up to 96"
semi-perimeter, or per latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards. Hanger straps to be secured to the bottom of the duct using sheet
metal screws. Additional screws to be added to sides of ductwork as conditions
15850 - 4
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
dictate. Trapeze hangers per SMACNA standards may also be used.
3.02 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. All ductwork will be run substantially as shown on the plans. Changes in size or
cross section shall be made with long tapers. The Engineer reserves the right to
slightly change the run of certain ducts without extra cost to the Owner, if
necessary to avoid unforeseen structural or other interferences.
B. Where ducts run through ceiling spaces and structural, mechanical, or electrical
interference is encountered, maintain same cross sectional area as indicated on
plans with a maximum of 4 1/2 to 1 aspect ratio.
C. All openings in duct for grilles, registers, etc., shall be capped dust-tight with G.I.
metal caps during the construction period.
D. Where square turns are indicated, either round or rectangular duct, provide and
install square turn elbows with turning vanes. Vanes may be either commercial
type duct turns or approved equal, or shop fabricated to conform to SMACNA
standards. Vanes shall be single or double thickness type preassembled on
runners before installing in each elbow. Brace adequately and avoid rough
edges to prevent objectionable noise.
E. Where moisture may condense within the duct system, pitch ductwork to low
points and provide drip pans and drain connections with plugs for removal of
condensate.
F. No obstructions will be allowed in ducts except places where absolutely neces-
sary and prior approval has been received from the Engineer. In such cases
they shall be installed so as to least interfere with the passage of air.
G. Curbs and Flashings:
1. This Contractor shall take responsibility for the integrity of the
roof, including making all new roof penetrations, installing curbs,
and making entire installation water-tight. Coordinate prefab
curb installation with General Contractor.
2. All flashing joints shall be soldered watertight.
3. Wash all flashings and counterflashing with acetic acid, and
paint with one coat of oil paint, silver or white in color.
4. Rooftop equipment shall be anchored to withstand wind loads of
30 pounds per square foot.
3.03 EXHAUST FANS:
A. Install per manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Wiring to roof mounted exhaust fans shall be routed up inside the curb utilizing
the fan manufacturer’s built-in conduit.
3.04 STATIONARY LOUVERS
A. Install louvers, where indicated on the plans, according to manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide anchor clips and caulk as required for a sound,
watertight installation. Make airtight duct connections to installed louvers.
15850 - 5
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
3.05 ELECTRIC FAN COIL
A. Hang electric fan coil from ceiling/structure in compliance with manufacturer’s
written instructions. Make duct connections with neoprene coated fabric vibration
isolators.
B. All wiring shall be in compliance with the NEC.
C. Temperature controls shall be by the Temperature Controls Contractor.
3.06 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER
A. Hang electric unit heater from ceiling/structure in compliance with manufacturer’s
written instructions.
B. All wiring shall be in compliance with the NEC.
C. Temperature controls shall be by the Temperature Controls Contractor.
END OF SECTION
15950 - 1
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
SECTION 15950
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Basic Mechanical Requirements, in its entirety, including appli-
cable provisions of other Specification sections, are hereby adopted and made
part of this section of the Specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists of
performing all labor and furnishing of all materials and equipment necessary to
provide the Automatic Temperature Control System for Heating, and Ventilating
systems as specified herein, including minor items obviously necessary for
complete and operating installation.
1.03 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Control system shall be electric and electronic as manufactured by Honeywell,
Landis and Staefa, Kreuter, Reliable Controls, Robert Shaw, Siebe, or prior
approved equal.
B. The system shall be installed under the full-time supervision of an authorized
Installations Engineer employed by one of the above, or by Long and Assoc.,
Carrier Commercial Services, CW Industries, Air Comfort, Yoder Electrical
Services, or prior approved equal.
C. Prior to start of work, the Contractor shall submit control shop drawings as stated
in this Section. Shop drawings shall be prepared by an authorized temperature
control contractor as listed above. Work shall not begin until shop drawings are
approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONTROL INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT*
2.02 In general, the control instruments and equipment furnished for this installation shall be the
best product of its type produced by the manufacturer.
A. Dampers and Damper Operators:
1. Damper Operators: 120 V electric type. Damper operators shall have metal
bodies. Provide operators with ample power to overcome friction of
damper linkage and air pressure acting on the damper blades. Locate the
damper operator mounting arrangement outside the airstream wherever
possible. Provide the operators with external adjustable stops to limit the
stroke. The operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit
normally closed position of the damper. Belimo operators are preferred.
15950 - 2
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
B. Dampers:
1. Damper Frames: 13 gauge galvanized steel channel or 1/8" extruded
aluminum with reinforced corner bracing.
2. Damper Blades: Not to exceed six (6) inches in width. Blades shall be
suitable for high velocity performance. Opposed blades.
3. Damper Bearings: Nylon or Teflon. Bushings that turn in the bearing shall
be oil impregnated sintered metal.
4. Low leakage insulated type, with blade edge seals and side seals. Similar
to Greenheck Model ICD-45.
C. Thermostats:
1. Mechanical Chase Unit Heaters: Heating thermostat. 40 to 90 degrees F
range. Honeywell T87K1007 with protective metal enclosure.
2. Electric Fan Coil: Heating Thermostat. 0 to 100 degree F range.
Honeywell T675A1516 with remote bulb and duct bulb holder.
3. All room thermostats shall be mounted at 60” AFF.
4. Coordinate electrical requirements with Electrical Contractor.
D. Motion Detector:
1. See electrical drawings and specifications for motion detectors.
Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WIRING:
A. Except where otherwise specified under sequence of controls, wire all electrical
controls furnished under this section of the specifications.
B. This installation shall comply with all rules and regulations of the National Electrical
Code and all state and local codes and regulations.
C. Install all conduits in a neat and orderly manner with conduit grouped as much as
possible following horizontal and vertical building lines and rigidly secure conduit to
the building construction.
D. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be coordinated with
associated work being done under Division 16.
E. Except where otherwise specified, voltages for control of circuiting associated with
motors and their starters, and all control devices shall be rated at 120 volts or 24
volts.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the installation of temperature control equipment furnished under this
section but installed under other sections of this Division.
B. Electric Fan-coil, etc.: The manufacturer will provide all control devices,
transformers, relays, and other appurtenances as required per manufacturer's
system wiring and interlock submittals.
15950 - 3
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
3.03 SERVICE AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. After completion of the installation, adjust all thermostats, motors, and other
equipment provided under this Section.
B. Following complete adjustment, have a qualified representative fully acquainted
with the installation instruct the Owner's operators in the fundamentals and
operations of the system. This instruction period shall not be less than two (2)
hours.
1. Submit typewritten and/or printed sets of operating and maintenance
instructions, to be included in the O&M Manuals, including sheets
describing fundamentals of each system and an explanation of the
operation and function of each system device as part of the maintenance
and operating instructions portfolio required under Section 15010.
3.04 CONTROL DRAWINGS*
A. Before proceeding with the work required under this section, the Contractor shall
submit for approval complete temperature control diagrams, including a written
description of the systems and descriptive literature covering each item of control
equipment. Diagrams shall indicate all control functions required. Submit to
Engineer.
3.05 OPERATING TESTS
A. A complete system-operating test shall be made for a period of two (2) weeks with
controls set in their respective positions to ensure proper operation. All tests and
final adjustments, including calibration of all controllers and thermostats, shall be
made to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. At the completion of the test, Contractor shall prepare a list showing temperature
settings of all thermostats together with actual thermostat readings. This list shall
be submitted to the Engineer as part of the maintenance and operating instruction
portfolios.
3.06 "AS-BUILT" DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor will, at the same time, insure that the control diagrams for the
project are brought up-to-date and that they reflect the control system "As-Built".
These control diagrams will be included in the Maintenance Manuals, which shall
be turned over to the Owner following the acceptance of the above procedure by
the Consulting Engineer.
B. The "As- Built" diagrams will have an indication on them as to what changes
occurred to the control system between the system originally specified and the
system as installed. If necessary, the description of operation shall be changed to
adequately describe the completed control system.
1. Provide reproducible set of "As-Builts".
2. Operating sequences and control diagrams modified "As-Built," shall be
included in the O&M Manuals.
15950 - 4
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
3.07 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. General: The following description gives the intent of the sequence of operation. It
is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate controls furnished with the
equipment with necessary supplementary controls under this section to provide a
working system as described below.
1. Fans, and Intake/Exhaust Dampers:
a. Exhaust fan normally off and dampers normally closed. The exhaust
fan starts from a signal from space motion sensors which will also
open intake and exhaust dampers.
2. Electric Fan-Coil:
a. The Electric Fan-Coil shall cycle independent of the motion sensors to
maintain the set point of 55 degrees F, adjustable, upon a drop in
temperature as sensed by the remote bulb of the thermostat. Locate
the remote bulb behind louver in the exhaust duct in the Women’s
Rest Room. See plans for location.
3. Electric Unit Heater:
a. Unit heater shall cycle unit heating element and fan to maintain a
heating setpoint of 55 degrees F, adjustable, upon drop in temperature
in the Chase. See plans for location.
END OF SECTION
15990 - 1
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer-
ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050,
Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the
specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Balance the building ventilation and heating systems only.
1.03 FIRM REQUIREMENTS
A. Balancing shall be done by a firm specializing in this work. Prequalified firms
are:
1. AirDronics, Inc, Parker, Colorado.
2. Fort Collins/Midwest, Fort Collins, Colorado.
3. Lawrence H. Finn & Assoc., Greeley, Colorado.
4. Double T Balancing.
B. Other firms desiring to furnish services for this project shall submit for written
approval during bid time.
1. A brochure shall be provided listing the qualifications of personnel in the
organization, instruments available to be used and a list of projects
successfully balanced within the last two years.
2. Information regarding qualifications must be in the office of the Design
Engineer at least six days, excluding Sundays and holidays, prior to the
date set for receiving bids.
C. The balancing work shall be performed by a firm having total professional
responsibility for the final testing, adjusting and balancing of the entire air
system. All balancing shall be performed by qualified technicians in the employ
of the pre-qualified firm.
D. This firm shall furnish all necessary tools, scaffolding and ladders that are
required and shall provide all required instruments, take all readings and make
all necessary adjustments.
E. Instruments shall be used and applied which are best suited to the system func-
tion being tested. Instruments shall be in first-class state of repair and have
been calibrated within a period of six months prior to starting the job. Instru-
ments shall be recalibrated upon completion of the job if required by the Design
Engineer to prove reliability.
F. All air systems shall be balanced using an applicable proportionate procedure.
15990 - 2
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
G. After all adjustments are made, a detailed written report shall be prepared and
submitted for approval. Final acceptance of this project will not be made until a
satisfactory report is received and field verified.
H. The Design Engineer will field verify the report in the following manner:
1. Select quantities to be tested at random. (Quantity shall not exceed 10%
of total.)
2. Require balancing firm to read the quantities in his presence.
3. Field tested values shall be within plus or minus 10% of those shown on
plans.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 AIR BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Before any adjustments are made, room is to be closed off with doors closed.
The systems are to be checked for such items as duct leakage, damper leakage,
equipment vibrations, correct damper operations, etc. All fan systems are to be
adjusted to deliver design air quantities within plus or minus 5 %. After balancing
is completed, check motor amperage.
B. Exhaust and recirculation air systems shall be adjusted for air quantities shown
on drawings and the proper relationship between supply and exhaust
established.
C. Distribution system shall be adjusted to obtain uniform space temperatures free
from objectionable drafts and noise within the capabilities of the system.
D. Sheaves and/or belts shall be exchanged or speed controllers adjusted as
required to adjust the RPM of all fans so they handle specified air quantity.
3.02 MISCELLANEOUS
A. All installed thermal overload protection shall be observed and noted in the data
sheets. If thermal overload protection is incorrect, it shall be the responsibility of
the balancing firm to see that proper overload protection is installed at the
completion of the job.
B. The adjusting crew shall measure and set any special conditions such as
minimum outside air quantities; check and adjust outside and return air intakes
so that the system will deliver substantially the same volume on either; make
tests and record data as required in "REPORT" below.
C. All balancing devices, i.e. dampers, speed control switches, etc. shall be clearly
marked as to the final balanced position. Plug all test holes, replace access
doors and belt guards.
D. When deemed necessary, 24-hour space temperature recording shall be taken
and any required partial rebalance of the system shall be performed without
additional cost.
15990 - 3
Rolland Moore Park Playground 1143.04
3.03 REPORT
A. A bound report shall be provided which shall contain a general information sheet
listing instruments used, methods of balancing, altitude correction, and
manufacturer's grille, register and diffuser data.
B. Provide equipment data sheets listing make, size, serial number, rating, etc., of
all mechanical equipment, including fans, motors, starters, and drives.
Operating data shall include rotational speed, inlet and outlet pressures,
pressure drop components, and measured motor current and voltage.
C. Balancing data sheets shall indicate the required and actual CFM of all supply,
return and exhaust outlets or inlets, and shall be totaled and summarized by
systems.
D. Reports shall contain a reduced set of contract drawings with outlets marked
thereon for easy identification of the designation used in the data sheets.
E. The report shall outline any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in
the above.
F. Final report shall be included in the O&M Manuals.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein.
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16000-1 September, 2012
SECTION 16000
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work covered by this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and
materials unless otherwise specified and of performing all operations necessary for the
installation of complete electrical systems as required by these specifications and/or as
indicated on the Drawings.
1. All work under this section shall also be governed by the project general conditions, along
with all supplements and amendments thereto, as published by the Engineer.
B. Work shall also include the completion of all labor and the supply of all materials, whether
specifically mentioned or not, for the successful operation of all electrical systems described
on the Drawings or required by these specifications.
1. Oversights at the bidding stage will not relieve the Contractor of providing complete
electrical systems including equipment, materials, tools and labor.
C. The scope of electrical work shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Underground secondary service and service entrance equipment for the restroom
building.
2. Power distribution and branch circuit wiring to all equipment in restroom and interception
of existing circuit wiring to existing pavilions.
3. Installation of building’s lighting systems.
4. Demolition of existing restroom building electrical systems.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Codes and Regulations: Comply with all applicable state and local codes, regulations and
ordinances and the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code as
interpreted by the local inspection authority who shall have final jurisdiction.
B. Permits and Fees: Secure and pay for all permits, fees, taxes, royalties, licenses and
inspections in connection with the electrical work. Upon completion of work, furnish to the
Engineer a Certificate of Inspection indicating final approval by the local inspection authority.
C. Examination of Premises: Examine the premises prior to bidding and become fully familiar
with existing conditions.
D. Construction Power and Lighting: Provide all temporary power, lighting and wiring as required
during the construction period for the use of all the trades. Temporary facilities shall be
installed per NEC and are to be properly grounded throughout. Remove all temporary
facilities upon completion of the project.
1.3 DRAWINGS
A. The Drawings show functional requirements of the system described herein; components not
itemized on the Drawings and Specifications shall be provided by the Contractor to provide a
completed working system as indicated on the Drawings.
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16000-2 September, 2012
1. Before installing any wiring, equipment, outlets or other devices, examine architectural,
structural and mechanical drawings and specifications; if any discrepancies occur
between them and the electrical drawings and specifications, report same to the Engineer
in writing and obtain written instructions for changes in the work. The architectural,
structural and mechanical drawings and specifications take precedence over the
electrical.
2. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual
construction of the building and work of other trades will permit. All changes from
Drawings necessary to make the electrical work conform to the building as constructed
and to fit work of other trades shall be made without cost to the Owner and shall be
marked on the documents for later submittal to the Engineer.
3. Data given herein and on the Drawings is as exact as could be secured, but absolute
accuracy is not guaranteed. Specifications and Drawings are for assistance and guidance
to the Contractor. Exact locations, distances, levels and dimensions will be governed by
the building; the Contractor shall use same with this understanding.
PART 2 – MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials and equipment shall be manufactured, tested and installed in accordance with
the following:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL).
3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
5. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).
B. All electrical material shall display a UL label.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate electrical work with the progress of other work
and with the work of other trades on the job without cost to the Owner.
B. Cleanup: If so directed by the Engineer, remove any materials not installed in the work which
conflict with the work of other trades. At completion of work, clean up and remove from
premises all debris and materials not installed so premises will be left clean.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. When and if directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall test, under supervision of the
Engineer, all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds.
B. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate by megger test the
insulation resistance of any circuit. Where such a test indicates the presence of faulty
insulation, the Contractor shall locate the point of fault, replace with no additional cost to the
Owner and demonstrate by further test the elimination of such a fault.
C. After the installation has been completed and at such time as the Engineer may direct, the
Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval in accordance with the requirements
of this Specification.
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16100-1 September, 2012
SECTION 16100
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all new materials consistent with the requirements of Section 16000 and as specified
below.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit catalog cut sheets on all basic materials to be used and receive Engineer's acceptance.
1. See supplemental conditions for distribution and count.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS - ACCEPTABLE CLASSES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide raceways as required below for raceway systems.
2. Conduit sizes not noted on Drawings shall be in accordance with NEC requirements for the
quantities and size of wire installed therein.
3. Where nonmetallic raceways are utilized, size as required to conform with the grounding
conductor considered as an insulated additional conductor.
4. Where metallic raceways are used, they must establish positive low-resistance paths to
ground and effectively isolate conductors so that any short-circuit arcs will be confined.
5. Reference Section 16450, Grounding.
B. Acceptable Classes.
1. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
a. Install 2" and smaller for all exposed branch circuit wiring.
b. Galvanize on the outside and coat on the inside with a smooth hard finish of lacquer,
varnish or enamel.
c. Fittings.
1) Steel set screw.
d. Comply with Underwriters' Laboratories Standard UL 797 and USA Standards Institute
C80-3.
2. Poly-Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Conduit.
a. Provide in the following locations.
1) In or below slabs on grade.
2) In earth or gravel.
b. Schedule 40 Heavy Wall, 90 degrees Celsius, UL listed for above ground and
underground uses.
c. Conform to NEMA TC-2 and UL-651 standards.
d. UL listed in conformity with Article 347 of the National Electric Code.
e. 1-1/2" and larger shall conform to NEMA Publications No. TC-1-1965.
3. Surface Metal Wireway.
a. Provide surface metal wireway of a dimension permitting the number of conductors and
splices installed. NEMA 1 enclosure.
b. The raceway shall meet all NEC Article 352A requirements and shall be UL listed.
c. Provide with appropriate boxes and fittings by same manufacturer.
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16100-2 September, 2012
4. Flexible Metal Conduit.
a. Provide in sufficient lengths for:
1) Make-up of motor or equipment raceway connections.
b. Non-liquidtight type: Steel, galvanized, flexible metallic, same manufacturers as for
rigid.
c. Liquidtight: American Brass Company Sealtite Type VA, General Electric Type UA or
equal.
2.2 WIRES AND CABLES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide a complete system of conductors in raceway systems with minimum wire size to be
No. 12, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, wire sizes noted on Drawings are to be extended for the entire
length of a circuit including taps and risers.
B. Conductor Material.
1. Copper conductors shall be high conductivity tin coated annealed copper in accordance with
ASTM B-33.
a. Use copper conductors for all wiring unless otherwise indicated as optional on plans.
C. Insulation.
1. Thermoplastic Insulated, Nylon Sheathed - Use for all branch circuit conductors installed in
conduit.
a. UL Type THWN, suitable for operation at 600 volts in wet or dry locations at conductor
temperatures not to exceed 75oC.
b. Poly-vinyl chloride insulation that is UL defined as heat, abrasion, moisture and oil
resistant.
2.3 WIRE CONNECTORS AND DEVICES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide wire connectors, crimp terminals, splice connectors, mechanical lugs, compression
lugs, pin connectors, split bolt connectors and associated insulating devices for a complete
wiring connection system suitable for specified cables furnished.
2. Connectors shall be in accordance with NEC, state and local requirements for size and color
installed therein.
3. Connectors and devices shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's and UL
standard requirements for tightening torques. Use proper torqueing tools to achieve accurate
values.
2.4 JUNCTION BOXES
A. General Requirements.
1. Provide all covers of same gauge metal and include screws.
B. Concealed Junction Boxes.
1. Provide code gauge sheet metal boxes located and sized as required with suitable covers
and trims.
a. Make of material resistant to corrosion or suitably protected, both internally and
externally, by galvanizing.
b. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be UL approved for the purpose.
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16100-3 September, 2012
c. Comply with UL Standard 50.
d. Metal boxes to meet NEC construction specifications.
C. Exposed Junction Boxes.
1. Boxes exposed or surface mounted shall be die-cast or permanent-mold cast aluminum body
with threaded external hub and cast cover.
2.5 OUTLET BOXES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide outlet boxes for all wiring devices, receptacles, switches, telephone connections and
clock connections of material construction to suit environmental conditions.
2. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with actual structural
conditions to eliminate obstructions and interference with other work and equipment.
a. Verify final location for all outlets, panels and equipment with Engineer - see
Architectural Drawings.
B. Concealed Boxes.
1. Furnish sheet steel boxes and fittings which shall be made corrosion resistant both internally
and externally by galvanizing.
a. Provide with matching manufactured cover.
C. Surface Boxes.
1. Furnish die-cast or permanent-mold cast aluminum boxes with threaded external hubs.
a. Provide threaded plugs for unused hubs.
2. Boxes shall be of a corrosion-resistant alloy.
3. Boxes shall be deep-body series, single-gang through four-gang with corresponding device
cover plates.
2.6 WIRING DEVICES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide wiring devices and device plates as specified below. Provide in the quantities and at
the locations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Specification Grade Receptacles.
1. Specification grade receptacles shall be 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding duplex, 20 amp, 125 volts.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Leviton
b. Hubbell
c. Pass & Seymour Legrand
C. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles.
1. GFI receptacles shall be 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding duplex, 20 amp, 125 volts. No feed-thru
GFCI protection allowed.
2. Ground-fault receptacles shall have NEMA 5-20 configuration with the following
characteristics:
a. 5 milliamp sensitivity to earth leakage current.
b. 1/30th of a second trip time.
c. Local "test" button.
d. Local "reset" button.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Leviton
b. Hubbell
c. Pass & Seymour Legrand
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16100-4 September, 2012
D. Switches.
1. Switches shall be heavy duty, AC quiet type, toggle handle, 20 amp, 120-277 volts, corrosion
resistant.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Single-pole
1) Leviton
2) Hubbell
3) Pass & Seymour Legrand
b. Three-way
1) Leviton
2) Hubbell
3) Pass & Seymour Legrand
E. Motion Detector: Ultrasonic sensor for switching restroom lighting.
1. Model: See plans
F. Daylight Sensor:
G. Provide stainless steel wall plates for all receptacles and switches.
H. Materials shall conform and be consistent throughout.
2.7 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be of deadfront construction incorporating switching and protective devices of
the number, rating and type noted herein or indicated on the Drawings.
1. Electrical characteristics, ratings and branch circuit wiring of panelboard shall be in
accordance with panel schedules and elementary drawings.
2. Panelboard circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type.
a. Breakers shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical
short circuit capacity.
b. Breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-
break switching mechanism with overload or short circuit tripping being clearly
indicated.
2.8 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
5. As approved
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 400 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower
rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses where required, lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Retain one of last two options in first paragraph below depending on whether fuse applications and
class designations are indicated on Drawings or specified in Division 16 Section "Fuses." Show
fuse ampere ratings on Drawings.
D. Provide with voltage rating for system being applied.
E. Accessories:
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16100-5 September, 2012
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled
for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when specific Class R fuses are
specified.
4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
SWITCH WITH THERMAL OVERLOAD
A. Outlet box mounted switch with integral thermal device for all 120 volt, 1-phase motor loads as
shown on the Drawings, including self-protected motors. Size heater at 115% of the full load
current or as otherwise required by the manufacturer
B. Mount on or directly adjacent to the motor load.
C. Equip with device plate to meet requirements of the location.
D. Provide engraved label on switch or engraved device plate defining load served.
E. Switch/Fuse combination units (e.g. SKU) expressly prohibited
2.9 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R
3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Raceways.
1. Layout work in advance to avoid excessive concentrations of multiple raceway runs.
2. Securely fasten raceways at intervals and locations required by NEC or the type raceway
employed.
3. Route exposed conduit and surface metal raceways parallel or perpendicular to building lines
with neat right angle turns.
4. Turn conduits with neat symmetrical concentric bends.
B. Wire and Cable.
1. Install wire in approved raceways only after all concrete and plastering work is complete and
all moisture has been swabbed from conduits.
2. All wiring shall be furnished and installed complete from point of service connection to all
receptacles, lighting fixtures, utilization equipment, etc., as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Suitable installation equipment shall be provided to prevent cutting and abrasion of
conductors and conduits during the pulling of feeders and branch circuits. Repeated bending
shall be avoided, and the minimum bending radius for the particular conductor shall be strictly
observed.
4. Ropes used for pulling feeders shall be made of polyethylene.
a. Metallic ropes shall not be used.
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16100-6 September, 2012
5. Wire pulling lubricants shall conform to UL requirements applicable to the several insulation
and raceway materials used.
6. Pulling lines are to be attached to wires and cables by means of either woven basket grips or
pulling eyes.
a. Rope hitcher shall not be used.
7. All cables to be installed in a single conduit shall be installed together.
8. Apply color coding to all three- and four-wire circuits as follows:
120/240/208V Phase 277/480V
Black A Yellow
Red B Brown
Blue C Orange
White Neutral White
Green Ground Green
9. Where home run circuit numbers are indicated on the Drawings, such numbers shall be
followed in connecting circuits to panelboards.
C. Wire Connectors and Devices.
1. Any connectors and lugs installed shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended connecting
combinations.
2. Install wire connecting devices to provide a tight mechanical and electrical make-up.
3. Re-check splices and terminations and make tight prior to substantial completion.
D. Junction Boxes.
1. Install junction boxes so that covers are readily accessible after the completion of the
installation.
2. Mount rigidly in place with fronts straight and plumb.
3. Support sheet steel adequately to maintain shape.
4. Secure covers with corrosion resistant screws and bolts.
5. All surface mounted special boxes shall be secured to cement and/or block walls using 1/4" x
3/4" lead anchors.
E. Outlet Boxes.
1. Except as required otherwise by actual construction conditions, locate outlets as follows (all
dimensions given are from finished floor to centerline of outlet boxes).
a. Wall Switches: 4'-6".
b. Convenience outlets: 1'-0" except over such items as counters, benches, special
equipment where they shall be at a height to service equipment or as indicated on
Drawings.
2. Adjust height so the height of all units will be consistent in one direction.
F. Wiring Devices.
1. Install ground fault interrupting receptacles and isolated ground receptacles at locations
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Install specification grade receptacles in all remaining areas as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Install the proper type of device and plate for the particular appliance or equipment.
a. Verify with Engineer.
G. Panelboards.
1. Mount panelboards rigidly in place with fronts straight and plumb.
2. Provide complete mounting brackets and hardware as necessary for complete support of
panelboards at locations indicated on Drawings.
3. Provide a typed panel directory for each panelboard; enclose in plastic.
a. Label panel as indicated on one-line diagram. Submit sample of label to Engineer for
approval.
END OF SECTION
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16410-1 September, 2012
SECTION 16410
ELECTRIC SERVICE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The electric service includes all conductors and equipment from the point at which the electric
utility delivers the power to the site to the metering equipment and to the line side of the
service disconnecting means.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and coordinate with the local electric utility for
reuse of existing pad mounted 25KVA pad mounted transformer.
B. Size of the service entrance conductors, number of conductors, service entrance raceway size
and type, service voltage and associated equipment are indicated on the Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. National Electric Code.
B. Local Electric Utility Specifications.
C. Local Codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable classes of materials for use in conjunction with the electric service shall be in
accordance with the appropriate reference sections listed below.
1. Basic Materials and Methods, 16100.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The electric utility will maintain the existing pad mounted transformer. The contractor shall
install the new service entrance conductors leaving sufficient length of conductor for
terminations inside the transformer.
1. The electric utility will make all the necessary terminations inside their transformer.
B. The Contractor shall install the service entrance conductors from the padmount transformer
and terminate them at the main disconnecting means.
C. Coordinate underground conduit installations with other work to eliminate conflict and avoid
interference with other underground piping systems.
END OF SECTION
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16450-1 September, 2012
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
B. Power system grounding
C. Communications system grounding
D. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product or hardware indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16450-2 September, 2012
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at
least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions. Contractors may utilize exothermic welding only
with prior experience with the process. Submittal package shall include a list of both firm and
individual previous project(s), date(s) of installation and names individuals qualified for this project.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet.
B. Connector for Building Footing Steel (Ufer) Concrete Encased Ground: Exothermic weld or
compression type providing irreversible, secure connections. Termination products shall be listed by
UL for the specific application.
2.4 GROUNDING HARDWARE
A. Provide all bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps, etc. as required for a complete,
operating grounding system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No.8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No.
6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Bare Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No.1/0 AWG minimum or
as noted on the Drawings. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders
with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with
alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of
yellow.
D. Building Footing Reinforcing Steel (Ufer) Grounding Electrode: Connect all steel in the building
footing together by wire tie or other method approved by the building Engineer. Minimum
connection length shall be 20 feet. Bend minimum #4 rebar up into a space near the electrical
service equipment that is open or has access after the building construction work is complete.
Extend bar minimum of 16 inches above elevation of finished floor or top of foundation. Where
connection is within finished wall construction, provide properly-sized access panel. Coordinate with
General Contractor or Architect
E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16450-3 September, 2012
4. Connections to Structural Steel and Reinforcing Bars: UL listed irreversible compression
connectors.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits (including lighting and receptacle circuits).
2. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
3. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
4. Flexible raceway runs.
5. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
6. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus
in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on
busway.
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and
connected metallic piping.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be
subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Install all wiring grounding conductors in raceways with
phase and grounded conductors. Grounding electrode conductors shall be installed without any
joint or splice.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise
indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install rod(s) spaced at least one-rod length from each other
and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the
service grounding electrode conductor.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except
where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances
to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted
clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16450-4 September, 2012
of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor
on street side of fitting with a bonding jumper around the fitting. Bond metal grounding
conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff
valve.
E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Bond grounding conductor for all duct
mounted electrical equipment (heaters, air cleaners, etc.) to the metal ductwork. Install bonding
jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level
is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation
and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or
seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural
ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method using 600 volt megohm tester according to
IEEE 81 or by use of clamp-on grounding tester.
c. Provide written report of grounding test results prior to project Substantial Completion
B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground for the service exceeds 8.0 ohms, notify
Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 16450
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16500-1 September, 2012
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete lighting system as indicated on Drawings and in fixture schedules, all wired,
assembled and in working order.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards.
1. IES minimum standards.
2. UL approved auxiliaries.
3. NEMA.
4. CBM-ETL certified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit catalog cut sheets for all lighting fixture types to the Engineer. These shall include the
following information:
1. Photometric data.
2. Mounting provisions and accessories.
3. Ballast electrical characteristics.
B. Submit the operating temperature rating and the noise level ratings for all ballasts.
1. Report the maximum ambient temperature in degrees Fahrenheit in which the fixture will
function continuously without interruption.
2. Guarantee operation under conditions of this project.
C. Reference supplemental conditions for distribution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Fixtures installed in damp or wet locations shall be suitable for the environment and display
appropriate UL label.
B. All fixtures shall be constructed of adequate gauge steel, including interior barriers, channels, end
caps and reflectors.
C. Ballast case temperatures not to exceed the UL 90oC limit in a 25oC ambient.
2.2 BALLASTS
A. All fluorescent ballasts to conform to the following:
1. UL approved.
2. CBM-ETL certified.
3. High power factor energy saving.
4. Conform to applicable UL designated Class "P" requirements.
5. Operable on nominal applied system voltage with allowable voltage variations.
6. Automatic-resetting type thermal protectors.
7. Sound ratings equal to G.E. "A."
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16500-2 September, 2012
B. All HID ballasts shall be designed and constructed to meet the American National Standard
Institute specifications. They shall also comply with UL 1029 and be UL listed.
1. All ballasts shall be encased.
2. All ballasts shall be the high power factor type.
3. Each ballast shall display its ballast data plus wiring connections on an aluminized label on
the case.
C. LED luminaires: Shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LEDs as the light source. In addition, a
complete luminaire shall consist of a housing, LED array, and electronic driver (power supply).
Each luminaire shall be rated for a minimum operational life of 50,000 hours. Each luminaire shall
be designed to operate at an average temperature of 77 degrees Fahrenheit. The individual LEDs
shall be connected such that the failure of one LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire.
Each luminaire shall be listed with a nationally recognized testing laboratory (including, but not
limited to, UL, CSA, ETL).
2.3 FINISH
A. Furnish ferrous metal surface with protective finish having rust inhibiting properties.
B. Painted Finishes: Minimum of 1.5 mils thick; balance between hardness and bending properties
suitable for the application.
C. White Finishes: 87% minimum reflectance.
2.4 DIFFUSERS
A. Plastic Used for Light Transmission.
1. Acrylic throughout; no styrene permitted.
2. 100% virgin materials.
3. 0.125 inch minimum thickness.
4. No blends or copolymers permitted.
5. ETL certified as light stabilized and non-yellowing.
B. Aging Properties.
1. Guaranteed to conform with minimum standard of IES.
2. SPI-NEMA conformance when installed in interior locations utilizing standards WW or CW
lamp.
2.5 FIXTURES
A. Provide as specified in the fixture schedule.
2.6 LAMPS
A. Lamps shall be manufactured by General Electric or Phillips.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set luminaries true and free from light leaks, warps, dents and other defects.
B. Provide fixtures having proper flanges, trim and mounting.
C. Mount outlets at position and height to clear ductwork, piping and obstructions.
D. Install fluorescent lamps aligned for proper lamp contact.
E. Fixture Wiring: conform to NEC.
Rolland Moore Park Restroom Replacement 16500-3 September, 2012
F. Protect wiring with tape or tubing at points where abrasion is likely to occur.
G. Provide chase nipples where field wiring through knockouts.
H. Install wire in fluorescent fixtures that meets temperature requirements with a minimum rating of
90oC (194oF).
I. Provide special plates, barriers and rings as required to comply with the NEC.
APPENDIX
Geotechnical Soils Report.
PRINTED
OWNER REPRESENTATIVE:
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:
CONTACT:
MECHANICAL ENGINEER:
CONTACT:
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER:
CONTACT:
ABBREVIATIONS
@ AT
A.F.F. Above Finished Floor
A.H.U. Air-Handling Unit
B.O. Bottom Of
B.M. Benchmark
C.J. Control Joint
C.M.U. Concrete Masonry Unit
C.U. Condensing Unit
CAB. Cabinet
CER.TL. Ceramic Tile
CONT. Continuous
D.F. Drinking Fountain
DBL. Double
D.S. Downspout
DWG. Drawings
E.C. Electrical Conduit
E.F. Exhaust Fan
E.J. Expansion Joint
E.W.C. Electric Water Cooler
EA. Each
E.P.PT. Epoxy Paint
EQ. Equal
EXIST or (E) Existing
EXT. Exterior
F.D. Floor Drain
F.E. Fire Extinguisher
F.V. Field Verify
FIN. Finish
FLR. Floor
FTG. Footing
GALV. Galvanized
GYP.BD. Gypsum Wallboard
HC Handicapped
H.C. Hollow Core (Wood)
HDR. Header
H.M. Hollow Metal
HORIZ. Horizontal
I.D. Inside Diameter
INS.STL. Insulated Steel
INT. Interior
M.O. Masonry Opening
MANUF. Manufacturer
MTL. Metal
(N) New
N.I.C. Not in Contract
N.T.S. Not to Scale
NOM. Nominal
O.A. Overall
O.C. On Center
O.D. Outside Diameter
O.H. Overhead
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
CHASE
103
WOMEN
101
MEN
102
1
A-3
1
A-3
103
101
102
STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS,
PAINT - TYP.
STEEL URINAL SCREEN,
PAINT - TYP.
CJ CJ
MOP &
BROOM
HOLDER
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
DASHED LINE REPRESENTS
OUTLINE OF ROOF ABOVE
2
A-3
2
A-3
3
A-3
3
A-3
12" DIA. CONCRETE COLUMN - TYP.
A-5
7
A-5
10
A-5
6
SOLID SURFACE
COUNTERTOP - TYP.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE FLOOR,
SLOPE TO FLOOR DRAINS 1/8" PER
FT. , SEAL - TYP.
FLOOR DRAIN, RE. PLUMB.
3' - 0" 15' - 0"
S.S. URINAL - TYP.
STAINLESS STEEL TOILET - TYP.
MOP SINK
-
HI-LO WATER FOUNTAIN,
RE. PLUMB.
EW1
EL.
FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
1
A-3
6 5 4 3 2 1
PREFINISHED METAL
FASCIA
CONCRETE COLUMN &
BASE
CORRUGATED METAL ROOF
CONCRETE MASONRY
BLOCK WALL - PAINT
103
H.M. DOOR AND
FRAME - PAINT
2
A-3
RIDGE VENT
SKYLIGHT, TYP. OF 4
EL.
BOTTOM OF FASCIA
110' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF DORMER
113' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF RIDGE
117' - 3"
SKYLIGHT, TYP.
EL.
FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
B A
PREFINISHED METAL
FASCIA
CONCRETE COLUMN &
BASE TO MATCH
EXISTING ADJACENT
CORRUGATED METAL ROOF
CONCRETE MASONRY
BLOCK WALL - PAINT
3
A-3
EL.
BOTTOM OF FASCIA
110' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF DORMER
113' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF RIDGE
117' - 3"
EL.
FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
A B
PREFINISHED METAL
FASCIA OVER WOOD
FASCIA
EL.
FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
A B
3
A-3
F2 F2
R1
RIDE VENT
F1
R-49 INSULATION
A-4
2
A-4
1
EL.
BOTTOM OF FASCIA
110' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF DORMER
113' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF RIDGE
117' - 3"
H.M. DOOR AND
FRAME - PAINT, TYP.
CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE COLUMN,
TYP.
R-49 BLOWN IN
PLACE INSULATION
LINTEL RE:
STRUCTURAL
CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE
FOUNDATION
PRE-ENGINEERED
WOOD ROOF
TRUSSES
HIGH LOW
DRINKING
FOUNTAIN
JUG FILLER
EL.
FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
A 3 B
A-3
10' - 0"
R1
SKYLIGHT, 24" x 30"
SKYLIGHT SHAFT BEYOND
RIDGE VENT
3' - 0" 4" 1' - 6"
S.S. GRAB BARS, TYP.
TOILET PAPER DISPENSER, TYP.
2' - 10"
R-49 BLOWN IN
PLACE INSULATION
ELECTRIC HAND DRYER
EL.
FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
3
A-3
4"x8" SPLIT FACE
CMU VENEER - PAINT
AIR GAP
RIGID INSULATION
R-14 MINIMUM
8" LOAD BEARING CMU
REINF. RE: STRUCT.
F2
F1
CONCRETE
FOUNDATION AND
FOOTING RE: STRUCT.
R-49 BLOWN IN INSULATION
C1
HOLLOW METAL
DOOR & FRAME
PRE-ENGINEERED
ROOF TRUSS
R1
1X2 WOOD TRIM - PAINT
PREFIN. CORRUGATED ROOF DECK
WOOD SHEATHING RE: STRUCTURAL
PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ GYP.
SOFFIT BD. - PAINT
2X BLOCKING
STEEL LINTEL RE: STRUCTURAL
H.M. FRAME - GROUT SOLID - PAINT
INSULATED H.M. DOOR - PAINT
STEP FOUNDATION AT DOOR
OPENING
R-14 RIGID INSULATION BELOW
GRADE
EXP. JT. W/ SEALANT - TYP.
PRIMARY AND
SECONDARY
UNDERLAYMENT
EL.
FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
A
EW1
F2
8" LOAD BEARING CMU
REINF. RE: STRUCT.
RIGID INSULATION
R-14 MINIMUM
AIR GAP
4"x8" SPLIT FACE
CMU VENEER
CONCRETE
FOUNDATION AND
FOOTING RE: STRUCT.
SLAB ON GRADE OVER
COMPACTED GRAVEL. RE: STRUCT.
F1
WASTE WASTE
TOWELS
TOWELS
MIRROR
SANITARY
NAPKINS
DRYER
SOAP
3' - 0"
3' - 4" MAX.
2' - 0" MIN.
6" MIN.
36" MAX
27" MIN.
32" CLR. MIN.
18" CLR. MIN.
27" MIN.
36" MAX
54" MIN.
18" CLR. MIN.
6" MAX.
18" MIN.
STANDARD HEIGHT
DRINKING FOUNTAINS IN ALCOVE
SINGLE HIGH & LOW
CLR.
MASONRY /
CONC. WALL
STAINLESS STEEL
ANCHOR W/ STEEL
WEDGE MIN. 2 PER
BRACKET, TYP.
1-1/4" DIA.
GRAB BAR
MIN.
EMBEDMENT
1 1/2"
PLAN
CLEAR FLOOR
SPACE
TOP OF RIM
ELEVATION
1' - 5" MAX.
3' - 8" MAX.
4' - 0"
2' - 6"
RESTROOM
CORRESPONDING
GRADE 2 BRAILLE
SEE NOTE 1 BELOW
A B C
NOTES:
1. BRAILLE SYMBOLS: CONTRACTED GRADE 2 BRAILLE SHALL BE USED. BRAILLE SHALL COMPLY
WITH SECTION 703.4 OF THE LATEST EDITION OF THE ANSI.
2. CHARACTERS, SYMBOLS AND BACKGROUND SHALL HAVE A NON-GLARE FINISH.
CHARACTERS AND SYMBOLS SHALL BE BLUE OVER WHITE BACKGROUND.
3. SIGNS TO BE 1/8" THICK PLASTIC WITH 1/32" RAISED BORDER, GRAPHICS AND LETTERS.
PROVIDE MECHANICAL MOUNTING WITH VANDAL RESISTANT FASTENERS. COMPLY WITH
ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS IN THE LATEST EDITION OF THE ANSI.
UNISEX
CHASE
103
WOMEN
101
MEN
102
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
CHASE
103
CHASE
103
WOMEN
101
MEN
102
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
CHASE
103
PROJECT
DATE
DRAWN
712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
www.aller-lingle-massey.com
PRINTED FILE NAME:
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
3/1/2012 9:43:33 AM
C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2010
0000-Project-SD.rvt
1143.04
ESC
09/13/12
City of Fort Collins
ROLLAND MOORE PARK PLAYGROUND
RESTROOM
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
ELECTRICAL PLANS
E-1
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"
LIGHTING PLAN
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"
POWER PLAN
LCP 1
LOCATION: ELECTRICAL ROOM
SWITCH LOC 1
CH-4-WH-WH
NO SCALE
DIGITAL OUTDOOR
PHOTOCELL, PCO
PART CIRCUIT L1-14
SCALE: 1" = 20'-0"
ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN
PROJECT
DATE
DRAWN
712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
www.aller-lingle-massey.com
PRINTED FILE NAME:
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
3/1/2012 9:43:33 AM
C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2010
0000-Project-SD.rvt
1143.04
ESC
09/13/12
City of Fort Collins
ROLLAND MOORE PARK PLAYGROUND
RESTROOM
ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE
AND SCHEDULES
E-2
LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
TYPE LAMPS DESCRIPTION FINISH MOUNTING MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT #
B 14W LED ASSY. 8"x23" SEMI-FLUSH 14W LED FIXTURE, WHITE TRIM HOUSING. WHITE SURFACE KENALL #FS518R-0-PIA-MW-14L40K-120
D 2-32W T8 1X4 FLUORESCENT 2 LAMP STRIP FIXTURE. WHITE CHAIN HUNG TO 7'-0"
AFF COLUMBIA #C-2-32-120-GEB10IS
BB 26W LED 6.5" RECESSED CAN, 26 WATT LED LAMPING. 3000K COLOR. WHITE TRIM,
WHITE HOUSING. DAMP LISTED. ALUMINUM RECESSED SOFFIT KENALL #HRDL6L-26L30K-DV-SCC-FW-CSS-G
LOAD SUMMARY
PANEL 'L1' 26.55 KVA
26.55 KVA
26.55 KVA ( 111 AMPS) ON NEW 200 AMP, 240V SINGLE PHASE SERVICE.
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
KEY DESCRIPTION CHARACTERISTICS LOCAL LOCAL SCHEDULE
HP KW FLA VOLTAGE PHASE PANEL SWITCH FUSE NOTES
EF-1 EXHAUST FAN #1 1/20 HP 0.25 120 1 PANEL L1 STO PROVIDE NEW OCCUPANCY SENSOR
INTERCONNECT TO L-2 120V MOUNTED AT CEILING IN EACH RESTROOM
MOTORIZED DAMPER. SO THAT FAN RUNS UPON OCCUPANCY
IN EITHER RESTROOM SPACE, REGARDLESS
OF DAYLIGHT
L-2 LOUVER / MOTRIZED DAMPER 120 1 PANEL L1 INTERLOCKED WITH EF-1
EFC-1 ELECTRIC FAN COIL 5 KW 25 FLA 240 1 PANEL L1 30/2 NEMA 1 DISCONNECT
EWH-1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 3 KW 12.5 FLA 240 1 PANEL L1 30/2 NEMA 1 DISCONNECT
UH-1 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER 7.5KW 31.3 FLA 240 1 PANEL L1 60/2 NEMA 1 DISCONNECT
PANEL: L1
120/240 VOLT BUS: 225A CU
1 PHASE, 3 W. MAIN: 225A MAIN LUGS ONLY LOCATION: CHASE
Available Fault Current: 10,000
NOTES: FED FROM: EXTERIOR DISCONNECT
* GFCI BREAKER MOUNTING: SURFACE
** TIE HANDLE ON CIRCUITS WITH SHARED NEUTRALS. NEMA 3R
ID BREAKER DESCRIPTION V - A CIRCUIT PHASE CIRCUIT V - A DESCRIPTION BREAKER ID
E 50/2 UH-1 UNIT HEATER 3750 1 A 2 400 BUILDING INTERIOR LIGHTING / EF-1 20 L
E 3750 3 B 4 - SPARE - 20 +
E 20/2 EWH-1 WATER HEATER 1500 5 A 6 - SPARE - 20 +
E 1500 7 B 8 - SPARE - 20 +
D 20 SECURITRON POWER SUPPLY 200 9 A 10 2300 HAND DRYER MEN'S 30/1 D
G 20 RESTROOM RECEPTACLES 540 11 B 12 2300 HAND DRYER WOMEN'S 30/1 D
G 20 - SPARE - 13 A 14 540 STORAGE RM. RECEPTACLE 20 G
+ 20 - SPARE - 15 B 16 SPARE 20 +
+ 20 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 150 17 A 18 200 IRRIGATION PUMP CONTROL PANEL 20 D
+ 20 - SPARE - 19 B 20 360 PAVILION WEST (A) RECEPTS 20 G
+ 30/2 EFC-1 FAN COIL 2500 21 A 22 360 PAVILION WEST (B) RECEPTS 20 G
+ 2500 23 B 24 360 PAVILION EAST (A) RECEPTS 20 G
+ 20 - SPARE - 25 A 26 360 PAVILION EAST (B) RECEPTS 20 G
+ 20 - SPARE - 27 B 28 200 PAVILION LIGHTING 20 L
+ 20 - SPARE - 29 A 30 - SPARE - 20 +
CONNECTED LOAD (Downstream Loads Included) TOTALS LOAD SUMMARY
Phase A 12,260 CATEGORY CONNECTED FACTOR CALCULATED V - A AMPS
Phase B 11,510 LIGHTING 600 125% 750 3.1
GENERAL RECEPTACLE 2520 100% 2,520 10.5
DOWNSTREAM LOADS REMAINING GENERAL REC. 0 50% 0 0.0
DEDICATED RECEPTACLE 5000 100% 5,000 20.8
MOTOR 0 100% 0 0.0
LARGEST MOTOR 0 125% 0 0.0
MISCELANEOUS 5150 100% 5,150 21.5
KITCHEN 0 65% 0 0.0
ELECTRIC HEAT 10500 125% 13,125 54.7
Total Demand: 26,545 111
8"
6"
NOTE: ENTIRE PARTITION AND
HARDWARE TO BE PAINTED
WELD 2x2x0.125 STEEL ANGLES @ 2 PLACES
EA. PARTITION - ANCHOR TO CMU
MASONRY EXP. ANCHORS W/ TAMPER-PROOF
HEADS
2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL - PAINT
CONT. WELD, GRIND SMOOTH
11 GA. SHEET STEEL - PAINT
CONT. WELD GRIND SMOOTH (TYP)
2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL SUPPORT
- PRIMED & PAINTED
2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL FRAME
- PRIMED & PAINTED
11 GA. SHEET STEEL @ DOOR
(2) SPRING HINGES @ EA. DOOR ATTACH
TO DOOR W/ TAMPER RESISTANT SCREWS
WELD TO FRAME (3 HINGES PER DOOR)
1"1"
1/4"
3/8" BAR STOCK PULL
1" BENT FLAT BAR WELD
TO SUPPORT FOR LATCH
STUD WELDED TO SUPPORT
FOR LATCH PIVOT
1" W FLAT BAR LATCH W/
WELDED STUD FOR HANDLE
1" x2"Wx55" L FLAT BAR DOOR STOP
CONT. WELD GRIND SMOOTH
PROVIDE ADEQUATE
CLEARANCE FOR DOOR SWING
2"
6"
2"
SUPPORT BRACKET
@ 48" O.C.
FINISH TO MATCH
3/8" RADIUS
TYP.
CMU WALL
SOLID SURFACE
COUNTER
SPLASH
4"
2' - 0"
2' - 10"
3/8" EXP. BOLTS
3x3x1/4" STEEL ANGLE BRACKET
PAINT
2x3
A
5/8" TYPE X GYP. SOFFIT BOARD
1/2" PLYWOOD 2" x BLOCKING
FLUSH DOOR
A
HM FRAME
1
4"
2" 2"
SEE SHCED.
SEE SCHED.
PROJECT
DATE
DRAWN
712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
www.aller-lingle-massey.com
PRINTED 9/11/2012 4:30:33 PM FILE NAME:
2201 S. SHIELDS STREET
C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012
1143.05-.rvt
TYPICAL DETAILS
1143.04
Author
09/11/2012
A-5
City of Fort Collins
ROLLAND MOORE PARK RESTROOM
A-5 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
9 ACCESSORIES DETAIL
A-5 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
5 DRINKING FOUNTAIN DETAIL
A-5 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" RE:
14 GRAB BAR @ CMU WALL
A-5 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
8 ACCESSIBLE URINAL
A-5 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE:
2 RESTROOM WALL SIGNAGE
A-5 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
6 TLT PARTITION DETAIL @ WALL
A-5 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
7 TLT PARTITION DTL @ HINGE
A-5 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
10 TLT PARTITION DTL @ LATCH
A-5 SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
11 TYPICAL COUNTER DETAIL
A-5 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-4
12 WALL SECTION 4
DOOR SCHEDULE
MARK FROM ROOM TO ROOM WIDTH HEIGHT
DOOR FRAME HARDWARE
GROUP
FIRE
MATERIAL TYPE FINISH MATERIAL TYPE FINISH RATING COMMENTS
101 EXTERIOR WOMEN 3' - 0" 7' - 0" HM A PNT HM 1 PNT A MAG LOCK
102 EXTERIOR MEN 3' - 0" 7' - 0" HM A PNT HM 1 PNT A MAG LOCK
103 CHASE EXTERIOR 3' - 0" 7' - 0" HM A PNT HM 1 PNT B
R-49 BATT INSULATION
4" T CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE WALK
1/2" EXP. JT-SEAL
STAINLESS STEEL TOILET
STAINLESS STEEL GRAB BARS
C1
VENEER TIES @
2 SF/TIE MAX
GROUT SOLID BELOW GRADE
WOOD TRIM - PAINT
R1
PREFIN. CORRUGATED ROOFING
WOOD SHEATHING RE: STRUCTURAL
PREENGINEERED WOOD ROOF
TRUSSES
PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ GYP.
SOFFIT BD. - PAINT
2X BLOCKING
2X8 SUB FASCIA
2X10 FASCIA WRAP
W/ PREFIN. METAL
WRAP FASCIA PRIOR
TO GYP. BD. INSTALL
WEEP HOLES AT 48" O.C.
FOAM IN PLACE
INSULATION ALL CELLS
NOT GROUTED SOLID
EL.
FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
A
F2
R1
A-5
12
TS BEAM RE: STRUCT. - PAINT
4" x 8" x 1/2"
PREFIN. CORRUGATED ROOF DECK
WOOD SHEATHING RE: STRUCTURAL
PREENGINEERED WOOD ROOF
TRUSSES
PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ GYP.
SOFFIT BD. - PAINT
2X BLOCKING
4X8X16 CMU VENEER W/ VENEER
TIES - PAINT
R-14 RIGID INSULATION
STEEL LINTEL RE: STRUCTURAL
H.M. FRAME - GROUT SOLID - PAINT
INSULATED H.M. DOOR - PAINT
3' - 0"
12" DIA. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
COLUMN
16" DIA. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
COLUMN AND FOOTING
CHAMFER TOP
STEP FOUNDATION AT DOOR
OPENING
R-14 RIGID INSULATION BELOW
GRADE
EXP. JT. W/ SEALANT - TYP.
PROJECT
DATE
DRAWN
712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
www.aller-lingle-massey.com
PRINTED FILE NAME:
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
9/11/2012 4:30:33 PM
2201 S. SHIELDS STREET
C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012
1143.05-.rvt
WALL SECTIONS
1143.04
Author
09/11/2012
A-4
City of Fort Collins
ROLLAND MOORE PARK RESTROOM
A-4 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-3
2 WALL SECTION 2
A-4 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RE: 2 A-3
3 WALL SECTION 3
A-4 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-3
1 WALL SECTION 1
CONC. FOOTING & FOUNDATION
WALL - RE. STRUCT.
F1 F2
C1 S1
F2
A-4
3
EL.
BOTTOM OF FASCIA
110' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF DORMER
113' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF RIDGE
117' - 3"
SOLID SURFACE COUNTER AND
BACKSPLASH
STEEL TOILET
PARTITION -
PAINT
GROUT SOILID
BELOW GRADE
PRE-ENGINEERED
WOOD ROOF
TRUSSES
SOLID SURFACE COUNTER AND
STAINLESS STEEL MIRROR
EL.
FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
1
A-3
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
A-3
F1
F2 F2
W1 W1
SKYLIGHT
PRE-ENGINEERED
ROOF TRUSSES
STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS - PAINT
C1
PLYWOOD AND
GYP. BD. SOFFIT W/
SOFFIT VENTS
CMU WALL, RIGID
INSULATION AIR
SPACE AND CMU
VENEER, TYP.
R-49 BLOWN IN
PLACE INSULATION
STEEL TOILET
PARTITION -
PAINT
GROUT SOILID
BELOW GRADE
PRE-ENGINEERED
WOOD ROOF
TRUSSES
CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE COLUMN,
TYP.
CMU WALL - PAINT
PROJECT
DATE
DRAWN
712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
www.aller-lingle-massey.com
PRINTED FILE NAME:
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
9/11/2012 4:30:32 PM
2201 S. SHIELDS STREET
C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012
1143.05-.rvt
BUILDING SECTIONS
1143.04
Author
09/11/2012
A-3
City of Fort Collins
ROLLAND MOORE PARK RESTROOM
A-3 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
1 Section 1
A-3 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
2 Section 2
A-3 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-1
3 Section 3
CONCRETE COLUMN &
BASE
CORRUGATED METAL ROOF
CONCRETE MASONRY
BLOCK WALL - PAINT
3
A-3
OVERFRAME DORMER
EL.
BOTTOM OF FASCIA
110' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF DORMER
113' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF RIDGE
SKYLIGHT TYP. 117' - 3"
RIDGE VENT TYP.
EL.
FLOOR PLAN
100' - 0"
1
1 2 3 A-3 4 5 6
PREFINISHED METAL
FASCIA
CONCRETE COLUMN &
BASE
CORRUGATED METAL ROOF
CONCRETE MASONRY
BLOCK WALL - PAINT
H.M. DOOR AND
FRAME - PAINT
101 102
2
A-3
HI-LO DRINKING FOUNTAIN
- SEE PLUMB.
SKYLIGHT, TYP. OF 4
RIDGE VENT
EL.
BOTTOM OF FASCIA
110' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF DORMER
113' - 0"
EL.
TOP OF RIDGE
117' - 3"
JUG FILLER - SEE PLUMB.
SIGN WITH TAMPER
RESISNTANT SCREWS -
TYP.
PROJECT
DATE
DRAWN
712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
www.aller-lingle-massey.com
PRINTED FILE NAME:
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
9/11/2012 4:30:31 PM
2201 S. SHIELDS STREET
C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012
1143.05-.rvt
BUILDING ELEVATIONS
1143.04
Author
09/11/2012
A-2
City of Fort Collins
ROLLAND MOORE PARK RESTROOM
A-2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 SD1
2 NORTH ELEVATION
A-2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 SD1
1 EAST ELEVATION
A-2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 SD1
3 WEST ELEVATION
A-2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 SD1
4 SOUTH ELEVATION
W1
W1
EW1
EW1 EW1
S.S. MIRROR, TYP.
3' - 0" 23' - 4" 3' - 0"
2' - 8" 20' - 8"
4' - 8" 11' - 4" 6' - 8" 11' - 4" 4' - 8"
2' - 6" 38' - 8" 2' - 6"
STAINLESS STEEL GRAB BARS, TYP.
-
3' - 10" 5' - 4 1/2"
5' - 10"
5' - 4 1/2"
3' - 0"
7' - 5 1/2"
7' - 5"
ELECTRIC HAND DRYER TYP.
11
A-5
F1
F1
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
SIDEWALK W/ LT. BROOM
FIN. SEE SITE PLAN FOR
CONTINUATION
F1
13' - 0" 3' - 4" 13' - 0"
EDGE OF CONCRETE WALK
ALL AROUND
WALL HUNG F.E.
F.V. LOCATION
4" 3' - 0" 10" 5' - 10"
4' - 1" 2' - 7" 3' - 0" 4"
HOSE BIBB & VENT UNDER SINK, RE. MECH
JUG FILLER, RE:MECH
1
A-3
1
A-3
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
CORRUGATED
METAL ROOF
2
A-3
2
A-3
3
A-3
3
A-3
2' - 0"
8" 29' - 4" 8"
24"x30" SKYLIGHT - TYP.
DASHED LINE REPRESENTS
FACE OF WALL BELOW
PRE-FINISHED METAL
FASCIA - TYP.
RIDGE VENT
25' - 4"
1' - 0" 2' - 0" 19' - 4"2' - 0" 1' - 0"
41' - 4"
1' - 4" 4' - 0" 8" 7' - 2" 15' - 0" 7' - 2" 8" 4' - 0" 1' - 4"
1' - 4" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 1' - 4"
9' - 8" 22' - 0" 9' - 8"
41' - 4"
R1
R1
1. DIMENSIONS ARE MEASURED FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF FRAMING TO OUTSIDE FACE OF
FRAMING, CMU, OR GRID LINES.
2. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF
THE IBC, MECHANICAL CODE AND NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE, ALL CURRENT EDITIONS.
3. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW THE DRAWINGS, FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND
VERIFY ALL ASPECTS OF THIS PROJECT PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION AND NOTIFY
ARCHITECT AND OWNER REPRESENTATIVE OF ANY DISCREPANCIES.
4. ALL EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON THE
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, OR AS NEGOTIATED BY THE OWNER/CONTRACTOR FOR ITEMS NOT
DETAILED.
5. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
6. A MINIMUM OF 4 INCH LAYER OF CLEAN, GRADED GRAVEL OR CRUSHED ROCK DEVOID OF
FINES SHALL BE PLACED BENEATH SLAB.
7. USE ONLY APPROVED, NON-EXPANSIVE, GRANULAR MATERIAL AS FILL. ALL FILL MATERIAL TO
BE APPROVED BY OWNER REP.
8. CLEAN ENTIRE AREA AFFECTED BY CONSTRUCTION.
9. ALL MATERIALS TO BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE
NOTED.
10. AIR TIGHTNESS TESTING IS REQUIRED.
GENERAL NOTES
1. FRAMING SUBCONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL WOOD WALL BLOCKING FOR
MOUNTING OF ALL EQUIPMENT, LIGHTING, FIXTURES, CASEWORK, HANDRAILS, BATHROOM
ACCESSORIES, COUNTERTOPS, AND / OR OTHER LOCATIONS WHERE FINISH ITEMS ARE TO BE SECURELY
FASTENED TO THE FINISHED WALL OR CEILING.
2. ALL CMU AND STEEL SHALL BE PAINTED
PROJECT NOTES
1
A-3
1
A-3
2
A-3
2
A-3
3
A-3
3
A-3
C1 C1 C1
S1
S1
FLARED OPENINGS
FOR SKYLIGHTS, TYP.
W/ 2X4 FRAMING
AND PLYWOOD WITH
GYP. BD. CEILING
5' - 4" 30' - 8" 5' - 4"
24X36 ATTIC
HATCH F.V.
LOCATION
PROJECT
DATE
DRAWN
712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
www.aller-lingle-massey.com
PRINTED FILE NAME:
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
9/11/2012 4:30:08 PM
2201 S. SHIELDS STREET
C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012
1143.05-.rvt
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
1143.04
SJM
09/11/2012
A-1
City of Fort Collins
ROLLAND MOORE PARK RESTROOM
A-1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-2
1 FLOOR PLAN
A-1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-2
3 ROOF PLAN
SYSTEM NOTES
SYSTEM
NOTES SYSTEM NOTES
C1 5/8" GYP. BOARD CEILING ON 1/2" PLYWOOD ATTACHED
TO ROOF STRUCTURE. EPOXY PAINT.
EW1 SPLIT FACE CMU VENEER ON 1" MIN. AIR SPACE WITH AIR
BARRIER OVER R-14 RIGID INSULATION ON 8" CMU WALL.
FOAM-IN INSULATION AT ALL NON-GROUTED CELLS.
FINISH INTERIOR SIDE OF CMU WALL WITH EPOXY PAINT.
F1 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ INTEGRAL COLOR OVER 4"
GRAVEL LAYER OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE.
REFERENCE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR
REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
F2 4" CONCRETE SLAB OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE.
REFERENCE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR
REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT. SEAL.
R1 CORRUGATED METAL ROOF ON PLYWOOD DECK WITH
ICE AND WATER MEMBRANE WITH #30 FELT
UNDERLAYMENT OVER PRE-ENGINEERED WOOD
TRUSSES. RE: STRUCT.
S1 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYPSUM SOFFIT BOARD ON 1/2" PLYWOOD
ATTACHED TO STRUCTURE W/ EVENLY SPACED 2" Ø
VENTS @ EACH JOISTS SPACE. PAINT.
W1 8" CMU WALL PARTITION. EPOXY PAINT.
A-1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE: 1 A-2
2 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
NORTH NORTH
NORTH
PL.LAM. Plastic Laminate
P.T. Pressure-Treated
P.TL. Paper Towel Dispenser
PLYWD. Plywood
PNT. Paint
R.D. Roof Drain
R.O. Rough Opening
R.T.U. Roof - Top Unit
REINF. Reinforce or Reinforcing
RESIL. Resilient (flooring or base)
REQ'D Required
RLG. Rolling
RND. Round
RW. Redwood
S.AC.TL. Suspended Acoustical Tile
S.C. Solid Core (wood)
S.D. Soap Dispenser
S.S. Stainless Steel
SAIL.CRS. Sailor Course (masonry)
STL. Sheet
T.P. Toilet Paper Dispenser
TEMP. Tempered (glass)
T.O. Top Of
TYP. Typical
U.N.O. Unless Noted Otherwise
V.C.T. Vinyl Composition Tile
V. Vent
VERT. Vertical
V.T.R. Vent Thru Roof
V.WC. Vinyl Wallcovering
W/ With
W/O Without
WD. Wood
A1
1
Property Line
Existing Contour
New Contour
Easement / Setback
Sanitary Sewer
Water Line
Gas Line
Storm Drain
Window Type
Drawing Title
Drawing Number
Sheet Number
Scale
Room Name
Room Number
10
10
SS
W
G
SD
Datum
Spot Elevation
?
A
1
A1
DWG TTL
1/4" =1'-0"
ROOM NAME
1
A1
Wall Elevation
Detail
1
A1
Building Section
1
A1
Wall Section
Grid Line
A
Batt Insulation
Granular Fill
Wood Blocking Precast Concrete
Finish Wood
Dimensional Wood
Plywood Brick Stone
Concrete Masonry
Cast in Place Conc.
Steel
Rigid Insulation
Gypsum Board
Earth
ALA PROJECT NO.
FILE NAME:
712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
www.aller-lingle-massey.com
ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS BUILDING & SITE DATA
MATERIALS
VICINITY MAP DRAWING INDEX
9/11/2012 4:30:07 PM
2201 S. SHIELDS STREET
ROLLAND MOORE PARK RESTROOM
City of Fort Collins
C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012
1143.04
1143.05-.rvt
ARCHITECTURAL
S0.1 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS
S1.1 FOUNDATION & FRAMING PLAN
S2.1 DETAILS
STRUCTURAL
M1 MECHANICAL PLAN
M2 MECHANICAL LEGENDS & DETAILS
MECHANICAL
E1 ELECTRICAL PLANS
E2 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE SCHEDULES
ELECTRICAL
A-1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN
A-2 BUILDING ELEVATIONS
A-3 BUILDING SECTIONS
A-4 WALL SECTIONS
A-5 TYPICAL DETAILS
A-7 DETAILS
A-9 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE & LEGEND
KATE HODGSON
ESC ENGINEERING
3540 JFK PARKWAY
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 212-1522
ROGER ABRAHAMSON
ABRAHAMSON ENGINEERING
3101 KINTZLEY COURT UNIT D
LAPORTE, CO 80535
(970) 221-2569
EILEEN SCHOLL
CITY OF FORT COLLINS - PARKS
DIVISION
413 SOUTH BRYAN AVENUE
FORT COLLINS, CO 80521
(970) 416-2062
GARY WEEKS
SD1 SITE PLAN
WEEKS AND ASSOCIATES
4700 SOUTH COLLEGE AVENUE
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 225-2422
PROPOSED BUILDING DESCRIPTION & USE:
NEW 1 STORY PARK RESTROOM, 590 SQ. FT.
PROPOSED BUILDING:
BUILDING HEIGHT: 17' - 5"
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: TYPE V - B
TYPE OF OCCUPANCY: TYPE B
FIRE PROTECTION: NA
TOTAL AREA OF PROPOSED BUILDING: 590 SQ. FT.
SITE AREA: 68 ACRES
SITE DISTURBANCE: APPROX. 5000 SQ.FT.
to provide information on recycled content.
consists of removing perimeter branches at their lower junction with shorter
06650 Solid Polymer Countertop Fabrications
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07210 Thermal Building Insulation
07215 Foundation Insulation
07270 Air Infiltration Barriers
07612 Prefinished Corrugated Screwed-Down
Metal Roofing
07621 Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim
07810 Skylights
DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08110 Standard Steel Doors and Frames
08700 Finish Hardware
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
Section 09260 Gypsum Wallboard
09900 Painting
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
Section 10430 Exterior Signage for Building
10520 Fire Protection Specialties
10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
Section 15010 Mechanical Special Conditions
15050 Materials and Methods
15250 Mechanical Systems Insulation
15440 Plumbing
15850 Heating and Ventilating
15950 Automatic Temperature Controls
15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
Section 16000 General Electrical
16100 Basic Materials and Methods
16410 Electric Service
16450 Grounding and Bonding
16500 Lighting
APPENDIX - Soils Report